JVC GY HD200U User Manual

E
INTRODUCTION  
CONTROLS,  
INDICATORS AND  
CONNECTORS  
PREPARATIONS  
PREPARATIONS  
FOR OPERATION  
SETTING AND  
ADJUSTMENTS  
BEFORE SHOOTING  
SHOOTING  
OPERATION  
HD CAMERA RECORDER  
PLAYBACK MODE  
USING EXTERNAL  
COMPONENTS  
INSTRUCTIONS  
GY-HD200U/CHU  
GY-HD200E/CHE  
GY-HD201E/CHE  
MENU SCREENS  
FEATURES OF THE  
CAMERA SECTION  
OTHERS  
*
The illustration shows the GY-HD200U/  
GY-HD200E/GY-HD201E HD CAMERA  
RECORDER with the provided lens,  
viewfinder and microphone attached.  
Thank you for purchasing this JVC product. Before operating this  
device, please read the instructions carefully to ensure the best  
possible performance.  
For Customer Use:  
Enter below the Serial No. which is located on the body.  
Retain this information for future reference.  
Model No.  
Serial No.  
© 2006 Victor Company of Japan, Limited  
LST0512-001A  
LST0512-001A  
WARNING:  
Information for Users on Disposal of  
Old Equipment  
Safety Precautions (Cont’d)  
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR  
ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS  
APPLIANCE TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.  
This unit should be used with 12V DC only.  
CAUTION:  
FOR EUROPE  
To prevent electric shocks and fire hazards, do NOT  
use any other power source.  
This equipment is in conformity with the provisions and protection  
requirements of the corresponding European Directives.  
This equipment is designed for professional video appliances and  
can be used in the following environments:  
NOTE:  
Attention:  
This symbol is only valid in the European  
Union.  
The rating plate (serial number plate) is on the bottom of the unit.  
z
z
z
residential area (in houses)  
commercial and light industry; e.g. offices or theatres  
urban outdoors  
CAUTION:  
To prevent electric shock, do not open the cabinet. No user ser-  
[European Union]  
viceable parts inside. Refer servicing to qualified service person-  
nel.  
This symbol indicates that the electrical and electronic equip-  
ment should not be disposed as general household waste at  
its end-of-life. Instead, the product should be handed over to  
the applicable collection point for the recycling of electrical  
and electronic equipment for proper treatment, recovery and  
recycling in accordance with your national legislation.  
In order to keep the best performance and furthermore for electro-  
magnetic compatibility we recommend to use cables not exceeding  
the following length:  
Due to design modifications, data given in this instruction book are  
subject to possible change without prior notice.  
Camera  
The apparatus shall not be exposed to dripping or splashing and  
that no objects filled with liquids, such as vases, shall be placed  
close to the apparatus.  
Port  
Cable  
Length  
2 m  
By disposing of this product correctly, you will help to con-  
serve natural resources and will help prevent potential nega-  
tive effects on the environment and human health which  
could otherwise be caused by inappropriate waste handling  
of this product. For more information about collection point  
and recycling of this product, please contact your local  
municipal office, your household waste disposal service or  
the shop where you purchased the product.  
DC IN  
Exclusive Cable  
Coaxial Cable  
Coaxial Cable  
Shielded Cable  
VIDEO  
Y, PB, PR  
3 m  
Worded - “CAUTION - Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly  
replaced. Replace only with the same or equivalent type.”  
3 m  
AUDIO INPUT1,  
INPUT2  
3 m  
AUDIO OUT CH1,  
CH2  
Shielded Cable  
3 m  
Penalties may be applicable for incorrect disposal of this  
waste, in accordance with national legislation.  
Phones1, 2  
Exclusive Cable  
2 m  
IEEE1394 (HDV/DV) Exclusive Cable  
REMOTE Exclusive Cable  
4.5 m  
5 m  
(Business users)  
If you wish to dispose of this product, please visit our web  
page www.jvc-europe.com to obtain information about the  
take-back of the product.  
Caution: Where there are strong electromagnetic waves or mag-  
netism, for example near radio or TV transmitter, transformer,  
motor, etc., the picture and the sound may be disturbed. In such  
case, please keep the apparatus away from the sources of the dis-  
turbance.  
a
[Other Countries outside the European Union]  
If you wish to dispose of this product, please do so in accor-  
dance with applicable national legislation or other rules in  
your country for the treatment of old electrical and electronic  
equipment.  
Dear Customer,  
This apparatus is in conformance with the valid European direc-  
tives and standards regarding electromagnetic compatibility and  
electrical safety.  
European representative of Victor Company of Japan Limited is:  
JVC Technology Centre Europe GmbH  
P.O. Box 10 05 52  
61145 Friedberg  
Germany  
III  
IV  
Thank you for purchasing the JVC HD CAMERA RECORDER.  
These instructions are for the GY-HD200U/CHU, GY-  
HD200E/CHE and GY-HD201E/CHE.  
Camera section designed with 3-CCD system for high-  
quality picture  
1/3" 3-CCD with 1,110,000 effective pixels employed. Dig-  
ital signal processing for reproduction of HDV/DV high-  
quality picture.  
ACCESSORIES  
MAIN FEATURES  
A lens is included with the GY-HD200U, GY-HD200E and  
GY-HD201E.  
A
lens is not included with the GY-HD200CHU, GY-  
Multi-Zone Auto Iris Detection Circuit  
HD200CHE and GY-HD201CHE.  
IEEE1394 input is possible with the GY-HD200U/CHU and  
GY-HD201E/CHE.  
Multi-zone auto iris detection circuit ensures optimum iris  
position even in back light conditions or when a bright sub-  
ject moves in a frame.  
This device records in HDV format or DV format. DV for-  
mat can record and play back SD (Standard Definition)  
video on Mini DV videocassettes.  
Explanations concerning unique GY-HD200U/CHU and GY-  
HD201E/CHE functions are set off by the (GY-HD200U/GY-  
HD201E only) notice.  
Information applicable only to the GY-HD200U/CHU is  
marked by “(U model only)”.  
HDV format can record and play back HD (High Definition)  
video on Mini DV videocassettes.  
There are two types of recording formats within HDV format.  
HDV 720p (720 effective scan lines, progressive scan)  
HDV 1080i (1080 effective scan lines, interlaced scan)  
Safety Zone indication in viewfinder  
Zebra pattern video level indication in viewfinder  
Full Auto Shooting (FAS) function  
This device supports HDV 720p format. (HDV 720p)  
Information applicable only to theGY-HD200E/CHE, GY-  
HD201E/CHE is marked by “(E model only)”.  
Eliminates the need for troublesome switch or filter opera-  
tions by automatically providing a wide range of compati-  
bility with shooting conditions that change as you move  
between indoors and outdoors or between bright and dark  
locations.  
HDV and  
are trademarks of Sony Corporation  
(Excluding the CHU/CHE  
model)  
and Victor Company of Japan, Limited.  
Model  
(Accessories)  
IEEE1394 Applicable  
Lens Availability  
Input  
Model  
24p mode shooting function  
In HDV format, it records in 24p mode.  
Lens  
Microphone  
GY-HD200U  
GY-HD200CHU  
Yes  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
U model  
X See pages 10 and 33  
X See page 33  
It uses a 2:3:2:3 pulldown when recording to tape and con-  
verts the images to 60 frames. Component output is con-  
verted to 60 frames during playback as well.  
24p DV format video uses a 2:3:2:3 pulldown (24p Mode).  
A 2:3:3:2 pulldown (24p Advanced Mode) is also supported.  
It can shoot with the same number of frames as movie  
film.  
ND filters for 1/4ND, 1/16ND provided  
GY-HD200E  
GY-HD200CHE  
Yes  
No  
No  
No  
E model  
IEEE1394 connector  
IEEE1394 connector (6-pin) provided. Enables transfer of  
digital data to other equipment provided with IEEE1394  
connector, such as a non-linear editing system. (Power  
cannot be supplied.)  
GY-HD201E  
GY-HD201CHE  
Yes  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
Core Filter  
For Viewfinder Cable  
X See page 34  
Clamp Filters ×4  
For DC (×2)/Earphone/  
IEEE1394 Cable  
Tapes recorded in the DVCAM format can only be played  
back (simple playback).  
Recording in the DVCAM format is not possible.  
1/3" bayonet type lens  
X See pages 12, 36 and 63  
/
Built-in color bars (ARIB (multi-format color bars), SMPTE/  
EBU type)  
This device is  
recorder.  
Videocassettes marked with the A symbol can be used.  
a
HDV/DV video system format camera  
DVCAM is a registered trademark of Sony Corporation.  
60 Hz/50 Hz HD or HDTV signals  
Supports both 60 Hz/50 Hz HD or HDTV signals.  
You can select this in a menu screen.  
Shutter speeds and menus can be selected using a dial,  
making it very easy to use.  
The following phenomena may occur when tapes recorded  
on other units (including another GY-HD200U/GY-HD200E/  
GY-HD201E) are recorded or played back on this device.  
Variable scan shutter  
There is no flicker when shooting computer screens and  
other non-NTSC/PAL format screens.  
Cross-convert video output  
You can output converted video from the video output con-  
nectors. You can select this in a menu screen.  
SD memory card  
X See page 34  
The transient section between scenes recorded on other  
units and those recorded on this device may appear dis-  
turbed.  
Digital noise may appear during playback due to track-  
ing errors.  
Slow shutter  
Makes it possible to brightly shoot video of dark subjects  
with little motion by accumulating the images.  
Focus assist function  
Enables easy and accurate focusing during shooting.  
Backup recording function  
Continuous extended recording is possible by connecting  
to HDV/DV devices.  
User buttons added  
Enables you to switch camera settings instantly to suit the  
shooting conditions.  
This device records and plays back in the SP mode.  
Recording or playback in the LP mode is not possible.  
(In DV format)  
Due to manufacturing dispersion of tapes, we recom-  
mend not to record pictures within the first 2 to 3 min-  
utes from the beginning of the tape.  
Before recording important scenes, be sure to perform a  
test recording and confirm that both video and audio are  
recorded correctly.  
Recorded video and audio contents are for private use.  
Other use may infringe on the rights of copyright hold-  
ers.  
Time code reader/generator  
The built-in time code reader/generator can be used to  
record the time code and user’s bits.  
Built-in large 3.5" color LCD display  
In addition to displaying the camera image and the play-  
back image, the LCD monitor shows the status screens,  
menu screens for settings, and alarm indications.  
Built-in monitor speaker for audio checking  
The input audio can be monitored in recording or EE mode.  
The playback sound can be monitored in the playback  
mode. The speaker also outputs an alarm tone in case an  
abnormal condition occurs in this device.  
JVC cannot assume liabilities that may derive from the  
impossibility of normal recording or playback of video or  
audio due to malfunction of this device or the videocas-  
sette.  
Recording check function for convenient recording review  
function  
*
All product names in this manual are trademarks or regis-  
tered trademarks of their respective companies.  
Marks such as ™, ® and © are not used in this manual.  
2
3
Attaching the Tripod Base (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35  
AC Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36  
Charging the Built-in Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36  
Battery Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37  
Attaching the Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37  
Removing the Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37  
Precautions for the Battery Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . .38  
Remaining Battery Power Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38  
Operating Time with Battery Pack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38  
Precautions for the Battery Pack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38  
Recharging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38  
Selecting the audio signal input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55  
Adjusting Audio during Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55  
Monitoring Audio during Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56  
FILE MANAGE Menu Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96  
Displaying the FILE MANAGE menu screen . . . . . . . .96  
Loading a menu settings file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96  
Saving settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97  
Resetting the menu settings to the factory settings . . .98  
Initializing (formatting) an SD memory card . . . . . . . . .98  
CONTENTS  
SHOOTING OPERATION  
ACCESSORIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2  
MAIN FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3  
Basic Recording Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57  
If the Record-Standby Mode Continues . . . . . . . . . . . .58  
Checking Recorded Contents in Record-Standby Mode  
(Recording Check Function) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58  
HEADER REC Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59  
FEATURES OF THE CAMERA SECTION  
How to Use Skin Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99  
Outputting Color Bars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101  
INTRODUCTION  
Precautions for Proper Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6  
Routine and Periodical Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7  
Precautions for Use of Head Cleaning Tape . . . . . . . . . . . .7  
Battery Pack to be Used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8  
Videocassette to be Used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8  
For recording and storing videotapes in the best  
PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION  
PLAYBACK MODE  
OTHERS  
Turning the Power ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39  
Turning the Power ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39  
Turning the Power OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39  
Loading/Unloading the Cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40  
Cassette Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40  
Unloading the Cassette. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40  
Setting and Displaying the Date and Time . . . . . . . . . . . .41  
Setting the Date and Time Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41  
Setting the Date and Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42  
Displaying the Time and Date on the Screen . . . . . . . .42  
Displaying Time Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43  
Time code input entered the IEEE1394 connector  
Playback Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61  
Fast-Forward, Rewind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61  
Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61  
Outputting Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62  
Warnings and Responses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102  
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106  
How to Display the Hour Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107  
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108  
EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109  
condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8  
Condensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9  
Characteristic CCD Phenomena . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9  
USING EXTERNAL COMPONENTS  
Connecting the Video Signal Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63  
Connecting the IEEE1394 Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63  
Dubbing with AV Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64  
HDV/DV Dubbing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65  
Backup Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67  
Connect a Remote Control Unit (RM-LP55/RM-LP57) . . .68  
CONTROLS, INDICATORS AND  
CONNECTORS  
ZOOM Lens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10  
Front Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11  
Rear Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12  
LCD Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13  
Right Side Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14  
Left Side Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16  
Top Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18  
Recording and Image Output Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20  
Indications on the LCD Monitor and in the Viewfinder . . . .22  
Status Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22  
Status Screens in the Camera Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23  
Status Screen in VTR MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28  
Magnified Status Indications on the LCD Monitor. . . . .29  
Auto White Balance Indication  
(GY-HD200U/GY-HD201E only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43  
Presetting and Recording of Time Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44  
Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44  
Presetting time code data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45  
Presetting user’s bit data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45  
Zero-resetting the Time Code or User’s Bit Data . . . . .45  
Presetting the Time Code from the LCD Screen . . . . . . . .46  
Recording Time Codes in Continuation of Time Codes  
Recorded on Tape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47  
Playing Back Time Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47  
Synchronizing with the Time Code of the IEEE1394  
MENU SCREENS  
Menu Screen Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70  
Setting Menu Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72  
TOP MENU Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73  
VIDEO FORMAT[1/2] Menu Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74  
VIDEO FORMAT[2/2] Menu Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76  
CAMERA OPERATION Menu Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77  
CAMERA PROCESS[1/2] Menu Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78  
CAMERA PROCESS[2/2] Menu Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79  
ADVANCED PROCESS Menu Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80  
COLOR MATRIX ADJUST Menu Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . .81  
SKIN COLOR ADJUST Menu Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81  
WHITE BALANCE Menu Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82  
SWITCH MODE Menu Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83  
AUDIO/MIC[1/2] Menu Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84  
AUDIO/MIC[2/2] Menu Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85  
LCD/VF[1/4] Menu Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86  
LCD/VF[2/4] Menu Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87  
LCD/VF[3/4] Menu Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88  
LCD/VF[4/4] Menu Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89  
TC/UB/CLOCK Menu Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90  
HEADER REC Menu Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91  
TIME/DATE Menu Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92  
OTHERS[1/2] Menu Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93  
OTHERS[2/2] Menu Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94  
(DV)-Connected Master Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48  
Screen Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49  
Viewfinder Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49  
Back Focus Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50  
White Balance Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51  
White Balance Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51  
Full Auto White Balance (FAW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51  
White Shading Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52  
(Camera mode only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30  
Menu Setting Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30  
Alarm Message Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30  
Safety Zone Indication (Camera mode only) . . . . . . . .30  
Switching between the LCD Screen and Viewfinder  
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31  
PREPARATIONS  
SETTING AND ADJUSTMENTS BEFORE  
SHOOTING  
Basic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32  
Attaching the Zoom Lens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33  
Attaching the Microphone (Provided) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33  
How to Attach the Viewfinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33  
Inserting an SD Memory Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34  
Inserting an SD Memory Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34  
Taking out the SD memory card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34  
About SD Memory Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34  
Setting the Video Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53  
Setting the FRAME RATE Item. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53  
Camera Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54  
Screen Size (4:3/16:9) Mode Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54  
Audio Input Signal Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55  
Selecting the CH-2 channel input connector. . . . . . . . .55  
4
5
INTRODUCTION  
Do not insert an object other than a videocassette in the  
cassette insertion slot. Be sure to close the cassette cover  
when this device is not to be used for a long period.  
Do not set the POWER switch to OFF or remove the  
power cable during recording or playback. Otherwise the  
tape may be damaged.  
The sensitivity level of the provided microphone is set  
lower than the reference input (–60 dBs) setting.  
When this device is not in use, be sure to set the POWER  
switch to OFF in order to reduce power consumption.  
Cleaning the body: Wipe body with a dry, soft cloth. To  
prevent deformation of the body, etc. and to avoid opera-  
tion hazards, do not allow volatile liquids such as benzine  
and thinner to touch the body, and do not wipe it with a  
cloth soaked in such a liquid. When it is extremely dirty,  
soak the cloth in a solution of neutral detergent, wipe the  
body with it, and then use a clean cloth to remove the  
detergent.  
The maintenance contents vary depending on the operat-  
ing environment and method. Therefore, the data in the  
chart should be considered as a reference.  
Precautions for Proper  
Use  
Routine and Periodical  
Maintenance  
Time management  
The accumulated running time of this device can be con-  
firmed with the hour meter display (which shows the accu-  
mulated drum and fan motor running time). X See “How to  
Display the Hour Meter” on page 107.  
Supply voltage  
This device incorporates precision mechanical parts, which  
will collect dirt, wear out and deteriorate as this device is  
used. After this device has been used for a long period even  
in a normal environment, the heads, drums and tape trans-  
port mechanisms also collect dirt. Especially, dust which  
penetrates the inside of the VTR section during outdoor use  
will promote the wear and deterioration of mechanical parts  
by causing poor contact between tape and heads or failing to  
maintain the video and audio quality at high levels. To pre-  
vent wear and deterioration, clean the mechanical parts  
using a head cleaning tape as routine maintenance. How-  
ever, cleaning with a head cleaning tape alone is not enough  
for cleaning the entire tape transport mechanism, so it is also  
recommended to apply periodical maintenance (inspection)  
to prevent the sudden occurrence of failure. As the replace-  
ment, adjustment and servicing of parts require advanced  
skill and equipment, please consult the person in charge of  
professional video equipment at your nearest JVC-autho-  
rized service agent.  
Make sure that the power is between 11 V and 15 V DC. If  
the power voltage is too low, abnormal color and  
increased noise may occur.  
Allowable ambient temperature and humidity  
Be sure to use this device within the allowable tempera-  
ture range of 0°C to 40°C and a relative humidity of 30% to  
80%. Using this device at a temperature or humidity out-  
side the allowable ranges could result not only in malfunc-  
tion but the impact on the CCD elements could be serious  
as small white spots may be generated.  
Strong electromagnetic waves or magnetism  
Noise may appear in the picture or audio and/or the colors  
may be incorrect if the camera is used near a radio or tele-  
vision transmitting antenna, in places where strong mag-  
netic fields are generated by transformers, motors, etc., or  
near devices emitting radio waves, such as transceivers or  
cellular phones.  
For consultations related to the maintenance planning or  
cost, please contact the person in charge of professional  
video equipment at your nearest JVC-authorized service  
agent.  
Precautions for Use of  
Head Cleaning Tape  
The camera may not show stable pictures in the period  
immediately after the power is turned on, but this is not a  
malfunction.  
A sound occurs when the built-in head cleaner that runs  
when you load or eject a videocassette operates, but this  
is not a malfunction.  
Please use cleaning tape produced by JVC.  
Adhere to the following precautions when using the head  
cleaning tape.  
1.Insert the cleaning tape.  
Use of wireless microphone near the camera  
The LCD monitor and the viewfinder screen  
Press the PLAY/STILL button after the cleaning tape is  
fully loaded.  
The tape runs for 10 seconds at a time in the PLAY  
mode. (The tape stops automatically and then this device  
enters the STOP mode.)  
When  
a
wireless microphone or wireless microphone  
The LCD monitor and the viewfinder screen are manufac-  
tured using high-precision technology. Black spots may  
appear on the LCD monitor and the viewfinder screen, or  
red, blue, green and/or white spots may not turn off. How-  
ever, this is not a malfunction and these spots are not  
recorded on the tape.  
If you use this device continuously for a long period of  
time, the characters displayed in the viewfinder may tem-  
porarily remain on the screen. This is not recorded on the  
tape. In addition, they are no longer displayed if you turn  
the power off and then on again.  
If you use this device in a cold location, the images may  
appear to lag on the screen, but this is not a malfunction.  
This is not recorded on the tape.  
Do not insert fingers or foreign objects into the cassette  
insertion slot as this may result in personal injury or dam-  
age to the mechanism.  
Head Cleaning  
To maintain beautiful pictures and sound, be sure to use a  
head cleaning tape to clean the head periodically.  
X See “Precautions for Use of Head Cleaning Tape”. If  
head cleaning is not performed periodically,  
mosaic noise called block noise may appear in the picture  
or sound may be interrupted.  
tuner is used near the camera during recording, the tuner  
could pick up noise.  
Avoid using or placing this device in places;  
subject to extreme heat or cold;  
with excessive dirt or dust;  
with high humidity or moisture;  
subject to smoke or vapour such as near a cooking  
stove;  
a
type of  
2.Do not use the tape more than four times at the most for  
each cleaning.  
Use the following chart as a guide for periodical head  
subject to strong vibrations or on an unstable surface;  
also do not leave this device for long hours in a parked  
car under direct sunlight or near room heating equip-  
ment.  
cleaning.  
Low  
Room  
High  
Running  
temperature  
temperature  
temperature  
Do not leave this device where it is subject to radiation or  
X-rays or where corrosive gasses occur.  
Protect this device from being splashed with water (espe-  
cially when shooting in the rain).  
Protect this device from being wet when shooting on a  
beach.  
In addition, salt and sand may adhere to the camera body.  
Be sure to clean the camera after use.  
Protect this device against penetration of dust when using  
it in a place subject to sandy dust.  
Optical performance of lens  
Due to the optical performance of the lens, color diver-  
gence phenomena (magnification chromatic aberration)  
may occur at the periphery of the image.  
Operating envi- 0°C to 10°C  
ronment  
10°C to 35°C  
35°C to 40°C  
Block Noise  
Yardstick  
use of cleaning ery 5 hours  
tape  
for 1 to 2 times ev- 1 to 2 times ev- 1 to 2 times ev-  
ery 20 to 30 ery 5 hours  
hours  
Please use cleaning tape produced by JVC. Do not use  
head cleaning tapes other than specified.  
X See “Precautions for Use of Head Cleaning Tape”  
about how to use the head cleaning tape and precautions  
for use of the head cleaning tape.  
When dust adheres to the heads, the warning message  
“HEAD CLEANING REQUIRED!” is displayed on the LCD  
monitor, and in the viewfinder during playback and record-  
ing check using the RET button on the lens section.  
To prevent damage to the connectors, use this device with  
the connector covers on when you are not using the video/  
audio signal output connectors.  
Note 1) When used in a low humidity environment, head  
cleaning should be conducted at intervals half of  
those given in the chart above.  
Note 2) If an M-DV80 tape is used immediately after head  
cleaning, the “HEAD CLEANING REQUIRED!”  
indicator may remain on. In this case, let the tape  
run as the indicator will turn off after the tape has  
run for a while.  
CAUTION  
Do not point the lens or viewfinder directly at the sun or  
other strong light source.  
Periodical Maintenance  
Contents : Check or replace the following mechanical parts  
according to the running time.  
Eye damage could result.  
This is not a camera malfunction.  
Note 3) Use the cleaning tape in the room temperature  
(10°C to 35°C).  
If the lens or viewfinder is left pointed at the sun, rays  
may collect inside this device and cause damage or a  
fire.  
Noise may appear in the viewfinder when switching  
between the playback picture and the EE picture.  
Use this device in an upright position.  
If placed on its side, heat release efficiency will deterio-  
rate, adversely affecting the tape transport. Depending on  
circumstances the tape may also be damaged.  
Vibrations  
Colors may fail to appear and/or the image and sound  
may be disturbed during VTR playback in locations sub-  
jected to strong vibrations.  
Note 4) The cleaning tape case contains instructions for  
use of the cleaning tape. However, some of these  
instructions differ from the contents of this sheet.  
When using the cleaning tape, please follow the  
instructions of this sheet.  
Note 5) If the “HEAD CLEANING REQUIRED!” does not  
disappear after repeated head cleanings, the  
recording tape may be abnormal. Avoid excessive  
repeated use of the head cleaning tape.  
Usage Time  
500H 1000H 1500H 2000H  
When carrying the camera, be sure to hold the carrying  
handle. Holding the lens or viewfinder may result in  
damage.  
Drum assembly (includ-  
ing heads)  
G
E
E
F
Tape guides, rollers  
Belt gears  
G
H
H
E
E
H
E
E
E
F
F
F
Drive parts  
G: Clean, check and adjust.  
E: Clean and check. Replace as required.  
F: Replace.  
Precautions for transportation  
Do not drop or hit this device against a hard object.  
Remove the videocassette before transporting this device.  
6
7
INTRODUCTION  
eocassette, place this device in a tightly sealed vinyl bag,  
and then move it to a new environment.  
To ensure no condensation occurs, allow the temperature  
of this device in the bag to reach that of the new environ-  
ment before using it.  
Battery Pack to be Used  
For recording and storing  
videotapes in the best con-  
dition  
Condensation  
This device can use any of the following batteries. (Factory  
setting)  
U model: Anton Bauer battery  
E model: IDX battery  
If this device has been cooled down in a cold place and is  
then carried to a warm place, the moisture contained in  
the warm air may adhere to the head drum or tape guides  
and be cooled into water droplets. This phenomenon is  
referred to as condensation (dew). When this occurs, the  
head drum and tape guides are covered with droplets  
allowing the tape to be stuck to them, leading to tape dam-  
age.  
Characteristic CCD Phe-  
nomena  
Observe the following instructions for the best recording and  
storage of videotapes.  
Take care of the conditions of handling videotapes. It is  
recommended that you record and store videotapes in the  
environment below.  
Recommended batteries  
U model: Dionic 90 (Anton Bauer)  
E model: Endura-7 (IDX)  
Smear and Blooming  
Storage  
Due to the physical structure of a CCD it is possible to induce  
vertical streaking (called “smear”) when shooting an  
extremely bright light source. Another effect is the expansion  
of light around a bright light or object (called “blooming”).  
The CCD employed in this device is characterized by induc-  
ing very little smear or blooming. Nevertheless, please take  
note that smear or blooming may be induced when shooting  
a bright light source.  
Condensation occurs in the following cases:  
Short period  
(Up to 10  
years)  
Long period  
(Over 10  
years)  
CAUTION  
Recording  
When this device is suddenly  
Use only the recommended batteries.  
If a heavy battery is used, the battery may fall out depend-  
ing on the way the HD camera recorder is used.  
Head drum  
moved from  
warm place.  
a
cold place to  
a
Temperature  
Humidity  
17°C to 25°C 15°C to 23°C 15°C to 19°C  
When  
a
room heater has just  
30% to 70%  
40% to 55%  
25% to 35%  
started or when this device is  
exposed directly to cold air from  
an air conditioner.  
Hourly tempera-  
ture change  
Less than  
10°C  
H
H
Video tape  
Smear  
Hourly humidity  
change  
Less than  
10%  
H
H
When this device is placed in a  
very humid place.  
Vertical pale streaking appearing at high  
luminous object  
Videocassette to be Used  
Do not leave the videotapes neglected for a long period. If  
videotapes are left wound for a long period of time, it may  
result in distortion of the tape. Also it may cause tape-to-  
tape adhesion (known as blocking). It is recommended  
that videotapes be unspooled and rewound once a year  
for refreshing.  
When tapes are not in use, store them in cases and on  
end. Storage cases protect videotapes from humidity, dust  
and ultraviolet light. Keep tapes in cases and do not store  
them lying flat. When housed in a horizontal position, pres-  
sure from other tapes can cause distortions and deforma-  
tions of the tape edges.  
High luminous object  
(Electric light, sunlight, etc.)  
Do not leave the videocassette inserted when moving the  
camera under conditions where the temperature environ-  
ment changes.  
After moving this device, do not use until the internal parts  
have stabilized.  
Blooming  
Blurring in highlight  
Monitor screen  
Use JVC’s videocassette tapes marked with the  
symbol.  
A
Mini DV videocassette : M-DV63HD  
M-DV63PROHD  
* Do not use M-DV80.  
Moire or Aliasing  
“CONDENSATION ON DRUM” is displayed on the LCD  
monitor and in the viewfinder when condensation occurs  
in this device.  
Shooting stripes or fine patterns may cause a jagged effect  
or a banding in fine mesh patterns.  
Videocassettes cannot be used upside down.  
Avoid storing a videocassette with its tape not being com-  
pletely wound, as this may damage the tape. Rewind it to  
the beginning before placing a cassette into storage.  
Store videocassettes in a place with little humidity and  
good ventilation where mould does not form.  
After a videocassette tape has been used repeatedly, it  
becomes unable to maintain full performance due to an  
increase in noise caused by dropouts, etc. Do not continue  
to use a dirty or damaged tape, as this will reduce the  
rotary head life.  
White dots  
High temperatures can cause CCD sensor pixels to produce  
the effect of white dots in the image. This condition is con-  
spicuous especially when gain is applied.  
This is a characteristic of the charged-coupled device (CCD).  
As far as possible, use this device under conditions where  
the temperature of this device does not increase.  
Videocassette tapes with the A symbol are provided  
with a switch on the back to prevent accidental erasure.  
Slide the switch to SAVE to protect the required recording  
in the tape from being overwritten.  
Keep the power on until the warning message disappears.  
If the power is turned off while the warning message is dis-  
played, condensation may remain in the device even if the  
warning message is not displayed. Wait until this device is  
completely dry before using.  
To record on the tape, slide the switch to REC.  
Switch  
Pay attention to condensation even before the condensa-  
tion indication appears.  
As condensation forms gradually, the condensation indica-  
tion may not appear for the first 10-15 minutes after con-  
densation has formed inside.  
In an extremely cold place, the condensation could freeze  
and turn into frost. In such a case, it takes an additional 2-  
3 hours for the frost to first melt into condensation and  
then to be dissolved.  
To prevent condensation  
When moving this device from one place to another where  
the temperatures are greatly deferent, first remove the vid-  
8
9
CONTROLS, INDICATORS AND CONNECTORS  
6ZOOM servo control lever  
6[ZEBRA] Zebra switch  
To operate the servo zoom feature with this lever, set the  
ZOOM knob b to “S”.  
When this switch is ON, a zebra pattern is imposed on the  
viewfinder or LCD areas having luminance levels in accor-  
dance with the menu settings made for the video signal.  
This pattern can be used as a reference for manual adjust-  
ment of the lens iris. Zebra patterns are also displayed  
during color bar display when this switch is set to ON.  
ZOOM Lens  
Front Section  
Pressing the “W” section of this lever increases the  
angle of the lens for a wider shooting angle.  
Pressing the “T” section of this lever narrows the lens  
angle perspective for telephoto shots.  
The zoom lens is not provided with the GY-HD200CHU, GY-  
HD200CHE or the GY-HD201CHE.  
Pushing harder changes the speed of the zoom.  
The default value is 70% - 80%. The luminance level  
can be changed with the ZEBRA setting in the LCD/  
VF[1/4] menu screen.  
3
2
1
7IRIS mode switch  
Th16 × 5.5BRMU  
A
M
: Activates the auto iris feature.  
: Allows manual iris control.  
X See page 86.  
3
2
1
While this switch is pressed to the SKIN AREA side, the  
color tone areas specified with the SKIN COLOR ADJUST  
item on the ADVANCED PROCESS menu are indicated in  
the viewfinder. The switch returns to the OFF position  
when released.  
8Momentary auto iris button  
When the IRIS mode switch 7 is at “M”, pushing this but-  
ton activates the Auto Iris Function while it is held down  
only.  
4
X See “How to Use Skin Detail” on pages 99 and 100.  
9[S] IRIS speed adjusting control  
*
The Skin Detail color tone areas are not indicated while  
the color bar or VTR playback picture is shown in the  
viewfinder or on the LCD monitor.  
For adjusting the iris operation speed.  
8
MEMO  
RET  
M
A
W
T
If the speed becomes too fast, hunting may occur. To avoid  
the phenomena described above, perform adjustment  
again.  
7[AWB] Auto white balance button  
When the WHT.BAL switch c on page 15 is set to A or B  
and you press this button, the white balance is automati-  
cally adjusted.  
7
6
5
0FILTER thread  
*
It is not activated in preset, full auto shooting, full auto  
white balance and color bar modes.  
4
5
6
7 8  
9
Protect the lens with a clear filter or UV filter by screwing  
the filter onto the thread inside the lens hood from the  
front.  
X See “White Balance Adjustment” on page 51.  
1Shoe  
8Lens mounting ring/Lens lock lever  
Hold the lens and use the lever to turn the ring anticlock-  
wise to release lens.  
0
d
Other filters can be used for various effects.  
Makes it possible to mount separately sold lights and  
accessories.  
aZOOM servo connector  
Connect an optional zoom servo unit here.  
To mount lens make sure the lens guide pin fits well, and  
then turn the ring clockwise until firm.  
X See “Attaching the Zoom Lens” on page 33.  
2Knob  
b[ZOOM] ZOOM mode knob  
This is the mounting knob for the microphone holder 3.  
S
: Servo zoom mode. Allows operation by the zoom  
servo control lever 6.  
3Microphone holder  
Makes it possible to attach the provided microphone or a  
separately sold microphone.  
M
: Manual zoom mode. Allows zoom control by the  
zoom lever/ring 2.  
X See “Attaching  
the  
Microphone  
(Provided)”  
on page 33.  
a
b
c
cBACK FOCUS ring/fixing screw  
For back focus adjustment only. Secure with the screw  
knob after adjustment. X See “Back Focus Adjustment”  
on page 50.  
4Front tally lamp  
1FOCUS ring  
Manual focus ring.  
This lamp lights up when this device enters the record  
mode. It blinks during the transition to the record mode.  
When the tape has run out, or the VTR enters the warning  
mode, it blinks quickly.  
2ZOOM lever/ring  
dMacro focusing ring (for close-up shooting)  
By rotating this ring in the direction of the arrow, close-up  
shooting of very small objects becomes possible.  
Normal focus adjustment and zooming are not available in  
the macro mode.  
To shoot images in the macro mode, set the focus ring 1  
to the infinite position (f) and the zoom ring 2 to the max-  
imum wide-angle position. To adjust the focus of the  
macro image, rotate this ring in the direction of the arrow  
until the object is focused.  
This is the manual zoom ring equipped with a zoom lever.  
To adjust the zoom manually, turn the zoom mode knob b  
to position “M”.  
Use the FRONT TALLY item on the OTHERS[1/2] menu  
screen to select whether or not the lamp should light  
and the lighting pattern.  
3IRIS ring  
X See page 93.  
Manual iris ring. To activate the auto iris feature, set the  
Iris Mode switch 7 to “A”.  
5[LENS] Lens control connector  
Connect 12-pin lens control cable from lens here.  
4[VTR] VTR trigger button  
To start/stop shooting.  
Pin  
No.  
Pin  
No.  
Function  
Return switch  
Function  
Iris position  
5[RET] Return video button  
You can only monitor the return video signal from the VTR  
on the viewfinder, LCD monitor and video signal connector  
while this button is pressed.  
When the camera control unit is connected, you can moni-  
tor the return video signal on the viewfinder while this but-  
ton is pressed. You cannot monitor on the LCD monitor or  
video output terminal.  
When you set the LENS RET item to “FOCUS ASSIST” in  
the SWITCH MODE menu screen, you can use this button  
as the FOCUS ASSIST button.  
1
2
3
4
7
8
9
CAUTION  
VTR trigger  
GND  
IRIS A/R INPUT  
The back-focus knob is located close to the macro ring,  
be careful not to mistake the back-focus knob for the  
macro ring.  
After the required operation, be sure to return the macro  
focusing ring to the normal position.  
EXTENDER position  
Lens AUTO/MANU con- 10 ZOOM position  
trol  
5
6
IRIS control  
+12V DC  
11  
12  
X See “Attaching the Zoom Lens” on page 33.  
X See “Back Focus Adjustment” on page 50.  
X See page 83.  
10  
11  
CONTROLS, INDICATORS AND CONNECTORS  
Connecting the Earphone Cable  
To reduce the emission of unwanted radio waves, be sure to  
attach the provided clamp filter as shown in the figure below.  
4[TC GENE.] Time code generator setting switch  
Switch for setting the time code generator to preset mode  
or regeneration mode. It is also used to select the time  
code run mode when the preset mode is selected.  
Rear Section  
LCD Door  
Attach the clamp filter as close to this device as possible,  
as shown in the figure.  
FREE  
: The preset mode is selected, and the time  
code run mode becomes the FREE run  
mode.  
Set to this position to record with the time  
code or user’s bits set anew (preset). In this  
setting, the time code always operates in the  
run mode.  
1
Earphone cable  
Clamp filter  
LCD BRIGHT  
-
CAM/VTR  
+
*
If this setting is used when recording  
scenes one after another, the time codes  
become discontinuous at the transition  
points between scenes.  
2
5
1
2
AUDIO SELECT  
CH-2  
TC  
3
DISPLAY  
TC  
GENE.  
CH-1  
FREE  
AUTO  
MANU  
3Shoulder belt hooks  
REC  
UB  
REGEN  
REC  
: The preset mode is selected, and the time  
code run mode becomes the REC run mode.  
Set to this position to record with the time  
code or user’s bits set anew (preset). The  
time code operates in the run mode during  
recording only. If this setting is used when  
recording scenes one after another, the time  
codes are recorded as continuous time  
codes.  
: Regeneration mode, in which this device  
reads existing time codes on the tape and  
records time codes in continuation of the  
existing ones. Set to this position when you  
want to add additional time codes to time  
codes already recorded on the tape.  
Allows you to attach a separately sold shoulder belt.  
4LCD monitor  
Shows a color camera image or the VTR playback picture.  
It is also used for displaying the following:  
4
3
4
Menu Setting screens  
Characters showing the whether this device is set to  
shooting mode or VTR playback mode  
Date and time and time code  
Audio level meter  
1[LCD BRIGHT +/–] LCD brightness +/– button  
This button is for adjusting the brightness of the LCD mon-  
itor display.  
Pushing the button in the + direction makes the monitor  
brighter.  
Pushing the button in the – direction makes the monitor  
darker.  
Pushing the +/– buttons simultaneously returns the set-  
ting to the standard setting.  
REGEN  
Warning indications, etc.  
1Back tally lamp  
X See page 22.  
This lamp lights up when this device enters the record  
mode. It blinks during the transition to the record mode.  
When the tape has run out, or the VTR enters the warning  
mode, it blinks quickly.  
Use the BACK TALLY item on the OTHERS[1/2] menu  
screen to select whether or not the lamp should light  
and the lighting pattern.  
2[CH-1/CH-2 AUDIO SELECT] CH-1/CH-2 audio selector  
switch  
MEMO  
Selects the method of adjusting the CH-1 and CH-2 audio  
channel audio levels.  
Preset of time code and user’s bits is performed on the TC/  
UB/CLOCK menu.  
X See page 44.  
X See page 93.  
2[PHONES] Earphone jack  
AUTO  
: The audio level is automatically adjusted  
according to the input level. When excessive  
audio is input, the limiter works to suppress  
the audio level.  
This is a stereo mini-jack for connecting an earphone for  
audio monitoring. Plug in an earphone or headphone with  
a 3.5 mm diameter plug. The earphone can also be used  
to monitor alarm tones in accordance with the circum-  
stances.  
The audio channel to be output is selected with the AUDIO  
MONITOR item on the AUDIO/MIC[2/2] menu screen and  
MONITOR SELECT switch d on page 19.  
X See “TC/UB/CLOCK Menu Screen” on page 90.  
5[CAM/VTR] Camera/VTR mode switch button  
Each time you press this button, the mode switches  
between camera mode and VTR mode.  
When you do this, the VTR indicator f on page 19 dis-  
plays the following statuses.  
The “AUTO” LED in the CH-1/CH-2 AUDIO  
LEVEL area f on page 15 lights.  
MANU  
: Allows you to adjust the audio levels using  
the CH-1/CH-2 AUDIO LEVEL volume con-  
trols f on page 15.  
While the mode is being switched: Flashing  
The audio output level is adjusted with the Audio monitor  
volume control 3 on page 14.  
Set AUDIO LIMITER on the AUDIO/MIC[1/2]  
menu screen to use limiter functions when  
excessive audio is input.  
In VTR mode  
: Lit  
In camera mode  
: Off  
Select the Camera mode to record the camera image.  
Select the VTR mode to playback VTR or to input the  
HDV/DV signal from the IEEE1394 connector on  
MEMO  
X See “AUDIO LIMITER” on page 84.  
The volume of the alarm sound is set with the ALARM  
VR LEVEL item on the OTHERS[1/2] menu screen.  
When using a stereotype jack and stereo sound should  
be output, the following setting should be performed.  
Set the MONITOR SELECT switch d on page 19 to  
BOTH.  
0
3[TC DISPLAY] TC/UB display switch  
Selects the contents displayed on the TC counter of the  
LCD monitor or in the viewfinder. (This switch works when  
the TC/UB item on the LCD/VF[3/4] menu screen is set to  
ON.)  
page 16. (HDV/DV signal input is possible with the  
GYHD200U/GY-HD201E.)  
When the power is turned on, the mode becomes the  
Camera mode.  
TC  
: Set to this position to display time code values.  
Set the AUDIO MONITOR item on the AUDIO/MIC[2/2]  
menu screen to STEREO.  
UB : Set to this position to display the user’s bits values.  
12  
13  
CONTROLS, INDICATORS AND CONNECTORS  
X See “LCD/VF[1/4] Menu Screen” on page 86.  
7Clamp  
Attach the cable from the viewfinder here.  
a[STATUS] Status/Menu button  
d[POWER] Power ON/OFF switch  
Switch that turns the power ON/OFF.  
When the power is OFF, POFF” is displayed in the LCD  
monitor or viewfinder.  
Pressing this button in the normal screen mode (condi-  
tion in which the menu screen is not shown) displays a  
status screen in the viewfinder or on the LCD monitor.  
The displayed status screen changes each time the but-  
ton is pressed.  
Right Side Section  
8[USER1/2/3] User buttons  
You can assign camera functions to the USER1 - 3 but-  
tons.  
Use them to switch shooting conditions depending upon  
the subject.  
*
Wait at least 5 seconds if you need to turn the power on  
again.  
X See “Status Screens” on page 22.  
e[REC] REC trigger button (start/stop recording)  
Start and stop recording using this button.  
(This works together with the REC trigger button on the  
top and the lens VTR trigger button.)  
When “SPLIT” is set for the 1394 REC TRIGGER item on  
the OTHERS[2/2] menu screen, this button becomes the  
start/stop recording button for an external device.  
X See page 94.  
Pressing this button for more than 1 second in the nor-  
mal screen mode displays the menu screen in the view-  
finder or on the LCD monitor. Pressing this button while  
the menu screen is displayed in the viewfinder or on the  
LCD monitor makes the menu screen disappear.  
X See “Setting Menu Screens” on page 72.  
2
1
Set them using the USER1  
MODE menu screen.  
X See page 83.  
-
3
items in the SWITCH  
Use this button to preset the time code.  
X See page 46.  
5
4
3
6
7
h
i
b[GAIN] Sensitivity selector switch  
Electronically boosts the light sensitivity when there is  
insufficient illumination on the subject.  
The boosting level differs depending on the switch position  
as follows:  
VF BRIGHT  
MEMO  
X See “Backup Recording” on page 67.  
8
USER  
1
USER  
2
USER  
3
The USER buttons work together with the menu settings.  
When a menu screen is being displayed, they also func-  
tion as menu operation buttons. X See “Setting Menu  
Screens” on page 72.  
f[CH-1/CH-2 AUDIO LEVEL] CH-1/CH-2 Audio level con-  
trols and AUTO LED  
Allow you to adjust the audio level for the CH-1 and CH-2  
audio channels.  
9
0
ND FILTER  
2
1
MENU  
(Factory presets)  
STATUS  
a
WHT.BAL  
L
: 0 dB (no boosting is applied)  
AUTO  
CH-1  
AUTO  
AUDIO  
To use these controls, set the CH-1/CH-2 AUDIO  
SELECT switch 2 on page 13 to “MANU”.  
When the FULL AUTO switch g on page 19 or the CH-  
1/CH-2 AUDIO SELECT switch 2 on page 13 is set to  
“AUTO”, “AUTO” LED lights. (The audio level controls  
do not work.)  
LEVEL  
CH-2  
b
c
M : 9 dB (boosted to approximately 3 times the original)  
H : 18 dB (boosted to approximately 8 times the original)  
ON  
OFF  
9[SHUTTER] Shutter/Menu dial  
POWER  
REC  
Every time this dial is pressed while in the normal  
screen mode (when the menu screen is not displayed),  
the shutter speed switches between on/off.  
The boosting level for each switch position can be  
changed with the SWITCH MODE menu screen.  
X See page 83.  
d
e
f
g
When this dial is turned 1 click up or down in the normal  
screen mode, the shutter speed indicator is shown for  
about 3 seconds on the LCD monitor or in the view-  
finder. The shutter speed is changed when this dial is  
turned while the shutter speed indicator is shown.  
X See page 83.  
The more the boosting level is increased, the more the  
resulting image will be noisy.  
1Monitoring speaker (Cheek pad)  
g[HDV/DV LED]  
In the Camera mode, the input sound can be EE moni-  
tored.  
In camera mode, this lights according to the setting for  
When the FULL AUTO switch g on page 19 is “ON”,  
this is fixed at “ALC”.  
the video format being shot.  
In the VTR mode, the speaker outputs the VTR play-  
back sound. In the VTR mode, the HDV/DV input sound  
can be EE monitored. (HDV/DV signal input is possible  
with the GY-HD200U/GY-HD201E.)  
The sound to be output is selected with the MONITOR  
SELECT switch d on page 19.  
In VTR mode, it lights according to the video format  
being recorded on tape or the IEEE1394 input video for-  
mat.  
c[WHT.BAL] White balance switch  
Three white balance modes are selectable with this  
switch.  
When this dial turned upward or downward while the  
menu screen is displayed, the cursor (K) also moves  
upward or downward to allow selection of items in the  
menu. To change the setting value of the item, press  
this dial. When the setting value starts blinking, turn this  
dial upward or downward to change the setting.  
X See “Setting Menu Screens” on page 72.  
HDV  
DV  
: Lights when the format is HDV.  
: Lights when the format is DV.  
B
: Switch into white balance mode memorized  
in B. If white balance is performed with the  
switch in this position, it will be memorized  
into B.  
The sound level is adjusted with the MONITOR sound  
level volume 3. This speaker also outputs various  
warning sounds superimposed on other sound.  
HDV/DV : Turns off when the format is 1080i.  
MEMO  
X See “Alarm Sound” on page 105.  
A
: Switch into white balance mode memorized  
in A. If white balance is performed with the  
switch in this position, it will be memorized  
into A.  
During  
a
system error, HDV/DV flash alternately.  
2Cheek pad set screw  
Screw for adjusting the height of the cheek pad.  
0[ND FILTER] ND filter switch  
Switches the built-in ND filter.  
X See page 104.  
Select whether or not to have this light in the FORMAT  
LED item on the OTHERS[1/2] menu screen.  
X See page 93.  
3[MONITOR] Audio monitor volume control  
Adjusts the volume of the monitoring loudspeaker and ear-  
phone.  
OFF : Turns the filter OFF (FILTER OFF)  
PRST  
: Switch into white balance mode (3200K or  
1
2
:
:
Cuts the light intensity to approximately 1/4. (1/4ND)  
Cuts the light intensity to approximately 1/16. (1/16ND)  
(PRESET) 5600K) set in PRESET TEMP. item on the  
CAMERA OPERATION menu screen.  
X See page 77.  
4[VF BRIGHT] Viewfinder brightness adjustment  
To adjust the brightness of the viewfinder.  
X See page 49.  
When you change this switch, the type of the new ND filter  
is displayed in the LCD monitor or viewfinder.  
hLCD door lock and release knob  
To open the LCD door, move this knob on the direction  
toward the rear section.  
FAW (Full Auto White Balance) mode can be set to A, B or  
PRESET with the SWITCH MODE menu screen.  
X See page 83.  
In the FAW mode, video color temperatures are constantly  
sampled for automatic adjustment to a proper white bal-  
ance.  
CAUTION  
5[PEAKING] Contour adjustment  
To adjust the contours of the LCD monitor and viewfinder  
image.  
iLCD door  
LCD monitor door.  
If you switch the ND filter while shooting is in progress, the  
picture may be disturbed or noise may occur in the audio.  
X See “Camera Settings” on page 54.  
The LCD monitor is located on the inner side of the door.  
The LCD monitor can be viewed when this door is opened.  
The door can be turned to change the orientation of the  
LCD monitor, and it can be rotated so that it can be  
accommodated in the main body of the camera.  
X See page 49.  
*
When the Focus Assist function is running, this control  
does not operate.  
X See page 49.  
When the FULL AUTO switch g on page 19 is “ON”,  
this is fixed at “FAW”.  
6[FOCUS ASSIST] Focus assist button  
When you press this button during shooting, the area of  
focus is displayed in blue, red or green, making it easy to  
focus accurately.  
MEMO  
Fine-tune red and blue to match the white adjusted in auto  
white balance in WHITE PAINT<R>/<B> on the WHITE  
BALANCE menu screen. (Available only when this switch is  
set to A or B.)  
MEMO  
When FOCUS ASSIST on the LCD/VF[1/4] menu screen is  
set to ACCU-FOCUS and this button is pressed, ACCU  
FOCUS functions with FOCUS ASSIST. This makes depth of  
field shallower, making it easier to focus.  
X See “WHITE BALANCE Menu Screen” on page 82.  
This button has the same function as the FOCUS  
ASSIST button 7 in the Top Section.  
14  
15  
CONTROLS, INDICATORS AND CONNECTORS  
Set the [AUDIO INPUT] switch  
device to be connected.  
Set the CH-2 audio input connector using the [CH-2  
INPUT] switch 2.  
3
according to the  
a
Left Side Section  
The CH-2 audio from the set connector is recorded.  
5Shoulder pad slide button  
Button to adjust the position of the shoulder pad.  
When you press this button, you can move the position of  
the shoulder pad 6 forward or backward.  
9
8
7
b
6Shoulder pad  
1
2
c
7Cassette cover  
Sliding the EJECT switch a on page 18 located on the  
top section opens this cover to allow insertion or removal  
of the videocassette.  
3
CAUTION  
To prevent foreign objects from entering the internal parts of  
the VTR unit, do not leave this device with the cover open  
for extended periods of time.  
d
0
6
5
4
a[IEEE1394] IEEE1394 switch  
Set according to the image format of the input/output sig-  
nal and playback signal of the IEEE1394 terminal.  
HDV : Set to this for HDV format.  
1Viewfinder connector (6-pin)  
Connect the cable from the viewfinder here.  
8[VIDEO OUT] Video output terminal (RCA)  
This is a terminal for composite video signal output.  
2[CH-2 INPUT] CH-2 audio input connector selector  
switch  
Selects the CH-2 audio input connector.  
DV  
: Set to this for DV format.  
Select whether or not to output a signal with setup in  
SET UP on the VIDEO FORMAT[2/2] menu screen.  
(Only for U model)  
b[Y/PB/PR] Component Y/PB/PR signal output terminal  
(BNC × 3)  
Outputs analog component (Y/PB/PR) signals.  
INPUT1  
: Inputs the audio from the INPUT1 connector  
4 into CH-2.  
Set ANALOG OUT CHAR. item on the OTHERS[1/2]  
menu screen to ON to output menu setting screens and  
warnings from this terminal.  
Select whether or not to add setup signals to DV format  
signals in SET UP item on the VIDEO FORMAT[2/2]  
menu screen. (Only for U model)  
INPUT2  
: Inputs the audio from the INPUT2 connector  
4 into CH-2.  
9[AUDIO OUTPUT CH-1/CH-2] Audio output connector  
(RCA)  
Output connector for audio signals.  
Set ANALOG OUT CHAR. item on the OTHERS[1/2]  
menu screen to ON to output menu setting screens and  
warnings from this terminal.  
MEMO  
The audio from the INPUT1 connector is also input into  
CH-1 regardless of the setting.  
Outputs the input audio signal in the Camera mode.  
Outputs the playback audio signal in the VTR mode.  
When a HDV/DV signal (IEEE1394) is input, the EE  
sound of the input audio signal is output in the VTR  
mode. (HDV/DV signal input is possible with the  
GYHD200U/GY-HD201E.)  
c[REMOTE] REMOTE terminal (Round 6-pin)  
Some functions of this camera can be controlled exter-  
nally.  
Connect to a remote control unit (RM-LP55/RM-LP57).  
X See “Connect a Remote Control Unit (RM-LP55/RM-  
LP57)” on page 68.  
3[AUDIO INPUT] Audio input signal selector switch  
This switch is used to select the input sound signal from  
INPUT1 or INPUT2 connector.  
LINE  
: Set to this position when connected to audio  
equipment, etc. The reference input level is  
+4 dBs.  
MEMO  
d[DC INPUT] DC input terminal (XLR 4-pin)  
This is the 12V DC power input terminal. Connect to the  
AC adapter.  
When a battery is installed and a cable is connected to this  
terminal, power supply from the battery stops and power is  
supplied by this terminal.  
Alarm sound is not output.  
MIC  
: Set to this position when the dynamic micro-  
phone is connected.  
0[IEEE1394] IEEE1394 connector (6-pin)  
MIC+48V : Set to this position when  
requiring +48 power supply (phantom  
microphone, etc.) is connected.  
a
microphone  
Using an IEEE1394 cable (optional), a digital video com-  
ponent with IEEE1394 connector can be connected here.  
X See “Connecting the IEEE1394 Cable” on page 63.  
X See “HDV/DV Dubbing” on page 65.  
V
CAUTION  
CAUTION  
When connecting a component that does not require +48 V  
power supply, make sure that the switch is not set to  
MIC+48V before the component is connected.  
When connecting the IEEE1394 cable, confirm that the  
connector is facing the right direction before inserting.  
X See page 63.  
MEMO  
MEMO  
You can select the normal input level for MIC and MIC+48V  
in the INPUT1, 2 MIC REF. item on the AUDIO/MIC[1/2]  
menu screen.  
Put the covers on the connectors when you are not using  
them.  
X See page 84.  
4[INPUT1/INPUT2] INPUT1/INPUT2 audio input connec-  
tors  
These are audio input connectors for connecting to an  
external audio device or microphone.  
16  
17  
CONTROLS, INDICATORS AND CONNECTORS  
MEMO  
d[MONITOR SELECT] Audio monitor selector switch  
This switch is used to select the monitor sound output and  
playback sound output from the monitoring speaker 1 on  
page 14 or the PHONES jack 2 on page 12.  
When you release FAS mode, all of the settings return  
to their previous modes.  
When FOCUS ASSIST on the LCD/VF[1/4] menu screen  
Top Section  
is set to ACCU-FOCUS and this button is pressed,  
ACCU FOCUS functions with FOCUS ASSIST. This  
makes depth of field shallower, making it easier to focus.  
This button has the same function as the FOCUS  
ASSIST button 6 in the Right Side Section.  
CAUTION  
When the power is turned on while the camera is in the  
FAS mode, it takes about 10 seconds before the automatic  
adjustment of FAS is completed.  
All of the previous setting contents are recalled when the  
FAS mode is cancelled.  
CH-1 : The CH-1 channel audio is output.  
BOTH : CH-1 and CH-2 channel audio are output mixed.  
When this setting is selected, the menu screen  
can be used to select whether the mixed sound  
or stereo sound should be output via the  
PHONES jack. (AUDIO MONITOR item on the  
AUDIO/MIC[2/2] menu screen)  
5
6
X See “LCD/VF[1/4] Menu Screen” on page 86.  
8[REC] REC trigger button (start/stop recording)  
Start and stop recording using this button.  
(This works together with the REC trigger button on the  
right panel and the lens VTR trigger button.)  
h[STOP] Stop button  
Press to enter the stop mode.  
When AUDIO MONITOR item on the AUDIO/  
MIC[2/2] menu screen is set to “STEREO”, only  
the audio of CH-1 is output from the monitoring  
speaker.  
7
i[REW] Rewind button  
Press this button to rewind the tape.  
8
9
9[REC LOCK] REC LOCK switch  
Pressing this button in the stop or fast forward mode ini-  
tiates the rewind mode. (Only for VTR mode)  
Pressing this button during playback, still picture play-  
back or forward search initiates reverse search.  
Slide this switch in the direction of the arrow to lock the  
[REC] trigger button 8. Use this to prevent unwanted  
recording.  
(The REC trigger button on the right panel and the lens  
VTR trigger button are not locked.)  
4
3
CH-2 : The CH-2 channel audio is output.  
X See “Outputting Audio” on page 62.  
X See “AUDIO/MIC[2/2] Menu Screen” on page 85.  
0
2
j[PLAY/STILL] Play/still button  
CAUTION  
1
Press to start playback. Press to enter the still picture  
mode during playback, in the stop mode or in the search  
mode.  
Depending on the ambient temperature, if still image play-  
back mode continues for between 30 seconds and 3 min-  
utes, it stops automatically. (Tape protect mode)  
During still picture playback and search mode, press this  
button to return to the normal playback mode.  
0SD memory card cover  
When you open this cover, you can insert and remove the  
SD memory card.  
X See “Inserting an SD Memory Card” on page 34.  
When an SD memory card is loaded  
Make sure to move switches all the way. Do not leave a  
switch stopped in a midway position. Noise will be gener-  
ated and operation irregularities will occur.  
l
d
a
b
e[DISPLAY] Display button  
e
f
g
You can save, call up and reset the menu settings on  
this device.  
When LCD+VF in the LCD/VF[4/4] menu display is set  
to OFF, press the DISPLAY button for 2 seconds to  
switch between the LCD screen and the viewfinder  
screen.  
You can initialize (format) an SD memory card.  
*
If the auto tracking is active at the moment the play  
mode is entered, the playback video will be interfered  
with digital noise.  
X See “FILE MANAGE Menu Screen” on page 96.  
a[EJECT] Eject switch and LED  
Slide this switch to the side to insert or eject a videocas-  
sette tape.  
When LCD+VF in the LCD/VF[4/4] menu display is set  
h
i
j
k
to ON, press the DISPLAY button for  
2
seconds to  
k[FF] Fast forward button  
Press this button to fast forward the tape.  
switch the LCD screen ON and OFF. Press the DIS-  
PLAY button briefly to change the display mode for the  
LCD screen as follows.  
The LED lights while ejecting is in progress.  
Pressing this button in the stop or rewind mode initiates  
the fast forward mode. (Only for VTR mode)  
Pressing this button during playback, still picture play-  
back or reverse search initiates forward search.  
MEMO  
c
Only image displayed  
Characters shown enlarged  
It takes  
a
few seconds before the videocassette is  
ejected. Do not close the cassette cover during the eject  
operation.  
Image and characters displayed  
lScrew holes for mounting accessories  
1Viewfinder  
Displays the camera image and the playback picture.  
Do not touch the cassette insertion slot or cassette dur-  
ing the eject operation. This could result in damage.  
X See “Magnified Status Indications on the LCD Monitor”  
on page 29.  
You can mount lights and other accessories.  
2Eyepiece  
f[VTR] VTR indicator  
Ensures that ambient light does not reach the viewfinder  
screen or falls into the eye of the cameraman.  
bOperation cover  
Open this cover when operating in the playback mode.  
Otherwise, keep this cover closed.  
This indicator lights when the camera is in the VTR mode.  
To perform VTR playback or to input the HDV/DV signal  
from the IEEE1394 connector 0 on page 16, press the  
CAM/VTR button 5 on page 13 to turn on this indicator.  
It flashes when the mode is being changed.  
(HDV/DV signal input is possible with the GY-HD200U,  
GY-HD201E.)  
3Eyepiece focus ring  
You can adjust the focus by turning this ring.  
This cover can be opened by sliding it to the side.  
4Eyepiece mounting ring  
You can adjust the position of the eyepiece forward or  
backward by loosening this ring.  
MEMO  
When the STOP button h is pressed in the Camera mode  
to set the VTR operation mode indicator to indicate STOP,  
playback operations become possible.  
g[FULL AUTO] Full auto shooting (FAS) switch  
This is the ON/OFF switch for FAS mode.  
5Slide mounting ring  
You can adjust the position of the viewfinder left or right by  
loosening this ring.  
During FAS mode, “FAS” is displayed on the LCD moni-  
tor or the viewfinder.  
cBattery adapter  
Attach the battery.  
U model: Anton Bauer battery  
E model: IDX battery  
X See “Battery Operation” on page 37.  
6Clamp  
Attach the microphone cable here.  
FAS mode works together with the auto iris and auto  
level control (ALC) modes and automatically adjusts to  
the optimal video signal level and white balance.  
You can select automatic adjustment mode or manual  
adjustment mode for audio recording level.  
X See “AUDIO/MIC[2/2] Menu Screen” on page 85.  
Even if there are color bars, this automatically sets to  
camera video.  
Auto iris mode operates even if the lens iris mode  
switch is set to the manual position.  
The gain changes continuously until it reaches the max-  
imum ALC MAX setting, and the shutter speed also  
changes continuously.  
7[FOCUS ASSIST] Focus assist button  
When you press this button during shooting, the area of  
focus is displayed in blue, red or green, making it easy to  
focus accurately.  
18  
19  
CONTROLS, INDICATORS AND CONNECTORS  
When Recording HDV or DV Images from the IEEE1394 Terminal (Only with the GY-HD200U and GY-HD201E)  
Component Out  
Recording and Image Out-  
put Formats  
Recording  
(IEEE1394 In)  
[HDV PB OUTPUT] menu item  
Rec on Tape  
Composite Out  
NATIVE  
q
720P  
q
1080I  
1080/60i  
1080/60i  
1080/50i  
1080/50i  
1080/60i  
N/A  
NTSC  
480/60i  
480/60i  
N/A  
PAL  
N/A  
720/60p  
720/30p  
720/50p  
720/25p  
720/24p  
480/60p  
576/50p  
480/60i  
q
q
q
q
q
N/A  
N/A  
q
q
q
q
480/60i  
480/60i  
576/50i  
576/50i  
480/60i  
N/A  
720/60p  
q
q
N/A  
This device supports HDV and DV image formats. This device also has various output terminals. (Composite, analog component,  
IEEE1394)  
During recording and playback, image formats from each of the output terminals are as shown in the table below.  
q
576/50i  
576/50i  
N/A  
HDV  
720/50p  
720/60p  
N/A  
q
N/A  
q
480/60i  
N/A  
Notes about the table  
(Shaded): Indicates the setting item in the VIDEO FORMAT menu screen.  
N/A: Terminal is not available.  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
q
: Same format as the left.  
q
q
U model  
480/60i(24p)  
576/50i  
q
q
DV  
When recording camera images  
Recording (Shooting)  
q
q
E model  
576/50i(25p)  
q
q
Component Out  
(EE Out)  
Composite Out  
(EE Out)  
Rec on Tape  
IEEE1394 Out  
[REC] menu item  
HDV-HD60P  
HDV-HD30P  
HDV-HD50P  
HDV-HD25P  
HDV-HD24P  
Format  
720/60p  
720/30p  
720/50p  
720/25p  
720/24p  
480/60i  
MEMO  
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
720/60p  
q
480/60i  
480/60i  
576/50i  
576/50i  
480/60i  
q
Synchronize the setting for FRAME RATE on the VIDEO FORMAT menu screen with the frame rate of the IEEE1394 input signal.  
HD  
(HDV)  
720/50p  
720/60p  
q
DV-60I  
DV-24P  
U model only  
E model only  
480/60i(24p)  
q
q
DV  
HD  
DV-24PA 480/60i(24p)  
q
q
DV-50I  
576/50i  
q
q
DV-25P  
576/50i(25p)  
q
q
[1080I CAMERA]  
menu item  
Frame rate  
Rec on Tape  
IEEE1394 Out  
Component Out  
Composite Out  
60/30  
50/25  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
1080/60i  
1080/50i  
480/60i  
576/50i  
ON  
In PLAY mode  
Component Out  
Playback  
IEEE1394 Out  
[HDV PB OUTPUT] menu item  
Composite Out  
NATIVE  
q
720P  
q
1080I  
1080/60i  
1080/60i  
1080/50i  
1080/50i  
1080/60i  
N/A  
NTSC  
480/60i  
480/60i  
N/A  
PAL  
N/A  
720/60p  
720/30p  
720/50p  
720/25p  
720/24p  
480/60p  
576/50p  
q
q
q
q
q
N/A  
N/A  
q
q
q
q
480/60i  
480/60i  
576/50i  
576/50i  
480/60i  
N/A  
720/60p  
q
q
N/A  
q
576/50i  
576/50i  
N/A  
HDV  
720/50p  
720/60p  
N/A  
q
N/A  
q
480/60i  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
480/60i  
q
q
U model  
E model  
480/60i(24p)  
576/50i  
q
q
DV  
q
q
576/50i(25p)  
q
q
MEMO  
Synchronize the setting for FRAME RATE in the VIDEO FORMAT menu screen with the frame rate of the playback signal.  
20  
21  
CONTROLS, INDICATORS AND CONNECTORS  
The contents of the status display are divided into those for  
the Camera mode and those for the VTR mode.  
Status Screens in the Camera Mode  
Indications on the LCD  
Monitor and in the View-  
finder  
Each time the STATUS button is pressed in the Camera  
mode, one of 5 status screens is displayed. (STATUS 0, 1,  
2, 3, 4)  
1
0
One type of screen is displayed in the VTR mode.  
CAMERA MODE (display example)  
266S DD  
In addition to showing the EE image and the playback pic-  
ture, the LCD monitor and viewfinder are also used for the  
following character displays.  
9
8
7
6
5
4
To show characters on the LCD monitor, press the DISPLAY  
button briefly.  
STATUS 0  
STATUS 1  
2
3
STATUS 0 Screen  
STATUS 0  
1
Event Indication  
When the Gain or Shutter Speed is changed manually, the setting condition is displayed for about 3 seconds at the time the  
change is made.  
Set the shutter display method to seconds or angle in SHUTTER DISP. on the LCD/VF[3/4] menu screen. (Only when  
frame rate is 24p or 25p mode)  
DISPLAY button  
STATUS 2  
STATUS 4  
Status screens (screens for checking the current cam-  
VTR MODE  
(display example)  
Setting Status  
Contents of Indications  
GAIN 0 dB, 3 dB, 6 dB, 9 dB, 12 dB, 15 dB, 18 dB  
era settings)  
Gain value was changed  
Auto white display (only displayed in the Camera  
mode)  
Menu setting screens  
Alarm message display  
Safety zone display (only displayed in the Camera  
mode)  
Gain value reached the ALC  
FULL AUTO was turned ON/OFF  
ZEBRA was turned ON/OFF  
Shutter speed value was changed  
GAIN ALC  
FULL AUTO ON, FULL AUTO OFF  
ZEBRA ON, ZEBRA OFF  
*1  
SHUTTER 1/6, 1/6.25, 1/7.5, 1/12, 1/12.5, 1/15, 1/24, 1/25, 1/30, 1/48, 1/50, 1/60, 1/100, 1/120,  
1/250, 1/500, 1/1000, 1/2000, 1/4000, 1/10000  
(When SHUTTER DISP. is set to SEC)  
*1  
Variable shutter speed value was changed  
(When SHUTTER DISP. is set to SEC)  
V. SHUTTER 1/24.01 to 1/10489.5  
MEMO  
When ANALOG OUT CHAR. on the OTHERS[1/2] menu  
screen is ON, characters are also shown on images from  
the Y/PB/PR OUT and VIDEO OUT terminals.  
*4  
STATUS 3  
STATUS  
Shutter was turned OFF  
SHUTTER OFF [1/**]  
Shutter speed value was changed  
(When SHUTTER DISP. is set to DEG)  
SHUTTER 360.0°, 180.0°, 172.8°, 150.0°, 144.0°, 135.0°, 120.0°, 105.0°, 90.0°, 75.0°, 60.0°,  
45.0°, 30.0°, 22.5°, 11.2°  
MEMO  
Variable shutter speed value was changed  
(When SHUTTER DISP. is set to DEG)  
24p: 0.82° to 359.4°  
25p: 0.85° to 359.4°  
When the STATUS button is pressed for 1 second or  
longer, the menu setting screen is displayed.  
To display the Status screen while the menu setting  
screen is displayed, press the STATUS button to return  
to the normal screen.  
You can switch between the LCD monitor and the view-  
finder by holding down the DISPLAY button for about 2  
seconds. (When the LCD+VF item on the LCD/VF[4/4]  
menu screen is set to OFF.)  
White balance value was changed  
(Example)  
WHITE BAL A [3200K]  
Status Screens  
Numeric value: Any of 2300, 2500, 2800, 3000, 3200, 3400, 3700, 4300, 5200, 5600, 6500,  
8000  
Press the STATUS button while normal screen is displayed  
to show one of the status screens.  
FILTER value was changed  
FILTER OFF, FILTER ND 1 [1/4ND], FILTER ND 2 [1/16ND]  
AE LEVEL –3, –2, –1, NORMAL, +1, +2, +3  
*2  
AE LEVEL value was changed  
*2  
BLACK gain value was changed  
BLACK NORMAL  
BLACK STRETCH 1, 2, 3, 4, 5  
BLACK COMPRESS 1, 2, 3, 4, 5  
USER  
1
USER  
2
USER  
3
SHUTTER  
*2 *3  
PRESET TEMP. value was changed  
WHITE BAL PRST [3200K], WHITE BAL PRST [5600K]  
HEADER REC  
ND FILTER  
2
1
HEADER REC is running  
MENU  
FOCUS ASSIST was turned ON/OFF  
Time code was set to zero reset  
REC LOCK switch was turned ON/OFF  
FOCUS ASSIST ON, FOCUS ASSIST OFF  
TC ZERO PRESET X See page 45.  
STATUS  
REC SWITCH LOCKED, REC SWITCH UNLOCKED X See page 18, 9 REC LOCK switch.  
A REC command was sent from the IEEE1394 TRIGGER TO HDV, TRIGGER TO DV  
connector  
STATUS button  
22  
23  
CONTROLS, INDICATORS AND CONNECTORS  
Indications on the LCD Monitor  
and in the Viewfinder (Cont’d)  
1
2
3
Setting Status  
Contents of Indications  
FF/REW button was pressed in CAMERA SWITCH TO VTR MODE  
mode  
7
0
REC/VTR trigger button was pressed when 1080I REC INVALID  
1080I CAMERA in the VIDEO FORMAT[1/2]  
menu screen was set to ON  
4
Other Displays  
X See “FILE MANAGE Menu Screen” on pages 96-98.  
X See “Warnings and Responses” on page 102.  
9
8
6
5
a
*1  
STATUS 1 Screen  
The range for the shutter speed differs depending on the video format setting. X See page 83.  
Displayed if functions were assigned to the USER1 - 3 buttons. X See page 83.  
Displayed when the [WHT.BAL] white balance selector switch c on page 15 is set to PRST (PRESET).  
“ ** ” depends on the video format.  
*2  
*3  
*4  
STATUS 1  
In addition to the information on the STATUS 0 screen, this screen displays the following items.  
No.  
Item  
Contents  
No.  
2
Item  
Contents  
1
VIDEO FORMAT display  
Displays the currently selected video format.  
Allows you to select the REC item on the VIDEO FORMAT[1/2] menu screen. X See page 74.  
You can switch this display ON/OFF using the VIDEO FORMAT item on the LCD/VF[3/4] menu screen.  
X See page 88.  
VTR mode indication  
STBY : In record standby mode (record-pause mode)  
REC : During recording  
PLAY : During playback  
FF  
: During fast forward  
2
Time Code (TC)/User’s Bits Indicates the time code (h:m:s:frame) or user’s bits data.  
REW : During rewind  
(UB) indication  
(Example) Time code TC 00 : 00 : 00 : 00  
STL  
: During still picture playback mode  
FWD : During playback in forward direction (FWD1: About ×2 speed, FWD2: About ×5 speed, FWD3:  
About ×10 speed)  
Colon (:) when non-drop frame mode  
Dot (.) when drop frame mode  
REV  
: During playback in reverse direction (REV1: About ×2 speed, REV2: About ×5 speed, REV3:  
About ×10 speed)  
User’s bits UB FF EE DD 20  
Whether or not to display this item is set with the TC/UB item on the LCD/VF[3/4] menu screen.  
X See page 88.  
Whether the time code or user’s bits should be shown is selected with the TC DISPLAY switch inside the  
LCD door.  
STOP : Stop mode (Tape protect mode)  
EJECT : Cassette being ejected  
- - -  
: No tape loaded  
3
Indication of date and time  
LCD BRIGHT indication  
Indicates the date and time.  
Whether or not the date and time should be displayed as well as the display style are set on the TIME/  
DATE menu.  
3
Remaining tape indication  
Remaining tape indication (displayed in 1-minute steps)  
This indicator blinks when remaining tape time is equivalent to less than 3 minutes.  
Whether or not to display this item is set with the TAPE REMAIN item on the LCD/VF[3/4] menu screen.  
X See page 88.  
* When inserting a brand-new tape, the remaining tape time is not indicated.  
When the tape has been run, the indication will appear.  
* The remaining tape indication is to be regarded only as a guide.  
* When this device is used at low temperatures, it may take a while before the indication of the remaining  
tape time appears.  
When the brightness of the monitor screen is adjusted with the LCD BRIGHT button, the date and time  
indications and the VTR mode indication 2 are turned off and the LCD BRIGHT indicator is displayed.  
(Example)  
BRIGHT +5 ••••+•••••O  
Numeric value: Any of –5, –4, –3, –2, –1, 0, +1, +2, +3, +4, +5.  
4
5
Indication of Black operation  
B : Displayed when the black stretch or black compress settings are other than NORMAL.  
Indication of skin tone detail SD : Indicated when skin tone detail is ON.  
color operation  
4
Voltage indication  
(Example) 12.2V: Indicates remaining battery level in 0.1V steps.  
Battery voltage and remaining battery are displayed. Select the display method in BATTERY INFO. on the  
LCD/VF[3/4] menu screen. X See page 88.  
Anton Bauer battery: Voltage/remaining capacity (%)/remaining time  
IDX Endura battery : Voltage/remaining capacity (%)  
6
Indication of Iris level opera- I : Displayed when the AE LEVEL setting is other than NORMAL  
tion  
7
8
9
Indication of FAW operation  
Gain operation indication  
FAW : Indicated when Full Auto White Balance is ON.  
* dB : Indicates gain value when gain is other modes than 0 dB and ALC.  
Indication of various function FOCUS  
: Displayed when the Focus Assist function is ON.  
operations SKIN AREA : Blinks while the skin detail color area is displayed.  
ALC  
FAS  
S
: Displayed when ALC function alone is ON.  
: Displayed when the Full Auto Shooting function is ON.  
: Displayed when the shutter speed is a setting other than the default setting.  
X See page 83.  
0
Indication of DR-HD100 Oper- When a DR-HD100 (HDD unit by FOCUS enhancements) is connected, its operation status is displayed.  
ation  
[: DR-HD100 is connected (displays white)  
[: Recording with DR-HD100 (displays red)  
(For details, refer to the DR-HD100 INSTRUCTION MANUAL.)  
24  
25  
CONTROLS, INDICATORS AND CONNECTORS  
Indications on the LCD Monitor  
and in the Viewfinder (Cont’d)  
No.  
Item  
Contents  
5
Audio sampling frequency in- 32 K : Indicated when the AUDIO MODE item on the AUDIO/MIC[1/2] menu screen is set to 32 K. (Audio  
dication  
is recorded with 12-bit, 32 kHz sampling.)  
48 K : Indicated when the AUDIO MODE item on the AUDIO/MIC[1/2] menu screen is set to 48 K. (Audio  
is recorded with 16-bit, 48 kHz sampling.) When HDV format is set, 48K is displayed.  
X See page 84.  
STATUS 2 Screen  
STATUS 3 Screen  
STATUS 2  
Whether or not to display this item is set with the AUDIO item on the LCD/VF[3/4] menu.  
This screen displays the camera setup statuses.  
Event display is not available while this screen is displayed.  
6
7
Audio level meter indication  
Displays the CH-1, CH-2 audio level meters.  
Whether or not to display this item is set with the AUDIO item on the LCD/VF[3/4] menu.  
X See page 88.  
Indication  
Indication Contents  
FILE  
FILE  
F CAM1 [********], CAM2-4 [********], and EXT1 - 4 [********] * indicates SUB NAME X See pages 96-98.  
Standard audio level indication The level at which audio is recorded on the tape is indicated by “O”.  
A F symbol is displayed when a menu setting read from LOAD FILE was changed.  
–20 dB, –12 dB  
The display disappears when the setting is saved using STORE FILE.  
X See “AUDIO REF.LEVEL” on page 84.  
FULL AUTO  
GAIN  
ON, OFF  
0dB, 3dB, 6dB, 9dB, 12dB, 15dB, 18dB, ALC  
–20 dB  
–12 dB  
*
SHUTTER  
(When STEP is selected)  
O
O
O
O
O
O
OFF, 1/6, 1/6.25, 1/7.5, 1/12, 1/12.5, 1/15, 1/24, 1/25, 1/30, 1/48, 1/50, 1/60, 1/100, 1/120, 1/250, 1/500, 1/1000, 1/2000,  
CH-1  
CH-2  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
\ \ \ ]  
\ \ \ ]  
1/4000, 1/10000  
(When VARIABLE is selected)  
1/24.01 - 1/10489.5  
8
9
0
Iris indicator display  
Iris F-value indication  
Filter position indication  
M: Iris set higher than normal  
b: Iris set to normal  
N: Iris set lower than normal  
(Displayed when FAS or ALC mode is selected)  
EEI  
* The range for the shutter speed differs depending on the video format. X See page 83.  
The indication can be switched ON/OFF with the F.NO/IRIS IND. item on the LCD/VF[1/4] menu screen.  
X See page 86.  
WHT. BAL  
A[##00K], B[##00K], PRESET[##00K], FAW, MANUAL (Only when the remote control unit is used)  
For A and B, ## represents 23, 25, 28, 30, 32, 34, 37, 43, 52, 65, or 80. For PRESET, 32 or 56.  
AE LEVEL  
FILTER  
ZEBRA  
–3, –2, –1, NORMAL, +1, +2, +3  
Indicates the F-number of the connected lens.  
OPEN, F2, F2.8, F4, F5.6, F8, F11, F16, CLOSE  
It is not displayed when the lens is removed. For some lenses, no display appears.  
The indication can be switched ON/OFF with the F.NO/IRIS IND. item on the LCD/VF[1/4] menu screen.  
X See page 86.  
OFF, ND1 [1/4ND], ND2 [1/16ND]  
60-70%, 70-80%, 85-95%, OVER 95%, OVER 100%  
Displays the remaining tape (minutes)  
REMAIN  
AUDIO  
Displays the audio sampling frequency and the audio level adjustment mode (Ex: 32K (CH1 Z CH2 a) Z (for AUTO  
mode) a (for MANUAL mode)  
Indicates the current filter position.  
No display : FILTER OFF  
* When SHUTTER DISP. on the LCD/VF[3/4] menu screen is set to DEG, the shutter display for the frame rate in 24p or 25p mode is degrees.  
Indication Indication Contents  
SHUTTER  
ND1  
ND2  
: FILTER ND1 (1/4ND)  
: FILTER ND2 (1/16ND)  
The indication can be switched ON/OFF with the FILTER item on the LCD/VF[1/4] menu screen.  
X See page 86.  
(When STEP is selected)  
360.0°, 180.0°, 172.8°, 150.0°, 144.0°, 135.0°, 120.0°, 105.0°, 90.0°, 75.0°, 60.0°, 45.0°, 30.0°, 22.5°, 11.2°  
(When VARIABLE is selected)  
a
Audio Lock Indication  
Displayed when the audio signal is locked to the video signal.  
24p: 0.82° to 359.4°, 25p: 0.85° to 359.4°  
STATUS 3  
Displays a list of setting statuses for USER1, 2, and 3 as well as LENS RET item on the SWITCH MODE menu screen.  
X See page 83.  
Events are not displayed while these statuses are being displayed.  
Indication  
Indication Contents  
USER1  
USER2  
NONE, BARS, PRESET TEMP., B.STRETCH1 to 5, B.COMPRESS1 to 5, AE LEVEL+, AE LEVEL–, RET, LOAD FILE  
USER3  
NONE, BARS, PRESET TEMP., B.STRETCH1 to 5, B.COMPRESS1 to 5, RET, LOAD FILE  
RET, FOCUS ASSIST  
LENS RET  
STATUS 4  
This screen only displays VTR mode indication, date and time, event display and alarm indications.  
*
Whether or not date and time should be displayed and the display style are set on the TIME/DATE menu screen.  
X See “Displaying the Time and Date on the Screen” on page 42.  
26  
27  
CONTROLS, INDICATORS AND CONNECTORS  
No.  
Item  
Contents  
Indications on the LCD Monitor  
and in the Viewfinder (Cont’d)  
8
Time/Date indication  
Recorded data are displayed during playback, fast forward, and rewind.  
During recording in DV format, the data from the IEEE1394 connector is displayed.  
During recording in HDV format, the data of internal clock is displayed.  
(HDV/DV signal input is possible with the GY-HD200U, GY-HD201E.)  
Whether or not the date and time should be displayed and the display style are set on the TIME/DATE  
menu screen. X See page 92.  
When the date and time have not been set, the following indication appears.  
- -/- -/- - - -: - -: - -  
Status Screen in VTR MODE  
9
0
Voltage indication  
(Example) 12.2V : Indicates remaining battery level in 0.1V steps.  
Battery voltage and remaining battery are displayed. Select the display method in BATTERY INFO. on the  
LCD/VF[1/2] menu screen X See page 88.  
Anton Bauer battery: Voltage/remaining capacity (%)/remaining time  
IDX Endura battery : Voltage/remaining capacity (%)  
1
2
3
Audio Lock indication  
Displayed when the audio signal from DV recording or playback is locked to the video signal.  
4
5
6
Magnified Status Indications on the  
LCD Monitor  
0
9
The characters on the status screens can be showed alone  
in magnified size on the LCD monitor.  
7
8
1
DISPLAY button  
No.  
Item  
VIDEO FORMAT display  
Contents  
1
Displays the video format recorded on the tape when in VTR mode. Also displays the video format of the  
HDV/DV input signal.  
You can switch this display ON/OFF using the VIDEO FORMAT item on the LCD/VF[1/2] menu screen.  
X See page 88.  
2
3
Time code (TC) and user’s bits Displays the time code data being recorded (hour, minute, second, frame) when in VTR mode.  
(UB) display  
You can switch this display ON/OFF using the TC/UB item on the LCD/VF[1/2] menu screen.  
4
X See page 88.  
266S DD  
2
You can select to display either the time code or the user’s bits using the TC DISPLAY switch in the LCD  
door.  
3
Remaining tape time  
Remaining tape indication (displayed in 1-minute steps)  
This indicator blinks when remaining tape time is equivalent to less than 3 minutes.  
Whether or not to display this item is set with the TAPE REMAIN item on the LCD/VF[1/2] menu screen.  
X See page 88.  
* When inserting a brand-new tape, the remaining tape time is not indicated.  
When the tape has been run, the indication will appear.  
* The remaining tape indication is to be used only as a guide.  
* When this device is used at low temperatures, it may take a while before the indication of the remaining  
tape time appears.  
1. Set the LCD+VF item on the LCD/VF[4/4] menu screen to ON. X See page 89.  
2. When the DISPLAY button is briefly pressed while the LCD monitor is displayed, the displayed contents change every time the  
DISPLAY button is pressed.  
Only image displayed  
Characters shown enlarged  
Image and characters displayed  
4
5
Event display  
Displays messages related to VTR operations. X See pages 102-104.  
Audio sampling frequency in- The audio sampling frequency used for the recording is displayed during playback.  
dication  
No.  
1
Item  
Contents  
Displayed during recording and playback when the audio signal is locked to the video signal.  
(32 K, 48 K, 44.1 K)  
Audio Lock Indicator  
Whether or not to display this item is set with the AUDIO item on the LCD/VF[1/2] menu screen.  
2
Time Code Generator Setting Indicates the set status of the TC GENE switch on the side section.  
X See page 88.  
Indicator  
FREE : TC GENE switch is set to PRESET-FREE RUN MODE.  
RECR : TC GENE switch is set to PRESET-REC RUN MODE.  
REGN : TC GENE switch is set to REGEN MODE.  
6
7
Audio level meter indication  
VTR mode indication  
Displays the audio level meters during playback.  
Whether or not to display this item is set with the AUDIO item on the LCD/VF[1/2] menu screen.  
X See page 88.  
DUPL : There is 1394 input in VTR mode and TC DUPLI. menu is set to ON.  
Indicates the VTR operation status  
3
4
Drop/Non-drop Indicator  
Indicates the framing mode of the time code.  
STBY, STOP, PLAY, REC, FF, REW, FWD, REV, STL, - - - (No tape loaded), SLOW: During variable play-  
back in forward direction (Displayed when using non-linear editing software.)  
(SLOW+1: About ×0.1 speed, SLOW+2: About ×0.2 speed, SLOW+3: About ×0.5 speed)  
During variable playback in reverse direction (Displayed when using non-linear editing software.)  
(SLOW–1: About ×–0.1 speed, SLOW–2: About ×–0.2 speed, SLOW–3: About ×–0.5 speed)  
DF  
NDF : Non-drop frame mode  
Indication of DR-HD100 Oper- When a DR-HD100 (HDD unit by FOCUS enhancements) is connected, its operation status is displayed.  
ation (For details, refer to the DR-HD100 INSTRUCTION MANUAL.)  
: Drop frame mode  
MEMO  
When characters indicating the status are displayed in  
magnified size on the LCD monitor, the viewfinder display  
the image.  
28  
29  
CONTROLS, INDICATORS AND CONNECTORS  
SAFETY ZONE  
CENTER MARK  
2.35:1CE  
OFF  
2.35:1CH  
OFF  
Indications on the LCD Monitor  
and in the Viewfinder (Cont’d)  
Alarm Message Display  
ON  
ON  
The following alarm messages are displayed while the STA-  
TUS (0, 1, 4) screen is shown in the Camera mode, or a STA-  
TUS screen is shown in the VTR mode.  
DV-60I  
DV-50I  
4:3  
Cannot be selected  
DV-24P  
DV-24PA  
DV-25P  
If an alarm is generated while the STATUS 2, 3 screen is  
shown, the STATUS 0 screen returns to display the alarm.  
X See page 102.  
When an abnormality occurs in the VTR, a warning message  
with an error code is displayed.  
16:9  
HDV-HD60P  
HDV-HD50P  
HDV-HD30P  
HDV-HD25P  
HDV-HD24P  
Auto White Balance Indication  
(Camera mode only)  
[16:9]  
X See pages 102-104.  
The AUTO WHITE indication and the result of the operation are dis-  
played during the auto white balance adjustment operation.  
X See “White Balance Adjustment” on page 51.  
Switching between the LCD Screen  
and Viewfinder Display  
When the LCD+VF item in the LCD/VF[4/4] menu is set to  
OFF, the LCD monitor and viewfinder (VF) displays are as  
shown below.  
DISPLAY button  
Alarm display area  
LCD Monitor Status  
LCD Display  
VF Display  
ON  
LCD Closed  
Normal LCD  
Inverted LCD  
Normal LCD  
Inverted LCD  
OFF  
ON  
ON  
ON  
OFF  
LCD Open  
OFF  
Normal LCD  
OFF  
Menu Setting Screen  
MEMO  
Screen used for making various settings.  
The Menu Setting Screen appears when the STATUS button is  
pressed for 1 second or more.  
X See “Setting Menu Screens” on page 72.  
You can switch between the LCD monitor and the view-  
finder by holding down the DISPLAY button for about 2  
seconds.  
Inverted LCD  
After you set up the function that switches the display  
between the LCD monitor and the viewfinder by holding  
down the DISPLAY button, the display mode is cancelled  
by the LCD monitor open/close and normal/inverted  
operations.  
LCD open 40° or  
more  
LCD close less  
than 40°  
If the LCD monitor is closed inside this device with the  
screen in the normal display orientation, holding down  
the DISPLAY button does not work.  
When the LCD+VF item in the LCD/VF[4/4] menu is set to  
ON, the LCD monitor and viewfinder (VF) displays are as  
shown below.  
TOP MENU screen (Camera mode)  
LCD Monitor Status  
LCD Display  
VF Display  
Safety Zone Indication (Camera mode only)  
LCD Closed  
Normal LCD  
Inverted LCD  
Normal LCD  
Inverted LCD  
OFF  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
The indication of the following safety zone and center mark indications can be turned ON/OFF with the SAFETY ZONE item and CEN-  
TER MARK item on the LCD/VF[1/4] menu screen. X See page 86.  
In addition, the safety zone display is on or off depending on the REC item setting and the ASPECT item setting in the VIDEO FOR-  
MAT[1/2] menu screen, as shown below.  
LCD Open  
SAFETY ZONE  
CENTER MARK  
OFF  
-
4:3  
14:9  
16:9  
16:9+4:3  
OFF ON  
OFF  
ON  
OFF  
ON  
OFF  
ON  
MEMO  
REC  
ASPECT  
Press the DISPLAY button for 2 seconds to switch the  
LCD screen display ON and OFF.  
The viewfinder screen is always displayed.  
DV-60I  
DV-50I  
DV-24P  
DV-24PA  
DV-25P  
4:3  
Cannot be selected  
16:9  
HDV-HD60P  
HDV-HD50P  
HDV-HD30P  
HDV-HD25P  
HDV-HD24P  
[16:9]  
30  
31  
PREPARATIONS  
1. 3. Knob  
2. Microphone  
Basic System  
Attaching the Zoom Lens  
1. Loosen the mount ring.  
Shoulder Belt  
Microphone  
holder  
2. Attach the lens with its pin aligned with the hole in the  
mount.  
Component Cable  
BNC  
3. Tighten the mount ring.  
4. Connect the cable connector.  
5. Clamp the lens cable.  
Microphone  
XLR 3P  
Monitor  
Composite Cable  
RCA pin  
Earphone  
Audio Cable  
RCA pin  
5. Clamp  
Hole  
Focus Manual Unit  
*1 HZ-FM13 (FUJINON)  
HZ-FM15 (CANON)  
Pin  
Monitor  
HDD Unit  
DR-HD100  
Microphone  
IEEE1394 Cable  
6P-6P  
4. INPUT1, 2 connector  
1/3 Zoom Lens  
Th13 × 3.5BRMU (FUJINON)  
For GY-HD200U  
Clamp  
V
F
B
R
I
G
H
T
DV VTR  
How to Attach the View-  
finder  
USER  
1
USER  
2
USER  
3
N
D
F
I
L
T
E
R
2
1
MENU  
Wide Converter  
WCV-82SC  
STATUS  
Anton Bauer  
Battery Charger  
WHT.BAL  
AUTO  
CH-1  
AUTO  
CH-2  
AUDIO  
LEVEL  
Anton Bauer  
Battery  
ON  
OFF  
POWER  
REC  
1/3 Zoom Lens  
CAUTION  
Focus Manual Unit  
*1  
Th16 × 5.5BRMU (FUJINON)  
BR-HD50  
(Excluding the CHU/CHE model)  
Battery mount  
For GY-HD200E/GY-HD201E  
Be sure to tighten the mount ring completely. Incomplete  
tightening may result in the lens dropping off or disturbed  
back focus.  
Set this device’s power switch to “OFF” before the zoom  
lens is attached or detached.  
GY-HD200U: Gold Mount  
GY-HD200E: V Mount  
GY-HD201E: V Mount  
1.To attach the viewfinder, slide it in the direction of the  
Non-linear Editing System  
SD Memory Card  
2.aSrerot twh.e viewfinder to a comfortable position and then turn  
Zoom Servo Unit  
HZ-ZS13B  
IDX  
Battery Charger  
the slide mounting ring and mount.  
GY-HD200U/GY-HD200E/GY-HD201E  
Standard Package  
IDX (Endura)  
Battery  
To take off the viewfinder, pull the knob in the direction of  
the arrow as you slide the viewfinder.  
Mount Converter  
(1/2r1/3): ACM-12  
(2/3r1/3): ACM-17  
XLR 4P  
Knob  
Tripod Base  
Taking off the viewfinder  
Attaching the Microphone  
(Provided)  
AC  
AC Adapter  
1/2 Zoom Lens  
S14 × 7.3B12U (FUJINON)  
S17 × 6.6BRM (FUJINON)  
S20 × 6.4B12U (FUJINON)  
YH16 × 7K12U (CANON)  
YH19 × 6.7K12U (CANON)  
2/3 Zoom Lens  
2. Slide mounting ring  
Remote Control Unit  
RM-LP55/RM-LP57  
Carrying Case  
Tripod  
Connect the provided microphone to the microphone holder.  
Provided microphone is a phantom microphone.  
1. Turn the knob on the microphone holder anticlockwise to  
loosen it and open the microphone holder.  
1.  
Dolly  
2. Place the microphone in the microphone holder.  
Place the microphone toward the front to prevent it from  
interfering with the cassette cover.  
1
*
An HZ-FM13 cannot be used with a Th16 × 5.5BRMU or S14 × 7.3B12/U zoom lens.  
Use a FUJINON focus manual unit (FMM-8, CFH-3, CFC-12-990).  
For details, please consult your JVC authorized dealer.  
3. Turn the knob on the microphone holder clockwise to  
secure the microphone.  
4. Connect the microphone cable to the INPUT1 or INPUT2  
input connector on this device.  
5. Attach the microphone cable to the clamp.  
6. Make sure to perform the correct setting for use of a  
phantom microphone.  
X See page 55.  
32  
33  
PREPARATIONS  
3.Close the SD memory card cover.  
CAUTION  
How to Attach the Viewfinder  
(Cont’d)  
The front base mount may be locked while the pin of the  
tripod base is not inserted into the hole on the rear base  
mount of this device. Therefore, after mounting, make  
sure that these parts are engaged properly.  
Attaching the Tripod Base  
(Optional)  
Cutout  
When moving this device mounted on  
a
tripod, any  
impact or vibration should be avoided as this may cause  
this device to become detached and to drop from the tri-  
pod.  
Be sure to remove this device from the tripod before  
transporting it.  
Use the optional tripod base to place the camera on a tripod.  
About the Viewfinder Cable  
Attach the viewfinder cable to the clamp 7 on page 14.  
To reduce the emission of unwanted radio waves, be sure to  
attach the provided core filter as shown in the figure below.  
1. Attach the tripod base on the tripod by using the hole that  
balances this device most optimally.  
Attach the core filter (black) as close to this device as pos-  
sible, as shown in the figure.  
SD memory card cover  
1. Tripod mounting holes  
Taking out the SD memory card  
2. While pushing the safety lever, pull the lock lever toward  
1.Push the SD memory card in the direction of the arrow.  
the front until the front mount clip clicks into place.  
The SD memory card comes out slightly.  
3. Pin  
2.Pull the SD memory card straight out.  
Front mount clip  
Core filter (black)  
2. Safety lever  
2.  
Lock lever  
Inserting an SD Memory  
Card  
3. Place this device on the tripod base by aligning the rear  
base mount of this device with the pin on the tripod base.  
By using an SD memory card, you can save and call up menu  
settings and camera settings for this device.  
X See “FILE MANAGE Menu Screen” on page 96.  
Check that the POWER switch is OFF.  
About SD Memory Cards  
When you use an SD memory card that is either new or  
was formatted on a device other than this device, format it  
on this device.  
Inserting an SD Memory Card  
4. Front base mount  
3. Rear base mount  
X See page 98.  
Recommended SD memory cards  
Panasonic: 16 MB to 2 GB  
1. Open the SD memory card cover.  
4. Hold the camera on the top and slide forward so that the  
base mount of the camera is locked by the front mount  
clip of this device as it clicks into place.  
2. Face the cutout end of the SD memory card inward and  
insert it in the direction of the arrow.  
You can write-protect the card so that saved files are not  
mistakenly erased. Set the switch on the side of the SD  
memory card to the “LOCK” position.  
CAUTION  
4.  
Be sure not to touch the metal connector area of the SD  
memory card.  
LOCK switch  
VF BRIGHT  
USER  
1
USER  
2
USER  
3
ND FILTER  
2
1
MENU  
STATUS  
WHT.BAL  
AUTO  
CH-1  
AUTO  
CH-2  
AUDIO  
LEVEL  
ON  
OFF  
POWER  
REC  
MEMO  
SDHC-compliant memory cards cannot be used with this  
device.  
34  
35  
PREPARATIONS  
GY-HD200E/GY-HD201E  
Charging the Built-in Battery  
Use an IDX (Endura) battery.  
AC Operation  
Battery Operation  
Attaching the Battery  
The built-in, rechargeable backup battery retains the date  
and time and the time code data.  
1.Face the battery terminals down and align the battery V-  
The built-in battery is constantly being charge whenever this  
device is connected to a power supply, but it gradually dis-  
charges while this device is disconnected from a power sup-  
ply. The battery will be fully discharged when this device is  
not used for about three months, in which case the set date  
and time and time code data are reset.  
In this case, recharge the built-in battery and then set the  
date and time and time code data again.  
However, it is possible to use this device even if the built-in  
battery is discharged but the date and time and time code  
data cannot be recorded.  
mount with the battery adapter V-mount attachment.  
This device is operable with AC power supply or battery  
pack.  
Use the AC adapter as the AC power supply.  
The attachable battery varies depending on location.  
Recommended batteries  
U model: Dionic 90 (Anton Bauer)  
E model: Endura-7 (IDX)  
V-mount  
V-mount  
attachment  
1. After making sure that the power switches of this device  
and of the AC adapter are set to OFF, connect the DC  
cable to the DC OUTPUT connector of the AC adapter  
and the DC INPUT connector of this device as shown in  
the illustration.  
CAUTION  
Use only the recommended batteries.  
If a heavy battery is used, the battery may fall out depend-  
ing on the way the HD camera recorder is used.  
To lessen the amount of unnecessary radio waves  
emitted, attach a provided Clamp filter near both ends  
of the DC cable as shown in the diagram.  
GY-HD200U  
Use an Anton Bauer battery.  
How to charge the built-in battery  
1.Connect the AC adapter to this device and an AC outlet  
or mount a charged battery on this device.  
2.Set the POWER switch on this device to “ON” or “OFF”  
(charging takes places with the POWER switch set to  
either of the positions).  
Attaching the Battery  
2.Slide the battery down until it clicks and locks.  
The battery is attached.  
1. Align the battery guide pins (three places) with the bat-  
tery adapter guide holes and insert straight. Battery will  
not be properly attached if guide pins are not straight.  
3.Leave the equipment in this condition for about 4 hours.  
3
The built-in battery will remain charged for about  
months after being charged for about 4 hours.  
Removing the Battery  
Slide the battery up while holding down the lock release but-  
ton to remove the battery.  
Clamp filter  
Guide pins  
Cassette cover  
side panel  
Guide  
holes (×3)  
DC INPUT  
Release button  
Battery  
Release lever  
DC cable  
Battery pack  
(trim pack)  
LCD screen  
side panel  
2. Slide the battery towards the Cassette cover side panel  
DC OUTPUT  
until it clicks.  
The battery is attached.  
Clamp filter  
AC adapter  
Removing the Battery  
Slide the battery towards you (LCD screen side panel) while  
holding down the release lever, and pull away from the  
device to remove the battery.  
2. Press the POWER switch of this device to ON. Power is  
supplied to the VTR section and the camera.  
CAUTION  
Do not remove or connect the DC cable while recording  
is being performed.  
Release lever  
Battery  
Do not use any power source with large fluctuations in  
the power source voltage, power sources generating  
noise, such as ripples or power sources with lower volt-  
age.  
36  
37  
PREPARATIONS  
PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION  
When you use an Anton Bauer battery, the remaining  
battery (capacity or time) can be displayed in the STA-  
TUS 1 screen of the LCD screen or viewfinder. Set BAT-  
TERY INFO. on the LCD/VF[3/4] menu screen to  
CAPA% or TIME to display the remaining battery. When  
using the IDX Endura battery, the remaining capacity (%)  
can be displayed. X See page 88.  
Battery Operation  
(Cont’d)  
Turning the Power OFF  
Turning the Power ON  
1.Place this device in the record-standby or STOP mode.  
2.Set the POWER switch to OFF.  
3.Remove the battery pack or the power supply to the DC  
INPUT connector. (When the camera is not going to be  
used for a longer period.)  
Turning the Power ON  
Precautions for the Battery Opera-  
tion  
CAUTION  
1. Set the POWER switch to ON.  
Operating Time with Battery Pack  
This device turns on in Camera mode.  
Do not set the POWER switch to OFF while recording is  
taking place.  
Confirm that the “STBY” or “STOP” indication is shown in  
the VTR operation mode indication area before the  
power is turned off.  
Should the POWER switch accidentally be set to OFF  
during a recording, wait at least 5 seconds before turning  
the power on again.  
Always set the POWER switch to OFF before discon-  
necting the power supply.  
Do not detach the battery pack while recording is taking  
place.  
Do not connect or disconnect the DC cable while operat-  
ing with a battery pack.  
The following symptoms may occur if the DC cable is con-  
nected or disconnected while operating with  
pack.  
When a fully charged battery pack is attached, the approxi-  
mate continuous operating time is as follows  
The operation differs according to whether this device is in  
the Camera mode or in the VTR mode.  
The mode switches each time you press the CAM/VTR button.  
When the mode is switched, the VTR indicator displays  
the following statuses.  
Battery Pack  
Continuous Operating Time (at 25°C (77°F))  
Approx. 3.2 hours  
Dionic 90  
(U model)  
a
battery  
Endura-7  
(E model)  
Approx. 2.5 hours  
While the mode is being switched : Flashing  
The power is cut off for a moment when the DC cable is  
In VTR mode  
: Lit  
disconnected.  
In Camera mode  
: Off  
Battery operating time may differ depending on the age of  
the battery pack, charging conditions and the operating  
environment, etc. Use the values in the table on the above  
for approximate reference times.  
Noise to the video and audio signals occurs. Audio sig-  
nal are muted.  
Do not remove the battery pack or turn AC adapter OFF  
while the POWER switch on the camera is still set to ON.  
When operation is continued with DC input after the bat-  
tery pack capacity has been used up, set the POWER  
switch to OFF after the DC power is applied. Then switch  
ON again.  
If this device is left with the battery pack attached, a small  
amount of power is consumed even if the POWER switch  
on this device is set to OFF.  
Operating time is reduced in areas with a cold environ-  
ment.  
Operating time is reduced when the power zoom lens and  
LCD are used frequently.  
VTR indicator  
Remove the battery pack when this device is not going to  
be used.  
Precautions for the Battery Pack  
VF BRIGHT  
When the battery pack is not in use, it must be stored in a  
cool, dry place.  
USER  
1
USER  
2
USER  
3
Remaining Battery Power Display  
ND FILTER  
LCD BRIGHT  
-
Do not leave the battery pack in a place where it might be  
subject to a high temperature (under direct sunlight in a  
car, etc.), this could cause leakage of the fluid or shorten  
service life.  
CAM/VTR  
+
2
1
MENU  
AUDIO SELECT  
CH-1  
CH-2  
TC  
DISPLAY  
TC  
GENE.  
FREE  
AUTO  
MANU  
REC  
UB  
STATUS  
REGEN  
LCD monitor/Viewfinder  
WHT.BAL  
AUTO  
CH-1  
AUTO  
CH-2  
AUDIO  
LEVEL  
When the terminal section of the battery pack gets dirty,  
the operating time will be shortened.  
If the operating time becomes greatly reduced even imme-  
diately after recharging, the service life of the battery pack  
is nearly finished.  
ON  
OFF  
POWER  
REC  
CAM/VTR button  
POWER switch  
Camera mode  
Purchase a new battery pack.  
This device enters the Camera mode. The camera image  
is displayed in the viewfinder or on the LCD monitor. When  
a recordable videocassette is loaded, this device enters  
the record-standby mode automatically. “STBY” is dis-  
played in the VTR operation mode indication area of the  
LCD monitor and/or in the viewfinder. In this condition,  
press the REC/VTR trigger button to start recording.  
Playback is also possible in the Camera mode.  
Playback operation becomes possible when the STOP  
button is pressed to set the VTR operation mode indica-  
tor to indicate “STOP”.  
Recharging  
When the remaining battery power is nearly exhausted, the  
following warnings will be generated.  
Viewfinder screen or LCD monitor  
When a Status screen is displayed (excluding the STATUS  
2, 3 screen in the Camera mode)  
Recharge the battery pack after completely discharging it.  
Repeated recharging with residual charge remaining could  
result in reduced battery capacity.  
If the battery capacity is reduced by repeating incomplete  
recharging, or recharging without discharging, once dis-  
charge the battery pack completely, then recharge it to  
restore the battery capacity.  
If the battery pack is recharged with its internal tempera-  
ture raised immediately after use, recharging may not be  
performed completely.  
Perform charging in an environment where the tempera-  
ture is between 10°C (50°F) and 35°C (95°F). 20°C (68°F)  
to 25°C (77°F) is the ideal temperature range for charging.  
If the environment is too cold, charging may not complete.  
*
Alarm indication: LOW VOLTAGE displayed.  
FRONT and BACK TALLY lamp on camera: Blinks  
Monitoring loudspeaker and PHONES jack: Alarm sound  
VTR mode  
This device enters the VTR mode. The camera image will  
not be displayed in the viewfinder or on the LCD monitor.  
When a videocassette is loaded, this device enters the  
stop mode.  
“STOP” is displayed in the VTR operation mode indication  
area of the LCD monitor and/or in the viewfinder.  
HDV/DV input is possible through the IEEE1394 connector.  
MEMO  
After the remaining battery power warnings appear, this  
device automatically stops operation if the battery power  
operation is continued.  
38  
39  
PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION  
TC/UB/CLOCK menu screen  
Unloading the Cassette  
Loading/Unloading the  
Cassette  
Setting and Displaying the  
Date and Time  
1.Turn the POWER switch to ON.  
2.When this device is in shooting standby mode or stop  
mode, slide the EJECT switch to the side and wait until  
the videocassette cover opens completely.  
The date and time of the built-in clock should be set. Pow-  
ered by the built-in backup battery the set date and time data  
continue to count even when the power is switched off.  
The set date and time data are displayed on the LCD mon-  
itor or in the viewfinder and recorded on the tape in accor-  
dance with the settings made on the menu screen.  
Cassette Loading  
The LED next to the EJECT switch flashes.  
A few seconds pass before the videocassette tape is  
ejected.  
Use a videocassette tape marked MiniDV.  
To record, slide the switch on the back for use in prevent-  
ing accidental erasure to the “REC” side.  
3.The LED turns off and the videocassette cover opens.  
Take out the videocassette tape.  
Remove any the tape slack before loading.  
5.Make settings on the TIME/DATE menu screen. (This  
4.Carefully push the center of the videocassette cover in  
includes display style, etc.)  
1. Turn the POWER switch ON.  
the direction of the arrow as far as it will go to close it.  
Setting the Date and Time Style  
2. Slide the EJECT switch on the top panel of this device to  
TIME/DATE menu screen  
CAUTION  
the side.  
The date and time are set on the menu screen.  
When setting while observing on a monitor connected to the  
connector, set the ANALOG OUT CHAR. item on the OTH-  
ERS[1/2] menu screen to ON.  
When you close the videocassette cover, push it in firmly  
as far as it will go. If the videocassette cover is not closed  
properly, it becomes half-locked and this device cannot  
function.  
The videocassette cover opens automatically and a vid-  
eocassette tape can be inserted.  
3. Insert a videocassette tape into the videocassette holder.  
With the tape window facing out, move the switch on the  
back of the videocassette up and firmly push the center  
back of the videocassette straight in as far as it will go.  
If this happens, firmly push the videocassette cover in  
again as far as it will go to lock it.  
1. Set the POWER switch to ON.  
2. Press the STATUS button for 1 second or longer to dis-  
The videocassette cover does not open during recording  
even if you slide the EJECT switch.  
Do not leave the videocassette cover open for a long  
time.  
play the TOP MENU screen.  
4. Carefully push the center (“Push here” sticker) of the vid-  
eocassette cover in the direction of the arrow as far as it  
will go to close it.  
After the cover is closed, it takes about 10 seconds  
until recording can begin or this device can enter  
STOP mode.  
Dust or dirt may enter the inside and cause damage.  
Do not touch the videocassette cover or interfere with the  
eject operation while ejecting is in progress. This will  
cause damage.  
When you close the videocassette cover, do not press  
the black area of the inner cover.  
3.  
USER  
1
USER  
2
USER  
3
DATE STYLE : Selects the style for displaying the  
date.  
SHUTTER dial  
ND FILTER  
YY/MM/DD (Year, month, day)  
MM/DD/YY (Month, day, year)  
DD/MM/YY (Day, month, year)  
2
1
REC/SAVE  
MENU  
Tape window  
switch  
2.  
TIME STYLE : The time can be set to display as a 12-  
hour or 24-hour clock system.  
SEC DISPLAY : To select whether or not indication of  
seconds should be displayed on the  
screen.  
STATUS  
EJECT switch  
STATUS button  
Cassette holder  
WHT.BAL  
AUTO  
CH-1  
AUTO  
CH-2  
AUDIO  
LEVEL  
ON  
OFF  
TIME SHIFT  
: Adds time to the built-in clock (time  
compensation) and displays it. The  
adjusted time is also recorded on the  
tape.  
POWER  
REC  
1Rotate the SHUTTER dial to align the cursor (K) with  
the item to be set, and then press the SHUTTER dial.  
1. POWER switch  
The setting area of the selected item starts blinking.  
3. Rotate the SHUTTER dial to align the cursor (K) with the  
TC/UB/CLOCK item, and then press the SHUTTER dial  
in the direction of the camera body.  
Videocassette cover  
Inner cover  
2Rotate the SHUTTER dial to change the setting, and  
then press the SHUTTER dial.  
The setting area stops blinking and the setting is  
entered.  
The TC/UB/CLOCK menu screen appears.  
4. Rotate the SHUTTER dial to align the cursor (K) with the  
If the power is on, the modes are as shown below.  
MEMO  
TIME/DATE item, and then press the SHUTTER dial.  
REC/SAVE switch  
MODE  
The TIME/DATE menu screen appears.  
Set the DISPLAY item on the TIME/DATE menu  
screen to ON.  
The TIME STYLE, SEC DISPLAY, DATE STYLE and TIME  
SHIFT items can also be set and changed after the date  
and time have been set.  
REC  
SAVE  
STOP mode  
Camera  
VTR  
Record-standby mode  
REC INHIBIT is displayed  
on the LCD monitor and in  
the viewfinder.  
STOP mode  
40  
41  
PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION  
Setting and Displaying the Date  
and Time (Cont’d)  
Displaying the Time and Date on the  
Screen  
Time code input entered the  
IEEE1394 connector (GY-HD200U/  
GY-HD201E only)  
Displaying Time Code  
Whether or not the time and date should be displayed on the  
screen and how to display them are set on the TIME/DATE  
menu screen.  
This device records SMPTE-standard (NTSC) or EBU-stan-  
dard (PAL) time codes and user’s bits. In the play mode or  
the record mode, the reproduced time codes or user’s bits  
are shown on the LCD monitor or in the viewfinder.  
Pressing the STOP button for 1 second in the EJECT or stop  
mode displays the DV input time code data or user’s bit data  
from the IEEE1394 connector on the STATUS screen.  
Setting the Date and Time  
DTCG : The time code data from the IEEE1394 connector  
DUBG : The user’s bit data from the IEEE1394 connector  
1. Display the CLOCK ADJUST menu screen.  
Select the CLOCK ADJUST item on the TIME/DATE  
menu screen.  
The time codes or user’s bits can be shown on the LCD mon-  
itor or in the viewfinder during playback and recording as fol-  
lows. (Status screen)  
To return to display of the original time code or user’s bit,  
press the STOP button. (Display of the normal time code or  
user’s bit is also restored by performing VTR operation.)  
TIME/DATE menu screen  
Setting  
MEMO  
1. Set the TC/UB item on the LCD/VF[3/4] menu screen to  
To record HDV/DV input time code and user’s bit from  
the IEEE1394 connector, set the TC DUPLI. item on the  
TC/UB/CLOCK menu screen to ON.  
ON.  
Date  
Time  
Time codes or user’s bit data are displayed on the  
STATUS screen.  
X See page 90.  
1.Display the TIME/DATE menu screen.  
To maintain the continuity of time code data, use with the  
TC GENE. switch set to REGEN mode when recording  
HDV/DV input signal from the IEEE1394 connector.  
There is no time code display for HDV input.  
Time code indication  
1
Select the TC/UB/CLOCK item on the TOP MENU  
screen.  
(Example)  
Time code indication  
00:00:00:00  
2Select the TIME/DATE item on the TC/UB/CLOCK  
menu screen.  
User’s bits indication  
FF EE DD 20  
2.Set the TIME/DATE menu screen.  
2. Set the date and time.  
CAUTION  
The blinking digit is the one to be set.  
DISPLAY item : Sets whether or not date and time  
should be displayed.  
A time code with a duration of more than 2 hours may not  
be displayed correctly by DV components for general con-  
sumer use, as some of these lack the capability to display  
longer time codes.  
CLOCK ADJUST menu screen  
Date  
Set to ON to display the indications.  
DISPLAY MODE : Sets the video output mode in  
item  
which date and time should be dis-  
played.  
BARS  
CAM  
:
Displayed when outputting the color  
bar.  
STATUS 1 screen  
: Displayed when outputting the color  
camera image.  
:
: Sets the style in which the date and  
time are displayed.  
: Date and time are displayed.  
: Date only is displayed.  
2. Whether time codes or user’s bit data should be dis-  
played is selected with the TC DISPLAY switch inside the  
LCD door.  
BARS+CAM  
DISPLAY  
STYLE item  
DATE+TIME  
DATE  
Date and time are always displayed.  
TC  
UB  
: Time codes are displayed.  
: User’s bit data is displayed.  
Time (Hour:Min)  
TIME  
: Time only is displayed.  
1When the SHUTTER dial is pressed, the blinking digit  
moves to the next digit.  
2When the SHUTTER dial is rotated, the value of the  
blinking digit changes.  
Display of date and time in the various operation modes.  
In Camera mode  
: The date and time of the internal  
clock are displayed.  
LCD BRIGHT  
CAM/VTR  
-
+
When the SHUTTER dial is rotated upward, the value  
becomes higher. When rotated downward, the value  
becomes smaller.  
3Repeat the procedure described in 1 and 2 above to  
set the day, month, year, hours, minutes.  
The digits indicating seconds cannot be set.  
4Press the SHUTTER dial in sync with a time signal to  
enter the date and time precisely.  
In VTR playback mode : The date and time recorded on the  
tape are displayed.  
AUDIO SELECT  
CH-2  
TC  
In VTR stop mode  
: The last read date and time values  
are displayed.  
DISPLAY  
TC  
GENE.  
FREE  
CH-1  
AUTO  
MANU  
REC  
UB  
REGEN  
When an HDV/DV sig- : The date and time of the DV input  
nal is input from the are displayed in DV format. The  
IEEE1394 connector  
date and time of the internal clock  
are displayed in HDV format.  
TC DISPLAY switch TC GENE. switch  
(GY-HD200U/GY-HD201E only)  
3. When all the settings are completed, rotate the SHUT-  
TER dial to align the cursor with the PAGE BACK item,  
and then press the SHUTTER dial.  
The TIME/DATE menu screen returns.  
4. To return to the normal screen, use either of the following  
methods.  
Press the STATUS button  
or  
Return to the TOP MENU screen and then select the  
EXIT item on the TOP MENU screen before pressing the  
SHUTTER dial.  
42  
43  
PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION  
TC/UB/CLOCK menu screen (FRAME RATE: 60/30)  
Use the DROP FRAME item to select the framing mode  
for the time code generator.  
Presetting time code data  
Presetting user’s bit data  
Presetting and Recording  
of Time Code  
DROP  
: The time code generator’s running method is  
set the drop frame mode.  
The time code and user’s bit data are preset on the TC/UB/  
CLOCK menu screen.  
The user’s bit data are preset with the UB PRESET item on  
the TC/UB/CLOCK menu screen.  
The method for setting is the same as the method for setting  
the time code described on the left.  
Use this setting when placing emphasis on  
the recording time.  
1. Display the TC/UB/CLOCK menu screen.  
Select the TC/UB/CLOCK item on the TOP MENU  
screen.  
The time codes from the internal time code generator can be  
recorded at the time of recording scenes.  
The TC/UB/CLOCK menu screen differs depending on  
whether the FRAME RATE item on the VIDEO FORMAT  
menu screen is “60/30” or “50/25”.  
There are two ways to preset the time code.  
Set from the TC/UB/CLOCK menu screen.  
Set in the LCD screen without opening the menu screen.  
NON  
DROP  
: The time code generator’s running method is  
set to the non drop frame mode.  
Use this setting when placing emphasis on  
the number of frames.  
The user’s bit can be specified using numerals or alpha-  
betic letters from 0 to F for each digit.  
To record user’s bit data, set the UB REC item to ON (Only  
when set to FRAME RATE 50/25).  
TC/UB/CLOCK menu screen  
(FRAME RATE: 60/30)  
CAUTION  
It is not possible to set all the digits of the user’s bit data to  
This section explains how to set from the TC/UB/CLOCK  
menu screen.  
“F”.  
Reading of the data during playback will not be possible for  
an all-F setting.  
*
See page 46 for instructions of setting from the LCD  
screen.  
Framing mode:  
Drop frame/  
Non-drop setting  
Menu and switch settings to set the time code preset are the  
same as the settings below.  
Time code (hour, min, sec, frame)  
Zero-resetting the Time Code or  
User’s Bit Data  
2. Set the time code (hours, minutes, seconds, frames).  
Setting  
1Rotate the SHUTTER dial to align the cursor (K) with  
TC PRESET, and then press the SHUTTER dial.  
This is performed with the TC or UB PRESET item on the  
TC/UB/CLOCK menu screen. (Performed separately for the  
time code and the user’s bit data.)  
The first digit of the time code blinks.  
The blinking digit is the one to be set.  
To preset the Time Code, make the following settings.  
TC GENE. switch  
Set to REC or FREE.  
MEMO  
Drop frame/Non-drop frame mode  
2When the SHUTTER dial is pressed, the blinking digit  
changes.  
In the NTSC system, the actual number of frames per 1  
second is approximately 29.97 frames, but per time code  
30 frames are processed. To compensate for this differ-  
ence, the mode called “drop mode” drops frame 00 and 01  
for every minute not divisible by 10.  
1Rotate the SHUTTER dial to align the cursor (K) with the  
TC or UB PRESET item, and then press the SHUTTER  
dial.  
REC  
: The data preset in the time code generator  
runs only during recording.  
Use this setting if it is necessary to record  
continual time codes across different scenes.  
3When the SHUTTER dial is rotated, the value of the  
blinking digit changes.  
When the SHUTTER dial is rotated upward, the value  
becomes higher. When rotated downward, the value  
becomes smaller.  
2Rotate the SHUTTER dial to select ZERO PRESET as the  
setting value, and then press the SHUTTER dial.  
*
However, approximately ±1-frame varia-  
tions may occur in scene accuracy.  
The “non-drop frame mode” is when no frames are dropped  
and the actual time shift neglected.  
MEMO  
FREE  
: The time code starts to run from the time it is  
preset in the time code generator.  
4Repeat the procedure described in 2 and 3 above to  
set the desired value for all digits.  
When a menu screen is not being displayed, you can zero  
reset the time code data by simultaneously holding down  
the USER2 button and the STOP button for about 1 sec-  
ond.  
TC/UB/CLOCK menu screen (FRAME RATE: 50/25)  
Whether or not user’s bit data should be recorded can be  
selected with the UB REC item on the TC/UB/CLOCK  
menu screen.  
5After setting the frame digit, press the SHUTTER dial to  
make EXECUTE blink. The setting values are con-  
firmed when the SHUTTER dial is pressed again.  
To cancel the setting, select CANCEL and press the  
SHUTTER dial.  
TC/UB/CLOCK menu screen  
(FRAME RATE: 50/25)  
3. When all the digits are set  
Press the STATUS button to return to the normal  
screen  
or  
Rotate the SHUTTER dial to align the cursor (K) with  
the PAGE BACK item, and then press the SHUTTER  
dial to return to the TOP MENU screen.  
44  
45  
PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION  
Presetting the Time Code  
from the LCD Screen  
Recording Time Codes in  
Continuation of Time  
Playing Back Time Code  
Codes Recorded on Tape  
The time code can be preset directly from the LCD screen  
without opening the TC/UB/CLOCK menu screen.  
This device features a time code reader. During playback,  
the time code or user’s bit data recorded on the tape is dis-  
played on the LCD screen or viewfinder status screen.  
This device also incorporates a time code reader. Therefore,  
when this device enters record mode from record-standby  
mode, it can read the time code data recorded on the tape  
and record time codes in continuation of the existing data.  
The recorded user’s bit data are identical to the user’s bit  
date recorded on tape.  
However, approximately ±1-frame variations may occur in  
scene accuracy.  
To enable this function, set the time code related switches as  
follows before starting recording.  
CAUTION  
MEMO  
PRESET mode is not available in the following.  
Blink  
TC GENE. switch is set to REGEN.  
TC DUPLI. item in the TC/UB/CLOCK menu screen is  
set to ON.  
During playback, if a portion of tape without recording  
time code runs through, the time code stops running.  
Playback continues.  
When a tape with a time code that is longer than two  
hours is played on home-use DV equipment, time code  
may not be played properly on some models.  
2.Press the USER2 button to reset all data.  
Data becomes “00:00:00:00” and the hour digit starts  
blinking.  
Menu screen is displayed.  
*
RECORDING mode is active.  
Switching to CAM/VTR mode (When VTR indicator is  
blinking).  
3.Set the time code (hour, minute, second and frame).  
The blinking digit can be set.  
1Turn the SHUTTER dial to change the value of the  
blinking digit. Turn the SHUTTER dial up to increase the  
value and down to decrease the value.  
Setting  
Setting  
TC/UB/CLOCK menu screen  
Set the TC GENE. switch inside the LCD door to REGEN.  
Set TC DUPLI. item on the TC/UB/CLOCK menu screen  
to OFF.  
2Press the SHUTTER dial to change the blinking digit.  
Set framing of the time code generator in DROP  
FRAME. (When set to FRAME RATE 60/30)  
Set to enable/disable user’s bit recording in UB REC.  
(When set to FRAME RATE 50/25)  
3Repeat steps 1 and 2 and continue setting for each  
row.  
MEMO  
The time code framing mode automatically becomes the  
mode (drop frame or non drop frame) already recorded on  
the tape.  
4.Press the USER3 button to confirm the setting data.  
Set the TC GENE switch to REC or FREE.  
The LCD screen returns to the original screen.  
MEMO  
Presetting User’s Bit  
You can specify the user’s bit with a number or character  
between 0 - F.  
See page 44 for details on the above settings.  
About Time Code Mode  
Camera mode  
Set the TC DISPLAY switch.  
Set to TC to preset time code and UB to preset user’s bit.  
TC GENE. switch  
REC  
TC PRESET mode  
CAUTION  
FREE  
REGEN  
All digits of user’s bit cannot be set to F.  
If all digits are set to F and read, user’s bit is deemed as  
undefined during playback.  
Operation  
This section describes presetting of the time code.  
TC REGENE mode  
VTR mode/IEEE1394 input mode  
TC/UB/CLOCK menu  
TC GENE. switch  
Aborting Preset Operation  
While presetting, press the USER1 button while holding  
down the STATUS button.  
USER 2 button  
USER 1 button  
TC DUPLI. item  
FREE  
REC  
REGEN  
USER 3 button  
OFF  
ON  
TC PRESET mode  
TC REGENE mode  
IEEE1394 TC  
SLAVE mode*  
USER  
1
USER  
2
USER  
3
IEEE1394 TC DUPLI. mode  
Preset operation stops and the LCD screen returns to  
the original screen.  
SHUTTER  
*
ND FILTER  
IEEE1394 TC SLAVE mode is performed with special operations. X See page 48.  
SHUTTER dial  
2
1
VF BRIGHT  
CAUTION  
USER  
1
USER  
2
USER  
3
MENU  
OFF  
ND FILTER  
2
1
MENU  
Preset operation is terminated in the following.  
STATUS button  
STATUS  
WHT.BAL  
TC DISPLAY switch is changed  
CAM/VTR mode switch is changed  
VTR operations are performed  
AUTO  
CH-1  
AUTO  
CH-2  
AUDIO  
LEVEL  
STATUS  
ON  
OFF  
POWER  
REC  
USER1, USER2, and USER3 presetting in the SWITCH  
MODE menus screen is not available when the Time Code  
Preset screen is displayed.  
The time code preset screen is displayed on the LCD  
screen or viewfinder. It will not be output from the VIDEO  
OUT terminal.  
1. In Standby or Stop mode, press the USER1 button for  
about 2 seconds while holding down the STATUS button.  
The current time code generator data is displayed in  
enlarged display mode on the LCD screen. The hour  
digit starts blinking.  
46  
47  
PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION  
Synchronizing with the  
Screen Adjustment  
Viewfinder Adjustment  
Time Code of the IEEE1394  
(DV)-Connected Master Unit  
LCD monitor direction, angle, screen brightness, etc. can be  
adjusted.  
Direction of the Viewfinder  
Adjust the position and angle of the viewfinder.  
You can synchronize the time code when performing multi-camera recording. The internal time code generator will be synchro-  
nized with the time code in the signal input from the IEEE1394 terminal. After synchronization (slave lock), the internal time code  
generator continues to run even if the IEEE1394 cable is disconnected.  
Diopter Adjustment  
Rotate the eyepiece focusing ring until the viewfinder screen  
image is clearly visible.  
Adjusting the Direction and Angle of the  
LCD monitor  
Master unit  
Slave unit  
With the LCD door in the open condition, rotate the LCD  
door.  
Adjustment of the Viewfinder Screen  
PEAKING:  
It can be turned 180° in upward direction and 90° in down-  
ward direction.  
Adjusts the contour of the LCD monitor and the viewfinder  
screen.  
VF BRIGHT  
VF BRIGHT  
When turned 180° upward direction, the LCD monitor can  
be viewed from the lens side (vertically inverted image).  
USER  
1
USER  
2
USER  
3
USER  
1
USER  
2
USER  
3
ND FILTER  
ND FILTER  
VF BRIGHT:  
2
1
2
1
MENU  
MENU  
STATUS  
STATUS  
Adjusts the brightness of the viewfinder screen.  
WHT.BAL  
WHT.BAL  
AUTO  
CH-1  
AUTO  
CH-2  
AUTO  
CH-1  
AUTO  
CH-2  
AUDIO  
LEVEL  
AUDIO  
LEVEL  
ON  
OFF  
ON  
OFF  
POWER  
REC  
POWER  
REC  
PEAKING volume  
Eyepiece focusing ring  
Eyepiece  
Slide the IEEE1394  
switch to the [DV] side.  
IEEE1394 terminal  
IEEE1394 terminal  
Slide the IEEE1394  
switch to the [DV] side.  
LCDBRIGHT  
button  
IEEE1394 cable  
VF BRIGHT volume  
PEAKING volume  
You can use the GY-HD200U or GY-HD201E as a slave unit.  
You cannot use the GY-HD200E as a slave unit.  
Status display  
DTCG 00 : 00 : 00 : 00  
Sliding securing ring  
LCD  
BRIG  
HT  
Connections  
Connect the master unit and the slave unit with an IEEE1394  
-
+
CA  
TC  
M/V  
TR  
AUDIO  
CH-1  
SELE  
CT  
CH-2  
AUTO  
MAN  
DISPL  
AY  
TC  
TC SLAVE LOCK  
?
GENE.  
U
FREE  
REC  
REG  
UB  
EN  
cable.  
180° up  
EXECUTE  
CANCEL  
USER1  
USER3  
90° down  
Settings and Operations  
Master unit (GY-HD200U/GY-HD200E/GY-HD201E/GY-  
HD250U/GY-HD251E/GY-HD100, 101 series/GY-HD110,  
111 series)  
LCD lock release lever  
Adjusting the LCD monitor  
1. Set the IEEE1394 switch on the left side to [DV].  
2. Set to Camera mode.  
8.Check that the time code that is synchronized with the  
PEAKING:  
master unit is running.  
Adjusts the contour of the LCD monitor.  
LCD BRIGHT:  
Adjusts the brightness of the LCD monitor.  
3. Set the recording format to DV-60I or DV50I.  
4. Set the TC GENE. switch to [FREE].  
9.Disconnect the IEEE1394 cable.  
10.The slave unit finally returns to Camera mode.  
Slave unit (GY-HD200U/GY-HD201E)  
Viewfinder mount base  
Adjustments are made on the LCD/VF[2/4] menu screen.  
X See page 87.  
MEMO  
1. Set the IEEE1394 switch on the left side to [DV].  
2. Set to VTR mode.  
Adjustments are made on the LCD/VF[4/4] menu screen.  
Slave lock cannot be performed in the following  
instances.  
LCD MIRROR MODE:  
X See page 89.  
3. Check that the camera image from the master unit is input.  
Sets the LCD monitor to display mirrored images when  
shooting facing the subject.  
VF CONTRAST:  
Slave unit is in CAMERA mode  
Slave unit is in VTR mode and there is no DV signal  
The TC GENE. switch on the slave unit is not set to  
FREE  
4. Set the TC GENE. switch to [FREE] and the TC DISPLAY  
Adjusts the contrast of the viewfinder screen.  
BLACK & WHITE:  
Sets the LCD monitor and viewfinder to black and white  
display.  
switch to [TC].  
Adjustments are made on the LCD/VF[4/4] menu screen.  
X See page 89.  
5. Set to STOP mode or EJECT mode.  
The slave unit is GY-HD200E  
HDV format  
6. Press the STOP button for 1 second.  
LCD CONTRAST:  
The DV input time code data from the IEEE1394 termi-  
nal is displayed in the status display. (When status is in  
magnified size, characters are displayed.)  
Adjusts the contrast of the LCD monitor.  
BLACK & WHITE:  
MEMO  
If slave lock is performed in DV format and is then  
switched to HDV format, frame digit may deviate.  
The screen size of the viewfinder can be changed by  
selecting the desired size with the ASPECT item on the  
VIDEO FORMAT[1/2] menu screen (4:3 or 16:9).  
Sets the LCD monitor and viewfinder to black and white  
display.  
7. Press the USER1 button to begin slave lock.  
(To skip slave lock, press the USER3 button and clear  
the status display.)  
If power is turned off, slave lock is disabled. Perform  
slave lock operation again.  
Slave lock cannot be performed for UB (User’s bit).  
If the frame rate for the master unit and slave unit is not  
synchronized, it will not run properly. Synchronize frame  
rate before using.  
If DROP/NON DROP is not synchronized, it will not run  
properly. Synchronize DROP/NON DROP before using.  
48  
49  
PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION  
1.Set the IRIS mode switch to M (Manual).  
ERROR: LOW LIGHT (Insufficient illumination)  
Displayed when the illumination is dim. Increase the illumi-  
nation and then re-adjust the white balance.  
ERROR: OVER LIGHT (Excessive illumination)  
Displayed when the light is excessively bright. Decrease  
the illumination and then re-adjust the white balance.  
2.Set the zoom mode to M (Manual).  
Back Focus Adjustment  
White Balance Adjustment  
3.Open the iris by turning the iris ring.  
If the illumination is too strong, reduce it or move to a  
darker place.  
4.Turn the zoom lever until the lens is at the maximum tele-  
It is only necessary to perform this when the lens is attached  
for the first time or when focusing is not correct in both the  
telephoto and wide-angle positions.  
Since the color of light (color temperature) varies depending on  
the light source, it is necessary to re-adjust the white balance  
when the main light source illuminating the subject changes.  
photo position.  
5.Bring the subject into focus.  
6.Set the lens to maximum wide-angle.  
7.Loosen the back focus ring retaining knob.  
It is easier to adjust back focus when the subject is more  
than 3 meters from the camera.  
White Balance Adjustment  
8.View the same subject and adjust the back focus ring for  
The optimal subject for this adjustment is a Siemens star  
chart.  
the best possible focus.  
Two kinds of white balance adjustment results can be stored  
in memories AUTO A and AUTO B.  
During operation  
Result message  
9.Repeat steps 4. through 8. about three times for fine  
adjustment until the subject remains in focus in both the  
telephoto position and the wide-angle position.  
Adjustment procedure  
3
4, 6  
5
10.Tighten the back focus ring retaining knob to secure the  
1. Set the following switches.  
ring.  
Set the POWER switch to ON.  
Set the IRIS mode switch of the lens to A (Auto).  
Set the FULL AUTO switch to OFF.  
2. Set the ND filter switch according to the current lighting.  
Improper object  
Insufficient illumination  
3. Set the WHT.BAL switch to A or B.  
4. Place a white object near the center of the screen under  
the same lighting conditions as the target subject and  
zoom in to fill the screen with white.  
5. Press the AWB (Auto White Balance) button.  
“AUTO WHITE A, B OPERATION” is displayed in the view-  
finder while the auto white balance adjustment circuit operates.  
When correct white balance is obtained, the approximate  
color temperature is displayed together with “AUTO  
WHITE A, B OK” for about 5 seconds.  
Excessive illumination  
1
CAUTION  
Do not adjust using any highly reflective objects, such as  
metal, etc., as this may result in improper white balance  
adjustment.  
Iris mode switch (7 on page 10)  
The FAW (Full Auto White balance) function cannot pro-  
vide optimum white balance with a subject outside the  
FAW adjustment range, for example when it contains  
only a single color or not enough white color.  
The accuracy of the FAW (Full Auto White balance) is  
inferior to that of the Auto white balance.  
When the power is turned on with the FAW mode  
selected, it takes about 10 seconds for the FAW adjust-  
ment to be completed.  
2
7, 8, 10  
ND filter  
Do not shoot within this interval.  
WHT.BAL  
switch  
POWER switch  
AWB button  
Full Auto White Balance (FAW)  
MEMO  
Fine-tune red and blue to match the white adjusted in white  
balance in WHITE PAINT<R>/<B> on the WHITE BAL-  
ANCE menu screen. X See page 82.  
The FAW function adjusts the white balance value automati-  
cally as the lighting condition changes.  
Siemens star chart  
This mode is convenient when you have no time to adjust the  
white balance or when the camera is moved frequently in  
and out of places under different lighting conditions.  
Setting procedure  
Error messages  
If the adjustment ends abnormally, an error message, as  
described below, blinks for about 5 seconds.  
The FAW function can be activated with the FAW item on  
the SWITCH MODE menu screen. The FAW function can  
be allocated to one of the white balance switching  
switches A, B, or PRESET.  
NG: OBJECT (Improper object)  
Displayed when there is not enough white color on an  
object or the color temperature is not suitable.  
Replace the color temperature conversion filter or use  
another white object and re-adjust the white balance.  
X See page 83.  
50  
51  
PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION  
SETTING AND ADJUSTMENTS BEFORE SHOOTING  
Setting in the WHITE BALANCE screen is performed as fol-  
lows.  
4.Turn the SHUTTER dial, change the setting and push the  
SHUTTER dial.  
White Shading Adjustment  
Setting the Video Format  
The setting stops flashing and is temporarily set.  
Move the cursor (K) to the EXECUTE item and EXE-  
CUTE flashes.  
Selecting an item  
Turn the SHUTTER dial to align the cursor (j) with the  
desired item, and press the SHUTTER dial.  
5.Push the SHUTTER dial.  
The item is selected and the setting value blinks.  
“REBOOT! SYSTEM CHANGE” is displayed on the  
screen and after a few seconds the system is reboo-  
ted.  
It is necessary to perform this adjustment to the camera  
when attaching a lens that is different from the previously  
attached lens.  
Even if white balance is achieved in the middle of the screen,  
it may not be achieved at the top and bottom of the screen.  
Greens and magentas may be colored. This is due to char-  
acteristics of the lens. Correcting this phenomenon is called  
White Shading Adjustment.  
Set the video format using the FRAME RATE item and the  
REC item on the VIDEO FORMAT menu screen.  
Changing the setting value  
Turn the SHUTTER dial to change the blinking value. When  
the SHUTTER dial is pressed, the value stops blinking and  
the setting is changed.  
Setting the FRAME RATE Item  
2 Perform the above steps to set SHADING to MANUAL.  
3 Select LEVEL R, LEVEL G, LEVEL  
B
and press the  
1. Press the STATUS button for at least 1 second.  
SHUTTER dial.  
The TOP MENU screen is displayed.  
SHUTTER dial  
Perform this after adjusting white balance.  
White shading adjustment is performed on the WHITE BAL-  
ANCE menu screen.  
The setting value for the selected LEVEL blinks and  
becomes available for changing.  
4 Change the setting values for LEVEL R, LEVEL G, and  
LEVEL B with the SHUTTER dial while referring to the  
monitor.  
When setting values are increased, colors at the bottom  
of the screen are suppressed and the top is enhanced.  
LEVEL R: Adjusts reds.  
LEVEL G: Adjusts greens.  
LEVEL B: Adjusts blues.  
<Range: -128 to +127>  
Adjustment procedure  
1. White balance the camera.  
USER  
1
USER  
2
USER  
3
SHUTTER  
2. Set the camera’s lens controls as follows:  
a.Set the IRIS opening to F4 or higher number.  
b.In the case of a zoom lens set the ZOOM at the center  
of its range.  
ND FILTER  
Setting the REC Item  
Set the REC item using the same steps as for the FRAME  
RATE item.  
2
1
MENU  
3. Shoot a uniformly lit white sheet of paper and fill the mon-  
STATUS  
MEMO  
itor screen with it.  
5 Press the SHUTTER dial after changing the setting val-  
If you change the FRAME RATE item setting, the system  
is rebooted.  
The synchronous video signal is momentarily disturbed  
when the REC item setting is switched.  
We recommend the following settings for REC item (in  
HDV format).  
ues to save in the memory.  
4. Set the monitor CHROMA level to maximum.  
6 Press the STATUS button to return to the normal screen.  
STATUS button  
5. Check the color of the monitor screen. If the top and the  
bottom of the monitor screen are white then no adjust-  
ment is necessary. If the top of the monitor screen is  
greenish and the bottom is reddish or if the top is reddish  
and the bottom is greenish then continue with this adjust-  
ment.  
8.When white shading adjustment is completed, adjust  
white balance again.  
X See “White Balance Adjustment” on page 51.  
2. Turn the SHUTTER dial and bring the cursor (K) to the  
VIDEO FORMAT.. item and press the SHUTTER dial.  
The VIDEO FORMAT[1/2] menu screen is displayed.  
When recording images with a lot of motion:  
Set to HDV60p or HDV50p  
6. Adjust the LEVEL G in the SHADING menu item to mini-  
mize the color difference between the top and bottom of  
the screen.  
When recording images with little motion:  
Set to HDV30p or HDV25p  
CAUTION  
If the lens setup is incorrect, the white shading adjust-  
ment might result in over compensation. When perform-  
ing this adjustment, set the lens to the recommended  
settings. Do not open the lens IRIS beyond F4; do not  
set a telephoto lens to its extreme wide position or tele-  
photo position.  
7. It is recommended that only LEVEL G be adjusted.  
1 Display the WHITE BALANCE menu screen.  
Follow the steps in “Setting Menu Screens” on page 72  
and proceed as follows.  
MENUrCAMERA PROCESS[1/2]rCAMERA PRO-  
CESS[2/2]rADVANCE PROCESSrWHITE BALANCE  
White shading occurs due to the optical characteristics of  
the mounted lens, it is not a camera malfunction.  
3. Turn the SHUTTER dial and bring the cursor (K) to the  
FRAME RATE item and press the SHUTTER dial.  
The setting for the selected item flashes and can be  
changed.  
“CHANGE THE SYSTEM” is displayed on the screen.  
52  
53  
SETTING AND ADJUSTMENTS BEFORE SHOOTING  
MEMO  
ASPECT item  
4:3  
You can select the normal input level for MIC and MIC+48V  
in the INPUT1, 2 MIC REF. item on the AUDIO/MIC[1/2]  
menu screen.  
4:3 TV  
Camera Settings  
Audio Input Signal Selec-  
tion  
1. Set the switch positions.  
A. [GAIN] switch: Set to L ( 0 dB).  
B. [WHT. BAL] (Auto White Balance) switch: Set to A or  
B.  
This device is provided with the INPUT1 connector and the  
INPUT2 connector for audio input.  
Select the audio from the INPUT1 connector or the INPUT2  
connector using the CH-2 INPUT switch for the audio to be  
recorded in CH-2.  
16:9 TV  
Adjusting Audio during Recording  
For each audio channel, use the CH-1/CH-2 AUDIO  
SELECT switch to select whether the audio level adjustment  
should be set to AUTO mode or MANUAL mode.  
2. Set the lens’ iris mode switch to “A” (Auto iris side).  
3. Select the ND filter.  
ND FILTER  
Suitable Location  
16:9  
4:3 TV  
Adjusting the audio input level control  
The audio input level can be adjusted manually when this device  
is in the record, record-standby or stop mode.  
Selecting the CH-2 channel input  
connector  
OFF OFF  
Indoors, dark outdoors  
1
2
1/4ND  
Outdoors under clear sky  
1/16ND  
Outdoors under extremely clear sky  
1.Set the CH-1/CH-2 AUDIO SELECT switch of the chan-  
nel whose audio level that you want to adjust manually to  
MANU.  
Select using the CH-2 INPUT switch.  
4. Set the shutter speed to OFF with the SHUTTER dial.  
[SQUEEZE]  
4:3 TV  
INPUT1  
: Inputs the audio from the INPUT1 connector  
into CH-2.  
INPUT2  
: Inputs the audio from the INPUT2 connector  
into CH-2.  
CH-2 INPUT switch  
Monitor  
speaker  
[LETTER]  
16:9 TV  
MONITOR SELECT FULL AUTO switch  
switch  
VTR indicator  
MONITOR  
volume  
AUDIO INPUT  
VF BRIGHT  
VF BRIGHT  
switch  
USER  
1
USER  
2
USER  
3
In DV mode, selection of SQUEEZE and LETTER is not  
possible. The screen display mode becomes SQUEEZE.  
USER  
1
USER  
2
USER  
3
4.  
3.  
ND FILTER  
ND FILTER  
LCD BRIGHT  
-
LCD BRIGHT  
-
CAM/VTR  
CAM/VTR  
+
2
1
+
2
1
MENU  
MENU  
AUDIO SELECT  
CH-1  
CH-2  
TC  
AUDIO SELECT  
CH-1  
CH-2  
TC  
DISPLAY  
TC  
GENE.  
DISPLAY  
TC  
GENE.  
FREE  
AUTO  
MANU  
FREE  
MEMO  
AUTO  
MANU  
REC  
UB  
REC  
UB  
STATUS  
REGEN  
STATUS  
REGEN  
WHT.BAL  
When you set the REC item on the VIDEO FORMAT[1/2]  
menu to HDV format, the ASPECT item is fixed at 16:9  
and “[16:9]” is displayed.  
If the above applies, you can set to display the image in  
the style of 4:3 televisions.  
X See “DOWN CON. [HDV]” on page 75.  
In the SAFETY ZONE item on the LCD/VF[1/4] menu  
screen, you can display the safety zone for a standard  
screen as well as a 16:9 screen in the viewfinder or LCD  
monitor.  
AUTO  
CH-1  
AUTO  
CH-2  
WHT.BAL  
AUTO  
CH-1  
AUTO  
CH-2  
AUDIO  
LEVEL  
AUDIO  
LEVEL  
A
B
1.  
ON  
OFF  
ON  
OFF  
POWER  
REC  
POWER  
REC  
CH-1 audio input  
level volume  
CH-1/CH-2  
AUDIO SELECT switch  
CAM/VTR button  
MEMO  
CH-2 audio input level  
volume  
The audio from the INPUT1 connector is also input into CH-  
1 regardless of the setting.  
2.Rotate the audio input level control corresponding to the  
Screen Size (4:3/16:9)  
Mode Selection  
audio input level to be adjusted.  
Adjust so that the peak level does not exceed the –3 dB  
point when a loud sound is input.  
X See page 86.  
Selecting the audio signal input  
When the ASPECT item is set to 4:3, the screen that is  
displayed may differ depending on the 16:9 television  
you are using.  
STATUS 1 screen  
Select the sound to be input to the INPUT1 or INPUT2 con-  
nector using the AUDIO INPUT switch.  
The setting is made for each of INPUT1 or INPUT2 connector.  
The screen size of recorded images can be selected with the  
ASPECT item on the VIDEO FORMAT[1/2] menu screen.  
X See page 75.  
To record using the standard screen, set ASPECT to 4:3.  
To record using the 16:9 screen, set ASPECT to 16:9.  
LINE  
: Set to this position when connected to audio  
equipment, etc.  
The reference input level is +4 dBs.  
MIC  
: Set to this position when using  
microphone.  
a
dynamic  
MIC+48V : Set to this position when a microphone (phan-  
tom microphone) requiring +48  
V
DC power  
supply is connected.  
Audio level  
CAUTION  
Indicator level (reference)  
When connecting a component that does not require +48 V  
power supply, make sure that the switch is not set to  
MIC+48V before the component is connected.  
54  
55  
SETTING AND ADJUSTMENTS BEFORE SHOOTING  
SHOOTING OPERATION  
The loudspeaker or earphone outputs an alarm tone in the  
MEMO  
case of an abnormal condition occurring in this device.  
An alarm tone is also output when the tape end is reached  
or when the battery is running down.  
Audio Input Signal Selection  
(Cont’d)  
The way the FRONT TALLY and the BACK TALLY lamps  
flash differ depending on what you set in the FRONT  
TALLY and BACK TALLY items on the OTHERS[1/2] menu  
screen. X See page 93.  
Basic Recording Opera-  
tion  
*
Do not increase the audio monitoring volume exces-  
sively; otherwise howling with the camera microphone  
may occur.  
MEMO  
1. Set the POWER switch to ON.  
CAUTION  
MEMO  
This device turns on in camera mode.  
When AUDIO LIMITER in the AUDIO/MIC[1/2] menu  
screen is set to ON, the AUDIO LIMITER functions in  
manual adjust mode. Recording level is suppressed  
when excessive audio is input.  
This device enters the stop mode automatically at TAPE  
When connecting a stereotype earphone, make the fol-  
2. Start recording.  
END. If this mode continues for  
switches to the tape protect mode.  
3
minutes, the mode  
lowing settings to output stereo sound.  
1Set the MONITOR SELECT switch to BOTH.  
Press the REC/VTR trigger button on this device to start  
recording.  
X
See “OTHERS[1/2] Menu Screen” on page 93.  
X See “AUDIO LIMITER” on page 84.  
2Set the AUDIO MONITOR item on the AUDIO/MIC[2/2]  
Once recording has started, the FRONT TALLY lamp and  
BACK TALLY lamp light red.  
(LONG PAUSE TIME item)  
The reference level for audio recorded on the tape can  
be set with the AUDIO REF. LEVEL item on the AUDIO/  
MIC menu screen. (–20 dB or –12 dB) The level will  
change for both CH-1 and CH-2.  
menu screen to STEREO.  
If the REC/VTR trigger button is pressed very quickly  
and repeatedly, or the POWER switch is moved immedi-  
ately after the trigger button is pressed, this device may  
not enter the record mode.  
When AUDIO MONITOR item on the AUDIO/MIC[2/2]  
menu screen is set to “STEREO”, only the audio of CH-1  
is output from the monitoring speaker.  
The volume of the alarm tone is set with the ALARM VR  
LEVEL item on the OTHERS[1/2] menu screen. (OFF/  
LOW/MIDDLE/HIGH)  
FOCUS ASSIST button  
FRONT TALLY lamp  
To remedy this condition set the POWER switch to OFF  
and wait for 5 seconds or more before turning the power  
on again.  
CAUTION  
When the AUDIO INPUT switch is set to MIC, be sure to  
check that the microphone is connected to the INPUT1/2  
connector. If the microphone is not connected, increasing the  
audio level could cause noise from the input connector to be  
recorded on the tape. When the microphone is not con-  
nected to the INPUT1/2 connector, set the AUDIO INPUT  
switch to “LINE” or turn down the audio level control.  
In the FULL AUTO mode, the audio level volume cannot  
be adjusted with the audio level controls on the CH-1 and  
CH-2.  
A neat transition to the next recorded scene cannot be  
guaranteed if  
POWER switch or DC power supply OFF, or by removing  
the battery pack.  
a
recording is ended by turning the  
Trial-shooting is always recommended before recording  
important events to confirm the recording is satisfactory.  
The microphone may pick up the sound of the lens’ iris if  
the iris is changed abruptly or the iris is manually moved  
abruptly during recording.  
Monitoring Audio during Recording  
About the QUICK REC START Mode  
If the REC/VTR trigger button is pressed immediately after  
the videocassette is inserted, the mode becomes the  
QUICK REC START mode that enables quick start of  
recording.  
The audio input during recording, in record-pause or stop  
mode can be monitored through the monitoring speaker or  
earphone.  
REC trigger button  
POWER switch  
However, when shooting starts in the middle of the tape, a  
blank space appears as the new scene will not be linked  
smoothly with the previous image.  
Also, the time code does not continue. (Some overlap may  
also occur.)  
FOCUS ASSIST  
button  
REC trigger button  
BACK TALLY lamp  
About the Focus Assist Function  
When you press this button during shooting, the area of  
focus is displayed in blue, red or green, making it easy to  
focus accurately.  
X See “LCD/VF[1/4] Menu Screen” on page 86.  
You can also set this function from the RET button.  
X See “SWITCH MODE Menu Screen” on page 83. (LENS  
RET item)  
When FOCUS ASSIST on the LCD/VF[1/4] menu screen is  
set to ACCU-FOCUS, ACCU FOCUS functions with FOCUS  
ASSIST. This makes focusing with shallower depth of field  
easier. ACCU FOCUS automatically turns OFF after approxi-  
mately 10 seconds. X See page 86  
PHONES jack  
RET button  
VTR trigger button  
Select the audio channel to be monitored using the MONI-  
TOR SELECT switch.  
: The sound input to the CH-1 channel is output.  
BOTH : The sound input to the CH-1 and CH-2 chan-  
nels is output mixed.  
CH-1  
CH-2  
: The sound input to the CH-2 channel is output.  
The MONITOR volume control adjusts the monitoring vol-  
ume.  
56  
57  
SHOOTING OPERATION  
The recorded contents can be checked on the LCD moni-  
tor, in the viewfinder or on a monitor connected to the  
video signal output connectors.  
Basic Recording Operation  
(Cont’d)  
HEADER REC Function  
1.In the record-standby mode, press the RET button on the  
camera lens section.  
When the REC/VTR trigger button is pressed while the STOP button is pressed, this function first records the color bar video and  
the test tone (1 kHz sine-wave) of the built-in signal generator at the beginning of the tape. Then it records the black video signal  
and the mute audio signal for the duration specified in advance. When the recording is completed, this device enters the Record-  
Standby mode. The time code value at the Record-Standby position becomes the time code specified in advance. (HEADER  
REC function)  
If the Record-Standby Mode Contin-  
ues  
Settings related to the HEADER REC function, such as whether the HEADER REC function should be enabled, the HEADER  
REC execution duration, and the time code value setting when the HEADER REC recording is completed, etc., are made on  
the HEADER REC menu screen.  
The HEADER REC function is executed under the following circumstances:  
CAM/VTR button: Set to CAM mode.  
Setting the time before the tape protection mode is engaged  
The time before the tape protection mode is engaged from  
the record-standby mode can be set to 5 minutes or 3 min-  
utes with the LONG PAUSE TIME item on the OTHERS[1/2]  
screen menu. X See page 93.  
In the Record-Standby or Stop mode  
1. RET button  
When the record-standby mode has continued for about 5  
minutes or 3 minutes, this device automatically stops drum  
rotation in order to protect the tape. (Tape protect mode)  
In the tape protect mode, STOP is shown as the VTR  
mode indication on the LCD monitor and in the viewfinder  
screen. (STATUS 1 screen)  
Record-Standby mode  
Tape beginning  
HEADER REC  
Normal recording  
(Example) 30 sec  
(Example) 30 sec  
Color bar video signal  
Test tone (1 kHz)  
Black video signal  
Mute audio (No sound)  
The tape rewinds and about 6 seconds of the content  
recorded in DV format is played back, and about 8 sec-  
onds of the content recorded in HDV format is played  
back. After playback, this device returns to standby  
mode at the position on the tape where the RET button  
was pressed.  
(Setting range: 0 to 99 sec)  
(Setting range: 0 to 99 sec)  
Time code, user’s bits recording  
Time code, user’s bits recording  
Time code:  
Time code:  
User’s bits:  
User’s bits:  
If you continue to hold down the RET button, up to about  
18 seconds of content recorded in DV format and up to  
about 20 seconds of content recorded in HDV format can  
be rewound and played back.  
The value specified on the HEADER  
REC menu screen.  
(Example) 00:00:00:00  
The value specified on the HEADER  
REC menu screen- HEADER REC time.  
(Example) 23:59:00:00  
The value specified for the UB  
DATA item on the HEADER REC  
menu screen.  
The value specified for the UB  
PRESET item on the TC/UB/  
CLOCK menu screen.  
(only when set to REC RUN or  
FREE RUN mode)  
VTR mode indication  
Pressing the REC/VTR trigger button during playback  
will put this device in REC standby mode. The camera  
will automatically return to recording mode after play-  
back.  
HEADER REC menu screen contents  
To start recording from the tape protect mode, press the  
REC/VTR trigger button.  
Item  
Function/Initial Setting  
START KEY  
Sets whether the HEADER REC operation should be executed when the REC/VTR trigger button is pressed while the  
STOP button is pressed.  
The drum starts rotating, and recording starts after  
about 3 seconds.  
CAUTION  
DISABLE  
STOP+REC  
:
:
HEADER REC operation is not executed.  
HEADER REC operation is executed.  
This function does not work when using RET button is  
used as FOCUS ASSIST button.  
This function does not work when this device is in the  
stop mode.  
During recording check, the following indication will  
appear if the error rate increases due to head clogging,  
etc.  
To return to the record-standby mode from the tape protect  
mode, press the RET button.  
TC DATA  
Sets the time code value for the point when the Record-Standby mode is engaged following completion of HEADER  
REC.  
CAUTION  
EXECUTE  
ZERO PRESET: Resets all time codes to zero “0”.  
CANCEL Clears the set time code.  
:
Confirms the set time code.  
This function does not work when using RET button is used  
as FOCUS ASSIST button.  
:
The frame mode is set depending on the setting in the DROP FRAME item on the TC/UB/CLOCK menu screen.  
* The time code value at the point when the Record-Standby mode is engaged may differ some frames from the value  
set for this item.  
“HEAD CLEANING REQUIRED!” is shown on the LCD  
monitor or in the viewfinder. (When the STATUS 0, 1, 4  
screen is displayed.)  
UB DATA  
Sets the user’s bits of the HEADER REC section.  
Checking Recorded Contents in  
Record-Standby Mode (Recording  
Check Function)  
EXECUTE  
:
Confirms the set user’s bits.  
ZERO PRESET: Resets all user’s bits data to zero “0”.  
CANCEL  
:
Clears the set user’s bits.  
MEMO  
The user’s bits for the normal recording section are set on the TC/UB/CLOCK menu screen.  
This function is available only when this device is in the  
standby mode.  
In standby mode, about 5 seconds of the last part of the con-  
tent recorded in DV format can be played back, and about 7  
seconds when the content was recorded in HDV format can  
be played back.  
BARS TIME  
Sets the duration (seconds) in which the color bar signal and test tone (1 kHz) is recorded during HEADER REC. (1-sec  
steps)  
[Initial Setting: 0SEC - 30SEC - 99SEC]  
BLACK TIME  
PAGE BACK  
Sets the duration (seconds) in which the black signal is recorded during HEADER REC. (1-sec steps)  
[Initial Setting: 0SEC - 30SEC - 99SEC]  
The TC/UB/CLOCK menu screen returns when the SHUTTER dial is pressed.  
58  
59  
SHOOTING OPERATION  
PLAYBACK MODE  
2.While pressing the STOP button, press the REC/VTR  
When the automatic tracking function is activated at the  
start of the playback mode, digital noise may appear in  
the playback image.  
This device does not allow manual tracking adjustment.  
When playing back a tape that was recorded on another  
unit, digital noise may appear during playback.  
Following loading of the tape, the built-in head cleaner  
will emit a sound while operating. This does not indicate  
a malfunction.  
trigger button.  
HEADER REC Function  
(Cont’d)  
Playback Procedure  
The tape automatically rewinds to the beginning, and  
HEADER REC operation starts from the beginning of  
the tape.  
After HEADER REC recording is performed for the  
specified duration only, the Record-Standby mode is  
engaged automatically.  
During HEADER REC recording, “HEADER REC” is  
shown (blinking) on the LCD monitor and in the view-  
finder.  
Recorded pictures can be viewed in the viewfinder, or on the  
LCD monitor, or on the monitor connected to the video output  
connector.  
How to set the HEADER REC menu screen  
1. Display the HEADER REC menu screen.  
The data recorded for the date and time or time code on  
the tape can be shown on the screen. To enable or dis-  
able the display is selected on the menu screen:  
1Select the TC/UB/CLOCK.. item on the TOP MENU  
screen.  
STOP button  
PLAY/STILL button  
2Select the HEADER REC item on the TC/UB/CLOCK  
Display of date and time : TIME/DATE menu screen  
menu screen.  
Display of time code  
: LCD/VF[1/2] menu screen  
TC/UB/CLOCK menu screen  
REW button  
FF button  
Fast-Forward, Rewind  
MEMO  
During HEADER REC  
This device can play back the following two types of video-  
cassettes:  
Press the FF button in the stop mode to fast forward the  
tape. Press the REW button in the stop mode to rewind  
the tape. (VTR mode only)  
The menu screen is not displayed during HEADER REC  
recording.  
MiniDV videocassette  
DVCAM videocassette  
HEADER REC menu screen  
*
“SWITCH TO VTR MODE” is displayed and the function  
does not work if the “FF” or “REW” buttons are pressed  
when Camera mode is in the stop mode.  
Tapes recorded in the LP mode cannot be played back.  
3.After HEADER REC recording is completed and the  
Record-Standby mode is engaged, normal recording  
starts when you press the REC/VTR trigger button.  
2. Setting the HEADER REC menu screen.  
1. Set the POWER switch to ON.  
Press the STOP button to stop fast forwarding or rewind-  
ing.  
1Select the menu item.  
2. Set this device to the VTR mode.  
When the TC GENE. switch is set to either REC or  
REGEN, the time code value at the start of the  
HEADER REC menu screen.  
Rotate the SHUTTER dial to align the cursor (K) with  
the item to be set, and then press the SHUTTER dial.  
The setting area of the selected item starts blinking.  
Press the CAM/VTR button to turn on the VTR indicator.  
*
Playback is also possible in the Camera mode.  
Playback operation becomes possible when the STOP  
button is pressed to set the VTR operation mode indi-  
cator to indicate STOP.  
MEMO  
When the tape approaches the end during fast forward-  
ing or rewinding, the tape speed decelerates to protect  
the tape.  
The time required for fast forwarding and rewinding may  
become longer when used in a cold environment. This is  
not a malfunction.  
MEMO  
2Changing the setting value.  
Rotate the SHUTTER dial to change the setting, and  
then press the SHUTTER dial.  
To stop during HEADER REC operation, press the REC/  
VTR trigger button or the STOP button.  
The HEADER REC menu screen cannot be opened dur-  
ing HEADER REC recording.  
HEADER REC operation is accepted even during load-  
ing of the cassette tape.  
The test tone (1 kHz sine-wave) recorded in the color bar  
section will be recorded unrelated to the setting for the  
TEST TONE item on the AUDIO/MIC[1/2] menu screen.  
The time code preset on the TC/UB/CLOCK menu  
screen becomes invalid when HEADER REC recording  
is performed.  
The user’s bits following completion of HEADER REC  
recording will be the user’s bits value set on the TC/UB/  
CLOCK menu screen.  
3. Load the recorded videocassette correctly.  
When the videocassette is loaded, this device enters  
the Stop mode.  
4. Open the operation cover on the upper section of this  
device.  
Slide the operation cover to the side to open.  
5. Press the PLAY/STILL button.  
Search  
Playback starts.  
6. Press the PLAY/STILL button to stop playback tempo-  
rarily.  
This device enters the still mode.  
Press the FF button in the play mode or still mode to  
search the tape in the forward direction. Playback takes  
place while fast forwarding.  
Pressing the REW button executes search of the tape in  
the reverse direction. Playback takes place while rewind-  
ing.  
(Each press on the button switches the speed to ×2, ×5,  
and ×10.)  
Press the PLAY/STILL button to resume normal playback.  
Press the STOP button to stop.  
7. To re-start playback, press the PLAY/STILL button.  
Cursor  
Item  
Set value  
8. To stop playback or the still mode, press the STOP but-  
The running of the time code following completion of  
HEADER REC recording will be in accordance with the  
setting of the TC GENE. switch.  
In the case of the TC DATA item and the UB DATA  
item, the blinking digit position moves when the SHUT-  
TER dial is pressed. When the SHUTTER dial is  
rotated, the value of the blinking digit changes. After all  
the digits have been set and the SHUTTER dial is  
pressed, EXECUTE starts blinking. Press the SHUT-  
TER dial once more to confirm the set value.  
ton.  
MEMO  
FREE RUN  
: Continuous running.  
In the VTR mode, the camera image is not output on the  
LCD monitor, in the viewfinder or through the video out-  
put connector.  
REC RUN or REGEN: Runs only during REC.  
Camera images are not output to the LCD monitor, view-  
finder or video output during REW mode when the  
HEADER REC operation begins.  
When the still picture mode or stop mode has continued  
for a while, this device automatically switches to the tape  
protect mode.  
3. To terminate the setting, press the STATUS button.  
MEMO  
To output sound during the search, set the SEARCH  
AUDIO [DV] item on the AUDIO menu screen to ON.  
Block noise may appear in the picture or the image may  
freeze during the search.  
Tape protect mode : Drum rotation is stopped in order to  
protect the tape.  
Executing the HEADER REC Function  
The START KEY item on the HEADER REC menu screen  
should be set to STOP+REC.  
Noise may appear in the picture in the still mode.  
1. Load the cassette and engage the Record-Standby mode  
or the Stop mode.  
60  
61  
PLAYBACK MODE  
USING EXTERNAL COMPONENTS  
1.Display the AUDIO menu screen.  
Displaying Alarms  
Select the AUDIO item on the TOP MENU screen.  
CHANGE 1394 SWITCH  
Outputting Audio  
Connecting the Video  
Signal Cables  
2.Set the AUDIO menu screen.  
Displayed when the setting for the input/output video format  
from the IEEE1394 connector and the setting for the  
IEEE1394 switch are different.  
PB AUDIO CH [DV] Items  
CH1/2  
: To reproduce the sound (CH-1, CH-2)  
recorded during shooting.  
Set the IEEE1394 switch so it matches the video format.  
MIX  
: To reproduce the sound recorded during  
shooting (CH-1, CH-2) and the after-  
recorded sound (on CH-3 and CH-4)  
simultaneously.  
Setting  
Connecting the IEEE1394 Cable  
Confirm that this device is in the VTR mode.  
(VTR indicator: On)  
To reduce the emission of unwanted radio waves, be sure to  
attach the provided clamp filter as shown in the figure below.  
CH3/4  
: To reproduce the sound after-recorded  
on CH-3 and CH-4.  
C H A N G E 1 3 9 4 S W I T C H  
Attach the clamp filter as close to this device as possible,  
as shown in the figure.  
Set the IEEE1394 switch on the left panel of this device.  
AUDIO OUT connector  
PB AUDIO CH [DV]  
CH-1  
CH1  
CH-2  
CH2  
CH1/2  
MIX  
DV  
: DV format  
MONITOR  
SELECT switch  
HDV  
: HDV format  
VTR indicator  
CH1+CH3  
CH3  
CH2+CH4  
CH4  
CH3/4  
IEEE1394 switch  
For HDV format, audio is output to CH1 and CH2 no matter  
the settings.  
Clamp filter  
VF BRIGHT  
USER  
1
USER  
2
USER  
3
ND FILTER  
3.Either of the following operations returns you to the nor-  
LCD BRIGHT  
-
CAM/VTR  
SHUTTER  
dial  
+
2
1
MENU  
mal screen.  
AUDIO SELECT  
CH-1  
CH-2  
TC  
DISPLAY  
TC  
GENE.  
FREE  
AUTO  
MANU  
REC  
UB  
Press the STATUS button  
STATUS  
REGEN  
or  
WHT.BAL  
Wind once  
AUTO  
CH-1  
AUTO  
CH-2  
AUDIO  
LEVEL  
STATUS  
button  
Return to the TOP MENU screen, select the EXIT item  
and press the SHUTTER dial.  
ON  
OFF  
POWER  
REC  
MEMO  
CAM/VTR button  
AUDIO menu screen  
The DV format is capable of recording up to 4 channels  
when the 12-bit, 32 kHz sampling frequency is employed.  
This device records audio on the two channels CH-1 and  
CH-2. (4-channel recording is possible in the case of DV  
input.)  
When this device is used for playback of a tape that was  
recorded on another unit with audio recorded on the CH-3  
and CH-4 channels, the PB AUDIO CH [DV] item on the  
AUDIO menu screen must be set.  
CAUTION  
When connecting the IEEE1394 cable from/to Camcorder,  
VCR and other IEEE1394 device, make sure the following  
instructions, otherwise the IEEE1394 circuit device may be  
destroyed.  
After-recording on the CH-3 and CH-4 channels is not pos-  
sible.  
Turn the power of both devices OFF and connect the  
IEEE1394 cable.  
Do not insert incorrectly (in reverse) the IEEE1394 cable  
end to IEEE1394 port of both devices.  
Earphone terminal output audio  
Audio output is as shown in the table below depending on  
the MONITOR SELECT switch and AUDIO MONITOR  
and PB AUDIO CH [DV] settings on the AUDIO menu  
screen.  
X
PB AUDIO CH [DV]  
MONITOR  
CH1/2  
MIX  
CH3/4  
SELECT  
AUDIO MONITOR  
Do not connect the IEEE1394 cable under the condition  
of static electricity.  
Turn the power of both devices OFF when changing the  
IEEE1394 switch from/to HDV/DV.  
CH-1  
-
L/R: CH1  
L/R: CH1+CH3  
L/R: CH3  
BOTH  
MIX  
L/R: CH1+CH2  
L: CH1 R:CH2  
L/R: CH1+CH2+CH3+CH4 L/R: CH3+CH4  
L: CH1+CH3 R: CH2+CH4 L: CH3 R: CH4  
STEREO  
CH-2  
-
L/R: CH2  
L/R: CH2+CH4  
L/R: CH4  
*
In HDV format, you can only select the settings within the bold frame.  
62  
63  
USING EXTERNAL COMPONENTS  
5.Set the audio output. X See page 62.  
5.Set the PB TAPE item on the VIDEO FORMAT menu  
screen. X See page 76.  
Select whether to automatically detect the playback tape  
video format or play back only a particular format.  
Normally, use the “AUTO” setting.  
Set the AUDIO menu screen. X See page 84.  
Dubbing with AV Devices  
HDV/DV Dubbing  
AUDIO menu screen  
VIDEO FORMAT menu screen  
By connecting the video signal output terminal and the  
AUDIO OUTPUT terminal on this device to an AV device,  
analog signal dubbing is possible.  
Connecting this device to another video component  
equipped with HDV/DV connector (IEEE1394 standard)  
using a IEEE1394 cable (optional) enables dubbing of digital  
signals with high picture quality and high-quality sound.  
1. Connect the cables.  
Using this device as the playback unit  
(Dubbing to another video)  
Composite cable  
or  
Component cable  
PB AUDIO CH [DV] item:  
1. Set the IEEE1394 switch on the left panel of this device.  
Set the audio channel to be output.  
DV : When dubbing in DV format  
HDV : When dubbing in HDV format  
6.Insert the videocassettes.  
6.Insert a videocassette tape.  
This device  
: Insert the recorded videocas-  
2. Connect the IEEE1394 cable.  
This device  
: Recorded videocassette tape  
: Videocassette you want to dub  
sette.  
Recording unit  
Recording unit  
: Insert the videocassette to be  
dubbed to.  
3. Turn both devices on.  
Signal flow  
7.Press the PLAY/STILL button on this device to start play-  
4. Set this device to VTR mode.  
back.  
7.Press the PLAY/STILL button on this device to start play-  
Press the CAM/VTR button. The VTR indicator lights.  
Recording unit  
back.  
8.Start recording on the recording device.  
See the recording device user manual for more informa-  
tion.  
8.Start recording on the recording unit.  
For details, see the instructions to the unit used for  
recording.  
1.  
IEEE1394 switch  
AUDIO  
OUTPUT  
connector  
9.When dubbing is finished, stop recording on the record-  
ing device, press the STOP button on this device, and  
stop the playback.  
9.When dubbing is completed.  
Stop recording on the recording unit, and then press the  
STOP button on this device to stop playback.  
Signal flow  
MEMO  
Switch the IEEE1394 switch when this device is OFF.  
When you dub still images, they are low resolution  
images. Noise may also enter the audio.  
Operations may differ depending on the features and  
specifications of the connected device, and operations or  
data exchange may not be possible even if the devices  
are connected.  
If noise appears on the screen or the audio cuts out, re-  
connect the IEEE1394 cable or turn this device on again.  
If you turn the power to the device connected to the  
IEEE1394 connector on and off or switch the video input,  
noise may occur in the audio. If you perform this type of  
operation, set the speaker volume as low as possible on  
the audio device connected to this device.  
2. Turn both devices on.  
Recording unit  
3. Set this device to VTR mode.  
Press the CAM/VTR button. The VTR indicator lights.  
4. Set the video output.  
Set the VIDEO FORMAT menu screen. X See page 74.  
2.  
VIDEO FORMAT menu screen  
IEEE1394 cable  
Signal flow  
CAUTION  
Set the IEEE1394 switch on both devices to either HDV  
or DV.  
Start recording after making sure that both devices are  
properly connected.  
Recording may not be possible in some cases even if the  
recorder is equipped with a IEEE1394 connector.  
HDV PB OUTPUT item:  
Set the video format to be output from the video output  
terminal during tape playback.  
PB TAPE item:  
Select whether to automatically detect the playback tape  
video format or play back only a particular format.  
Normally, use the “AUTO” setting.  
64  
65  
USING EXTERNAL COMPONENTS  
MEMO  
Backup unit  
HDV/DV Dubbing  
(Cont’d)  
*
Place in HDV/DV signal input mode.  
Depending on the used component, it may be neces-  
sary to set “REMOTE SELECT”.  
In HDV format, the UB set in this device is recorded regard-  
less of the setting.  
Backup Recording  
When BR-HD50 is used, set the Backup Recording  
function to OFF.  
Also, set REM SEL HDV/DV in the REMOTE[1/2] menu  
of the BR-HD50 to ON or LOC+REM.  
Insert the tape and set to STOP or REC PAUSE status.  
When Using the GY-HD200U/GY-HD201E  
as Recording Unit  
(Dubbing From Another Videocassette)  
Backup Recording of this Device’s Cam-  
era Image and Sound Through the  
IEEE1394 Connector  
CAUTION  
This device’s camera image and sound can be recorded for  
backup on another component that is equipped with  
IEEE1394 connector.  
1. Set the IEEE1394 switch on left side of the GY-HD200U/  
Set the IEEE1394 switch on both devices to either HDV  
or DV.  
Start recording after making sure that both devices are  
properly connected.  
If the RET button is pressed during backup recording,  
output from the IEEE1394 terminal is stopped, the image  
is switched to the image recorded on this device, inter-  
rupting the backup recording image.  
GY-HD201E.  
DV : When dubbing in DV format  
HDV : When dubbing in HDV format  
Connections  
Use this device as the master unit.  
2. Connect the units with the IEEE1394 cable.  
3. Turn ON both units.  
Connect the master unit and the backup unit with  
IEEE1394 cable.  
a
4. Place the GY-HD200U/GY-HD201E in the VTR MODE.  
Press the CAM/VTR button to turn on the VTR indicator.  
TC/UB  
5. Set the frame rate.  
1.  
Operation  
IEEE1394 switch  
Set the FRAME RATE item (60/30, 50/25, 24) on the  
VIDEO FORMAT[1/2] menu to match the HDV/DV signal  
frame rate input from the IEEE1394 connector.  
X See page 74.  
Start and stop of recording on the backup unit takes place in  
accordance with the operation of the REC/VTR trigger button  
on the master unit.  
(Depending on this device or the backup unit, the image,  
audio, and/or time code may deviate from what they should  
be at the points where the recording is started or stopped.)  
1.  
IEEE1394 switch  
Backup unit  
MEMO  
When the backup recording is started, the “TRIGGER  
TO DV” or “TRIGGER TO HDV” indication is shown on  
the LCD or in the viewfinder for approx. 3 seconds.  
When the Series Recording function of BR-HD50 is  
used, this device’s 1394 REC TRIG. item should be set  
to OFF.  
If the backup device is equipped with a feature to record  
time codes input from the IEEE1394 connector (TC  
DUPLICATE feature), time code data the same as on the  
master side can be recorded.  
If the master unit tape is paused or stopped when the  
master unit time code running mode is in REC RUN  
mode, the time code for the slave unit stops.  
When using BR-HD50 as a backup device and switching  
this device from the playback mode to the record mode,  
noise will be noticed on the monitor output screen of BR-  
HD50 (backup will be correctly recorded).  
Date and Time  
Master unit  
(this device)  
7.Insert the videocassettes.  
IEEE1394 cable  
Signal flow  
GY-HD200U/  
GY-HD201E  
: Insert the videocassette to be dubbed  
to.  
Playback unit : Insert the recorded videocassette.  
Recording unit  
Settings  
Master unit (this device)  
8.Start playback on the playback unit.  
For details, see the instructions to the unit used for play-  
back.  
1. Set the IEEE1394 switch on left side of this device.  
2.  
DV : When backup in DV format  
HDV : When backup in HDV format  
Signal flow  
IEEE1394 cable  
The playback picture from the playback unit appears  
on the GY-HD200U/GY-HD201E’s LCD monitor and  
viewfinder screen.  
2. Place in Camera mode.  
CAUTION  
3. Set the 1394 REC TRIG. item on the OTHERS[2/2] menu  
Set the IEEE1394 switch on both devices to either HDV  
or DV.  
Start recording after making sure that both devices are  
properly connected.  
9.Press the REC/VTR trigger button on the GY-HD200U/  
screen. X See page 94.  
GY-HD201E to start recording.  
For HDV mode, set the BACK SPACE [HDV] item.  
X See page 94.  
To temporarily pause the recording, press the REC or  
VTR trigger button.  
To restart the recording, press the REC or VTR trigger  
button again.  
OTHERS[2/2] menu screen  
6. Set the time code and user bit recording.  
Set the TC DUPLI. item on the TC/UB/CLOCK menu  
screen.  
10.When dubbing is completed.  
Press the REC/VTR trigger button or the STOP button on  
the GY-HD200U/GY-HD201E to stop recording, and then  
stop playback on the playback unit.  
OFF  
: Records the TC/UB set in this  
device.  
: Records the TC/UB for the  
IEEE1394 input.  
ON  
MEMO  
Date and time data : Records the data sent from the  
playback device in DV format.  
Depending on the player, sound may not be heard momen-  
tarily from this device when switching modes from STILL to  
PLAY.  
Records the data of the internal  
clock in HDV format.  
66  
67  
USING EXTERNAL COMPONENTS  
Notes on Using the Remote Control Unit  
Remote Control Unit Functions List  
SC FINE  
q
X
X
X
X
RANDOM SHUTTER  
VARIABLE SHUTTER LEVEL  
SLOW SHUTTER LEVEL  
When the switch function of this device and the remote  
control unit are the same, the remote control switch func-  
tion is prioritized.  
Connect a Remote Con-  
trol Unit (RM-LP55/RM-  
LP57)  
Function  
Action  
RM-LP55  
BARS [OFF/ON]  
RM-LP57  
q
q
q
q
q
G
G
G
G
G
X
FOCUS and ZOOM cannot be adjusted with the remote  
control unit.  
Shutter speed slightly differs from the value displayed on  
this device.  
q: Same as RM-LP55  
G: Available  
CONTOUR [OFF/ON]  
CONTOUR V/H LEVEL  
IRIS [MANU/AUTO]  
IRIS LEVEL  
: None  
X: Not available  
1
*
*
Only when frame rate is 60p, 60i, 30p, or 24p  
Only when frame rate is 50p, 50i, or 25p  
Set camera switch functions with the remote control unit  
(RM-LP55/RM-LP57).  
Shutter Speed in 24p Mode  
2
When this device is in 24p mode, shutter speed cannot be  
set to 1/60 (U model) or 1/50 (E model) with the remote  
control unit.  
Even if shutter speed is set to 1/60 or 1/50 with the remote  
control unit when in 24p mode, the shutter speed for the  
device is 1/48.  
IRIS DETECT  
Connection  
Connect the remote control unit cable to the REMOTE termi-  
nal.  
WHT.BAL  
AUTO1  
q
q
q
G
G
G
G
G
G
AUTO2  
FAW  
PRESET  
MANU  
AUTO WHITE Function  
When the device is in VTR mode, during playback or  
HEADER REC, the AUTO WHITE function does not work  
even if the auto white operation is performed with the RM-  
LP55 and RM-LP57.  
In the case of the RM-LP55, “LOW LIGHT ERROR” is dis-  
played on the LCD screen of the RM-LP55.  
AUTO WHITE  
q
MANUAL WHITE BALANCE R/B  
LEVEL  
G
Clamp filter  
PAINT R/B LEVEL  
q
q
q
q
q
G
G
G
G
G
X
GAIN  
0dB  
6dB  
Wind once  
9dB  
12dB  
LOLUX  
–3dB  
–6dB  
ALC+EEI  
ALC  
REMOTE  
X
X
RM-LP55  
q
q
G
X
Attach the clamp filter included with the remote control unit  
to the remote cable.(The clamp filter can be substituted  
with the clamp filter included with this device.)  
NEGA [OFF/ON]  
SHUTTER  
X
NORMAL  
1/100  
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
G
1
G *  
G *  
G
G
G
G
G
G
X
Consult your JVC dealer if you do not have a clamp filter.  
2
1/120  
CAUTION  
1/250  
Turn the power OFF when connecting.  
1/500  
1/1000  
1/2000  
1/4000  
1/10000  
EEI  
Operation  
1. Turn the device ON.  
2. Turn ON the OPERATE switch on remote control unit to  
q
activate the remote control unit.  
V.SCAN  
X
See page 69 for details on functions that can be operated  
with the remote control unit.  
ZOOM  
q
q
X
FOCUS  
X
HI-RESO [OFF/ON]  
X
MASTER BLACK LEVEL  
GAMMA [OFF/ON]  
GAMMA MASTER LEVEL  
KNEE MASTER LEVEL  
TITLE [OFF/ON]  
q
G
X
X
X
X
TITLE POSITION  
X
TITLE CLEAR  
X
H PHASE  
q
q
X
SC COARSE [0°/90°/180°/270°]  
X
68  
69  
MENU SCREENS  
Menu Screen Configura-  
tion  
The Menu Screen consists of multiple layers of menu screens as shown below. The menu screen to be set is selected from the  
TOP MENU in accordance with the function or purpose.  
VTR Mode/IEEE1394 Input Mode  
(HDV/DV signal input is possible with the GY-HD200U, GY-HD201E.)  
The items on the menu screens differ with the Camera mode and the VTR mode. The contents of set items are stored in this  
device’s memory and are retained even when the power is turned off.  
The FILE MANAGE menu screen can be used to store the menu setting contents on this device or SD memory card.  
Camera Mode  
TOP MENU screen (VTR)  
TOP MENU screen (CAM)  
70  
71  
MENU SCREENS  
4.Select the menu screen to be set.  
Rotate the SHUTTER dial to align the cursor (K) with the  
menu screen to be set, and then press the SHUTTER  
dial.  
Setting Menu Screens  
TOP MENU Screen  
The selected menu screen appears.  
Item  
Setting  
Make the settings while observing the LCD monitor or the  
viewfinder screen.  
Different menu screens are displayed depending on whether this device is in the Camera mode or in the VTR mode. In the VTR  
mode, the CAMERA OPERATION, CAMERA PROCESS and SWITCH MODE menu screens are not displayed.  
If the ANALOG OUT CHAR. item on the OTHERS[1/2]  
screen is set to ON, the menu screen can also be viewed on  
a monitor connected to the video signal output connector.  
Item  
Function  
VIDEO FORMAT..  
Displays the menu screen for setting the video format for shooting and playing back video.  
Camera mode: It consists of two screens.  
1. Set the POWER switch to ON.  
VTR mode  
: It consists of one screen.  
• The cursor (K) does not move to this item when this device is recording.  
2. Set the mode of this device with the CAM/VTR button.  
CAMERA OPERATION.. Displays a menu screen for setting the operation mode for camera shooting.  
• This item is only displayed in the Camera mode.  
(Camera mode or VTR mode)  
3. Press the STATUS button for 1 second or longer.  
CAMERA PROCESS..  
Displays a menu screen for adjustments of the picture quality of the camera image.  
It consists of two screens.  
The ADVANCED PROCESS menu screen, WHITE BALANCE menu screen, and SKIN COLOR ADJUST screen can  
be displayed through the CAMERA PROCESS menu screen.  
• This item is only displayed in the Camera mode.  
• The cursor (K) does not move to this item when this device is in VTR mode (PLAY, STL, FWD, REV).  
The TOP MENU screen appears.  
VIDEO FORMAT[1/2] menu screen  
USER1 USER2 USER3 button  
5.Select the menu item on the menu screen.  
Rotate the SHUTTER dial to align the cursor (K) with the  
item to be set, and then press the SHUTTER dial.  
SHUTTER dial  
The setting area of the selected item starts blinking,  
and the setting can now be made.  
USER  
1
USER  
2
USER  
3
SWITCH MODE..  
AUDIO/MIC..  
Displays the menu screens related to the camera switch functions.  
• This item is only displayed when in camera mode.  
SHUTTER  
ND FILTER  
6.Change the setting.  
Displays a menu screen related to audio.  
Camera mode: It consists of two screens.  
VTR mode  
2
1
Rotate the SHUTTER dial to change the setting, and then  
press the SHUTTER dial.  
MENU  
: It consists of one screen.  
The setting area stops blinking and the setting is  
entered.  
• In VTR mode, the screen changes to the AUDIO menu screen.  
• The cursor (K) does not move to this item when this device is recording.  
STATUS  
To change multiple items, repeat the procedures in steps  
5. and 6. above.  
LCD/VF..  
Displays a menu screen for selecting whether to display characters on the LCD monitor or in the viewfinder, and for  
adjustments of the picture quality of LCD monitor.  
Camera mode: It consists of four screens.  
7.Return to the TOP MENU screen.  
STATUS button  
VTR mode  
: It consists of two screens.  
Rotate the SHUTTER dial to align the cursor (K) with the  
PAGE BACK item, and then press the SHUTTER dial.  
To change settings on other menu screens, repeat the  
procedures in steps 4. to 7. above.  
TC/UB/CLOCK..  
Displays a menu screen for setting the time code, user’s bit data, date and time.  
The ways that the date and time are recorded together with the display style are set here.  
The TIME/DATE menu screen and CLOCK ADJUST screen can be displayed through the TC/UB/CLOCK menu  
screen.  
Cursor  
Menu screen  
To save the set contents in FILE, select the FILE MAN-  
AGE menu screen and perform the operations for saving  
to file.  
• The cursor (K) does not move to this item when this device is recording.  
OTHERS..  
Displays a menu screen for setting other functions and to display the hour meter.  
It consists of two screens.  
X See “FILE MANAGE Menu Screen” on page 96.  
FILE MANAGE..  
Displays the FILE MANAGE menu screen.  
8.To return to the normal screen after completing the set-  
tings, use either of the following methods.  
Press the STATUS button  
Saves the menu screen settings as a file on this device or an SD memory card, or reads the menu screen settings  
saved in the file. It is also possible to reset the menu settings to default settings or initialize (format) an SD memory  
card.  
X See “FILE MANAGE Menu Screen” on page 96.  
• The cursor (K) does not move to this item when VTR is activated.  
or  
Return to the TOP MENU screen and align the cursor (K)  
with the EXIT item, and then press the SHUTTER dial.  
EXIT  
The normal screen returns when the SHUTTER dial is pressed while the cursor is aligned with this item.  
TOP MENU screen  
MEMO  
While the menu screen is being displayed, the USER1,  
USER2 and USER3 buttons can also perform menu  
operations.  
USER1 button : Raises the cursor (K)/Changes the set-  
ting  
USER2 button : Lowers the cursor (K)/Changes the set-  
ting  
USER3 button : Confirms the menu item/Confirms the  
setting  
The menu screen is not displayed when switching  
between Camera and VTR mode (VTR indicator  
flashes).  
72  
73  
MENU SCREENS  
VIDEO FORMAT[1/2] Menu  
Screen  
The VIDEO FORMAT menu screen consists of two screens (1/2 screen, 2/2 screen).  
In VTR mode, this screen consists of one screen.  
*
This is not displayed in VTR mode.  
Item  
Function/Setting (bold characters indicate initial settings)  
*
This is not displayed in VTR mode.  
ASPECT*  
Sets the screen size for the recording video signal. (Can only be displayed and set in camera mode)  
Item  
Function/Setting (bold characters indicate initial settings)  
Sets the frame rate for shooting.  
4:3  
16:9  
: Outputs the video with an aspect ratio of 4:3.  
: Outputs the video with an aspect ratio of 16:9.  
FRAME RATE  
The resolution in the vertical direction drops compared to 4:3 video.  
U model  
60/30  
50/25  
24  
E model  
60/30  
: Shoots at 480/60i, 720/60p, 720/30p.  
: Shoots at 720/50p, 720/25p.  
: Shoots at 480/24p (2:3:2:3 pulldown), 480/24p advance mode (2:3:3:2 pulldown), 720/24p.  
MEMO  
• When the format setting is HDV, the ASPECT item is fixed at 16:9. (“[16:9]” is displayed.)  
• The synchronous video signal is momentarily disturbed when the ASPECT item setting is switched.  
: Shoots at 720/60p, 720/30p.  
: Shoots at 576/50i, 720/50p, 576/25p, 720/25p.  
: Shoots at 720/24p.  
HDV PB OUTPUT  
When playing back an HDV recorded tape, set video format for component output from the Y/PB/PR terminal.  
You can set the following depending on the FRAME RATE of the HDV recorded tape.  
50/25  
24  
CANCEL  
EXECUTE  
: Cancels the settings.  
: Executes the settings.  
Setting  
NATIVE  
Description  
FRAME RATE  
Outputs the signal being recorded on the tape.  
60/30  
50/25  
24  
MEMO  
720P  
1080I  
NTSC  
Converts the signal being recorded on tape to 720p and outputs it.  
Converts the signal being recorded on tape to 1080i and outputs it.  
Converts the signal being recorded on tape to 480i and outputs it.  
• If you change the FRAME RATE item setting, the system is rebooted. X See page 53.  
• The cursor (K) does not move to this item when this device is in VTR mode or is ejecting a tape.  
60/30  
24  
1080I CAMERA*  
Selects whether or not to output camera images in HDV1080i signals. HDV1080i signals are output from component  
output of the Y/PB/PR terminal. However, they are not recorded on this device.  
OFF  
PAL  
Converts the signal being recorded on tape to 576i and outputs it.  
50/25  
: No HDV1080i signal is output. Output setting of camera images is based on the REC settings below.  
: HDV1080i signal is output. (60/30 Frame rate: 1080/60i, 50/25 Frame rate: 1080/50i)  
480/60i or 576/50i signals are output from the VIDEO OUT terminal. (Composite signal)  
MEMO  
ON  
• If you convert video recorded in HDV format to DV format and output it, the colors may change.  
• This item is also applied to EE images when HDV signals are input to the IEEE1394 terminal.  
• Fixed at NATIVE during DV recorded tape playback or DV signal input.  
• ON/OFF is set when the SHUTTER dial is pressed.  
MEMO  
Tape recording and IEEE1394 output are not available when this is ON.  
• REC item cannot be set when this is ON.  
• The cursor is positioned on 1080I CAMERA in the VIDEO FORMAT[1/2] menu screen when this is ON.  
• When the FRAME RATE is set to 24, this is fixed to OFF.  
DOWN CON. [HDV]  
Set the style to display down-converted images in aspect ratio 4:3.  
SQUEEZE  
: Image that is squeezed horizontally is displayed.  
LETTER  
: Wide image with the top and bottom blackened is displayed.  
MEMO  
REC*  
Sets the video format for shooting. (Can only be displayed and set in camera mode)  
You can set the following according to the FRAME RATE.  
This setting is only valid in HDV mode.  
In DV mode, the style becomes SQUEEZE regardless of the setting of this item.  
Setting  
DV-60I  
Description  
FRAME RATE  
NEXT PAGE  
PAGE BACK  
To display the VIDEO FORMAT[2/2] menu screen, move the cursor to this position and press the SHUTTER dial.  
The TOP MENU returns when the SHUTTER dial is pressed with the cursor at this position.  
DV format Shoots using a 480/60i signal.  
(U model Only)  
HDV-HD60P HDV format Shoots using a 720/60p signal.  
HDV-HD30P HDV format Shoots using a 720/30p signal.  
HDV-HD50P HDV format Shoots using a 720/50p signal.  
HDV-HD25P HDV format Shoots using a 720/25p signal.  
60/30  
50/25  
DV-50I  
DV format Shoots using a 576/50i signal.  
DV format Shoots using a 576/25p signal.  
DV format Shoots at 480/24p (2:3:2:3 pulldown).  
DV format Shoots at 480/24p (2:3:3:2 pulldown).  
(E model Only)  
(E model Only)  
(U model Only)  
DV-25P  
DV-24P  
DV-24PA  
(U model Only) 24  
HDV-HD24P HDV format Shoots using a 720/24p signal.  
CANCEL  
EXECUTE  
: Cancels the settings.  
: Executes the settings.  
MEMO  
• The synchronous video signal is momentarily disturbed when the REC item setting is switched.  
• On the E model, the video format is fixed at HDV-HD24P when the FRAME RATE item is set to “24”. “[HDV-  
HD24P]” is displayed.  
74  
75  
MENU SCREENS  
VIDEO FORMAT[2/2] Menu  
Screen  
CAMERA OPERATION  
Menu Screen  
*
This is not displayed in VTR mode.  
The CAMERA OPERATION menu screen is only displayed in the Camera mode.  
Item  
Function/Setting (bold characters indicate initial settings)  
Item  
Function/Setting (bold characters indicate initial settings)  
*1  
PB TAPE  
Selects whether to automatically detect the playback tape video format or play back only a particular format.  
Normally, use the “AUTO” setting.  
For adjusting the image level when using auto iris, “ALC” or “EEI”.  
Increase value : Increases level.  
AE LEVEL  
AUTO  
DV  
HDV  
: During tape playback, the format signal is switched automatically and played back.  
: During tape playback, only the part of the tape recorded in DV format is played back.  
: During tape playback, only the part of the tape recorded in HDV format is played back.  
: During tape playback, only the part of the tape recorded in DVCAM format is played back.  
Decrease value : Decreases level.  
[Settings: –3, –2 - NORMAL (0) - 2, 3]  
ALC MAX  
Sets the maximum “ALC” value to automatically change the signal intensity level depending on the brightness.  
[Setting: 6 dB, 12 dB, 18 dB]  
DVCAM  
MEMO  
PRESET TEMP.  
Sets the basic color temperature when the [WHT.BAL] white balance selector switch c on page 15 is in the PRST  
(PRESET) position.  
3200K  
If you play back a tape containing both DV and HDV formats, the video signal is disturbed when the signal is  
switched.  
: Sets the basic color temperature to 3200K. (Use for light sources with a low color temperature,  
such as halogen lamps.)  
SET UP  
Selects whether to add a setup signal to the composite signal from the VIDEO OUT terminal.  
In DV format, a setup signal can be added to COMPONENT output.  
5600K  
: Sets the basic color temperature to 5600K. (Use for light sources with a high color temperature,  
such as sunlight.)  
* You can also select a setup signal in the IEEE1394 signal input mode.  
MEMO  
0.0%  
7.5%  
: No setup signal is added.  
: A setup signal is added.  
This item does not function when the FAW item on the SWITCH MODE menu screen is set to “PRESET”.  
Initial settings: U model: 7.5% E model: 0.0%  
*1  
Smoothens the transition when the [GAIN] switch b on page 15, or [WHT.BAL] switch c on page 15 is switched  
over and achieves gradual change in place of sudden change.  
SMOOTH TRANS  
MEMO  
However, the smooth transition function does not function when switching the [GAIN] switch set in ALC, FULL AUTO  
ON.  
When the FRAME RATE item is set to 50/25, this item is not displayed.  
PAGE BACK  
When the cursor is in this position, press the SHUTTER dial to the VIDEO FORMAT[1/2] menu screen.  
OFF  
ON  
: Deactivates the smooth transition function.  
: Activates the smooth transition function.  
*1  
Sets whether or not color bars are output. (This is fixed at “OFF” when in FULL AUTO mode)  
BARS  
OFF  
ON  
: Color bars are not output.  
: Color bars are output.  
PAGE BACK  
The TOP MENU returns when the SHUTTER dial is pressed with the cursor at this position.  
*1  
REMOTE appears as the setting value of this item when the remote control unit is connected.  
76  
77  
MENU SCREENS  
CAMERA PROCESS[1/2]  
Menu Screen  
CAMERA PROCESS[2/2]  
Menu Screen  
The CAMERA PROCESS menu screen consists of two screens. (1/2 screen, 2/2 screen)  
The CAMERA PROCESS menu screen is only displayed in camera mode.  
Item  
Function/Setting (bold characters indicate initial settings)  
Changes the gain in dark areas. Change this depending on the video signal being shot.  
*1  
BLACK  
Item  
Function/Setting (bold characters indicate initial settings)  
NORMAL  
: Normal status  
*2  
STRETCH  
: Enhances the dark areas of the video so the contrast between light and dark is more visible by  
stretching the signal only in the dark areas.  
MASTER BLACK  
Adjusts the pedestal level (master black) that serves as the reference black.  
Increase the number : Raises the pedestal level.  
Set elongation level with STRETCH LEVEL below.  
Decrease the number : Lowers the pedestal level.  
COMPRESS : If the video that was shot is bright overall and lacking in contrast, the gain in the dark areas is com-  
pressed, which adds contrast.  
[Settings: MIN (–10), –9 - NORMAL (0) - 9, MAX (10)]  
*2  
DETAIL  
Adjusts the contour (detail) sharpness level.  
Increase the number : Sharpens the contour.  
Decrease the number : Softens the contour.  
Set compression level with COMPRESS LEVEL below.  
STRETCH LEVEL  
COMPRESS LEVEL  
WHITE CLIP  
The amount of stretching increases from LEVEL1oLEVEL2oLEVEL3oLEVEL4oLEVEL5.  
[Settings: LEVEL1, LEVEL2, LEVEL3, LEVEL4, LEVEL5]  
OFF  
: Does not function.  
[Settings: OFF, MIN (–10), –9 - NORMAL (0) - 9, MAX (10)]  
When this item is set to “OFF”, “-----” is displayed for the following menu items and they cannot be selected.  
The amount of compression increases from LEVEL1oLEVEL2oLEVEL3oLEVEL4oLEVEL5.  
[Settings: LEVEL1, LEVEL2, LEVEL3, LEVEL4, LEVEL5]  
*2  
V/H BALANCE  
Sets which contours (details) to sharpen, those in the horizontal (H) direction or those in the vertical (V) direction.  
Increase the number : Sharpens H direction.  
Decrease the number : Sharpens V direction.  
Sets the white clipping point on input video signals with a high luminance level.  
108%  
100%  
: The white clipping point is set at a luminance level of 108%.  
: The white clipping point is set at a luminance level of 100%. If the screen is too white at  
108%, set it to 100%.  
[Settings: H-MIN (–5), –4 - NORMAL (0) - 4, H-MAX (5)]  
*2  
H FREQUENCY  
Changes the horizontal contour compensation frequency for the contours (details). Set this as appropriate for the  
subject.  
*1  
KNEE  
Sets whether to run the “knee” function, which compresses video signals over a certain level to render the tonality  
in the highlight areas, automatically or manually. Set “MANUAL” when you want to check the bright areas, and adjust  
the knee point manually.  
LOW  
: Enhances low frequency bands.  
Use this when shooting subjects with large patterns.  
: Enhances middle frequency bands.  
AUTO  
MANUAL  
: Adjusts the knee point automatically, according to the luminance level.  
: You can change the luminance level in the “LEVEL” item.  
MIDDLE  
HIGH  
: Enhances high frequency bands.  
*1  
LEVEL  
Sets the start point for knee compression (knee point).  
Increase the number : Raises the knee point level.  
Decrease the number : Lowers the knee point level.  
[Settings: 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, 100%]  
Use this when shooting subjects with small patterns.  
*1  
V FREQUENCY  
Use this when shooting subjects with finely detailed patterns.  
Changes the vertical contour compensation frequency for the contours (details). Compensates for distortion when  
outputting progressive video to an interlaced monitor.  
MEMO  
HIGH  
LOW  
: Enhances high frequency bands.  
: Enhances low frequency bands.  
When the “KNEE” item is set to “AUTO”, “-----” is displayed and this cannot be selected.  
*2  
SKIN DETECT  
LEVEL  
Sets ON/OFF for the skin detail function.  
REVERSE PICTURE  
DNR  
When the lens image is inverted and flipped, set “ROTATE” to record properly.  
OFF  
ON  
: Turns off the skin detail function.  
: Turns on the skin detail function. (Softens detected skin color area details.)  
OFF  
: No inversion.  
ROTATE  
: Invert lens image.  
X See “Using the Skin Detail Function” on page 100.  
Selects whether or not to set the noise reduction.  
Sets the contour compensation level (amount of softening) for the skin detail function.  
This can only be selected when the SKIN DETECT item is set to ON.  
The DNR (Digital Noise Reduction) function is applied to the tape recording signal, HD component output signal, and  
the IEEE1394 output signal in CAMERA mode.  
When camcorder’s picture is noisy, because of low light conditions, you can improve picture’s S/N by turning DNR  
on.  
–1  
–2  
–3  
: Low contour compensation level (amount of softening)  
: Medium contour compensation level (amount of softening)  
: High contour compensation level (amount of softening)  
OFF  
ON  
: Noise reduction is not performed.  
: Sets noise reduction.  
NEXT PAGE  
PAGE BACK  
To display the CAMERA PROCESS[2/2] menu screen, move the cursor to this position and press the SHUTTER dial.  
The TOP MENU returns when the SHUTTER dial is pressed while the cursor is at this position.  
MEMO  
*1  
When the REC item on the VIDEO FORMAT[1/2] menu is set to “DV-60I” or “DV-50I”, “-----” is displayed and this cannot be  
selected.  
REMOTE appears as the setting value of this item when the remote control unit is connected.  
• DNR is not applied in VTR mode or during playback.  
• DNR is not applied to composite output signals in CAMERA mode.  
• When the DNR is set to ON, the camcorder’s S/N ratio becomes better but the “blurring of moving objects” will  
increase.  
*2  
ADVANCED PROCESS.. Calls up the ADVANCED PROCESS menu screen.  
X See “ADVANCED PROCESS Menu Screen” on page 80.  
PAGE BACK  
When the cursor is in this position, press the SHUTTER dial to return to the CAMERA PROCESS[1/2] menu screen.  
REMOTE appears as the setting value of this item when the remote control unit is connected.  
*1  
78  
79  
MENU SCREENS  
ADVANCED PROCESS  
Menu Screen  
COLOR MATRIX ADJUST  
Menu Screen  
Item  
Function/Setting (bold characters indicate initial settings)  
Item  
Function/Setting (bold characters indicate initial settings)  
CINEMA  
OFF  
ON  
: Turns the function OFF.  
: Sets the gamma characteristics and color matrix close to the characteristics of a movie  
screen. (The monitor image is movie-quality. This setting is not intended for film output.)  
R GAIN  
For manually adjusting the shading of the R axis of the color matrix (red and cyan).  
Increase the number : Enhances red and cyan.  
Decrease the number : Reduces red and cyan.  
[Settings: MIN (–5), –4 - NORMAL (0) - 4, MAX (5)]  
MEMO  
R ROTATION  
G GAIN  
For manually adjusting the color phase of the R axis of the color matrix (red and cyan).  
Increase the number : Increases yellowishness of red color and bluishness of cyan color.  
Decrease the number : Increases bluishness of red color and greenishness of cyan color.  
[Settings: MIN (–5), –4 - NORMAL (0) - 4, MAX (5)]  
When this item is set to “ON”, “[CINE]” is displayed for COLOR MATRIX and GAMMA items and cannot be  
selected.  
COLOR MATRIX  
Sets the color matrix.  
OFF  
: Turns the function OFF.  
For manually adjusting the shading of the G axis of the color matrix (green and magenta).  
Increase the number : Enhances green and magenta.  
Decrease the number : Reduces green and magenta.  
STANDARD  
CINEMA  
: Sets a normal color matrix.  
: Sets a color matrix close to the characteristics of a movie screen.  
[Settings: MIN (–5), –4 - NORMAL (0) - 4, MAX (5)]  
ADJUST..  
GAMMA  
When “STANDARD” or “CINEMA” is set for the COLOR MATRIX item, a color matrix can be set individually.  
Press the SHUTTER dial to call up the COLOR MATRIX ADJUST menu screen.  
X See “COLOR MATRIX ADJUST Menu Screen” on page 81.  
G ROTATION  
B GAIN  
For manually adjusting the color phase of the G axis of the color matrix (green and magenta).  
Increase the number : Increases bluishness of green color and reddishness of magenta color.  
Decrease the number : Increases yellowishness of green color and bluishness of magenta color.  
[Settings: MIN (–5), –4 - NORMAL (0) - 4, MAX (5)]  
Adjusts the gamma curve to determine how black is rendered.  
OFF  
: No gamma curve correction.  
STANDARD  
CINEMA  
FILM OUT  
: Sets a normal gamma curve.  
: Sets to appear movie-like when viewing on a TV screen.  
: Sets to a setting for recording onto film.  
For manually adjusting the shading of the B axis of the color matrix (blue and yellow).  
Increase the number : Enhances blue and yellow.  
Decrease the number : Reduces blue and yellow.  
[Settings: MIN (–5), –4 - NORMAL (0) - 4, MAX (5)]  
MEMO  
B ROTATION  
PAGE BACK  
For manually adjusting the color phase of the B axis of the color matrix (blue and yellow).  
Increase the number : Increases reddishness of blue color and greenishness of yellow color.  
Decrease the number : Increases greenishness of blue color and reddishness of yellow color.  
[Settings: MIN (–5), –4 - NORMAL (0) - 4, MAX (5)]  
When this item is set to “OFF”, “-----” is displayed for the LEVEL item and it cannot be selected.  
LEVEL  
When “STANDARD”, “CINEMA”, or “FILM OUT” is set for the GAMMA item, a gamma curve can be set individually.  
Increase the number : Enhances the tonality of the black. However, the tonality in the bright areas deteriorates.  
Decrease the number : Enhances the tonality in the bright areas. However, the tonality in the black areas deterio-  
rates.  
Press the SHUTTER dial to return to the ADVANCED PROCESS screen when cursor is at this position.  
[Settings: MIN (–5), –4 - NORMAL (0) - 4, MAX (5)]  
COLOR GAIN  
Adjusts the video signal color level.  
OFF  
: Sets the video to black and white.  
SKIN COLOR ADJUST  
Menu Screen  
Increase the number : Makes the colors more dense.  
Decrease the number : Makes the colors less dense.  
[Settings: OFF, MIN (–10), –9 - NORMAL (0) - 9, MAX (10)]  
WHITE BALANCE..  
SKIN COLOR ADJUST..  
PAGE BACK  
When the cursor is in this position and you press the SHUTTER dial once, the screen switches to the WHITE BAL-  
ANCE menu screen.  
When you enter the SKIN COLOR ADJUST screen, the areas where the skin detail function is applied are displayed in color, and  
other areas are displayed in black and white.  
When the cursor is in this position and you press the SHUTTER dial once, the screen switches to the SKIN COLOR  
ADJUST screen.  
Item  
Function/Setting (bold characters indicate initial settings)  
Sets the color used by the skin detail function.  
When the cursor is in this position, press the SHUTTER dial to return to the CAMERA PROCESS[2/2] menu screen.  
SKIN COLOR DET.  
STOP  
EXECUTE  
: Stops loading the color used by the skin detail function.  
: Loads the color used by the skin detail function.  
X See “How to Use Skin Detail” on page 99.  
SKIN COLOR RANGE  
Adjusts the range of skin colors to which the skin detail function is applied.  
Adjust as you check the color range.  
Increase the number : Widens the range.  
Decrease the number : Narrows the range.  
[Settings: NARROW (–10), –9 - NORMAL (0) - 9, WIDE (10)]  
MEMO  
When the COLOR GAIN item is “OFF” on the ADVANCED PROCESS menu screen, only the areas where the  
skin detail function is running are displayed using skin colors.  
PAGE BACK  
When the cursor is in this position, press the SHUTTER dial to return to the ADVANCED PROCESS menu screen.  
80  
81  
MENU SCREENS  
WHITE BALANCE Menu  
Screen  
SWITCH MODE Menu  
Screen  
The SWITCH MODE menu screen is only displayed in camera mode.  
Item  
Function/Setting (bold characters indicate initial settings)  
Item  
SHUTTER  
Function/Setting (bold characters indicate initial settings)  
Sets the fixed value (STEP) for values that can change using the SHUTTER dial on the right panel or the VARIABLE  
used when shooting computer monitors.  
: Switches the shutter speed using fixed values.  
: Set when shooting a computer monitor, etc.  
You can set the following using the REC item on the VIDEO FORMAT menu screen. (This is fixed at EEI when in  
FULL AUTO mode.)  
*1  
Adjusts the R (red) component when in AWB (Auto White Balance) mode.  
Increase the number : Strengthens the red.  
Decrease the number : Weakens the red.  
WHITE PAINT<R>  
STEP  
VARIABLE  
[Settings: MIN (–32), –31 - NORMAL (0) - 30, MAX (31)]  
MEMO  
• You can select this when  
A
or  
B
is set for the [WHT.BAL] switch  
c
on the right panel of this device.  
X See page 15.  
Settings can be made for A and B individually. (When “PRESET” is set, “-----” is displayed and this cannot be  
selected.)  
REC Item  
Setting for STEP  
Setting for VARIABLE  
DV-60I  
HDV-HD60P 1/10000  
HDV-HD30P  
1/7.5, 1/15, 1/30, 1/60, 1/100, 1/250, 1/500, 1/1000, 1/2000, 1/4000, 1/30.03 - 1/10489.5  
• When you press the AWB (Auto White Balance) button and readjust the white balance, WHITE PAINT  
becomes “NORMAL”.  
R
*1  
DV-50I  
1/6.25, 1/12.5, 1/25, 1/50, 1/120, 1/250, 1/500, 1/1000, 1/2000,  
1/25.04 - 1/10489.5  
1/24.01 - 1/10489.5  
WHITE PAINT<B>  
Adjusts the B (blue) component when in AWB (Auto White Balance) mode.  
Increase the number : Strengthens the blue.  
Decrease the number : Weakens the blue.  
HDV-HD50P 1/4000, 1/10000  
HDV-HD25P  
DV-25P  
[Settings: MIN (–32), –31 - NORMAL (0) - 30, MAX (31)]  
DV-24P  
DV-24PA  
1/6, 1/12, 1/24, 1/48, 1/60, 1/100, 1/250, 1/500, 1/1000, 1/2000,  
1/4000, 1/10000  
MEMO  
• You can select this when  
A
or  
B
is set for the [WHT.BAL] switch  
c
on the right panel of this device.  
HDV-HD24P  
X See page 15.  
Settings can be made for A and B individually. (When “PRESET” is set, “-----” is displayed and this cannot be  
selected.)  
• When you press the AWB (Auto White Balance) button and readjust the white balance, WHITE PAINT <B>  
becomes “NORMAL”.  
FAW  
Sets the positions to assign the FAW (Full Auto White Balance) function to the [WHT.BAL] white balance selector  
switch c on page 15. (Fixed at FAW when in FULL AUTO mode)  
NONE  
A
B
: The FAW function is not assigned.  
: Assigns FAW to the A position.  
: Assigns FAW to the B position.  
: Assigns FAW to the PRESET position.  
SHADING  
Adjusts white shading.  
PRESET  
PRESET  
: No white shading adjustment.  
GAIN L  
GAIN M  
GAIN H  
USER1  
USER2  
USER3  
Sets the gain value for each position on the [GAIN] sensitivity selector switch b on page 15.  
[Setting: 0dB, 3dB, 6dB, 9dB, 12dB, 15dB, 18dB, ALC] (Fixed at ALC in FULL AUTO mode)  
Initial values: L: 0dB, M: 9dB, H: 18dB  
MANUAL  
: Enables white shading adjustment.  
X See “White Shading Adjustment” on page 52.  
MEMO  
You can assign one of the following menu functions to the [USER1/2/3] buttons  
8
on page 14 to each button.  
When the SHADING item is set to PRESET, the LEVEL R, LEVEL G, and LEVEL B items cannot be selected.  
Set according to the shooting conditions. This is only valid in CAMERA mode.This does not function in VTR mode.  
Setting  
Description  
LEVEL R  
LEVEL G  
When the SHADING item is set to MANUAL, adjusts the reds of white shading.  
Increase the number : Red at the bottom of the screen is suppressed and the top is enhanced.  
Decrease the number : Red at the top of the screen is suppressed and the bottom is enhanced.  
[Settings: MIN, –127 to –1, NORMAL, 1 to 126, MAX]  
NONE  
Does not function.  
BARS  
PRESET TEMP.  
Assigns “BARS” item functions in the CAMERA OPERATION menu screen.  
Assigns “PRESET TEMP.” item functions in the CAMERA OPERATION menu screen.  
X See “CAMERA OPERATION Menu Screen” on page 77.  
When the SHADING item is set to MANUAL, adjusts the greens of white shading.  
Increase the number : Green at the bottom of the screen is suppressed and the top is enhanced.  
Decrease the number : Green at the top of the screen is suppressed and the bottom is enhanced.  
[Settings: MIN, –127 to –1, NORMAL, 1 to 126, MAX]  
B.STRETCH1  
B.STRETCH2  
B.STRETCH3  
B.STRETCH4  
B.STRETCH5  
B.COMPRESS1  
B.COMPRESS2  
B.COMPRESS3  
B.COMPRESS4  
B.COMPRESS5  
Assigns “BLACK” item functions in the CAMERA PROCESS[1/2] menu screen.  
X See “CAMERA PROCESS[1/2] Menu Screen” on page 78.  
LEVEL B  
When the SHADING item is set to MANUAL, adjusts the blues of white shading.  
Increase the number : Blue at the bottom of the screen is suppressed and the top is enhanced.  
Decrease the number : Blue at the top of the screen is suppressed and the bottom is enhanced.  
[Settings: MIN, –127 to –1, NORMAL, 1 to 126, MAX]  
PAGE BACK  
When the cursor is in this position, press the SHUTTER dial to return to ADVANCED PROCESS menu screen.  
*1  
REMOTE appears as the setting value of this item when the remote control unit is connected.  
AE LEVEL+  
AE LEVEL–  
Assigns “AE LEVEL” item functions in the CAMERA OPERATION menu screen.  
MEMO  
Cannot assign to the USER3 button. If you assign these menu functions, assign AE  
LEVEL+ to the USER1 button, AE LEVEL– to the USER2 button.  
RET  
Assigns the normal RET button function.  
LOAD FILE  
Assigns the function to jump to in the LOAD FILE menu.  
X See “FILE MANAGE Menu Screen” on page 96.  
LENS RET  
Sets the lens RET button functions. (This does not function if there is not RET button on the lens you are using.)  
RET  
: Functions as a normal RET button.  
FOCUS ASSIST  
: Functions as the FOCUS ASSIST button.  
PAGE BACK  
When the cursor is in this position, press the SHUTTER dial to return to the TOP MENU screen.  
82  
83  
MENU SCREENS  
AUDIO/MIC[1/2] Menu  
Screen  
AUDIO/MIC[2/2] Menu  
Screen  
The AUDIO/MIC menu screen consists of two screens (1/2 screen, 2/2 screen).  
In VTR mode, the screen changes to the AUDIO menu screen.  
In VTR mode, the screen changes to the AUDIO menu screen.  
*
This is not displayed in VTR mode.  
*
This is not displayed in VTR mode.  
Item  
Function/Setting (bold characters indicate initial settings)  
Item  
Function/Setting (bold characters indicate initial settings)  
AUDIO MONITOR  
FAS AUDIO*  
Selects whether stereo or mixed audio is output from the PHONES jack when the MONITOR SELECT switch is set  
to BOTH.  
TEST TONE  
Sets whether to output a test audio signal (1 kHz, –20dBFS or –12dBFS) during color bar output.  
OFF  
ON  
: A test audio signal is not output.  
: A test audio signal is output.  
STEREO  
: Stereo audio (CH-1 audio is output to L and CH-2 audio is output to R)  
* Outputs only the CH-1 audio from the monitor speaker.  
MIX  
: Mixed audio (CH-1 and CH-2 mixed audio is output to L and R)  
MIC WIND CUT*  
Selects whether to cut the lows (low frequency bands) from the audio input signal.  
Use this when you want to reduce wind sounds from the microphone.  
Selects the recording level adjusting method for FAS (Full Auto Shooting). (CH-1, CH-2)  
OFF  
: Low frequencies are not cut.  
AUTO  
: Sets to AUTO.  
INPUT1  
INPUT2  
BOTH  
: Only cuts the low frequencies in the audio from the INPUT1 connector.  
: Only cuts the low frequencies in the audio from the INPUT2 connector.  
: Cuts the low frequencies in the audio from both the INPUT1 and INPUT2 terminals.  
SW SET  
: Follows settings for the AUDIO SELECT switch.  
X See “2 [CH-1/CH-2 AUDIO SELECT] switch” on page 13.  
X See “g [FULL AUTO] switch” on page 19.  
AUDIO REF.LEVEL  
Sets the reference audio level on the tape. (Both CH-1 and CH-2)  
SEARCH AUDIO [DV]  
PB AUDIO CH [DV]  
Selects whether to output audio when searching a tape recorded in DV format. (This also includes slow playback.)  
–20dB  
: Records with –20 dB as the reference audio level.  
ON  
: Audio is output.  
–12dB  
: Records with –12 dB as the reference audio level.  
OFF  
: Audio is not output.  
Set this if you are playing back the recorded tape on an ordinary DV device.  
* Set this for both playback and recording.  
* This is unrelated to the audio level via the IEEE1394 signal.  
Selects which channel audio to output when playing back a DV tape with the audio signal recorded in 4 channels.  
(Can only be set in VTR mode)  
CH1/2  
: Outputs the CH-1 and CH-2 channel audio.  
INPUT1 MIC REF.*  
INPUT2 MIC REF.*  
AUDIO MODE*  
Sets the reference audio input level for the INPUT1 connector. (When the [AUDIO INPUT] switch 3 on page 16 is  
set to MIC or MIC+48)  
This device records the audio in CH-1 and CH-2 while shooting.  
: Outputs all 4 channels of audio at the same time.  
: Outputs the CH-3 and CH-4 channel audio.  
MIX  
CH3/4  
–50dB  
–60dB  
: Sets the reference audio input level at –50 dB.  
: Sets the reference audio input level at –60 dB.  
MEMO  
Sets the reference audio input level for the INPUT2 connector. (When the [AUDIO INPUT] switch 3 on page 16 is  
set to MIC or MIC+48)  
This device does not have a function for dubbing to the CH-3 and CH-4 channels.  
–50dB  
–60dB  
: Sets the reference audio input level at –50 dB.  
: Sets the reference audio input level at –60 dB.  
PAGE BACK  
When the cursor is in this position, press the SHUTTER dial to the AUDIO/MIC[1/2] menu screen.  
Selects the audio sampling frequency for recording. (Both CH-1 and CH-2)  
(When HDV format is set, this is fixed at 48K and “[48K]” is displayed.)  
32K  
48K  
: Digitally records with a 12-bit, 32 kHz sampling frequency.  
: Digitally records with a 16-bit, 48 kHz sampling frequency.  
* If the DV format is 12-bit, 32 kHz, up to 4 recording track channels are available.  
Of those, this device records on the CH-1 and CH-2 channels. This device is not capable of dubbing.  
AUDIO LIMITER*  
Sets whether or not AUDIO LIMITER functions when the [CH-1/CH-2 AUDIO SELECT] switch 2 on page 13 is set  
to MANU.  
OFF  
: AUDIO LIMITER is turned off.  
ON  
: AUDIO LIMITER is turned on. Recording level is suppressed when excessive audio is input.  
NEXT PAGE  
PAGE BACK  
To display the AUDIO/MIC[2/2] menu screen, move the cursor to this position and press the SHUTTER dial.  
When the cursor is in this position, press the SHUTTER dial to return to the TOP MENU screen.  
84  
85  
MENU SCREENS  
LCD/VF[1/4] Menu Screen  
LCD/VF[2/4] Menu Screen  
The LCD/VF menu screen consists of four screens. (1/4 screen, 2/4 screen, 3/4 screen, 4/4 screen)  
The LCD/VF[1/4] menu screen can only be set in camera mode.  
In VTR mode, this screen consists of two screens. (1/2 screen, 2/2 screen)  
The LCD/VF[2/4] menu screen can only be set in camera mode.  
Item  
Function/Setting (bold characters indicate initial settings)  
Sets the image display method when the LCD monitor is in counterview position.  
LCD MIRROR MODE  
Item  
Function/Setting (bold characters indicate initial settings)  
NORMAL  
MIRROR  
: Image is displayed without inverting.  
: Inverted image is displayed.  
ZEBRA  
Switches the luminance level of the subject sections where the zebra pattern is displayed.  
• NORMAL/MIRROR is set when the SHUTTER dial is pressed.  
60-70%  
70-80%  
85-95%  
OVER95%  
OVER100%  
: Zebra pattern is displayed in sections with luminance levels between 60% and 70%.  
: Zebra pattern is displayed in sections with luminance levels between 70% and 80%.  
: Zebra pattern is displayed in sections with luminance levels between 85% and 95%.  
: Zebra pattern is displayed in sections with luminance levels over 95%.  
MEMO  
MIRROR setting is disabled when color bar is displayed or status is in magnified size.  
X See “Outputting Color Bars” on page 101.  
X See “Magnified Status Indications on the LCD Monitor” on page 29.  
: Zebra pattern is displayed in sections with luminance levels over 100%.  
F. NO/IRIS IND.  
FILTER  
Selects whether or not the F-number of the lens iris/iris level mark is displayed in the status display on the LCD mon-  
itor or in the viewfinder. (STATUS 1 screen)  
NEXT PAGE  
PAGE BACK  
When you display the LCD/VF[3/4] menu screen, move the cursor to this position and press the SHUTTER dial.  
When the cursor is in this position, press the SHUTTER dial to return to the LCD/VF[1/4] menu screen.  
OFF  
F.NO  
: F-number and iris level mark is not displayed.  
: F-number is displayed.  
F.NO+IND.  
: F-number and iris level mark is displayed.  
Selects whether or not the FILTER position of this device is displayed in the status display on the LCD monitor or in  
the viewfinder. (STATUS 1 screen)  
OFF  
ON  
: FILTER position is not displayed.  
: FILTER position is displayed.  
*1  
Selects whether or not the safety zone is shown on the LCD monitor or in the viewfinder together with the form of  
the safety zone indication.  
SAFETY ZONE  
OFF  
: Not displayed.  
4:3  
: 4:3 zone is displayed.  
14:9  
: 14:9 zone is displayed.  
16:9  
: 16:9 zone is displayed.  
16:9+4:3  
2.35:1 CE  
: 16:9 zone and 4:3 zone are display mixed. (This cannot be selected when DV format is set.)  
: Displays 2.35:1 zone in the middle of the screen.  
(Only in HDV format or 24P or 25P mode)  
: Displays 2.35:1 zone at the top of the screen.  
(Only in HDV format or 24P or 25P mode)  
2.35:1 CH  
*1  
CENTER MARK  
Sets whether or not a center mark is displayed when the safety zone is displayed.  
ON  
: Center mark is displayed.  
OFF  
: Center mark is not displayed.  
MEMO  
When the SAFETY ZONE item is set to OFF, - - -” is indicated and this item cannot be selected.  
FOCUS ASSIST  
Sets the FOCUS ASSIST function. Press the [FOCUS ASSIST] button on page 14 (6) or page 18 (7) to operate  
the FOCUS ASSIST function.  
NORMAL  
: Only the [FOCUS ASSIST] function operates.  
(The focus area becomes blue, red or green, making it easier to focus.)  
: The FOCUS ASSIST function and ACCU-FOCUS (forced focus) function operates.  
This makes the depth of field shallower, making it easier to focus. ACCU FOCUS automatically  
turns OFF after approximately 10 seconds.  
ACCU-FOCUS  
COLOR  
LEVEL  
Sets the display color for focusing when running the FOCUS ASSIST function.  
BLUE  
RED  
GREEN  
: Displays the area of focus in blue.  
: Displays the area of focus in red.  
: Displays the area of focus in green.  
Sets the display range of the focal area when the FOCUS ASSIST function is in use.  
LOW  
MIDDLE  
HIGH  
: Displays the focal area narrower than MIDDLE.  
: Displays the focal area in normal setting.  
: Displays the focal area wider than MIDDLE.  
NEXT PAGE  
PAGE BACK  
When you display the LCD/VF[2/4] menu screen, move the cursor to this position and press the SHUTTER dial.  
When the cursor is in this position, press the SHUTTER dial to return to the TOP MENU screen.  
*1  
SAFETY ZONE and CENTER MARK will not be displayed when this device is in VTR mode (PLAY, STL, FWD, REV).  
86  
87  
MENU SCREENS  
LCD/VF[3/4] Menu Screen  
LCD/VF[4/4] Menu Screen  
[1/2] screen is displayed in the VTR mode.  
[2/2] screen is displayed in the VTR mode.  
Item  
Function/Setting (bold characters indicate initial settings)  
*
This is not displayed in VTR mode.  
VIDEO FORMAT  
Selects whether to display the video format in the status display on the LCD monitor or the viewfinder.  
(Camera mode: STATUS 1 screen, VTR mode: STATUS screen)  
: Displays the video format.  
: Does not display the video format.  
In camera mode : Displays the video format set in the REC item on the VIDEO FORMAT menu screen.  
Item  
Function/Setting (bold characters indicate initial settings)  
Selects the LCD monitor and viewfinder display switching method.  
ON  
OFF  
LCD+VF  
ON  
OFF  
: Viewfinder always displayed the image.  
: Turns off the viewfinder display when the LCD monitor is opened.  
In VTR mode  
: Displays the video format recorded on the playback tape or the video format input from the  
IEEE1394 connector.  
MEMO  
When this item is set to ON, the contents displayed on the LCD monitor can be changed with the DISPLAY button.  
X See page 29.  
TAPE REMAIN  
Selects whether or not the remaining tape time (minutes) is shown in the status display on the LCD monitor or in the  
viewfinder.  
(Camera mode: STATUS 1 screen, VTR mode: STATUS screen)  
LCD CONTRAST  
VF CONTRAST  
BLACK & WHITE*  
Adjusts the contrast of the LCD.  
[Settings: MIN (–5), –4 - NORMAL (0) - 4, MAX (5)]  
ON  
: Displayed.  
OFF  
: Not displayed.  
Adjusts the contrast of the viewfinder.  
[Settings: MIN (–5), –4 - NORMAL (0) - 4, MAX (5)]  
TC/UB  
Selects whether or not the time code or user’s bits data should be shown in the status display on the LCD monitor  
or in the viewfinder.  
(Camera mode: STATUS 1 screen, VTR mode: STATUS screen)  
Selects the LCD monitor and viewfinder display style.  
COLOR  
: Displays the image in color.  
ON  
: Displayed.  
B&W  
: Displays the image in black and white.  
OFF  
: Not displayed.  
* Whether the time code or user’s bits data is shown is selected with the TC DISPLAY switch.  
MEMO  
AUDIO  
Selects whether the audio level meters should be shown in the status display on the LCD monitor and the viewfinder  
Characters are always displayed in color.  
screen.  
(Camera mode: STATUS 1 screen, VTR mode: STATUS screen)  
PAGE BACK  
Camera mode:  
ON  
OFF  
: Displayed.  
: Not displayed.  
When the cursor is in this position, press the SHUTTER dial to return to the LCD/VF[3/4] menu screen.  
VTR mode:  
When the cursor is in this position, press the SHUTTER dial to return to the LCD/VF[1/2] menu screen.  
BATTERY INFO.  
For setting the status display method when loading the Anton-Bauer Battery.  
The status will be displayed on the LCD screen and the viewfinder screen.  
(In camera mode, only displayed when in STATUS 1 screen.)  
VOLTAGE  
CAPA%  
TIME  
: Indicates battery voltage in 0.1 V steps [V]  
: Remaining battery is shown in percentage [%]  
: Remaining battery is shown in minutes [min]  
• VOLTAGE and CAPA% can be selected when using an IDX Endura battery. When TIME is set, VOLTAGE is dis-  
played.  
MEMO  
• When TIME or CAPA% is selected, the battery indicator displayed before the value changes depending on the  
remaining battery level.  
}: 12% or less |: 12% to less than 50% {: 50% or more  
• When remaining battery level becomes less than 12%, the display changes to “} RES”.  
• When CALIBRATION is required from the battery, the display switches between TIME (CAPA%) display (30 sec-  
onds) and “} CAL” display (2 seconds) repeatedly.  
• For CALIBRATION, refer to the instruction manual of Anton-Bauer Battery.  
• Please use the remaining battery level and remaining time as a reference for shooting duration.  
SHUTTER DISP.  
Sets the shutter display method to seconds or angle.  
SEC  
DEG  
: Seconds  
: Degrees  
MEMO  
This item is available when REC on the VIDEO FORMAT[1/2] menu screen is set to HDV-HD24P, DV-24P, DV-  
24PA, HDV-HD25P, or DV-25P.  
Shutter display method is fixed to SEC for other settings. (“[SEC]” is displayed)  
NEXT PAGE  
PAGE BACK  
Camera mode:  
To display the LCD/VF[4/4] menu screen, move the cursor to this position and press the SHUTTER dial.  
VTR mode:  
To display the LCD/VF[2/2] menu screen, move the cursor to this position and press the SHUTTER dial.  
Camera mode:  
When the cursor is in this position, press the SHUTTER dial to return to the LCD/VF[2/4] menu screen.  
VTR mode:  
When the cursor is in this position, press the SHUTTER dial to return to the TOP MENU screen.  
88  
89  
MENU SCREENS  
TC/UB/CLOCK Menu  
Screen  
HEADER REC Menu  
Screen  
Time codes (TC) and user’s bits (UB) can be set on this screen. Date and time is set on the TIME/DATE screen that can be  
reached from this screen.  
The HEADER REC menu screen is used for settings related to the HEADER REC function. X See page 59.  
Item  
START KEY  
Function/Setting (bold characters indicate initial settings)  
Item  
TC PRESET  
Function/Setting (bold characters indicate initial settings)  
Sets whether the HEADER REC operation should be executed when the REC/VTR trigger button is pressed while  
the STOP button is pressed.  
To preset the time code, align the cursor with this position and then press the SHUTTER dial.  
DISABLE  
STOP+REC  
: HEADER REC operation is not executed.  
: HEADER REC operation is executed.  
EXECUTE  
CANCEL  
: The set time code is confirmed.  
: The set time code is cancelled.  
ZERO PRESET : Resets all time codes to “0”.  
TC DATA  
Sets the time code value for the point when the Record-Standby mode is engaged following completion of HEADER  
REC.  
UB PRESET  
To preset the user’s bit data, align the cursor with this position and then press the SHUTTER dial.  
EXECUTE  
ZERO PRESET : Resets all time codes to “0”.  
CANCEL : Clears the set time code.  
: Confirms the set time code.  
EXECUTE  
CANCEL  
: The set user’s bit data are confirmed.  
: The set user’s bit data are cancelled.  
ZERO PRESET : Resets all user’s bits data to “0”.  
The frame mode is set depending on the setting in the DROP FRAME item on the TC/UB/CLOCK menu screen.  
* The time code value at the point when the Record-Standby mode is engaged may differ some frames from the val-  
ue set for this item.  
MEMO  
When the “UB REC” item is set to “OFF”, “--------” is displayed and this cannot be selected.  
UB DATA  
Sets the user’s bits of the HEADER REC section.  
*1  
Selects whether the time code generator framing mode is drop-frame or non-drop-frame.  
DROP FRAME  
EXECUTE  
: Confirms the set user’s bits.  
DROP  
: Internal time code generator works in drop-frame mode. Set this when the recorded time is im-  
ZERO PRESET : Resets all user’s bits data to “0”.  
portant.  
CANCEL  
: Clears the set user’s bits.  
NON DROP  
: Internal time code generator works in non-drop-frame mode. Set this when the number of frames  
is important.  
MEMO  
*2  
• The user’s bits for the normal recording section are set on the TC/UB/CLOCK menu screen.  
• When the “UB REC” item is set to “OFF”, “--------” is displayed and this cannot be selected.  
To select whether or not user’s bit data should be recorded.  
To select whether the user’s bits should be displayed during playback of a tape with recorded user’s bits data.  
UB REC  
ON  
: User’s bits are recorded during recording.  
User’s bits are displayed during playback.  
: User’s bits are not recorded during recording.  
User’s bits are not displayed during playback.  
BARS TIME  
Sets the duration (seconds) in which the color bar signal and test tone (1 kHz) is recorded during HEADER REC. (1-  
sec steps)  
[Settings: 0SEC - 30SEC - 99SEC]  
OFF  
BLACK TIME  
PAGE BACK  
Sets the duration (seconds) in which the black signal is recorded during HEADER REC. (1-sec steps)  
[Settings: 0SEC - 30SEC - 99SEC]  
TC DUPLI.  
Sets how to record the time code (TC) and user’s bits (UB) during IEEE1394 input of HDV/DV format.  
OFF  
: Records the TC/UB set in this device.  
ON  
: Records the TC/UB of the IEEE1394 input.  
The TC/UB/CLOCK menu screen returns when the SHUTTER dial is pressed.  
MEMO  
In HDV format, the UB set in this device is recorded regardless of the setting.  
HEADER REC..  
To make settings related to the HEADER REC function, align the cursor with this position, and then press the SHUT-  
TER dial.  
X See “HEADER REC Menu Screen” on page 91.  
TIME/DATE..  
PAGE BACK  
To make settings related to the date and time, align the cursor with this position and then press the SHUTTER dial.  
X See “TIME/DATE Menu Screen” on page 92.  
When the cursor is in this position, press the SHUTTER dial to return to the TOP MENU screen.  
*1  
This can be displayed and selected when 60/30 is set for the FRAME RATE item on the VIDEO FORMAT menu screen.  
(When 24 is set, this is fixed at “NON DROP” and “[NON DROP]” is displayed.)  
This can be displayed and selected when 50/25 is set for the FRAME RATE item on the VIDEO FORMAT menu screen.  
*2  
90  
91  
MENU SCREENS  
TIME/DATE Menu Screen  
OTHERS[1/2] Menu Screen  
The OTHERS menu screen consists of two screens (1/2 screen, 2/2 screen)  
Item  
Function/Setting (bold characters indicate initial settings)  
Sets whether the date and time are shown in the status display on the LCD monitor or in the viewfinder.  
Item  
Function/Setting (bold characters indicate initial settings)  
DISPLAY  
OFF  
ON  
: Not displayed.  
: Displayed.  
ANALOG OUT CHAR.  
Sets whether or not to display characters such as status and menus on the screen for the [Y/PB/PR] and [VIDEO  
OUT] terminals.  
When a tape with time and date not recorded is played back, there will be no display of time and date even when  
this item is set to ON.  
ON  
OFF  
: On-screen display.  
: No on-screen display.  
DISPLAY MODE  
In the Camera mode, the date and time are displayed in accordance with the following settings.  
The date and time recorded on a tape are displayed in accordance with the following settings.  
MEMO  
When ANALOG OUT CHAR. item is set to ON, the content displayed on the viewfinder is also displayed in the  
video from the video output terminal. During VTR recording, the mode is displayed in red on the viewfinder. How-  
ever, color is not applied for the following video outputs.  
• Component output of recording or playback in DV format  
• Composite output  
BARS+CAM  
BARS  
CAM  
: Date and time are always displayed.  
: Date and time are displayed when the color bars are output.  
: Date and time are displayed when the camera images are output.  
When the DISPLAY item is set to OFF, “- - -” is indicated and this item cannot be selected.  
DISPLAY STYLE  
DATE STYLE  
Selects the style for the date and time display.  
DATE+TIME  
DATE  
TIME  
: Date and time are displayed.  
: Date only is displayed.  
: Time only is displayed.  
LONG PAUSE TIME  
Selects the time (minutes) before the tape protect mode (drum head rotation stopped) is engaged when the record-  
standby condition continues.  
3MIN  
5MIN  
: 3 minutes  
: 5 minutes  
When the DISPLAY item is set to OFF, “- - -” is indicated and this item cannot be selected.  
* When used in a cold environment or when the stopped or STILL status continues, the setting will be 3 minutes or  
less regardless of the setting on the menu.  
* Normally, set “3MIN” and use this to prevent head clogging and tape damage.  
Selects the style for the date display.  
YY/MM/DD  
MM/DD/YY  
DD/MM/YY  
: Displayed in the format of year/month/date.  
: Displayed in the format of month/date/year.  
: Displayed in the format of date/month/year.  
ALARM VR LEVEL  
Selects whether or not alarm sound is emitted and the volume of the alarm sound.  
The alarm sound is output through the monitoring loudspeaker and the PHONES jack.  
Variation Range: U model: MM/DD/YY E model: DD/MM/YY  
When the DISPLAY item is set to OFF, “- - -” is indicated and this item cannot be selected.  
OFF  
LOW  
: Sound is not output.  
: Alarm sound is soft.  
TIME STYLE  
Selects the style for the time display.  
MIDDLE : Alarm sound is normal.  
HIGH : Alarm sound is loud.  
Selects the lighting method of the FRONT TALLY lamp during recording.  
24 HOUR  
12 HOUR  
: Displays the time using the 24-hour system.  
: Displays the time using the 12-hour system.  
When the DISPLAY item is set to OFF, “- - -” is indicated and this item cannot be selected.  
FRONT TALLY  
BACK TALLY  
FORMAT LED  
BLINK  
: The lamp blinks from when the REC/VTR trigger is pressed and until recording starts. The lamp lights  
SEC DISPLAY  
Selects whether to display the seconds in the time display.  
ON  
OFF  
steadily during recording.  
: Seconds are displayed.  
: Seconds are not displayed.  
ON  
OFF  
: The lamp lights only during recording.  
: The lamp is always off.  
When the DISPLAY item is set to OFF, “- - -” is indicated and this item cannot be selected.  
Selects the lighting method of the BACK TALLY lamp during recording.  
TIME SHIFT  
Sets the clock OFFSET time. (1H steps)  
Adds time to the built-in clock (time compensation) and displays it. The adjusted time is also recorded on the tape.  
[Settings: –23H - –1H, OFF, +1H - +23H]  
BLINK  
: The lamp blinks from when the REC/VTR trigger is pressed and until recording starts. The lamp lights  
steadily during recording.  
ON  
OFF  
: The lamp lights only during recording.  
: The lamp is always off.  
CLOCK ADJUST  
PAGE BACK  
To adjust the date and time, align the cursor with this position and then press the SHUTTER dial.  
The date and time are set on the CLOCK ADJUST screen.  
X See “Setting the Date and Time” on page 42.  
Sets whether or not the [HDV/DV LED] g on page 15 lights for HDV format or DV format.  
ON  
: Lights.  
The TC/UB/CLOCK menu returns when the SHUTTER dial is pressed while the cursor is at this position.  
OFF  
: Does not light.  
NEXT PAGE  
PAGE BACK  
To display the OTHERS[2/2] menu screen, move the cursor to this position and press the SHUTTER dial.  
The TOP MENU screen returns when the SHUTTER dial is pressed while the cursor is at this position.  
92  
93  
MENU SCREENS  
OTHERS[2/2] Menu Screen  
*
This is not displayed in VTR mode.  
*
This is not displayed in VTR mode.  
Item  
Function/Setting (bold characters indicate initial settings)  
Item  
Function/Setting (bold characters indicate initial settings)  
1394 REC TRIGGER*  
Sets how to control the REC trigger command output from the IEEE1394 connector. (Can be displayed and set in  
camera mode)  
DR-HD100 A.OFF*  
Selects whether or not to turn OFF the DR-HD100 (HDD unit by FOCUS enhancements) when this device is turned  
OFF.  
Set this when recording a backup of the HDV/DV signal from this device onto another device.  
OFF  
: Power does not turn OFF.  
OFF  
: Does not control the backup device.  
ON  
: Power turns OFF with this device.  
SYNCRO : Controls the backup device in conjunction with the recording start/stop mode status on this device, and  
if there is no videocassette or if no tape remains for recording, controls the backup device in conjunction  
with the REC trigger button and the lens VTR button on this device.  
MEMO  
• The [ mark is displayed at the upper right of the LCD monitor and viewfinder when the DR-HD100 is con-  
nected. If this device is turned OFF before the mark is displayed, power does not turn OFF even if this setting is  
ON.  
• This setting is canceled and the DR-HD100 does not turn OFF in the following instances.  
- 1394 REC TRIGGER item is set to OFF  
SPLIT  
: The REC trigger button on the right panel of this device controls the backup device recording start/stop.  
Set this when you want to control the timing of the recording on this device and the backup device sep-  
arately.  
SERIES : Automatically starts recording on a backup device that is on Pause when the tape on this device has less  
than 3 minutes remaining during shooting.  
- VTR mode is set  
• When the DR-HD100 power turns off and this device is turned ON again, after 12 seconds, “DR-HD100 power?”  
appears on the LCD monitor for 7 seconds.  
MEMO  
• If you use the backup recording function on the BR-HD50, set this item to OFF.  
• The cursor (K) does not move to this item when this device is recording.  
MENU ALL RESET  
Selects whether to reset the menu screen settings to initial settings.  
The camera mode and VTR mode menu settings are reset. (The TC PRESET, UB PRESET, and CLOCK ADJUST  
settings are not reset.)  
BACK SPACE [HDV]*  
This function controls the camera tape transport, back space and pre-roll time when the camera is connected to an  
external HDD or external back up Recorder via IEEE1394 in HDV mode.  
P-1394 : Priority for IEEE1394 recording (Auto setting)  
CANCEL  
: The settings are not reset.  
EXECUTE : The settings are reset.  
P-TAPE : Priority for camera VCR recording  
MEMO  
• The cursor (K) does not move to this item when the VTR is activated.  
• If the current menu settings and the factory settings have different FRAME RATE settings, “REBOOT!” is dis-  
played for 3 seconds, this device automatically turns off and then turns on.  
1394 REC  
TRIGGER  
(X See page 94)  
Internal  
VCR  
start delay  
IEEE1394  
connection  
External Recorder or HDD  
vie IEEE1394 terminal  
BACK SPACE [HDV]  
OFF  
SYNCRO  
SPLIT  
N/A  
PAGE BACK  
DRUM HOUR  
When the cursor is in this position, press the SHUTTER dial once to return to the OTHERS[1/2] menu screen.  
See Note 1  
See Note 2  
N/A  
Connected and  
Power ON  
approx. 3 seconds  
approx. 1 second  
approx. 1 second  
approx. 1 second  
Displays the drum usage time.  
Use as an estimate for regular maintenance.  
The cursor (K) does not move to this item.  
SERIES  
OFF  
P-1394  
FAN HOUR  
Displays the fan motor usage time.  
Use as an estimate for regular maintenance.  
The cursor (K) does not move to this item.  
SYNCRO  
SPLIT  
No connection or  
Power OFF  
N/A  
SERIES  
OFF  
SYNCRO  
SPLIT  
See Note 3  
N/A  
Connected and  
Power ON  
SERIES  
OFF  
P-TAPE  
SYNCRO  
SPLIT  
No connection or  
Power OFF  
N/A  
SERIES  
Note 1:  
REC start signal will be sent 3 seconds after pressing REC trigger button.  
* Actual recording start time is depending on recorder performance.  
Note 2:  
REC start signal will be sent just after pressing REC trigger button.  
* Actual recording start time is depending on recorder performance.  
Note 3:  
In this mode, the IEEE1394 stream is discontinuous during internal VCR back space editing (when the REC trigger  
is operated). This may result in breaks in the recording on tape on an external recorder. In the case of HDD recording  
this may result in this device staying in REC PAUSE or divided files.  
MEMO  
The cursor (K) does not move to this item when this device is recording.  
94  
95  
MENU SCREENS  
5.Turn the SHUTTER dial, bring the cursor (K) to the  
STORE item and press the SHUTTER dial.  
Displaying the FILE MANAGE menu  
screen  
Saving settings  
FILE MANAGE Menu  
Screen  
EXECUTE (if the file already exists, “OVERWRITE”)  
flashes.  
Select the STORE FILE.. item on the FILE MANAGE menu  
screen.  
Select the FILE MANAGE.. item on the TOP MENU screen.  
1. Turn the SHUTTER dial, bring the cursor (K) to SELECT  
You can perform the following operations in the FILE MAN-  
AGE menu screen.  
and press the SHUTTER dial.  
The file name setting area flashes.  
Settings corresponding to shooting conditions can be read  
immediately with the following read-only files.  
Loading a menu settings file  
2. Turn the SHUTTER dial, select the file to save to, and  
press the SHUTTER dial.  
LIVE HD60P  
LIVE HD50P  
: Ideal setting for HD60P format  
: Ideal setting for HD50P format  
Select the LOAD FILE.. item on the FILE MANAGE menu  
screen.  
CINEMA HD24P : Ideal setting for movie-quality shoot-  
ing  
*
The read-only files listed above cannot be saved or  
reset.  
6.With EXECUTE selected, turn the SHUTTER dial to save  
the menu settings to the selected file.  
Save menu settings (Camcorder: CAM1, 2, 3, 4; SD mem-  
ory card: EXT1, 2, 3, 4) to files.  
Load saved files.  
You can set a SUB NAME for the file to be saved.  
Reset the menu settings to the factory settings.  
Initialize (format) an SD memory card.  
When you set CANCEL for the LOAD, STORE, RESET  
and FORMAT SD CARD items, these operations are not  
executed.  
Setting a SUB NAME  
If you do not want to set a SUB NAME, go to Step 5..  
Execute  
Complete  
FILE MANAGE menu screen  
3. Turn the SHUTTER dial, bring the cursor (K) to SUB  
Error displays  
NAME and press the SHUTTER dial.  
A message is displayed in the LCD monitor or the view-  
finder.  
The first character in the file name flashes.  
NO CARD:  
No SD memory card is inserted.  
Insert an SD memory card.  
EXECUTE : Displayed for 3 seconds  
COMPLETE : Displayed for 3 seconds  
NO FORMAT:  
ERROR  
: Flashes (Error displays X See page 97.)  
The SD memory card is not initialized (formatted).  
Initialize (format) the SD memory card.  
NO ACCESS:  
There is a problem with the SD memory card.  
Replace the SD memory card.  
WRITE PROTECT:  
The SD memory card may be write-protected.  
Check that write-protection is disabled.  
1.Turn the SHUTTER dial, bring the cursor (K) to SELECT  
Execute  
Complete  
and press the SHUTTER dial.  
DISK FULL:  
The file name setting area flashes.  
The SD memory card does not have enough free space.  
Delete unwanted data or initialize (format) the card.  
Settable Characters  
2.Turn the SHUTTER dial, select the file to load and press  
the SHUTTER dial.  
INVALID VIDEO FORMAT:  
Flashing  
A settings file for a video format that is not supported was  
called up.  
3.Turn the SHUTTER dial, bring the cursor (K) to the  
Error display  
Space  
LOAD item and press the SHUTTER dial.  
Settings files for video formats that are not supported can-  
not be called up.  
EXECUTE flashes.  
4. Turn the SHUTTER dial, select the character, and press  
4.With EXECUTE selected, press the SHUTTER dial to  
Error  
the SHUTTER dial.  
READ ONLY FILE:  
read the menu settings in the selected file.  
The second character in the file name flashes.  
Indicates a read-only file.  
Read-only files cannot be saved.  
If the current menu settings and the menu settings to be  
loaded have different video format settings, “REBOOT!”  
is displayed for 3 seconds, this device turns off automati-  
cally and then turns on.  
Repeat Step 4. up through the eighth character.  
If there is an error:  
Press the STATUS button  
screen.  
Press the SHUTTER dial o Return to the FILE MAN-  
AGE menu screen.  
To exit the FILE MANAGE screen:  
o
Return to the normal  
Flashing  
Error display  
Move the cursor (K) to PAGE BACK and press the SHUT-  
TER dial or press the STATUS button.  
Error  
Reboot display  
CAUTION  
This device cannot load scene files from GY-HD100/GY-  
HD110-series devices.  
96  
97  
MENU SCREENS  
FEATURES OF THE CAMERA SECTION  
MEMO  
3.Move the cursor (K) to the SKIN COLOR DET. item,  
press the SHUTTER dial and select EXECUTE to switch  
to skin color detection mode.  
FILE MANAGE Menu Screen  
(Cont’d)  
Even if CAM1, CAM2, CAM3, or CAM4 are reset, the cur-  
rent settings are not reset.  
To reset the currently set values, select “CURRENT”.  
How to Use Skin Detail  
4.Shoot so that the color area you want to detect within the  
detection area frame is input.  
To confirm the detection area, press the SHUTTER dial  
and set SKIN COLOR DET. to STOP.  
This function suppresses edge sharpening in the skin color  
areas of the video signal, enabling velvety, smooth skin tones.  
The frame on the screen is the detection area for the  
skin detail function.  
Initializing (formatting) an SD mem-  
ory card  
Resetting the menu settings to the  
factory settings  
The color within the detection area is recognized as  
the color that the skin detail function will use.  
If the color within the detection area is not recognized  
as the color that the skin detail function will use,  
“ERROR” is displayed on the screen.  
Setting the skin detail function color and range  
Before initializing (formatting) a card:  
SHUTTER dial  
Select the RESET FILE.. item on the FILE MANAGE menu  
screen.  
1Insert and remove the SD memory card with the power  
to this device OFF.  
2Disable write-protection on the SD memory card.  
USER  
1
USER  
2
USER  
3
SHUTTER  
3Check that an SD memory card has been inserted into  
ND FILTER  
this device.  
2
1
1.Turn the SHUTTER dial, bring the cursor (K) to the FOR-  
MENU  
Detection  
area  
MAT SD CARD item and press the SHUTTER dial.  
CANCEL flashes.  
STATUS  
2.Turn the SHUTTER dial, and when EXECUTE flashes,  
press the SHUTTER dial to initialize (format) the card.  
SKIN COLOR ADJUST menu screen  
STATUS button  
1. Turn the SHUTTER dial, bring the cursor (K) to SELECT  
and press the SHUTTER dial.  
The file name setting area for the file to be reset  
flashes.  
1. Display the ADVANCED PROCESS menu screen.  
Black and  
white  
presenta-  
tion  
In menu setting procedure  
2. Turn the SHUTTER dial, select the name of the file to  
TOP MENU screen  
o
CAMERA PROCESS[1/2]  
o
Execute  
Complete  
reset, and press the SHUTTER dial.  
CAMERA PROCESS[2/2] o Select ADVANCED PRO-  
CESS item.  
Color  
presenta-  
tion  
CAM1, CAM2, CAM3, CAM4, CURRENT (current set-  
tings)  
3. Turn the SHUTTER dial, bring the cursor (K) to the  
Flashing  
RESET item and press the SHUTTER dial.  
Error display  
EXECUTE flashes.  
SKIN COLOR ADJUST screen  
4. With EXECUTE selected, press the SHUTTER dial to  
reset the settings.  
Error  
5.If you want to change the range of colors recognized with  
Cursor  
the skin color detection function, follow the steps below.  
1Turn the SHUTTER dial, bring the cursor (K) to the  
SKIN COLOR RANGE item and press the SHUTTER  
dial.  
If there is an error:  
Check items 2 and 3 in “Before initializing (formatting) a  
card”.  
CAMERA PROCESS[2/2] menu screen  
o The setting area flashes and can be changed.  
2Turn the SHUTTER dial up or down to widen or narrow  
the color range.  
Execute  
Complete  
2. Turn the SHUTTER dial, bring the cursor (K) to the SKIN  
COLOR ADJUST item and press the SHUTTER dial.  
Set the range as you check the color display.  
3To confirm the color range, press the SHUTTER dial.  
The setting returns to its lit state.  
The SKIN COLOR ADJUST screen is displayed.  
The entire screen becomes black and white, and only  
the areas recognized by the skin detail function are  
displayed in color.  
If the current menu settings and the factory settings have  
different video format settings, “REBOOT!” is displayed  
for 3 seconds, this device turns off automatically and then  
turns on.  
6.To stop the SKIN COLOR ADJUST function, turn the  
SHUTTER dial, bring the cursor (K) to the PAGE BACK  
item and press the SHUTTER dial.  
MEMO  
In the SKIN COLOR ADJUST menu screen, the lens image  
is not inverted and flipped even if the REVERSE PICTURE  
item in the CAMERA PROCESS[2/2] menu screen is set to  
ROTATE.  
Reboot display  
When this happens, the SUB NAME initial value,  
“[SCENE]” is displayed.  
ADVANCED PROCESS menu screen  
98  
99  
FEATURES OF THE CAMERA SECTION  
How to Use Skin Detail  
(Cont’d)  
Outputting Color Bars  
This device can output three types of color bars, depending  
on the camera settings.  
Using the Skin Detail Function  
To use the skin detail function set on the SKIN COLOR  
ADJUST screen, select “ON” for the SKIN DETECT item on  
the CAMERA PROCESS[1/2] menu screen.  
In addition, you can use the LEVEL item to set three levels of  
suppression of skin color area detail enhancement in the  
video signal. X See page 78.  
NTSC standard : Outputs color bars compliant with the  
SMPTE standard.  
PAL standard  
: Outputs color bars compliant with the  
EBU standard.  
16:9 screen  
: Outputs multi-format color bars.  
While the skin detail function operates, the “SD” indicator is  
displayed on the STATUS 0 and STATUS 1 screen in the  
viewfinder or LCD monitor.  
To output color bars, make the following settings.  
1. Turn the FULL AUTO switch to “OFF”.  
2. Set the BARS item on the CAMERA OPERATION menu  
screen to “ON”. X See page 77.  
Color bars are output.  
FULL AUTO switch  
“SD” display  
STATUS 0  
Confirming the color tone area adjusted  
with the Skin Detail function  
When you push the ZEBRA switch on the front panel to  
“SKIN AREA”, the skin detail function turns ON, and the color  
area adjusted with the skin detail function is displayed in  
color in the LCD monitor or viewfinder.  
USER button  
Outputting color bars using the USER buttons  
1. Turn the FULL AUTO switch to “OFF”.  
2. Assign “BARS” to one of the USER1, 2 or 3 buttons.  
X See “SWITCH MODE Menu Screen” on page 83.  
3. Press the USER button to which “BARS” was assigned.  
Color bars are output.  
MEMO  
You can select whether to output an audio test signal  
during color bar output using the TEST TONE item on  
the AUDIO/MIC[1/2] menu screen. X See page 84.  
Color bars are not output when FULL AUTO mode is ON  
or in VTR mode.  
ZEBRA switch  
MEMO  
When the REVERSE PICTURE item in the CAMERA  
PROCESS[2/2] menu screen is set to ROTATE, skin  
detail function is available but the detection area is not  
displayed in the viewfinder or LCD screen.  
When COLOR GAIN item on the ADVANCED PRO-  
CESS menu screen is set to “OFF”, only the portion the  
skin detail function is working is displayed in skin color.  
X See page 80.  
100  
101  
OTHERS  
Display  
Status  
Action  
Warnings and Responses  
CHANGE PB TAPE  
FORMAT*  
Image format which is different from the one set in the PB Check the setting for the PB TAPE item.  
TAPE item on the VIDEO FORMAT[2/2] menu screen is be- X See page 76.  
ing played back.  
LOW VOLTAGE*  
Battery is low.  
Charge the battery pack or replace it.  
TAPE NEAR END*  
There are less than 3 minutes remaining on the tape (flash- To continue shooting, find a new tape or replace the tape.  
es only when recording).  
Warnings are displayed on the LCD monitor or the viewfinder if there was a mistaken operation, if the battery or tape is low, or if  
there is a problem on the VTR.  
In addition, if the tape or battery is low or the VTR has a problem, the tally lamp flashes (or lights) and an alarm is output from the  
monitor speaker or PHONES jack.  
TAPE END*  
Displayed when the tape ends.  
Replace the tape.  
CHANGE 1394  
SWITCH*  
Recording or playback video format and the IEEE1394 set- Set the IEEE1394 switch correctly, turn the power off and  
ting is different when connected to the IEEE1394 port.  
Tried to use the FF or REW button in camera mode.  
then on again.  
SWITCH TO VTR  
MODE*  
Press the CAM/VTR button to set VTR mode.  
MEMO  
This device uses microcomputers. It may not operate properly if there is external static or interference. If this happens, turn the  
power off and then on again.  
HEAD CLEANING  
REQUIRED  
Displayed when the video head is dirty. (Head clogging was Clean with a special head cleaning tape.  
detected during an edit search in shooting mode as well as X See page 7.  
during playback and displayed.)  
Display  
Status  
Action  
CLEANING TAPE!  
COPY GUARD!*  
Displayed when a head cleaning tape is inserted.  
The display disappears when the head cleaning tape is re-  
moved.  
60/30 INHIBIT  
CHANGE FRAME  
RATE MENU  
The FRAME RATE item is set to 50/25 or 24, and a tape re- Sets the FRAME RATE item on the VIDEO FORMAT menu  
corded in 60/30 frame is played back or it is input into the screen to match the frames.  
IEEE1394 port in VTR mode.  
Tried to play back a copyguarded tape.  
Cannot play back a copyguarded tape.  
Please contact your local dealer or JVC.  
Lightly push the top center of the videocassette cover.  
X See page 74.  
FAN MOTOR HOUR Over the prescribed fan motor usage time.  
50/25 INHIBIT  
CHANGE FRAME  
RATE MENU  
The FRAME RATE item is set to 60/30 or 24, and a tape re-  
corded in 50/25 frame or it is input into the IEEE1394 port  
in VTR mode.  
PUSH CASSETTE  
COVER*  
The videocassette cover is not firmly shut.  
CHANGE THE SYS- Displayed when you attempt to change FRAME RATE item When the FRAME RATE item setting is changed, the frame  
24 INHIBIT CHANGE The FRAME RATE item is set to 50/25 or 60/30, and a tape  
FRAME RATE MENU recorded in 24 frame is played back or it is input into the  
IEEE1394 port in VTR mode.  
TEM*  
in the VIDEO FORMAT menu screen.  
rate system for this device is changed. Check the frame  
rate to use before changing the setting.  
X See pages 53 and 74.  
DV-60I INVALID!  
DV-24P INVALID!  
DV-24PA INVALID!  
A tape recorded in DV-60I, DV-24P, or DV-24PA format The E model cannot play back tapes recorded in DV-60I,  
was played back or input into the IEEE1394 connector in DV-24P or DV-24PA format or input into the IEEE1394 con-  
*
When status indications are magnified, warnings are not displayed on the LCD monitor.  
X See “Magnified Status Indications on the LCD Monitor” on page 29.  
VTR mode on the E model.  
nector in VTR mode.  
DV-50I INVALID!  
DV-25P INVALID!  
A tape recorded in DV-50I or DV-25P format was played The U model cannot play back tapes recorded in DV-50I or  
back or input into the IEEE1394 connector in VTR mode on DV-25P format or input into the IEEE1394 connector in  
the U model.  
VTR mode.  
HDV-SD60P  
INVALID!  
A tape recorded in HDV-SD60P format was played back or This device cannot play back or input an HDV-SD60P/  
input into IEEE1394 connector in VTR mode.  
HDV-SD50P signal.  
HDV-SD50P  
INVALID!  
A tape recorded in HDV-SD50P format was played back or  
input into IEEE1394 connector in VTR mode.  
INVALID TAPE!  
LP TAPE INVALID!*  
NO DV SIGNAL*  
NO HDV SIGNAL*  
COPY INHIBIT*  
REC INHIBIT*  
A computer data tape or a DVC PRO cassette was used. Use a MiniDV videocassette.  
Tried to play back a tape recorded in LP mode.  
DV signal was not input.  
This device cannot record or play back in LP mode.  
Set the IEEE1394 switch to DV and input a DV signal.  
Set the IEEE1394 switch to HDV and input an HDV signal.  
Cannot record a copyguarded signal.  
HDV signal was not input.  
Tried to record a copyguarded signal.  
A tape that cannot be recorded (back switch is set to SAVE) Set the switch on the back of the cassette tape to REC.  
was inserted.  
NO TAPE*  
No videocassette tape is inserted.  
Insert a cassette tape.  
102  
103  
OTHERS  
TALLY lamp  
Warnings and Responses (Cont’d)  
Blinks when remaining battery power or tape is low. (Only  
in Camera mode)  
Blinking Pattern  
Remaining Battery/Tape  
Slow blinking  
(once per sec.)  
• Remaining battery power is low.  
• Remaining tape time is equivalent to less  
than 3 minutes.  
Error code  
Fast blinking  
• Tape has run out.  
(four times per sec.)  
• Irregularity has occurred in the VTR.  
Alarm Sound  
When remaining battery power becomes low, a warning  
sound is output from the monitoring loudspeaker and the  
PHONES jack.  
Warning  
(In Camera mode only)  
When an irregularity occurs in the VTR, a warning sound  
is also output.  
Whether or not alarm sound should be output and the vol-  
ume level are selected with the ALARM VR LEVEL item  
on the OTHERS[1/2] menu screen.  
Warning Indications for VTR Abnormalities  
Should malfunctions occur during VTR operation, this  
device self-diagnoses the cause and shows the diagnose  
together with an error code on the LCD monitor or in the  
viewfinder.  
Depending on the alarm conditions, the warning indicators  
on the LCD monitor/viewfinder screen, the TALLY lamp,  
and alarm sounds appear as shown in the following table.  
Error Code  
Error Details  
This device Operation  
Remedy  
0201  
Indicates dew formation (condensa- Operation stops. All opera- Leave this device with the power ON,  
CONDENSATION ON DRUM tion).  
tions are rejected.  
until the indication disappears.  
X See page 9.  
3200  
Tape cannot be loaded.  
Switch the power OFF and then switch  
it back ON. However, the tape may be  
damaged depending on the circum-  
stances. Please consult the person in  
charge of professional video equip-  
ment at your nearest JVC-authorized  
service agent.  
LOADING FAILURE  
3300  
Tape cannot be unloaded.  
UNLOADING FAILURE  
4100  
Irregularity with eject operation.  
CASSETTE EJECT FAILURE  
5605 - 5609  
DEFECTIVE TAPE  
Tape is cut.  
Operation stops.  
Press the EJECT button to take out the  
cassette.  
Alarm Indications on LCD Monitor/  
TALLY lamp  
If the tape runs out during recording,  
switch the power OFF and then switch  
it back ON, press the EJECT button,  
and then take out the cassette.  
Alarm Sound  
Condition  
Viewfinder Screen  
VTR alarm indication  
(Example)  
Dew formation (condensation) or error has oc-  
curred in the VTR.  
5702  
Tape end sensor error.  
Tape beginning sensor error.  
Drum rotation error.  
Operation stops. All opera- Switch the power OFF and then switch  
I
TAPE END DET. ERROR  
tions are rejected.  
it back ON. However, the tape may be  
damaged depending on the circum-  
stances. Please consult the person in  
charge of professional video equip-  
ment at your nearest JVC-authorized  
service agent.  
5802  
About 3 min. before tape end  
(displayed during recording).  
TAPE BEGIN DET. ERROR  
J
I
J
7001  
Tape end  
(displayed during recording).  
DRUM MOTOR FAILURE  
7101  
Capstan rotation error.  
Supply reel rotation error.  
Take up reel rotation error.  
Remaining battery power is low.  
CAP MOTOR FAILURE  
7202 - 7203  
SUPPLY REEL FAILURE  
Display symbols  
J
: Blinking once per second.  
: Sound interrupted once per second.  
I
: Blinking four times per second.  
: Continuous sound.  
7302 - 7303  
TAKE UP REEL FAILURE  
7305  
Take up reel rotation error when un-  
loading.  
TAKE UP REEL FAILURE  
8000  
Tape problem detected.  
EMERGENCY TAPE!  
TURN POWER OFF.  
System error when power is turned on. HDV/DV LED, VTR indicator Turn off the power and let this device  
TURN BACK ON LATER.  
and TALLY lamp flash. Only sit for sometime before turning it back  
POWER switch operation is on.  
accepted.  
104  
105  
OTHERS  
Troubleshooting  
How to Display the Hour  
Meter  
The drum and fan motor usage times are displayed in the  
DRUM HOUR item and the FAN HOUR items on the OTH-  
ERS[2/2] menu screen as the hour meters on this device.  
Use as an estimate for regular maintenance. X See page 7.  
Symptoms  
Remedy  
• Is power supply connected correctly?  
Power cannot be switched ON.  
• Is battery pack recharged?  
• Was the power turned ON immediately after being turned OFF?  
Wait at least 5 seconds before turning the power ON again once it has been  
turned OFF.  
1. Turn the POWER switch ON.  
2. Press the STATUS button for at least 1 second to display  
the TOP MENU screen.  
Recording is not possible.  
• Is the REC LOCK switch on the handle set to ON?  
• Is the switch on cassette set to “REC”? If it is set to “SAVE”, set it to “REC”.  
• The Camera mode has not been selected. (The VTR indicator does not light.)  
While the VTR indicator lights, press the MODE switch upward to turn on the  
CAM indicator.  
3. Turn the SHUTTER dial, select the OTHERS.. item, and  
press the SHUTTER dial.  
The OTHERS[1/2] menu screen is displayed.  
4. Select the NEXT PAGE item on the OTHERS[1/2] menu  
Camera image does not appear on LCD monitor or in viewfind- • The Camera mode has not been selected. (The VTR indicator does not light.)  
screen and press the SHUTTER dial.  
er.  
While the VTR indicator lights, camera image will not be output.  
Press the CAM/VTR switch upward to turn on the VTR indicator.  
The OTHERS[2/2] menu screen is displayed.  
Image shown on LCD monitor or in viewfinder is dark or blurred. • Adjust the brightness of the LCD monitor or viewfinder screen.  
OTHERS[2/2] menu screen  
• Is the ND filter knob set to 2?  
• Is the iris closed?  
• Is the shutter speed too fast?  
• Is the viewfinder cable correctly connected?  
Playback does not start when the play button is pressed.  
Cannot play back.  
• In the Camera mode, is “STOP” indicated as the VTR operation mode indica-  
tor?  
When “STBY” is indicated, press the STOP button to display “STOP”.  
Drum usage  
hours (h)  
• Is the PB TAPE item on the VIDEO FORMAT menu screen set to a setting oth-  
er than AUTO?  
If this menu item and the tape format do not match, the tape cannot be played  
back.  
Cannot input an HDV/DV signal.  
Noise interferes with playback video.  
Sound is not output during playback.  
• Is this device in VTR mode? (Is the VTR indicator lit?)  
• Is the IEEE1394 switch set correctly?  
Fan motor usage hours (h)  
• Video head may be clogged with dirt. Clean head with the special head clean-  
ing tape. X See “Precautions for Use of Head Cleaning Tape” on page 7.  
OTHERS[2/2] Menu Screen  
DRUM HOUR item : Displays the drum usage hours.  
• Is the AUDIO SELECT item on the AUDIO menu screen set to CH3/4?  
To output the sound of the recording, set to CH1/2.  
FAN HOUR item  
: Displays the fan motor usage  
hours.  
Noise appears when playing back a tape recorded on another • When a tape recorded on another unit is played back or used for recording,  
unit.  
this phenomenon may occur due to tracking errors.  
5. To return to the normal screen display, do one of the fol-  
The transient section between scenes recorded on other units  
and those recorded on this device may appear disturbed.  
lowing:  
Press the STATUS button.  
The front section’s audio level control doesn’t work.  
• Is the CH-1/CH-2 AUDIO SELECT switch set to “AUTO”?  
• Is the FULL AUTO switch set to “ON”?  
or  
Return to the TOP MENU screen, select the EXIT item  
on the TOP MENU screen and press the SHUTTER  
dial.  
Cannot initialize (format) the SD memory card.  
• Is the SD memory card write-protected? X See page 34.  
Battery alarm is displayed even if a fully charged battery pack • Is the battery pack old?  
is put in.  
Cassette cannot be ejected after the power is turned ON.  
• The capacity of the power supply may be insufficient. Check the power volt-  
age.  
Time code or user’s bits data not displayed.  
• Is the TC/UB item on the LCD/VF[3/4] menu screen set to OFF?  
If so, set to ON.  
The date and time are not displayed or recorded.  
• Is the DISPLAY item on the TIME/DATE menu screen set to OFF?  
Set to ON when the data should be displayed and recorded.  
• Is the date and time setting made? X See “Setting and Displaying the Date  
and Time” on pages 41, 42.  
106  
107  
OTHERS  
[DV]  
Video signal record- : DV format, 8-bit, 25 Mbps  
ing format  
EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS (unit: mm)  
Specifications  
Compression  
: DV compression, 4:1:1 (NTSC)/  
4:2:0 (PAL)  
Audio:  
[HDV]  
[General]  
Audio signal record- : MPEG1 Audio Layer II  
ing format  
[DV]  
Audio signal record- : 16-bit (locked audio), 48 kHz PCM  
ing format  
Power requirements : DC 12 V, W 1.9 A  
Power consumption : Approx. 23 W (in the Record mode)  
Dimensions  
: 224(W) × 242.3(H) × 401(D) mm  
(U model)  
224(W) × 242.3(H) × 414(D) mm  
(E model)  
: 3.6 d(8.0 lbs.) (U model)  
3.8 d(8.4 lbs.) (E model)  
(including lens (Th16 × 5.5BRMU),  
viewfinder, microphone and tape)  
for  
2
channels or 12-bit, 32 kHz  
PCM for 4 channels  
: MiniDV tape  
: 18.8 mm/sec.  
: 63 minutes (with an M-  
DV63PROHD tape)  
Usable tape  
Tape speed  
Record/play time  
Mass  
Temperature  
Operating  
Storage  
Humidity  
Operating  
Storage  
[Time Code]  
: 0°C to 40°C (32°F to 104°F)  
: –20°C to 60°C (–4F° to 140°F)  
Time code signal  
: Compliance with SMPTE/EBU stan-  
dard  
: 30% to 80% RH  
: 85% RH or less  
[Connectors]  
Analog composite output  
: 1.0 V (p-p), 75 :, unbalanced (RCA)  
Analog component output  
Y
PB/PR  
Audio inputs  
Mic  
[Camera section]  
Image pickup device : 1/3" interline-transfer CCDs  
Color separation  
optical system  
Number of total pixels : Approx. 1,110,000 pixels  
: F1.4, 3-color separation prism  
: 1.0 V (p-p), 75 :, unbalanced (BNC)  
: 0.7 V (p-p), 75 :, unbalanced (BNC)  
Color bars  
: SMPTE/EBU type Sync system:  
Internal sync (built-in SSG)  
: 1/3" bayonet system  
: 1/4ND, 1/16ND  
: 0, 3, 6, 9, 12, 15, 18 dB, ALC  
: –60 dBs, 3 k:, balanced (XLR), +48  
V output for phantom power supply  
: +4 dBs, 10 k:, balanced (XLR)  
: –8 dBs, low impedance, unbalanced  
(RCA ×2)  
Lens mount  
ND filter  
Gain  
Line  
Audio outputs  
Electronic shutter  
Standard value  
Fixed values  
Earphone jack  
: –17 dBs to –60 dBs, 8-: impedance  
(stereo mini-jack ×2)  
: 59.94 Hz (U model)/50 Hz (E model)  
: 7.5  
-
10,000 Hz, 11 steps (HDV  
IEEE1394 connector : 6-pin  
HD30p/HDV HD60p/DV 60i), 6.25 -  
10,000 Hz, 11 steps (HDV HD25p/  
HDV HD50p/DV 50i), 6 - 10,000 Hz,  
12 steps (HDV HD24p/DV 24p),  
6.25 - 10,000 Hz, 11 steps (DV 25p)  
: 30.03 - 10,489.5 Hz (HDV HD60p/  
HDV HD30p/DV 60i)  
25.04 - 10,489.5 Hz (HDV HD50p/  
HDV HD25p/DV 50i/DV 25p)  
24.01 - 10,489.5 Hz (HDV HD24p/  
DV 24p)  
[ACCESSORIES]  
*
Design and specifications are subject to change without notice.  
Lens  
: 1 (Excluding the CHU/CHE model)  
Microphone  
Core Filter  
Clamp Filter  
SD memory card  
Instruction Manual  
Warranty Card  
: 1  
: 1  
: 4  
: 1  
: 1  
: 1  
Variable scan  
(USA and Canada only)  
Dynamic range  
: 300% or more  
For details, consult your JVC dealer.  
[VTR section]  
Video  
Recording format  
: 720/24p, 720/25p, 720/30p, 720/  
50p, 720/60p (U/E model), 480/24p,  
480/60i (U model), 576/25p, 576/50i  
(E model)  
Video Format:  
[HDV]  
Video signal record- : HDV720p format, 8-bit, 19.7 Mbps  
ing format  
Compression  
: MPEG-2 video (profile  
MP@H-14)  
&
level:  
108  
109  
E
INTRODUCTION  
CONTROLS,  
INDICATORS AND  
CONNECTORS  
PREPARATIONS  
PREPARATIONS  
FOR OPERATION  
SETTING AND  
ADJUSTMENTS  
BEFORE SHOOTING  
SHOOTING  
OPERATION  
HD CAMERA RECORDER  
PLAYBACK MODE  
USING EXTERNAL  
COMPONENTS  
INSTRUCTIONS  
GY-HD250  
GY-HD251  
MENU SCREENS  
FEATURES OF THE  
CAMERA SECTION  
OTHERS  
*
The illustration shows the GY-HD250/GY-  
HD251 HD CAMERA RECORDER with the  
provided lens, viewfinder and microphone  
attached.  
Thank you for purchasing this JVC product. Before operating this  
device, please read the instructions carefully to ensure the best  
possible performance.  
For Customer Use:  
© 2006 Victor Company of Japan, Limited  
Enter below the Serial No. which is located on the body.  
Retain this information for future reference.  
Model No.  
Serial No.  
LST0440-001A  
LST0440-001A  
INFORMATION (FOR CANADA)  
Important Safeguards  
Safety Precautions  
RENSEIGNEMENT (POUR CANADA)  
This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-  
003.  
Cet appareil numerique de la Class B est conforme a la norme  
NMB-003 du Canada.  
1. Read all of these instructions.  
2. Keep these instructions.  
3. Heed all warnings.  
4. Follow all instructions.  
5. Do not use this apparatus near water.  
6. Clean only with dry cloth.  
7. Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in accor-  
dance with the manufacturer’s instructions.  
8. Do not install near any heat sources such as radia-  
tors, heat resisters, stoves, or other apparatus  
(including amplifiers) that produce heat.  
9. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or  
grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades  
with one wider than the other. A grounding type plug  
has two blades and a third grounding prong.  
The wide blade or the third prong are provided for  
your safety.  
FOR USA AND CANADA  
CAUTION  
WARNING:  
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK  
DO NOT OPEN  
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELEC-  
TRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS  
APPLIANCE TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.  
CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK,  
DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK).  
NO USER SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE.  
REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.  
This unit should be used with 12V DC only.  
CAUTION:  
To prevent electric shocks and fire hazards, do NOT  
use any other power source.  
The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within  
an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user  
to the presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage”  
within the product’s enclosure that may be of suffi-  
cient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock  
to persons.  
NOTE:  
The rating plate (serial number plate) is on the bottom of the unit.  
CAUTION:  
To prevent electric shock, do not open the cabinet. No user ser-  
viceable parts inside. Refer servicing to qualified service person-  
nel.  
The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle  
is intended to alert the user to the presence of  
important operating and maintenance (servicing)  
instructions in the literature accompanying the  
appliance.  
If the provided plug does not fit into your outlet, con-  
sult an electrician for replacement of the obsolete out-  
let.  
AVERTISSEMENT :  
10. Protect the power cord from being walked on or  
pinched particularly at plug, convenience receptacles,  
and the point where they exit from the apparatus.  
11. Only use attachments/accessories specified by the  
manufacturer.  
POUR EVITER LES RISQUES D’INCENDIE  
OU D’ELECTROCUTION, NE PAS EXPOSER  
L’APPAREIL A L’HUMIDITE OU A LA PLUIE.  
INFORMATION FOR USA  
INFORMATION:  
Ce magnétoscope ne doit être utilisé que sur du cou-  
rant direct en 12V.  
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the  
limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the  
FCC Rules.  
12. Use only with the cart, stand, tripod,  
bracket, or table specified by the  
ATTENTION :  
Afin d’eviter tout resque d’incendie ou d’électrocu-  
tion, ne pas utillser d’autres sources d’alimentation  
électrique.  
These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection  
against harmful interference in a residential installation. This  
equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency  
energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the  
instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communi-  
cations. However, there is no guarantee that interference will  
not occur in a particular installation.  
manufacturer, or sold with the appa-  
ratus.  
When  
a
cart is used, use caution  
when moving the cart/apparatus  
combination to avoid injury tip-over.  
REMARQUE:  
La plaque signalétique (plaque du numéro desérie) est située sur  
le cadre inférieur de l’unité.  
13. Unplug this apparatus during light-  
ning storms or when unused for long periods of time.  
14. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Ser-  
vicing is required when the apparatus has been dam-  
aged in any way, such as power-supply cord or plug  
id damaged, liquid has been spilled objects have  
fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus has been  
exposed to rain or moisture, does not operate nor-  
mally, or has been dropped.  
If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or  
television reception, which can be determined by turning the  
equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct  
the interference by one or more of the following measures:  
Due to design modifications, data given in this instruction book are  
subject to possible change without prior notice.  
The apparatus shall not be exposed to dripping or splashing and  
that no objects filled with liquids, such as vases, shall be placed  
close to the apparatus.  
z
z
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.  
Increase the separation between the equipment and  
receiver.  
z
z
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different  
from that to which the receiver is connected.  
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for  
help.  
Worded - “CAUTION - Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly  
replaced. Replace only with the same or equivalent type.”  
CAUTION:  
CHANGES OR MODIFICATIONS NOT APPROVED BY JVC  
COULD VOID USER’S AUTHORITY TO OPERATE THE  
EQUIPMENT.  
THIS DEVICE COMPLIES WITH PART 15 OF THE FCC  
RULES.  
OPERATION IS SUBJECT TO THE FOLLOWING TWO CON-  
DITIONS: (1) THIS DEVICE MAY NOT CAUSE HARMFUL  
INTERFERENCE, AND (2) THIS DEVICE MUST ACCEPT  
ANY INTERFERENCE RECEIVED, INCLUDING INTERFER-  
ENCE THAT MAY CAUSE UNDESIRED OPERATION.  
I
II  
WARNING:  
Information for Users on Disposal of  
Old Equipment  
Safety Precautions (Cont’d)  
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR  
ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS  
APPLIANCE TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.  
This unit should be used with 12V DC only.  
CAUTION:  
FOR EUROPE  
To prevent electric shocks and fire hazards, do NOT  
use any other power source.  
This equipment is in conformity with the provisions and protection  
requirements of the corresponding European Directives.  
This equipment is designed for professional video appliances and  
can be used in the following environments:  
NOTE:  
Attention:  
This symbol is only valid in the European  
Union.  
The rating plate (serial number plate) is on the bottom of the unit.  
z
z
z
residential area (in houses)  
commercial and light industry; e.g. offices or theatres  
urban outdoors  
CAUTION:  
To prevent electric shock, do not open the cabinet. No user ser-  
viceable parts inside. Refer servicing to qualified service person-  
nel.  
[European Union]  
This symbol indicates that the electrical and electronic equip-  
ment should not be disposed as general household waste at  
its end-of-life. Instead, the product should be handed over to  
the applicable collection point for the recycling of electrical  
and electronic equipment for proper treatment, recovery and  
recycling in accordance with your national legislation.  
In order to keep the best performance and furthermore for electro-  
magnetic compatibility we recommend to use cables not exceeding  
the following length:  
Due to design modifications, data given in this instruction book are  
subject to possible change without prior notice.  
Camera  
The apparatus shall not be exposed to dripping or splashing and  
that no objects filled with liquids, such as vases, shall be placed  
close to the apparatus.  
Port  
Cable  
Length  
2 m  
By disposing of this product correctly, you will help to con-  
serve natural resources and will help prevent potential nega-  
tive effects on the environment and human health which  
could otherwise be caused by inappropriate waste handling  
of this product. For more information about collection point  
and recycling of this product, please contact your local  
municipal office, your household waste disposal service or  
the shop where you purchased the product.  
DC IN  
Exclusive Cable  
Coaxial Cable  
Coaxial Cable  
Shielded Cable  
VIDEO  
Y, PB, PR  
3 m  
Worded - “CAUTION - Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly  
replaced. Replace only with the same or equivalent type.”  
3 m  
AUDIO INPUT1,  
INPUT2  
3 m  
AUDIO OUT CH1,  
CH2  
Shielded Cable  
3 m  
Penalties may be applicable for incorrect disposal of this  
waste, in accordance with national legislation.  
Phones1, 2  
Exclusive Cable  
2 m  
4.5 m  
3 m  
3 m  
5 m  
1 m  
IEEE1394 (HDV/DV) Exclusive Cable  
GENLOCK/AUX IN Coaxial Cable  
(Business users)  
If you wish to dispose of this product, please visit our web  
page www.jvc-europe.com to obtain information about the  
take-back of the product.  
HD/SD-SDI  
REMOTE  
STUDIO  
Coaxial Cable  
Exclusive Cable  
Exclusive Cable  
[Other Countries outside the European Union]  
If you wish to dispose of this product, please do so in accor-  
dance with applicable national legislation or other rules in  
your country for the treatment of old electrical and electronic  
equipment.  
Caution: Where there are strong electromagnetic waves or mag-  
netism, for example near radio or TV transmitter, transformer,  
motor, etc., the picture and the sound may be disturbed. In such  
case, please keep the apparatus away from the sources of the dis-  
turbance.  
a
Dear Customer,  
This apparatus is in conformance with the valid European direc-  
tives and standards regarding electromagnetic compatibility and  
electrical safety.  
European representative of Victor Company of Japan Limited is:  
JVC Technology Centre Europe GmbH  
P.O. Box 10 05 52  
61145 Friedberg  
Germany  
III  
IV  
Thank you for purchasing the JVC GY-HD250U/CHU and  
GY-HD251E/CHE HD CAMERA RECORDER.  
These instructions are for the GY-HD250U/CHU and GY-  
HD251E/CHE.  
Time code input/output terminal and slave lock function  
Slave lock to an external time code generator connected  
to the time code input terminal.  
The time code output terminal outputs built-in time code  
generator data.  
ACCESSORIES  
MAIN FEATURES  
A lens is included with the GY-HD250U and GY-HD251E.  
A lens is not included with the GY-HD250CHU and GY-  
HD251CHE.  
Built-in large 3.5" color LCD display  
In addition to displaying the camera image and the play-  
back image, the LCD monitor shows the status screens,  
menu screens for settings, and alarm indications.  
GY-HD250/GY-HD251 records in HDV format or DV format.  
DV format can record and play back SD (Standard Defini-  
tion) video on Mini DV videocassettes.  
HDV format can record and play back HD (High Definition)  
video on Mini DV videocassettes.  
There are two types of recording formats within HDV format.  
HDV 720p (720 effective scan lines, progressive scan)  
HDV 1080i (1080 effective scan lines, interlaced scan)  
GY-HD250/GY-HD251 supports HDV 720p format. (HDV  
720p)  
Information applicable only to the GY-HD250U/CHU is  
marked by “(U model only)”.  
Information applicable only to the GY-HD251E/CHE is  
marked by “(E model only)”.  
Built-in monitor speaker for audio checking  
The input audio can be monitored in recording or EE mode.  
The playback sound can be monitored in the playback  
mode. The speaker also outputs an alarm tone in case an  
abnormal condition occurs in this device.  
Recording check function for convenient recording review  
function  
(Excluding the CHU/CHE  
model)  
HDV and  
are trademarks of Sony Corporation  
/
and Victor Company of Japan, Limited.  
This device is  
recorder.  
Videocassettes marked with the A symbol can be used.  
a
HDV/DV video system format camera  
Camera section designed with 3-CCD system for high-  
quality picture  
1/3" 3-CCD with 1,110,000 effective pixels employed. Dig-  
ital signal processing for reproduction of HDV/DV high-  
quality picture.  
Lens  
Microphone  
24p mode shooting function  
In HDV format, it records in 24p mode.  
X See pages 10 and 33  
X See page 33  
It uses a 2:3:2:3 pulldown when recording to tape and con-  
verts the images to 60 frames. Component output is con-  
verted to 60 frames during playback as well.  
24p DV format video uses a 2:3:2:3 pulldown (24p Mode).  
A 2:3:3:2 pulldown (24p Advanced Mode) is also supported.  
It can shoot with the same number of frames as movie  
film.  
The following phenomena may occur when tapes recorded  
on other units (including another GY-HD250/GY-HD251)  
are recorded or played back on GY-HD250/GY-HD251.  
Multi-Zone Auto Iris Detection Circuit  
Multi-zone auto iris detection circuit ensures optimum iris  
position even in back light conditions or when a bright sub-  
ject moves in a frame.  
The transient section between scenes recorded on other  
units and those recorded on this device may appear dis-  
turbed.  
Digital noise may appear during playback due to track-  
ing errors.  
Core Filter  
Clamp Filters ×4  
For DC (×2)/Audio/  
IEEE1394 Cable  
For Viewfinder Cable  
X See page 33  
Tapes recorded in the DVCAM format can only be played  
back (simple playback).  
Recording in the DVCAM format is not possible.  
Safety Zone indication in viewfinder  
X See pages 36, 64 and 67  
Zebra pattern video level indication in viewfinder  
This device records and plays back in the SP mode.  
Recording or playback in the LP mode is not possible.  
(In DV format)  
Due to manufacturing dispersion of tapes, we recom-  
mend not to record pictures within the first 2 to 3 min-  
utes from the beginning of the tape.  
Before recording important scenes, be sure to perform a  
test recording and confirm that both video and audio are  
recorded correctly.  
Recorded video and audio contents are for private use.  
Other use may infringe on the rights of copyright hold-  
ers.  
DVCAM is a registered trademark of Sony Corporation.  
Full Auto Shooting (FAS) function  
60 Hz/50 Hz HD or HDTV signals  
Supports both 60 Hz/50 Hz HD or HDTV signals.  
You can select this in a menu screen.  
Eliminates the need for troublesome switch or filter opera-  
tions by automatically providing a wide range of compati-  
bility with shooting conditions that change as you move  
between indoors and outdoors or between bright and dark  
locations.  
Cross-convert video output  
You can output converted video from the video output con-  
nectors. You can select this in a menu screen.  
SD memory card  
X See page 34  
Tripod base  
(Provided only for U model)  
X See page 35  
ND filters for 1/4ND, 1/16ND provided  
IEEE1394 connector  
Outputs composite, component, Y/C separate and RGB  
signals as analog video in DV format. Outputs composite  
and component signals in HDV format.  
IEEE1394 connector (6-pin) provided. Enables transfer of  
digital data to other equipment provided with IEEE1394  
connector, such as a non-linear editing system. (Power  
cannot be supplied.)  
JVC cannot assume liabilities that may derive from the  
impossibility of normal recording or playback of video or  
audio due to malfunction of this device or the videocas-  
sette.  
Features HD/SD SDI output terminals  
Outputs serial digital HD and SD signals.  
1/3" bayonet type lens  
Focus assist function  
Enables easy and accurate focusing during shooting.  
Built-in color bars (ARIB (multi-format color bars), SMPTE/  
EBU type)  
*
All product names in this manual are trademarks or regis-  
tered trademarks of their respective companies.  
User buttons added  
Enables you to switch camera settings instantly to suit the  
shooting conditions.  
Shutter speeds and menus can be selected using a dial,  
making it very easy to use.  
Marks such as ™, ® and © are not used in this manual.  
Variable scan shutter  
There is no flicker when shooting computer screens and  
other non-NTSC/PAL format screens.  
External video signal input enabled  
Records composite video signals from an external source.  
GENLOCK input terminal  
Input BB (Black Burst) or HD Tri-sync signals. SC phase  
and HD/SD H phase adjustments can be performed.  
Slow shutter  
Makes it possible to brightly shoot video of dark subjects  
with little motion by accumulating the images.  
Time code reader/generator  
The built-in time code reader/generator can be used to  
record the time code and user’s bits.  
Backup recording function  
Continuous extended recording is possible by connecting  
to HDV/DV devices.  
Connect to KA-HD250 Studio Kit and use as a studio cam-  
era.  
2
3
Charging the Built-in Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36  
Battery Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37  
Attaching the Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37  
Removing the Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37  
Precautions for the Battery Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . .38  
Remaining Battery Power Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38  
Operating Time with Battery Pack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38  
Precautions for the Battery Pack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38  
Recharging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38  
Adjusting Audio during Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56  
Monitoring Audio during Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57  
OTHERS[1/2] Menu Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96  
OTHERS[2/2] Menu Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97  
GENLOCK Menu Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99  
FILE MANAGE Menu Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100  
Displaying the FILE MANAGE menu screen . . . . . . .100  
Loading a menu settings file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100  
Saving settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101  
Resetting the menu settings to the factory settings . . . .102  
Initializing (formatting) an SD memory card . . . . . . . .102  
CONTENTS  
SHOOTING OPERATION  
Basic Recording Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58  
If the Record-Standby Mode Continues . . . . . . . . . . . .59  
Checking Recorded Contents in Record-Standby Mode  
(Recording Check Function) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59  
HEADER REC Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60  
ACCESSORIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2  
MAIN FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3  
INTRODUCTION  
Precautions for Proper Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6  
Routine and Periodical Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7  
Precautions for Use of Head Cleaning Tape . . . . . . . . . . . .7  
Battery Pack to be Used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8  
Videocassette to be Used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8  
For recording and storing videotapes in the best condition . . .8  
Condensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9  
Characteristic CCD Phenomena . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9  
PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION  
FEATURES OF THE CAMERA SECTION  
PLAYBACK MODE  
Turning the Power ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39  
Turning the Power ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39  
Turning the Power OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39  
Loading/Unloading the Cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40  
Cassette Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40  
Unloading the Cassette. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40  
Setting and Displaying the Date and Time . . . . . . . . . . . .41  
Setting the Date and Time Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41  
Setting the Date and Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42  
Displaying the Time and Date on the Screen . . . . . . . .42  
Displaying Time Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43  
Displayed Time Code/User’s Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43  
Time code input entered the IEEE1394 connector . . . .43  
Presetting and Recording of Time Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44  
Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44  
Presetting time code data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45  
Presetting user’s bit data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45  
Zero-resetting the Time Code or User’s Bit Data . . . . .45  
Presetting the Time Code from the LCD Screen . . . . . . . .46  
Recording Time Codes in Continuation of  
How to Use Skin Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103  
Outputting Color Bars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105  
Playback Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62  
Fast-Forward, Rewind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62  
Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62  
Outputting Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63  
OTHERS  
Warnings and Responses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106  
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110  
How to Display the Hour Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111  
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112  
EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113  
USING EXTERNAL COMPONENTS  
Connecting the Video Signal Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64  
Connecting the IEEE1394 Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64  
Recording Composite Video Signals from  
CONTROLS, INDICATORS AND  
CONNECTORS  
ZOOM Lens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10  
Front Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11  
Rear Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12  
LCD Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13  
Right Side Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14  
Left Side Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16  
Top Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18  
Recording and Image Output Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20  
Indications on the LCD Monitor and in the Viewfinder . . . .22  
Status Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22  
Status Screens in the Camera Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23  
Status Screen in VTR MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28  
Magnified Status Indications on the LCD Monitor. . . . .29  
Auto White Balance Indication (Camera mode only) . . . .30  
Menu Setting Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30  
Alarm Message Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30  
Safety Zone Indication (Camera mode only) . . . . . . . .30  
Switching between the LCD Screen and  
an External Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65  
Using GENLOCK Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66  
Dubbing with AV Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67  
HDV/DV Dubbing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68  
Backup Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70  
Connect a Remote Control Unit (RM-LP55/RM-LP57) . . .71  
MENU SCREENS  
Time Codes Recorded on Tape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47  
Playing Back Time Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47  
Synchronizing with the Time Code of  
Menu Screen Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73  
Setting Menu Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75  
TOP MENU Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76  
VIDEO FORMAT[1/2] Menu Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77  
VIDEO FORMAT[2/2] Menu Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79  
CAMERA OPERATION Menu Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80  
CAMERA PROCESS[1/2] Menu Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81  
CAMERA PROCESS[2/2] Menu Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82  
ADVANCED PROCESS Menu Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83  
COLOR MATRIX ADJUST Menu Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . .84  
SKIN COLOR ADJUST Menu Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84  
WHITE BALANCE Menu Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85  
SWITCH MODE Menu Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86  
AUDIO/MIC[1/2] Menu Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87  
AUDIO/MIC[2/2] Menu Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88  
LCD/VF[1/4] Menu Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89  
LCD/VF[2/4] Menu Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90  
LCD/VF[3/4] Menu Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91  
LCD/VF[4/4] Menu Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92  
TC/UB/CLOCK Menu Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93  
HEADER REC Menu Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94  
TIME/DATE Menu Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95  
the IEEE1394 (DV)-Connected Master Unit . . . . . .48  
Synchronizing with an External Time Code Generator . . .49  
Screen Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50  
Viewfinder Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50  
Back Focus Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51  
White Balance Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52  
White Balance Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52  
Full Auto White Balance (FAW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52  
White Shading Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53  
Viewfinder Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31  
PREPARATIONS  
Basic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32  
Attaching the Zoom Lens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33  
Attaching the Microphone (Provided) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33  
How to Attach the Viewfinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33  
Inserting an SD Memory Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34  
Inserting an SD Memory Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34  
Taking out the SD memory card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34  
About SD Memory Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34  
Attaching the Tripod Base (Provided only for U model) . . . . .35  
AC Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36  
SETTING AND ADJUSTMENTS BEFORE  
SHOOTING  
Setting the Video Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54  
Setting the FRAME RATE Item. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54  
Camera Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55  
Screen Size (4:3/16:9) Mode Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55  
Audio Input Signal Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56  
Selecting the CH-2 channel input connector. . . . . . . . .56  
Selecting the audio signal input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56  
4
5
INTRODUCTION  
Do not insert an object other than a videocassette in the  
cassette insertion slot. Be sure to close the cassette cover  
when this device is not to be used for a long period.  
Do not set the POWER switch to OFF or remove the  
power cable during recording or playback. Otherwise the  
tape may be damaged.  
The sensitivity level of the provided microphone is set  
lower than the reference input (–60 dBs) setting.  
When this device is not in use, be sure to set the POWER  
switch to OFF in order to reduce power consumption.  
Cleaning the body: Wipe body with a dry, soft cloth. To  
prevent deformation of the body, etc. and to avoid opera-  
tion hazards, do not allow volatile liquids such as benzine  
and thinner to touch the body, and do not wipe it with a  
cloth soaked in such a liquid. When it is extremely dirty,  
soak the cloth in a solution of neutral detergent, wipe the  
body with it, and then use a clean cloth to remove the  
detergent.  
The maintenance contents vary depending on the operat-  
ing environment and method. Therefore, the data in the  
chart should be considered as a reference.  
Precautions for Proper  
Use  
Routine and Periodical  
Maintenance  
Time management  
The accumulated running time of this device can be con-  
firmed with the hour meter display (which shows the accu-  
mulated drum and fan motor running time). X See “How to  
Display the Hour Meter” on page 111.  
Supply voltage  
The GY-HD250/GY-HD251 incorporates precision mechani-  
cal parts, which will collect dirt, wear out and deteriorate as  
this device is used. After this device has been used for a long  
period even in a normal environment, the heads, drums and  
tape transport mechanisms also collect dirt. Especially, dust  
which penetrates the inside of the VTR section during out-  
door use will promote the wear and deterioration of mechani-  
cal parts by causing poor contact between tape and heads or  
failing to maintain the video and audio quality at high levels.  
To prevent wear and deterioration, clean the mechanical  
parts using a head cleaning tape as routine maintenance.  
However, cleaning with a head cleaning tape alone is not  
enough for cleaning the entire tape transport mechanism, so  
it is also recommended to apply periodical maintenance  
(inspection) to prevent the sudden occurrence of failure. As  
the replacement, adjustment and servicing of parts require  
advanced skill and equipment, please consult the person in  
charge of professional video equipment at your nearest JVC-  
authorized service agent.  
Make sure that the power is between 11 V and 15 V DC. If  
the power voltage is too low, abnormal color and  
increased noise may occur.  
Allowable ambient temperature and humidity  
Be sure to use this device within the allowable tempera-  
ture range of 0°C to 40°C and a relative humidity of 30% to  
80%. Using this device at a temperature or humidity out-  
side the allowable ranges could result not only in malfunc-  
tion but the impact on the CCD elements could be serious  
as small white spots may be generated.  
Strong electromagnetic waves or magnetism  
Noise may appear in the picture or audio and/or the colors  
may be incorrect if the camera is used near a radio or tele-  
vision transmitting antenna, in places where strong mag-  
netic fields are generated by transformers, motors, etc., or  
near devices emitting radio waves, such as transceivers or  
cellular phones.  
For consultations related to the maintenance planning or  
cost, please contact the person in charge of professional  
video equipment at your nearest JVC-authorized service  
agent.  
Precautions for Use of  
Head Cleaning Tape  
The camera may not show stable pictures in the period  
immediately after the power is turned on, but this is not a  
malfunction.  
A sound occurs when the built-in head cleaner that runs  
when you load or eject a videocassette operates, but this  
is not a malfunction.  
Please use cleaning tape produced by JVC.  
Adhere to the following precautions when using the head  
cleaning tape.  
1. Insert the cleaning tape.  
Use of wireless microphone near the camera  
The LCD monitor and the viewfinder screen  
Press the PLAY/STILL button after the cleaning tape is  
fully loaded.  
The tape runs for 10 seconds at a time in the PLAY  
mode. (The tape stops automatically and then this device  
enters the STOP mode.)  
When  
a
wireless microphone or wireless microphone  
The LCD monitor and the viewfinder screen are manufac-  
tured using high-precision technology. Black spots may  
appear on the LCD monitor and the viewfinder screen, or  
red, blue, green and/or white spots may not turn off. How-  
ever, this is not a malfunction and these spots are not  
recorded on the tape.  
If you use this device continuously for a long period of  
time, the characters displayed in the viewfinder may tem-  
porarily remain on the screen. This is not recorded on the  
tape. In addition, they are no longer displayed if you turn  
the power off and then on again.  
If you use this device in a cold location, the images may  
appear to lag on the screen, but this is not a malfunction.  
This is not recorded on the tape.  
Do not insert fingers or foreign objects into the cassette  
insertion slot as this may result in personal injury or dam-  
age to the mechanism.  
Head Cleaning  
To maintain beautiful pictures and sound, be sure to use a  
head cleaning tape to clean the head periodically.  
X See “Precautions for Use of Head Cleaning Tape”. If  
head cleaning is not performed periodically,  
mosaic noise called block noise may appear in the picture  
or sound may be interrupted.  
tuner is used near the camera during recording, the tuner  
could pick up noise.  
Avoid using or placing this device in places;  
subject to extreme heat or cold;  
with excessive dirt or dust;  
with high humidity or moisture;  
subject to smoke or vapour such as near a cooking  
stove;  
a
type of  
2. Do not use the tape more than four times at the most for  
each cleaning.  
Use the following chart as a guide for periodical head  
subject to strong vibrations or on an unstable surface;  
also do not leave this device for long hours in a parked  
car under direct sunlight or near room heating equip-  
ment.  
cleaning.  
Low  
Room  
High  
Running  
temperature  
temperature  
temperature  
Do not leave this device where it is subject to radiation or  
X-rays or where corrosive gasses occur.  
Protect this device from being splashed with water (espe-  
cially when shooting in the rain).  
Protect this device from being wet when shooting on a  
beach.  
In addition, salt and sand may adhere to the camera body.  
Be sure to clean the camera after use.  
Protect this device against penetration of dust when using  
it in a place subject to sandy dust.  
Optical performance of lens  
Due to the optical performance of the lens, color diver-  
gence phenomena (magnification chromatic aberration)  
may occur at the periphery of the image.  
Operating envi- 0°C to 10°C  
ronment  
10°C to 35°C  
35°C to 40°C  
Block Noise  
Yardstick  
use of cleaning ery 5 hours  
tape  
for 1 to 2 times ev- 1 to 2 times ev- 1 to 2 times ev-  
ery 20 to 30 ery 5 hours  
hours  
Please use cleaning tape produced by JVC. Do not use  
head cleaning tapes other than specified.  
X See “Precautions for Use of Head Cleaning Tape”  
about how to use the head cleaning tape and precautions  
for use of the head cleaning tape.  
When dust adheres to the heads, the warning message  
“HEAD CLEANING REQUIRED!” is displayed on the LCD  
monitor, and in the viewfinder during playback and record-  
ing check using the RET button on the lens section.  
To prevent damage to the connectors, use this device with  
the connector covers on when you are not using the video/  
audio signal output connectors.  
Note 1) When used in a low humidity environment, head  
cleaning should be conducted at intervals half of  
those given in the chart above.  
Note 2) If an M-DV80 tape is used immediately after head  
cleaning, the “HEAD CLEANING REQUIRED!”  
indicator may remain on. In this case, let the tape  
run as the indicator will turn off after the tape has  
run for a while.  
CAUTION  
Do not point the lens or viewfinder directly at the sun or  
other strong light source.  
Periodical Maintenance  
Contents : Check or replace the following mechanical parts  
Eye damage could result.  
This is not a camera malfunction.  
Note 3) Use the cleaning tape in the room temperature  
(10°C to 35°C).  
If the lens or viewfinder is left pointed at the sun, rays  
may collect inside this device and cause damage or a  
fire.  
Noise may appear in the viewfinder when switching  
between the playback picture and the EE picture.  
Use this device in an upright position.  
If placed on its side, heat release efficiency will deterio-  
rate, adversely affecting the tape transport. Depending on  
circumstances the tape may also be damaged.  
Vibrations  
Colors may fail to appear and/or the image and sound  
may be disturbed during VTR playback in locations sub-  
jected to strong vibrations.  
according to the running time.  
Note 4) The cleaning tape case contains instructions for  
use of the cleaning tape. However, some of these  
instructions differ from the contents of this sheet.  
When using the cleaning tape, please follow the  
instructions of this sheet.  
Note 5) If the “HEAD CLEANING REQUIRED!” does not  
disappear after repeated head cleanings, the  
recording tape may be abnormal. Avoid excessive  
repeated use of the head cleaning tape.  
Usage Time  
500H 1000H 1500H 2000H  
When carrying the camera, be sure to hold the carrying  
handle. Holding the lens or viewfinder may result in  
damage.  
Drum assembly (includ-  
ing heads)  
G
E
E
F
Tape guides, rollers  
Belt gears  
G
H
H
E
E
H
E
E
E
F
F
F
Drive parts  
G: Clean, check and adjust.  
E: Clean and check. Replace as required.  
F: Replace.  
Precautions for transportation  
Do not drop or hit this device against a hard object.  
Remove the videocassette before transporting this device.  
6
7
INTRODUCTION  
For recording and storing  
videotapes in the best con-  
dition  
Battery Pack to be Used  
Condensation  
Characteristic CCD Phe-  
nomena  
The GY-HD250/GY-HD251 can use any of the following bat-  
teries. (Factory setting)  
U model: Anton Bauer battery  
If this device has been cooled down in a cold place and is  
then carried to a warm place, the moisture contained in  
the warm air may adhere to the head drum or tape guides  
and be cooled into water droplets. This phenomenon is  
referred to as condensation (dew). When this occurs, the  
head drum and tape guides are covered with droplets  
allowing the tape to be stuck to them, leading to tape dam-  
age.  
Smear and Blooming  
Due to the physical structure of a CCD it is possible to induce  
vertical streaking (called “smear”) when shooting an  
extremely bright light source. Another effect is the expansion  
of light around a bright light or object (called “blooming”).  
The CCD employed in this device is characterized by induc-  
ing very little smear or blooming. Nevertheless, please take  
note that smear or blooming may be induced when shooting  
a bright light source.  
Observe the following instructions for the best recording and  
storage of videotapes.  
Take care of the conditions of handling videotapes. It is  
recommended that you record and store videotapes in the  
environment below.  
E model: IDX battery  
Recommended batteries  
U model: Dionic 90 (Anton Bauer)  
E model: Endura-7 (IDX)  
Storage  
Condensation occurs in the following cases:  
Short period  
(Up to 10  
years)  
Long period  
(Over 10  
years)  
CAUTION  
Recording  
When this device is suddenly  
Smear  
Use only the recommended batteries.  
If a heavy battery is used, the battery may fall out depend-  
ing on the way the HD camera recorder is used.  
Vertical pale streaking appearing at high  
luminous object  
Head drum  
moved from  
warm place.  
a
cold place to  
a
Temperature  
Humidity  
17°C to 25°C 15°C to 23°C 15°C to 19°C  
When  
a
room heater has just  
30% to 70%  
40% to 55%  
25% to 35%  
High luminous object  
(Electric light, sunlight, etc.)  
started or when this device is  
exposed directly to cold air from  
an air conditioner.  
Hourly tempera-  
ture change  
Less than  
10°C  
H
H
Blooming  
Video tape  
Hourly humidity  
change  
Less than  
10%  
Blurring in highlight  
H
H
When this device is placed in a  
very humid place.  
Monitor screen  
Videocassette to be Used  
Moire or Aliasing  
Shooting stripes or fine patterns may cause a jagged effect  
or a banding in fine mesh patterns.  
Do not leave the videotapes neglected for a long period. If  
videotapes are left wound for a long period of time, it may  
result in distortion of the tape. Also it may cause tape-to-  
tape adhesion (known as blocking). It is recommended  
that videotapes be unspooled and rewound once a year  
for refreshing.  
When tapes are not in use, store them in cases and on  
end. Storage cases protect videotapes from humidity, dust  
and ultraviolet light. Keep tapes in cases and do not store  
them lying flat. When housed in a horizontal position, pres-  
sure from other tapes can cause distortions and deforma-  
tions of the tape edges.  
Do not leave the videocassette inserted when moving the  
camera under conditions where the temperature environ-  
ment changes.  
After moving this device, do not use until the internal parts  
have stabilized.  
Use JVC’s videocassette tapes marked with the  
symbol.  
A
White dots  
High temperatures can cause CCD sensor pixels to produce  
the effect of white dots in the image. This condition is con-  
spicuous especially when gain is applied.  
This is a characteristic of the charged-coupled device (CCD).  
As far as possible, use this device under conditions where  
the temperature of this device does not increase.  
Mini DV videocassette : M-DV63HD  
M-DV63PROHD  
* Do not use M-DV80.  
“CONDENSATION ON DRUM” is displayed on the LCD  
monitor and in the viewfinder when condensation occurs  
in this device.  
Videocassettes cannot be used upside down.  
Avoid storing a videocassette with its tape not being com-  
pletely wound, as this may damage the tape. Rewind it to  
the beginning before placing a cassette into storage.  
Store videocassettes in a place with little humidity and  
good ventilation where mould does not form.  
After a videocassette tape has been used repeatedly, it  
becomes unable to maintain full performance due to an  
increase in noise caused by dropouts, etc. Do not continue  
to use a dirty or damaged tape, as this will reduce the  
rotary head life.  
Videocassette tapes with the A symbol are provided  
with a switch on the back to prevent accidental erasure.  
Slide the switch to SAVE to protect the required recording  
in the tape from being overwritten.  
Keep the power on until the warning message disappears.  
Pay attention to condensation even before the condensa-  
tion indication appears.  
As condensation forms gradually, the condensation indica-  
tion may not appear for the first 10-15 minutes after con-  
densation has formed inside.  
To record on the tape, slide the switch to REC.  
Switch  
In an extremely cold place, the condensation could freeze  
and turn into frost. In such a case, it takes an additional 2-  
3 hours for the frost to first melt into condensation and  
then to be dissolved.  
To prevent condensation  
When moving this device from one place to another where  
the temperatures are greatly deferent, first remove the vid-  
eocassette, place this device in a tightly sealed vinyl bag,  
and then move it to a new environment.  
To ensure no condensation occurs, allow the temperature  
of this device in the bag to reach that of the new environ-  
ment before using it.  
8
9
CONTROLS, INDICATORS AND CONNECTORS  
6ZOOM servo control lever  
6[ZEBRA] Zebra switch  
To operate the servo zoom feature with this lever, set the  
ZOOM knob b to “S”.  
When this switch is ON, a zebra pattern is imposed on the  
viewfinder or LCD areas having luminance levels in accor-  
dance with the menu settings made for the video signal.  
This pattern can be used as a reference for manual adjust-  
ment of the lens iris. Zebra patterns are also displayed  
during color bar display when this switch is set to ON.  
ZOOM Lens  
Front Section  
Pressing the “W” section of this lever increases the  
angle of the lens for a wider shooting angle.  
Pressing the “T” section of this lever narrows the lens  
angle perspective for telephoto shots.  
The zoom lens is not provided with the GY-HD250CHU or  
the GY-HD251CHE.  
Pushing harder changes the speed of the zoom.  
The default value is 70% - 80%. The luminance level  
can be changed with the ZEBRA setting in the LCD/  
VF[1/4] menu screen.  
3
2
1
7IRIS mode switch  
Th16 × 5.5BRMU  
A
M
: Activates the auto iris feature.  
: Allows manual iris control.  
X See page 89.  
3
2
1
While this switch is pressed to the SKIN AREA side, the  
color tone areas specified with the SKIN COLOR ADJUST  
item on the ADVANCED PROCESS menu are indicated in  
the viewfinder. The switch returns to the OFF position  
when released.  
8Momentary auto iris button  
When the IRIS mode switch 7 is at “M”, pushing this but-  
ton activates the Auto Iris Function while it is held down  
only.  
4
X See “How to Use Skin Detail” on page 103.  
9[S] IRIS speed adjusting control  
*
The Skin Detail color tone areas are not indicated while  
the color bar or VTR playback picture is shown in the  
viewfinder or on the LCD monitor.  
For adjusting the iris operation speed.  
8
MEMO  
RET  
M
A
W
T
If the speed becomes too fast, hunting may occur. To avoid  
the phenomena described above, perform adjustment  
again.  
7[AWB] Auto white balance button  
When the WHT.BAL switch c on page 15 is set to A or B  
and you press this button, the white balance is automati-  
cally adjusted.  
7
6
5
0FILTER thread  
*
It is not activated in preset, full auto shooting, full auto  
white balance and color bar modes.  
4
5
6
7 8  
9
Protect the lens with a clear filter or UV filter by screwing  
the filter onto the thread inside the lens hood from the  
front.  
X See “White Balance Adjustment” on page 52.  
1Shoe  
8Lens mounting ring/Lens lock lever  
Hold the lens and use the lever to turn the ring anticlock-  
wise to release lens.  
0
d
Other filters can be used for various effects.  
Makes it possible to mount separately sold lights and  
accessories.  
aZOOM servo connector  
Connect an optional zoom servo unit here.  
To mount lens make sure the lens guide pin fits well, and  
then turn the ring clockwise until firm.  
X See “Attaching the Zoom Lens” on page 33.  
2Knob  
b[ZOOM] ZOOM mode knob  
This is the mounting knob for the microphone holder 3.  
S
: Servo zoom mode. Allows operation by the zoom  
servo control lever 6.  
3Microphone holder  
Makes it possible to attach the provided microphone or a  
separately sold microphone.  
M
: Manual zoom mode. Allows zoom control by the  
zoom lever/ring 2.  
X See “Attaching  
the  
Microphone  
(Provided)”  
on page 33.  
a
b
c
cBACK FOCUS ring/fixing screw  
For back focus adjustment only. Secure with the screw  
knob after adjustment. X See “Back Focus Adjustment”  
on page 51.  
4Front tally lamp  
1FOCUS ring  
Manual focus ring.  
This lamp lights up when the GY-HD250/GY-HD251 enters  
the record mode. It blinks during the transition to the  
record mode.  
When the tape has run out, or the VTR enters the warning  
mode, it blinks quickly.  
2ZOOM lever/ring  
dMacro focusing ring (for close-up shooting)  
By rotating this ring in the direction of the arrow, close-up  
shooting of very small objects becomes possible.  
Normal focus adjustment and zooming are not available in  
the macro mode.  
To shoot images in the macro mode, set the focus ring 1  
to the infinite position (f) and the zoom ring 2 to the max-  
imum wide-angle position. To adjust the focus of the  
macro image, rotate this ring in the direction of the arrow  
until the object is focused.  
This is the manual zoom ring equipped with a zoom lever.  
To adjust the zoom manually, turn the zoom mode knob b  
to position “M”.  
Use the FRONT TALLY item on the OTHERS[1/2] menu  
screen to select whether or not the lamp should light  
and the lighting pattern.  
3IRIS ring  
Manual iris ring. To activate the auto iris feature, set the  
Iris Mode switch 7 to “A”.  
X See page 96.  
5[LENS] Lens control connector  
Connect 12-pin lens control cable from lens here.  
4[VTR] VTR trigger button  
To start/stop shooting.  
5[RET] Return video button  
Pin  
No.  
Pin  
No.  
Function  
Return switch  
Function  
Iris position  
You can only monitor the return video signal from the VTR  
from the viewfinder, LCD monitor and video signal connec-  
tor while this button is pressed.  
When the camera control unit is connected, you can moni-  
tor the return video signal on the viewfinder while this but-  
ton is pressed. You cannot monitor from the LCD monitor  
or video output terminal.  
When you set the LENS RET item to “FOCUS ASSIST” in  
the SWITCH MODE menu screen, you can use this button  
as the FOCUS ASSIST button.  
CAUTION  
1
2
3
4
7
8
9
The back-focus knob is located close to the macro ring,  
be careful not to mistake the back-focus knob for the  
macro ring.  
After the required operation, be sure to return the macro  
focusing ring to the normal position.  
VTR trigger  
GND  
IRIS A/R INPUT  
EXTENDER position  
Lens AUTO/MANU con- 10 ZOOM position  
trol  
5
6
IRIS control  
+12V DC  
11  
12  
X See “Attaching the Zoom Lens” on page 33.  
X See “Back Focus Adjustment” on page 51.  
X See page 86.  
10  
11  
CONTROLS, INDICATORS AND CONNECTORS  
3Shoulder belt hooks  
Allows you to attach a separately sold shoulder belt.  
4[TC GENE.] Time code generator setting switch  
Switch for setting the time code generator to preset mode  
or regeneration mode. It is also used to select the time  
code run mode when the preset mode is selected.  
Rear Section  
LCD Door  
4LCD monitor  
Shows a color camera image or the VTR playback picture.  
It is also used for displaying the following:  
FREE  
: The preset mode is selected, and the time  
code run mode becomes the FREE run  
mode.  
Menu Setting screens  
Characters showing the whether the GY-HD250/GY-  
HD251 is set to shooting mode or VTR playback mode  
Date and time and time code  
Audio level meter  
Warning indications, etc.  
Set to this position to record with the time  
code or user’s bits set anew (preset). In this  
setting, the time code always operates in the  
run mode.  
1
LCD BRIGHT  
-
CAM/VTR  
+
*
If this setting is used when recording  
scenes one after another, the time codes  
become discontinuous at the transition  
points between scenes.  
X See page 22.  
2
5
1
2
AUDIO SELECT  
CH-2  
TC  
3
DISPLAY  
TC  
GENE.  
CH-1  
FREE  
AUTO  
MANU  
REC  
UB  
REGEN  
REC  
: The preset mode is selected, and the time  
code run mode becomes the REC run mode.  
Set to this position to record with the time  
code or user’s bits set anew (preset). The  
time code operates in the run mode during  
recording only. If this setting is used when  
recording scenes one after another, the time  
codes are recorded as continuous time  
codes.  
4
3
4
1[LCD BRIGHT +/–] LCD brightness +/– button  
This button is for adjusting the brightness of the LCD mon-  
itor display.  
Pushing the button in the + direction makes the monitor  
brighter.  
Pushing the button in the – direction makes the monitor  
darker.  
Pushing the +/– buttons simultaneously returns the set-  
ting to the standard setting.  
REGEN  
: Regeneration mode, in which this device  
reads existing time codes on the tape and  
records time codes in continuation of the  
existing ones. Set to this position when you  
want to add additional time codes to time  
codes already recorded on the tape.  
1Back tally lamp  
This lamp lights up when the GY-HD250/GY-HD251 enters  
the record mode. It blinks during the transition to the  
record mode.  
When the tape has run out, or the VTR enters the warning  
mode, it blinks quickly.  
2[CH-1/CH-2 AUDIO SELECT] CH-1/CH-2 audio selector  
switch  
Selects the method of adjusting the CH-1 and CH-2 audio  
channel audio levels.  
Use the BACK TALLY item on the OTHERS[1/2] menu  
screen to select whether or not the lamp should light  
and the lighting pattern.  
MEMO  
This switch is enabled when TCG SOURCE on the TC/  
UB/CLOCK menu screen is set to INTERNAL.  
Preset of time code and user’s bits is performed on the  
TC/UB/CLOCK menu.  
X See page 44.  
X See “TC/UB/CLOCK Menu Screen” on page 93.  
X See page 96.  
AUTO  
: The audio level is automatically adjusted  
according to the input level. When excessive  
audio is input, the limiter works to suppress  
the audio level.  
The “AUTO” LED in the CH-1/CH-2 AUDIO  
LEVEL area f on page 15 lights.  
: Allows you to adjust the audio levels using  
the CH-1/CH-2 AUDIO LEVEL volume con-  
trols f on page 15.  
Set AUDIO LIMITER on the AUDIO/MIC[1/2]  
menu screen to use limiter functions when  
excessive audio is input.  
2[PHONES] Earphone jack  
This is a stereo mini-jack for connecting an earphone for  
audio monitoring. Plug in an earphone or headphone with  
a 3.5 mm diameter plug. The earphone can also be used  
to monitor alarm tones in accordance with the circum-  
stances.  
The audio channel to be output is selected with the AUDIO  
MONITOR item on the AUDIO/MIC[2/2] menu screen and  
MONITOR SELECT switch d on page 19.  
5[CAM/VTR] Camera/VTR mode switch button  
Each time you press this button, the mode switches  
between camera mode and VTR mode.  
When you do this, the VTR indicator f on page 19 dis-  
plays the following statuses.  
While the mode is being switched: Flashing  
In VTR mode  
In camera mode  
MANU  
The audio output level is adjusted with the Audio monitor  
volume control 3 on page 14.  
: Lit  
: Off  
X See “AUDIO LIMITER” on page 87.  
MEMO  
Select the Camera mode to record the camera image.  
3[TC DISPLAY] TC/UB display switch  
Selects the contents displayed on the TC counter of the  
LCD monitor or in the viewfinder. (This switch works when  
the TC/UB item on the LCD/VF[3/4] menu screen is set to  
ON.)  
The volume of the alarm sound is set with the ALARM  
VR LEVEL item on the OTHERS[1/2] menu screen.  
When using a stereotype jack and stereo sound should  
be output, the following setting should be performed.  
Set the MONITOR SELECT switch d on page 19 to  
BOTH.  
Select the VTR mode to playback VTR or to input the  
HDV/DV signal from the IEEE1394 connector 0 on  
page 16.  
When the power is turned on, the mode becomes the  
Camera mode.  
TC  
: Set to this position to display time code values.  
UB : Set to this position to display the user’s bits values.  
Set the AUDIO MONITOR item on the AUDIO/MIC[2/2]  
menu screen to STEREO.  
12  
13  
CONTROLS, INDICATORS AND CONNECTORS  
7Clamp  
Attach the cable from the viewfinder here.  
a[STATUS] Status/Menu button  
d[POWER] Power ON/OFF switch  
Switch that turns the power ON/OFF.  
When the power is OFF, POFF” is displayed in the LCD  
monitor or viewfinder.  
Pressing this button in the normal screen mode (condi-  
tion in which the menu screen is not shown) displays a  
status screen in the viewfinder or on the LCD monitor.  
The displayed status screen changes each time the but-  
ton is pressed.  
Right Side Section  
8[USER1/2/3] User buttons  
You can assign camera functions to the USER1 - 3 but-  
tons.  
Use them to switch shooting conditions depending upon  
the subject.  
*
Wait at least 5 seconds if you need to turn the power on  
again.  
X See “Status Screens” on page 22.  
e[REC] REC trigger button (start/stop recording)  
Start and stop recording using this button.  
(This works together with the REC trigger button on the  
top and the lens VTR trigger button.)  
When “SPLIT” is set for the 1394 REC TRIGGER item on  
the OTHERS[2/2] menu screen, this button becomes the  
start/stop recording button for an external device.  
X See page 97.  
Pressing this button for more than 1 second in the nor-  
mal screen mode displays the menu screen in the view-  
finder or on the LCD monitor. Pressing this button while  
the menu screen is displayed in the viewfinder or on the  
LCD monitor makes the menu screen disappear.  
X See “Setting Menu Screens” on page 75.  
2
1
Set them using the USER1  
MODE menu screen.  
X See page 86.  
-
3
items in the SWITCH  
Use this button to preset the time code.  
X See page 46.  
5
4
3
6
7
h
i
MEMO  
b[GAIN] Sensitivity selector switch  
Electronically boosts the light sensitivity when there is  
insufficient illumination on the subject.  
The boosting level differs depending on the switch position  
as follows:  
VF BRIGHT  
The USER buttons work together with the menu settings.  
When a menu screen is being displayed, they also func-  
tion as menu operation buttons. X See “Setting Menu  
Screens” on page 75.  
X See “Backup Recording” on page 70.  
8
USER  
1
USER  
2
USER  
3
f[CH-1/CH-2 AUDIO LEVEL] CH-1/CH-2 Audio level con-  
trols and AUTO LED  
Allow you to adjust the audio level for the CH-1 and CH-2  
audio channels.  
9
0
ND FILTER  
2
1
MENU  
(Factory presets)  
STATUS  
a
WHT.BAL  
L
: 0 dB (no boosting is applied)  
AUTO  
CH-1  
AUTO  
9[SHUTTER] Shutter/Menu dial  
AUDIO  
To use these controls, set the CH-1/CH-2 AUDIO  
SELECT switch 2 on page 13 to “MANU”.  
When the FULL AUTO switch g on page 19 or the CH-  
1/CH-2 AUDIO SELECT switch 2 on page 13 is set to  
“AUTO”, “AUTO” LED lights. (The audio level controls  
do not work.)  
LEVEL  
CH-2  
b
c
M : 9 dB (boosted to approximately 3 times the original)  
H : 18 dB (boosted to approximately 8 times the original)  
Every time this dial is pressed while in the normal  
screen mode (when the menu screen is not displayed),  
the shutter speed switches between on/off.  
ON  
OFF  
POWER  
REC  
The boosting level for each switch position can be  
changed with the SWITCH MODE menu screen.  
X See page 86.  
d
e
f
g
When this dial is turned 1 click up or down in the normal  
screen mode, the shutter speed indicator is shown for  
about 3 seconds on the LCD monitor or in the view-  
finder. The shutter speed is changed when this dial is  
turned while the shutter speed indicator is shown.  
X See page 86.  
The more the boosting level is increased, the more the  
resulting image will be noisy.  
1Monitoring speaker (Cheek pad)  
g[HDV/DV LED]  
In the Camera mode, the input sound can be EE moni-  
tored.  
In camera mode, this lights according to the setting for  
When the FULL AUTO switch g on page 19 is “ON”,  
this is fixed at “ALC”.  
the video format being shot.  
In the VTR mode, the speaker outputs the VTR play-  
back sound. In the VTR mode, the HDV/DV input sound  
can be EE monitored.  
In VTR mode, it lights according to the video format  
being recorded on tape or the IEEE1394 input video for-  
mat.  
When this dial turned upward or downward while the  
menu screen is displayed, the cursor (K) also moves  
upward or downward to allow selection of items in the  
menu. To change the setting value of the item, press  
this dial. When the setting value starts blinking, turn this  
dial upward or downward to change the setting.  
X See “Setting Menu Screens” on page 75.  
c[WHT.BAL] White balance switch  
Three white balance modes are selectable with this  
switch.  
The sound to be output is selected with the MONITOR  
SELECT switch d on page 19.  
The sound level is adjusted with the MONITOR sound  
level volume 3. This speaker also outputs various  
warning sounds superimposed on other sound.  
HDV  
DV  
: Lights when the format is HDV.  
: Lights when the format is DV.  
B
: Switch into white balance mode memorized  
in B. If white balance is performed with the  
switch in this position, it will be memorized  
into B.  
HDV/DV : Turns off when the format is 1080i.  
X See “Alarm Sound” on page 109.  
MEMO  
2Cheek pad set screw  
Screw for adjusting the height of the cheek pad.  
0[ND FILTER] ND filter switch  
Switches the built-in ND filter.  
A
: Switch into white balance mode memorized  
in A. If white balance is performed with the  
switch in this position, it will be memorized  
into A.  
During  
a
system error, HDV/DV flash alternately.  
X See page 108.  
3[MONITOR] Audio monitor volume control  
Adjusts the volume of the monitoring loudspeaker and ear-  
phone.  
OFF : Turns the filter OFF (FILTER OFF)  
Select whether or not to have this light in the FORMAT  
LED item on the OTHERS[1/2] menu screen.  
X See page 96.  
1
2
:
:
Cuts the light intensity to approximately 1/4. (1/4ND)  
Cuts the light intensity to approximately 1/16. (1/16ND)  
PRST  
: Switch into white balance mode (3200K or  
(PRESET) 5600K) set in PRESET TEMP. item on the  
CAMERA OPERATION menu screen.  
X See page 80.  
When you change this switch, the type of the new ND filter  
is displayed in the LCD monitor or viewfinder.  
4[VF BRIGHT] Viewfinder brightness adjustment  
To adjust the brightness of the viewfinder.  
X See page 50.  
hLCD door lock and release knob  
To open the LCD door, move this knob on the direction  
toward the rear section.  
CAUTION  
FAW (Full Auto White Balance) mode can be set to A, B or  
PRESET with the SWITCH MODE menu screen.  
X See page 86.  
In the FAW mode, video color temperatures are constantly  
sampled for automatic adjustment to a proper white bal-  
ance.  
5[PEAKING] Contour adjustment  
To adjust the contours of the LCD monitor and viewfinder  
image.  
If you switch the ND filter while shooting is in progress, the  
picture may be disturbed or noise may occur in the audio.  
X See “Camera Settings” on page 55.  
iLCD door  
LCD monitor door.  
*
When the Focus Assist function is running, this control  
does not operate.  
The LCD monitor is located on the inner side of the door.  
The LCD monitor can be viewed when this door is opened.  
The door can be turned to change the orientation of the  
LCD monitor, and it can be rotated so that it can be  
accommodated in the main body of the camera.  
X See page 50.  
X See page 50.  
When the FULL AUTO switch g on page 19 is “ON”,  
6[FOCUS ASSIST] Focus assist button  
When you press this button during shooting, the area of  
focus is displayed in blue, red or green, making it easy to  
focus accurately.  
this is fixed at “FAW”.  
MEMO  
Fine-tune red and blue to match the white adjusted in auto  
white balance in WHITE PAINT<R>/<B> on the WHITE  
BALANCE menu screen. (Available only when this switch is  
set to A or B.)  
MEMO  
When FOCUS ASSIST on the LCD/VF[1/4] menu screen is  
set to ACCU-FOCUS and this button is pressed, ACCU  
FOCUS functions with FOCUS ASSIST. This makes depth of  
field shallower, making it easier to focus.  
X See “WHITE BALANCE Menu Screen” on page 85.  
This button has the same function as the FOCUS  
ASSIST button 7 in the Top Section.  
X See “LCD/VF[1/4] Menu Screen” on page 89.  
14  
15  
CONTROLS, INDICATORS AND CONNECTORS  
4[INPUT1/INPUT2] INPUT1/INPUT2 audio input connec-  
tors  
These are audio input connectors for connecting to an  
external audio device or microphone.  
g[GENLOCK/AUX IN] GENLOCK/AUX IN terminal (BNC)  
d
c
e
Input synchronization signals in this terminal when  
externally synchronizing camera images or playback  
images.  
Left Side Section  
Set the [AUDIO INPUT] switch  
device to be connected.  
3
according to the  
Synchronization signal: BB (Black Burst) signal of SD  
or Tri sync signal of HD  
Set the CH-2 audio input connector using the [CH-2  
INPUT] switch 2.  
The CH-2 audio from the set connector is recorded.  
Input composite video signals to record images from an  
external device with this device.  
Select the signal to input with the [GENLOCK/AUX IN]  
switch c.  
g
h
i
j
k
9
8
7
5Shoulder pad slide button  
1
2
f
X See “Using GENLOCK Functions” on page 66.  
X See “Recording Composite Video Signals from an  
External Device” on page 65.  
Button to adjust the position of the shoulder pad.  
When you press this button, you can move the position of  
the shoulder pad 6 forward or backward.  
3
h[HD/SD-SDI] HD/SD-SDI output terminal (BNC)  
Outputs HD/SD-SDI (Serial Digital Interface) signals. Out-  
puts embedded audio signals as digital audio.  
The sampling frequency for embedded audio is 48 kHz.  
In addition, the time code for the built-in time code genera-  
tor and playback time code are output.  
6Shoulder pad  
7Cassette cover  
a
Sliding the EJECT switch a on page 18 located on the  
top section opens this cover to allow insertion or removal  
of the videocassette.  
b
a[STUDIO] Studio terminal (Round 10-pin)  
Connect the studio cable from the KA-HD250 Studio Kit  
(sold separately). Connect the KA-HD250 to use this  
device as a studio camera.  
0
6
5
4
X See pages 20 and 21 for the signals that are enabled.  
CAUTION  
1Viewfinder connector (6-pin)  
Connect the cable from the viewfinder here.  
To prevent foreign objects from entering the internal parts of  
the VTR unit, do not leave this device with the cover open  
for extended periods of time.  
MEMO  
For details, refer to the KA-HD250 INSTRUCTION MAN-  
UAL.  
Set the image format for this terminal in VF SIGNAL on  
the LCD/VF[4/4] menu screen. X See page 92.  
Set whether or not to output SDI signals from this terminal  
in HD/SD-SDI OUT of the VIDEO FORMAT[2/2] menu  
screen.  
b[DC INPUT] DC input terminal (XLR 4-pin)  
This is the 12V DC power input terminal. Connect to the  
AC adapter.  
When a battery is installed and a cable is connected to this  
terminal, power supply from the battery stops and power is  
supplied by this terminal.  
2[CH-2 INPUT] CH-2 audio input connector selector  
switch  
8[VIDEO OUT] Video output terminal (RCA)  
This is a terminal for composite video signal output.  
i[Y] Component Y signal output terminal (BNC)  
Outputs Y signal of component when the [PBPR/TC] switch  
d is set to PBPR.  
Selects the CH-2 audio input connector.  
Select whether or not to output a signal with setup in  
SET UP on the VIDEO FORMAT[2/2] menu screen.  
(Only for U model)  
INPUT1  
: Inputs the audio from the INPUT1 connector  
4 into CH-2.  
: Inputs the audio from the INPUT2 connector  
4 into CH-2.  
c[GENLOCK/AUX IN] GENLOCK/AUX IN switch  
Set according to the signal input in the [GENLOCK/AUX  
IN] terminal.  
GENLOCK : Set to this when inputting external synchroni-  
zation signals.  
INPUT2  
j[PB/TC IN] Component PB signal output/time code  
input terminal (BNC)  
9[AUDIO OUTPUT CH-1/CH-2] Audio output connector  
(RCA)  
Output connector for audio signals.  
Outputs PB signal of component when the [PBPR/TC]  
switch d is set to PBPR.  
MEMO  
Outputs the input audio signal in the Camera mode.  
Outputs the playback audio signal in the VTR mode.  
When a HDV/DV signal (IEEE1394) is input, the EE  
sound of the input audio signal is output in the VTR  
mode.  
AUX IN  
: Set to this when inputting composite video  
Inputs time code when the [PBPR/TC] switch d is set to  
TC. Enter the LTC time code to slave lock this device’s  
time code generator with an external time code genera-  
tor.  
The audio from the INPUT1 connector is also input into  
CH-1 regardless of the setting.  
signals from an external device.  
MEMO  
3[AUDIO INPUT] Audio input signal selector switch  
This switch is used to select the input sound signal from  
INPUT1 or INPUT2 connector.  
If no signals are input to the [AUX IN] terminal and this  
switch is set to AUX IN, the monitor turns black and video is  
not output from any terminal.  
MEMO  
MEMO  
Set TCG SOURCE on the TC/UB/CLOCK Menu screen to  
EXTERNAL to input external time codes.  
X See “Synchronizing with an External Time Code Gener-  
ator” on page 49.  
LINE  
: Set to this position when connected to audio  
equipment, etc. The reference input level is  
+4 dBs.  
: Set to this position when the dynamic micro-  
phone is connected.  
Alarm sound is not output.  
d[PBPR/TC] PBPR/Time code switch  
Set according to the [PB/TC IN] and [PR/TC OUT] terminal  
signals.  
PBPR : Set to this when outputting component PB signals  
from the [PB/TC IN] terminal and outputting com-  
ponent PR signals from the [PR/TC OUT] terminal.  
0[IEEE1394] IEEE1394 connector (6-pin)  
MIC  
Using an IEEE1394 cable (optional), a digital video com-  
ponent with IEEE1394 connector can be connected here.  
X See “Connecting the IEEE1394 Cable” on page 64.  
X See “HDV/DV Dubbing” on page 68.  
k[PB/TC OUT] Component PB signal output/time code  
output terminal (BNC)  
MIC+48V : Set to this position when  
requiring +48 power supply (phantom  
microphone, etc.) is connected.  
a
microphone  
V
TC  
: Set to this when inputting LTC time code from the  
[PB/TC IN] terminal and outputting the built-in time  
code generator from the [PR/TC OUT] terminal.  
Outputs PR signal of component when the [PBPR/TC]  
switch d is set to PBPR.  
CAUTION  
Outputs the LTC time code of the built-in time code gen-  
erator when the [PBPR/TC] switch d is set to TC.  
CAUTION  
When connecting the IEEE1394 cable, confirm that the  
connector is facing the right direction before inserting.  
X See page 64.  
MEMO  
When connecting a component that does not require +48 V  
power supply, make sure that the switch is not set to  
MIC+48V before the component is connected.  
When this switch is set to TC, video is not output from the  
MEMO  
Y/PB/PR terminal (i j k).  
Set the [Y/PB/PR] terminal (i j k) output image signal to  
RGB or Y/C video signals in OUTPUT TERM. [DV] on the  
VIDEO FORMAT[2/2] menu screen. (Only for DV format)  
X See “OUTPUT TERM. [DV]” on page 79.  
MEMO  
e[IEEE1394] IEEE1394 switch  
MEMO  
Put the covers on the connectors when you are not using  
them.  
Set according to the image format of the input/output sig-  
nal and playback signal of the IEEE1394 terminal.  
HDV : Set to this for HDV format.  
You can select the normal input level for MIC and MIC+48V  
in the INPUT1, 2 MIC REF. item on the AUDIO/MIC[1/2]  
menu screen.  
DV  
: Set to this for DV format.  
X See page 87.  
f[REMOTE] REMOTE terminal (Round 6-pin)  
Some functions of this camera can be controlled exter-  
nally.  
Connect to a remote control unit (RM-LP55/RM-LP57).  
X See “Connect a Remote Control Unit (RM-LP55/RM-  
LP57)” on page 71.  
16  
17  
CONTROLS, INDICATORS AND CONNECTORS  
MEMO  
d[MONITOR SELECT] Audio monitor selector switch  
This switch is used to select the monitor sound output and  
playback sound output from the monitoring speaker 1 on  
page 14 or the PHONES jack 2 on page 12.  
CAUTION  
When FOCUS ASSIST on the LCD/VF[1/4] menu screen  
When the power is turned on while the camera is in the  
FAS mode, it takes about 10 seconds before the automatic  
adjustment of FAS is completed.  
All of the previous setting contents are recalled when the  
FAS mode is cancelled.  
Top Section  
is set to ACCU-FOCUS and this button is pressed,  
ACCU FOCUS functions with FOCUS ASSIST. This  
makes depth of field shallower, making it easier to focus.  
This button has the same function as the FOCUS  
ASSIST button 6 in the Right Side Section.  
CH-1 : The CH-1 channel audio is output.  
BOTH : CH-1 and CH-2 channel audio are output mixed.  
When this setting is selected, the menu screen  
can be used to select whether the mixed sound  
or stereo sound should be output via the  
PHONES jack. (AUDIO MONITOR item on the  
AUDIO/MIC[2/2] menu screen)  
5
6
h[STOP] Stop button  
Press to enter the stop mode.  
X See “LCD/VF[1/4] Menu Screen” on page 89.  
8[REC] REC trigger button (start/stop recording)  
Start and stop recording using this button.  
(This works together with the REC trigger button on the  
right panel and the lens VTR trigger button.)  
i[REW] Rewind button  
Press this button to rewind the tape.  
When AUDIO MONITOR item on the AUDIO/  
MIC[2/2] menu screen is set to “STEREO”, only  
the audio of CH-1 is output from the monitoring  
speaker.  
Pressing this button in the stop or fast forward mode ini-  
tiates the rewind mode. (Only for VTR mode)  
Pressing this button during playback, still picture play-  
back or forward search initiates reverse search.  
7
8
9
9[REC LOCK] REC LOCK switch  
Slide this switch in the direction of the arrow to lock the  
[REC] trigger button 8. Use this to prevent unwanted  
recording.  
(The REC trigger button on the right panel and the lens  
VTR trigger button are not locked.)  
4
3
CH-2 : The CH-2 channel audio is output.  
j[PLAY/STILL] Play/still button  
X See “Outputting Audio” on page 63.  
X See “AUDIO/MIC[2/2] Menu Screen” on page 88.  
Press to start playback. Press to enter the still picture  
mode during playback, in the stop mode or in the search  
mode.  
Depending on the ambient temperature, if still image play-  
back mode continues for between 30 seconds and 3 min-  
utes, it stops automatically. (Tape protect mode)  
During still picture playback and search mode, press this  
button to return to the normal playback mode.  
0
2
CAUTION  
1
0SD memory card cover  
When you open this cover, you can insert and remove the  
SD memory card.  
X See “Inserting an SD Memory Card” on page 34.  
When an SD memory card is loaded  
Make sure to move switches all the way. Do not leave a  
switch stopped in a midway position. Noise will be gener-  
ated and operation irregularities will occur.  
l
d
a
b
e[DISPLAY] Display button  
e
f
g
You can save, call up and reset the menu settings on  
GY-HD250/GY-HD251.  
*
If the auto tracking is active at the moment the play  
mode is entered, the playback video will be interfered  
with digital noise.  
When LCD+VF in the LCD/VF[4/4] menu display is set  
to OFF, press the DISPLAY button for 2 seconds to  
switch between the LCD screen and the viewfinder  
screen.  
You can initialize (format) an SD memory card.  
X See “FILE MANAGE Menu Screen” on page 100.  
k[FF] Fast forward button  
Press this button to fast forward the tape.  
a[EJECT] Eject switch and LED  
Slide this switch to the side to insert or eject a videocas-  
sette tape.  
When LCD+VF in the LCD/VF[4/4] menu display is set  
h
i
j
k
to ON, press the DISPLAY button for  
2
seconds to  
Pressing this button in the stop or rewind mode initiates  
the fast forward mode. (Only for VTR mode)  
Pressing this button during playback, still picture play-  
back or reverse search initiates forward search.  
switch the LCD screen ON and OFF. Press the DIS-  
PLAY button briefly to change the display mode for the  
LCD screen as follows.  
The LED lights while ejecting is in progress.  
MEMO  
c
lScrew holes for mounting accessories  
You can mount lights and other accessories.  
Only image displayed  
Characters shown enlarged  
It takes  
a
few seconds before the videocassette is  
ejected. Do not close the cassette cover during the eject  
operation.  
Image and characters displayed  
1Viewfinder  
Displays the camera image and the playback picture.  
Do not touch the cassette insertion slot or cassette dur-  
ing the eject operation. This could result in damage.  
X See “Magnified Status Indications on the LCD Monitor”  
on page 29.  
f[VTR] VTR indicator  
MEMO  
bOperation cover  
Open this cover when operating in the playback mode.  
Otherwise, keep this cover closed.  
This indicator lights when the camera is in the VTR mode.  
To perform VTR playback or to input the HDV/DV signal  
from the IEEE1394 connector 0 on page 16, press the  
CAM/VTR button 5 on page 13 to turn on this indicator.  
It flashes when the mode is being changed.  
Set the image format for the viewfinder to RGB, compo-  
nent, composite, or Y signal in VF SIGNAL on the LCD/  
VF[4/4] menu screen. X See page 92.  
This cover can be opened by sliding it to the side.  
2Eyepiece  
MEMO  
g[FULL AUTO] Full auto shooting (FAS) switch  
This is the ON/OFF switch for FAS mode.  
Ensures that ambient light does not reach the viewfinder  
screen or falls into the eye of the cameraman.  
When the STOP button h is pressed in the Camera mode  
to set the VTR operation mode indicator to indicate STOP,  
playback operations become possible.  
During FAS mode, “FAS” is displayed on the LCD moni-  
tor or the viewfinder.  
3Eyepiece focus ring  
You can adjust the focus by turning this ring.  
FAS mode works together with the auto iris and auto  
level control (ALC) modes and automatically adjusts to  
the optimal video signal level and white balance.  
You can select automatic adjustment mode or manual  
adjustment mode for audio recording level.  
X See “AUDIO/MIC[2/2] Menu Screen” on page 88.  
Even if there are color bars, this automatically sets to  
camera video.  
Auto iris mode operates even if the lens iris mode  
switch is set to the manual position.  
The gain changes continuously until it reaches the max-  
imum ALC MAX setting, and the shutter speed also  
changes continuously.  
4Eyepiece mounting ring  
You can adjust the position of the eyepiece forward or  
backward by loosening this ring.  
cBattery adapter  
Attach the battery.  
U model: Anton Bauer battery  
E model: IDX battery  
X See “Battery Operation” on page 37.  
5Slide mounting ring  
You can adjust the position of the viewfinder left or right by  
loosening this ring.  
6Clamp  
Attach the microphone cable here.  
7[FOCUS ASSIST] Focus assist button  
When you press this button during shooting, the area of  
focus is displayed in blue, red or green, making it easy to  
focus accurately.  
When you release FAS mode, all of the settings return  
to their previous modes.  
18  
19  
CONTROLS, INDICATORS AND CONNECTORS  
When Recording HDV or DV Images from the IEEE1394 Terminal  
Component / SDI Out  
[HDV PB OUTPUT] menu item  
Recording and Image Out-  
put Formats  
Recording  
(IEEE1394 In)  
Rec on  
Tape  
Composite  
Out  
RGB Out Y/C Out  
NATIVE  
q
720P  
q
1080I  
1080/60i  
1080/60i  
1080/50i  
1080/50i  
1080/60i  
N/A  
NTSC  
480/60i  
480/60i  
N/A  
PAL  
N/A  
720/60p  
720/30p  
720/50p  
720/25p  
720/24p  
480/60p  
576/50p  
480/60i  
q
q
480/60i*1 480/60i*1  
480/60i*1 480/60i*1  
576/50i*2 576/50i*2  
576/50i*2 576/50i*2  
480/60i*1 480/60i*1  
480/60i  
480/60i  
576/50i  
576/50i  
480/60i  
N/A  
720/60p  
q
q
N/A  
This device supports HDV and DV image formats, as well as images input from external devices. This device also has various  
output terminals. (Composite, analog component, HD/SD-SDI, IEEE1394)  
Select analog component, RGB or Y/C signals for images from the Y/PB/PR terminal in DV format.  
(Select in OUTPUT TERM. [DV] on the VIDEO FORMAT[2/2] menu screen)  
q
q
576/50i  
576/50i  
N/A  
HDV  
q
720/50p  
720/60p  
N/A  
q
N/A  
q
q
480/60i  
N/A  
During recording and playback, image formats from each of the output terminals are as shown in the table below.  
N/A  
N/A  
q
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
q
N/A  
N/A  
q
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
Notes about the table  
(Shaded): Indicates the setting item in the VIDEO FORMAT menu screen.  
q
q
N/A: Terminal is not available.  
U model  
480/  
60i(24p)  
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
: Same format as the left.  
DV  
576/50i  
When recording camera images  
Recording (Shooting)  
E model  
576/  
50i(25p)  
Rec on  
Tape  
IEEE  
1394 Out  
Component / SDI Out  
(EE Out)  
Composite  
Out  
RGB Out Y/C Out  
*1  
*2  
When HDV PB OUTPUT is set to NTSC, 480/60i format video signal is output.  
When HDV PB OUTPUT is set to PAL, 576/50i format video signal is output.  
[REC] menu item  
HDV-HD60P  
HDV-HD30P  
HDV-HD50P  
HDV-HD25P  
HDV-HD24P  
Format  
720/60p  
720/30p  
720/50p  
720/25p  
720/24p  
480/60i  
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
720/60p  
q
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
q
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
q
480/60i  
480/60i  
576/50i  
576/50i  
480/60i  
q
MEMO  
HD  
(HDV)  
Synchronize the setting for FRAME RATE on the VIDEO FORMAT menu screen with the frame rate of the IEEE1394 input signal.  
720/50p  
720/60p  
q
When Recording Composite Images from the AUX IN Terminal  
DV-60I  
DV-24P  
Rec on  
Tape  
IEEE  
1394 Out  
Compos-  
ite Out  
U model only  
E model only  
480/60i(24p)  
q
q
q
q
Recording (Composite In)  
Component/SDI Out (EE Out)  
RGB Out  
Y/C Out  
DV  
HD  
DV-24PA 480/60i(24p)  
q
q
q
q
DV-50I  
576/50i  
q
q
q
q
HD  
DV-25P  
576/50i(25p)  
q
q
q
q
U model  
E model  
480/60i  
576/50i  
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
[1080I CAMERA]  
menu item  
Rec on  
Tape  
IEEE  
1394 Out  
Composite  
Out  
SD  
Frame rate  
Component / SDI Out RGB Out Y/C Out  
60/30  
50/25  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
1080/60i  
1080/50i  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
480/60i  
576/50i  
MEMO  
ON  
For the U model, set REC on the VIDEO FORMAT[1/2] menu screen to DV-60I.  
For the E model, set REC on the VIDEO FORMAT[1/2] menu screen to DV-50I.  
In PLAY mode  
Component / SDI Out  
[HDV PB OUTPUT] menu item  
IEEE  
1394  
Out  
Composite  
Out  
Playback  
RGB Out Y/C Out  
NATIVE  
q
720P  
q
1080I  
1080/60i  
1080/60i  
1080/50i  
1080/50i  
1080/60i  
N/A  
NTSC  
480/60i  
480/60i  
N/A  
PAL  
N/A  
720/60p  
720/30p  
720/50p  
720/25p  
720/24p  
480/60p  
576/50p  
q
q
480/60i*1 480/60i*1  
480/60i*1 480/60i*1  
576/50i*2 576/50i*2  
576/50i*2 576/50i*2  
480/60i*1 480/60i*1  
480/60i  
480/60i  
576/50i  
576/50i  
480/60i  
N/A  
720/60p  
q
q
N/A  
q
q
576/50i  
576/50i  
N/A  
HDV  
q
720/50p  
720/60p  
N/A  
q
N/A  
q
q
480/60i  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
q
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
q
N/A  
N/A  
q
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
480/60i  
q
q
U model  
E model  
480/  
60i(24p)  
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
DV  
576/50i  
576/  
50i(25p)  
*1  
*2  
When HDV PB OUTPUT is set to NTSC, 480/60i format video signal is output.  
When HDV PB OUTPUT is set to PAL, 576/50i format video signal is output.  
MEMO  
Synchronize the setting for FRAME RATE in the VIDEO FORMAT menu screen with the frame rate of the playback signal.  
20  
21  
CONTROLS, INDICATORS AND CONNECTORS  
The contents of the status display are divided into those for  
the Camera mode and those for the VTR mode.  
Status Screens in the Camera Mode  
Indications on the LCD  
Monitor and in the View-  
finder  
Each time the STATUS button is pressed in the Camera  
mode, one of 5 status screens is displayed. (STATUS 0, 1,  
2, 3, 4)  
External Image Input Mode (AUX IN)  
0
1
0
a
One type of screen is displayed in the VTR mode.  
CAMERA MODE (display example)  
D V- 6 0 I A U X  
266S DD  
266S DD  
In addition to showing the EE image and the playback pic-  
ture, the LCD monitor and viewfinder are also used for the  
following character displays.  
To show characters on the LCD monitor, press the DISPLAY  
button briefly.  
9
8
7
6
5
4
1
STATUS 0  
STATUS 1  
2
3
2
3
STATUS 0 Screen  
STATUS 0 Screen  
STATUS 0  
1
Event Indication  
When the Gain or Shutter Speed is changed manually, the setting condition is displayed for about 3 seconds at the time the  
change is made.  
Set the shutter display method to seconds or angle in SHUTTER DISP. on the LCD/VF[3/4] menu screen. (Only when  
frame rate is 24p or 25p mode)  
DISPLAY button  
STATUS 2  
STATUS 4  
Status screens (screens for checking the current cam-  
VTR MODE  
(display example)  
Setting Status  
Contents of Indications  
GAIN 0 dB, 3 dB, 6 dB, 9 dB, 12 dB, 15 dB, 18 dB  
era settings)  
Gain value was changed  
Auto white display (only displayed in the Camera  
mode)  
Menu setting screens  
Alarm message display  
Safety zone display (only displayed in the Camera  
mode)  
Gain value reached the ALC  
FULL AUTO was turned ON/OFF  
ZEBRA was turned ON/OFF  
Shutter speed value was changed *1  
(When SHUTTER DISP. is set to SEC)  
GAIN ALC  
FULL AUTO ON, FULL AUTO OFF  
ZEBRA ON, ZEBRA OFF  
SHUTTER 1/6, 1/6.25, 1/7.5, 1/12, 1/12.5, 1/15, 1/24, 1/25, 1/30, 1/48, 1/50, 1/60, 1/100, 1/120,  
1/250, 1/500, 1/1000, 1/2000, 1/4000, 1/10000  
Variable shutter speed value was changed *1 V. SHUTTER 1/24.01 to 1/10489.5  
(When SHUTTER DISP. is set to SEC)  
MEMO  
When ANALOG OUT CHAR. on the OTHERS[1/2] menu  
screen is ON, characters are also shown on images from  
the Y/PB/PR OUT and VIDEO OUT terminals.  
Characters are also shown on images from the HD/SD-SDI  
OUT terminal when the SDI OUT CHAR. is ON.  
SHUTTER OFF [1/**] *4  
STATUS 3  
STATUS  
Shutter was turned OFF  
Shutter speed value was changed  
(When SHUTTER DISP. is set to DEG)  
SHUTTER 360.0°, 180.0°, 172.8°, 150.0°, 144.0°, 135.0°, 120.0°, 105.0°, 90.0°, 75.0°, 60.0°,  
45.0°, 30.0°, 22.5°, 11.2°  
MEMO  
Variable shutter speed value was changed  
(When SHUTTER DISP. is set to DEG)  
0° to 360°  
When the STATUS button is pressed for 1 second or  
longer, the menu setting screen is displayed.  
To display the Status screen while the menu setting  
screen is displayed, press the STATUS button to return  
to the normal screen.  
You can switch between the LCD monitor and the view-  
finder by holding down the DISPLAY button for about 2  
seconds. (When the LCD+VF item on the LCD/VF[4/4]  
menu screen is set to OFF.)  
White balance value was changed  
(Example)  
WHITE BAL A [3200K]  
Numeric value: Any of 2300, 2500, 2800, 3000, 3200, 3400, 3700, 4300, 5200, 5600, 6500,  
8000  
Status Screens  
FILTER value was changed  
FILTER OFF, FILTER ND 1 [1/4ND], FILTER ND 2 [1/16ND]  
AE LEVEL –3, –2, –1, NORMAL, +1, +2, +3  
Press the STATUS button while normal screen is displayed  
to show one of the status screens.  
AE LEVEL value was changed *2  
BLACK gain value was changed *2  
BLACK NORMAL  
BLACK STRETCH 1, 2, 3, 4, 5  
BLACK COMPRESS 1, 2, 3, 4, 5  
PRESET TEMP. value was changed *2 *3  
HEADER REC is running  
WHITE BAL PRST [3200K], WHITE BAL PRST [5600K]  
HEADER REC  
USER  
1
USER  
2
USER  
3
SHUTTER  
ND FILTER  
FOCUS ASSIST was turned ON/OFF  
Time code was set to zero reset  
REC LOCK switch was turned ON/OFF  
FOCUS ASSIST ON, FOCUS ASSIST OFF  
2
1
TC ZERO PRESET X See page 45.  
MENU  
REC SWITCH LOCKED, REC SWITCH UNLOCKED X See page 18, 9 REC LOCK switch.  
A REC command was sent from the IEEE1394 TRIGGER TO HDV, TRIGGER TO DV  
connector  
STATUS  
STATUS button  
22  
23  
CONTROLS, INDICATORS AND CONNECTORS  
External Image Input Mode (AUX IN)  
Indications on the LCD Monitor  
and in the Viewfinder (Cont’d)  
1
3
2
c
2
D V- 6 0 I A U X  
4
4
Setting Status  
Contents of Indications  
FF/REW button was pressed in CAMERA SWITCH TO VTR MODE  
mode  
8
a
REC/VTR trigger button was pressed when 1080I REC INVALID  
1080I CAMERA in the VIDEO FORMAT[1/2]  
menu screen was set to ON  
5
5
Other Displays  
X See “FILE MANAGE Menu Screen” on pages 100-102.  
X See “Warnings and Responses” on page 106.  
0
9
7
6
b
7
6
b
*1  
STATUS 1 Screen  
STATUS 1 Screen  
The range for the shutter speed differs depending on the video format setting. X See page 86.  
Displayed if functions were assigned to the USER1 - 3 buttons. X See page 86.  
Displayed when the [WHT.BAL] white balance selector switch c on page 15 is set to PRST (PRESET).  
“ ** ” depends on the video format.  
*2  
*3  
*4  
STATUS 1  
In addition to the information on the STATUS 0 screen, this screen displays the following items.  
No.  
Item  
Contents  
No.  
2
Item  
Contents  
1
VIDEO FORMAT display  
Displays the currently selected video format.  
Allows you to select the REC item on the VIDEO FORMAT[1/2] menu screen. X See page 77.  
You can switch this display ON/OFF using the VIDEO FORMAT item on the LCD/VF[3/4] menu screen.  
X See page 91.  
VTR mode indication  
STBY : In record standby mode (record-pause mode)  
REC : During recording  
PLAY : During playback  
FF  
: During fast forward  
2
Time Code (TC)/User’s Bits Indicates the time code (h:m:s:frame) or user’s bits data.  
REW : During rewind  
(UB) indication  
(Example) Time code TC 00 : 00 : 00 : 00  
STL  
: During still picture playback mode  
FWD : During playback in forward direction (FWD1: About ×2 speed, FWD2: About ×5 speed, FWD3:  
Colon (:) when non-drop frame mode  
Dot (.) when drop frame mode  
About ×10 speed)  
REV : During playback in reverse direction (REV1: About ×2 speed, REV2: About ×5 speed, REV3:  
User’s bits UB FF EE DD 20  
About ×10 speed)  
STOP : Stop mode (Tape protect mode)  
EJECT : Cassette being ejected  
Whether or not to display this item is set with the TC/UB item on the LCD/VF[3/4] menu screen.  
X See page 91.  
Whether the time code or user’s bits should be shown is selected with the TC DISPLAY switch inside the  
LCD door.  
- - -  
: No tape loaded  
3
Indication of date and time  
LCD BRIGHT indication  
Indicates the date and time.  
Whether or not the date and time should be displayed as well as the display style are set on the TIME/  
DATE menu.  
3
4
Synchronized display with an Lights up when the time code generator of this device synchronizes with the time code input from the TC  
external time code generator IN terminal. Blinks when synchronization is unsuccessful. Turns off If there is no input signal.  
Remaining tape indication  
Remaining tape indication (displayed in 1-minute steps)  
When the brightness of the monitor screen is adjusted with the LCD BRIGHT button, the date and time  
indications and the VTR mode indication 2 are turned off and the LCD BRIGHT indicator is displayed.  
(Example)  
BRIGHT +5 ••••+•••••O  
Numeric value: Any of –5, –4, –3, –2, –1, 0, +1, +2, +3, +4, +5.  
This indicator blinks when remaining tape time is equivalent to less than 3 minutes.  
Whether or not to display this item is set with the TAPE REMAIN item on the LCD/VF[3/4] menu screen.  
X See page 91.  
* When inserting a brand-new tape, the remaining tape time is not indicated.  
When the tape has been run, the indication will appear.  
* The remaining tape indication is to be regarded only as a guide.  
* When this device is used at low temperatures, it may take a while before the indication of the remaining  
tape time appears.  
4
5
Indication of Black operation  
B : Displayed when the black stretch or black compress settings are other than NORMAL.  
Indication of skin tone detail SD : Indicated when skin tone detail is ON.  
color operation  
6
Indication of Iris level opera- I : Displayed when the AE LEVEL setting is other than NORMAL  
tion  
5
Voltage indication  
(Example) 12.2V: Indicates remaining battery level in 0.1V steps.  
Battery voltage and remaining battery are displayed. Select the display method in BATTERY INFO. on the  
LCD/VF[3/4] menu screen. X See page 91.  
Anton Bauer battery: Voltage/remaining capacity (%)/remaining time  
IDX Endura battery : Voltage/remaining capacity (%)  
7
8
9
Indication of FAW operation  
Gain operation indication  
FAW : Indicated when Full Auto White Balance is ON.  
* dB : Indicates gain value when gain is other modes than 0 dB and ALC.  
Indication of various function FOCUS  
: Displayed when the Focus Assist function is ON.  
operations SKIN AREA : Blinks while the skin detail color area is displayed.  
ALC  
FAS  
S
: Displayed when ALC function alone is ON.  
: Displayed when the Full Auto Shooting function is ON.  
: Displayed when the shutter speed is a setting other than the default setting.  
X See page 86.  
0
a
Indication of DR-HD100 Oper- When a DR-HD100 (HDD unit by FOCUS enhancements) is connected, its operation status is displayed.  
ation  
[: DR-HD100 is connected (displays white)  
[: Recording with DR-HD100 (displays red)  
(For details, refer to the DR-HD100 INSTRUCTION MANUAL.)  
AUX display  
Displays when in external image input mode. (AUX IN mode)  
24  
25  
CONTROLS, INDICATORS AND CONNECTORS  
Indications on the LCD Monitor  
and in the Viewfinder (Cont’d)  
No.  
Item  
Contents  
6
Audio sampling frequency in- 32 K : Indicated when the AUDIO MODE item on the AUDIO/MIC[1/2] menu screen is set to 32 K. (Audio  
dication  
is recorded with 12-bit, 32 kHz sampling.)  
48 K : Indicated when the AUDIO MODE item on the AUDIO/MIC[1/2] menu screen is set to 48 K. (Audio  
is recorded with 16-bit, 48 kHz sampling.) When HDV format is set, 48K is displayed.  
X See page 87.  
STATUS 2 Screen  
STATUS 3 Screen  
STATUS 2  
Whether or not to display this item is set with the AUDIO item on the LCD/VF[3/4] menu.  
This screen displays the camera setup statuses.  
Event display is not available while this screen is displayed.  
7
8
Audio level meter indication  
Displays the CH-1, CH-2 audio level meters.  
Whether or not to display this item is set with the AUDIO item on the LCD/VF[3/4] menu.  
X See page 91.  
Indication  
Indication Contents  
FILE  
FILE  
F CAM1 [********], CAM2-4 [********], and EXT1 - 4 [********] * indicates SUB NAME X See pages 100-102.  
Standard audio level indication The level at which audio is recorded on the tape is indicated by “O”.  
A F symbol is displayed when a menu setting read from LOAD FILE was changed.  
The display disappears when the setting is saved using STORE FILE.  
–20 dB, –12 dB  
X See “AUDIO REF.LEVEL” on page 87.  
FULL AUTO  
GAIN  
SHUTTER*  
ON, OFF  
0dB, 3dB, 6dB, 9dB, 12dB, 15dB, 18dB, ALC  
–20 dB  
–12 dB  
(When STEP is selected)  
O
O
O
O
O
O
OFF, 1/6, 1/6.25, 1/7.5, 1/12, 1/12.5, 1/15, 1/24, 1/25, 1/30, 1/48, 1/50, 1/60, 1/100, 1/120, 1/250, 1/500, 1/1000, 1/2000,  
CH-1  
CH-2  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
\ \ \ ]  
\ \ \ ]  
1/4000, 1/10000  
(When VARIABLE is selected)  
1/24.01 - 1/10489.5  
9
0
a
Iris indicator display  
Iris F-value indication  
Filter position indication  
M: Iris set higher than normal  
b: Iris set to normal  
N: Iris set lower than normal  
(Displayed when FAS or ALC mode is selected)  
EEI  
* The range for the shutter speed differs depending on the video format. X See page 86.  
The indication can be switched ON/OFF with the F.NO/IRIS IND. item on the LCD/VF[1/4] menu screen.  
X See page 89.  
WHT. BAL  
A[##00K], B[##00K], PRESET[##00K], FAW  
For A and B, ## represents 23, 25, 28, 30, 32, 34, 37, 43, 52, 65, or 80. For PRESET, 32 or 56.  
AE LEVEL  
FILTER  
ZEBRA  
–3, –2, –1, NORMAL, +1, +2, +3  
Indicates the F-number of the connected lens.  
OPEN, F2, F2.8, F4, F5.6, F8, F11, F16, CLOSE  
It is not displayed when the lens is removed. For some lenses, no display appears.  
The indication can be switched ON/OFF with the F.NO/IRIS IND. item on the LCD/VF[1/4] menu screen.  
X See page 89.  
OFF, ND1 [1/4ND], ND2 [1/16ND]  
60-70%, 70-80%, 85-95%, OVER 95%, OVER 100%  
Displays the remaining tape (minutes)  
REMAIN  
AUDIO  
Displays the audio sampling frequency and the audio level adjustment mode (Ex: 32K (CH1 Z CH2 a) Z (for AUTO  
mode) a (for MANUAL mode)  
Indicates the current filter position.  
No display : FILTER OFF  
* When SHUTTER DISP. on the LCD/VF[3/4] menu screen is set to DEG, the shutter display for the frame rate in 24p or 25p mode is degrees.  
Indication Indication Contents  
SHUTTER  
ND1  
ND2  
: FILTER ND1 (1/4ND)  
: FILTER ND2 (1/16ND)  
The indication can be switched ON/OFF with the FILTER item on the LCD/VF[1/4] menu screen.  
X See page 89.  
(When STEP is selected)  
360.0°, 180.0°, 172.8°, 150.0°, 144.0°, 135.0°, 120.0°, 105.0°, 90.0°, 75.0°, 60.0°, 45.0°, 30.0°, 22.5°, 11.2°  
(When VARIABLE is selected)  
0° to 360°  
b
c
Audio Lock Indication  
AUX display  
Displayed when the audio signal is locked to the video signal.  
Displays when in external image input mode (AUX IN mode)  
STATUS 3  
Displays a list of setting statuses for USER1, 2, and 3 as well as LENS RET item on the SWITCH MODE menu screen.  
X See page 86.  
Events are not displayed while these statuses are being displayed.  
Indication  
Indication Contents  
USER1  
USER2  
NONE, BARS, PRESET TEMP., B.STRETCH1 to 5, B.COMPRESS1 to 5, AE LEVEL+, AE LEVEL–, RET, LOAD FILE  
USER3  
NONE, BARS, PRESET TEMP., B.STRETCH1 to 5, B.COMPRESS1 to 5, RET, LOAD FILE  
RET, FOCUS ASSIST  
LENS RET  
STATUS 4  
This screen only displays VTR mode indication, date and time, event display and alarm indications.  
*
Whether or not date and time should be displayed and the display style are set on the TIME/DATE menu screen.  
X See “Displaying the Time and Date on the Screen” on page 42.  
26  
27  
CONTROLS, INDICATORS AND CONNECTORS  
No.  
Item  
Contents  
Indications on the LCD Monitor  
and in the Viewfinder (Cont’d)  
8
Time/Date indication  
Recorded data are displayed during playback, fast forward, and rewind.  
During recording in DV format, the data from the IEEE1394 connector is displayed.  
During recording in HDV format, the data of internal clock is displayed.  
Whether or not the date and time should be displayed and the display style are set on the TIME/DATE  
menu screen. X See page 95.  
When the date and time have not been set, the following indication appears.  
- -/- -/- - - -: - -: - -  
9
0
Voltage indication  
(Example) 12.2V : Indicates remaining battery level in 0.1V steps.  
Battery voltage and remaining battery are displayed. Select the display method in BATTERY INFO. on the  
LCD/VF[1/2] menu screen X See page 91.  
Anton Bauer battery: Voltage/remaining capacity (%)/remaining time  
IDX Endura battery : Voltage/remaining capacity (%)  
Status Screen in VTR MODE  
1
2
Audio Lock indication  
Displayed when the audio signal from DV recording or playback is locked to the video signal.  
3
Magnified Status Indications on the  
LCD Monitor  
4
5
6
0
9
The characters on the status screens can be showed alone  
in magnified size on the LCD monitor.  
1
7
8
DISPLAY button  
No.  
Item  
VIDEO FORMAT display  
Contents  
1
Displays the video format recorded on the tape when in VTR mode. Also displays the video format of the  
HDV/DV input signal.  
You can switch this display ON/OFF using the VIDEO FORMAT item on the LCD/VF[1/2] menu screen.  
X See page 91.  
4
5
2
3
Time code (TC) and user’s bits Displays the time code data being recorded (hour, minute, second, frame) when in VTR mode.  
(UB) display  
You can switch this display ON/OFF using the TC/UB item on the LCD/VF[1/2] menu screen.  
266S DD  
X See page 91.  
2
You can select to display either the time code or the user’s bits using the TC DISPLAY switch in the LCD  
door.  
3
Remaining tape time  
Remaining tape indication (displayed in 1-minute steps)  
This indicator blinks when remaining tape time is equivalent to less than 3 minutes.  
Whether or not to display this item is set with the TAPE REMAIN item on the LCD/VF[1/2] menu screen.  
X See page 91.  
* When inserting a brand-new tape, the remaining tape time is not indicated.  
When the tape has been run, the indication will appear.  
1.Set the LCD+VF item on the LCD/VF[4/4] menu screen to ON. X See page 92.  
2.When the DISPLAY button is briefly pressed while the LCD monitor is displayed, the displayed contents change every time the  
DISPLAY button is pressed.  
* The remaining tape indication is to be used only as a guide.  
* When this device is used at low temperatures, it may take a while before the indication of the remaining  
tape time appears.  
Only image displayed  
Characters shown enlarged  
Image and characters displayed  
4
5
Event display  
Displays messages related to VTR operations. X See pages 106-108.  
No.  
1
Item  
Audio Lock Indicator  
Contents  
Displayed during recording and playback when the audio signal is locked to the video signal.  
Audio sampling frequency in- The audio sampling frequency used for the recording is displayed during playback.  
dication  
(32 K, 48 K, 44.1 K)  
Whether or not to display this item is set with the AUDIO item on the LCD/VF[1/2] menu screen.  
2
Time Code Generator Setting Indicates the set status of the TC GENE switch on the side section.  
Indicator  
FREE : TC GENE switch is set to PRESET-FREE RUN MODE.  
RECR : TC GENE switch is set to PRESET-REC RUN MODE.  
REGN : TC GENE switch is set to REGEN MODE.  
DUPL : There is 1394 input in VTR mode and TC DUPLI. menu is set to ON.  
EXT : Displays when time code is input to the TC IN terminal.  
(When TCG SOURCE on the TC/UB/CLOCK menu screen is set to EXTERNAL.)  
X See page 91.  
6
7
Audio level meter indication  
VTR mode indication  
Displays the audio level meters during playback.  
Whether or not to display this item is set with the AUDIO item on the LCD/VF[1/2] menu screen.  
X See page 91.  
Indicates the VTR operation status  
STBY, STOP, PLAY, REC, FF, REW, FWD, REV, STL, - - - (No tape loaded), SLOW: During variable play-  
back in forward direction (Displayed when using non-linear editing software.)  
(SLOW+1: About ×0.1 speed, SLOW+2: About ×0.2 speed, SLOW+3: About ×0.5 speed)  
During variable playback in reverse direction (Displayed when using non-linear editing software.)  
(SLOW–1: About ×–0.1 speed, SLOW–2: About ×–0.2 speed, SLOW–3: About ×–0.5 speed)  
3
Drop/Non-drop Indicator  
Indicates the framing mode of the time code.  
DF  
: Drop frame mode  
NDF : Non-drop frame mode  
4
5
Synchronized display with an Lights up when the time code generator of this device synchronizes with the time code input from the TC  
external time code generator IN terminal. Blinks when synchronization is unsuccessful. Turns off If there is no input signal.  
Indication of DR-HD100 Oper- When a DR-HD100 (HDD unit by FOCUS enhancements) is connected, its operation status is displayed.  
ation  
(For details, refer to the DR-HD100 INSTRUCTION MANUAL.)  
MEMO  
When characters indicating the status are displayed in  
magnified size on the LCD monitor, the viewfinder display  
the image.  
28  
29  
CONTROLS, INDICATORS AND CONNECTORS  
SAFETY ZONE  
CENTER MARK  
2.35:1CE  
OFF  
2.35:1CH  
OFF  
Indications on the LCD Monitor  
and in the Viewfinder (Cont’d)  
Alarm Message Display  
ON  
ON  
The following alarm messages are displayed while the STA-  
TUS (0, 1, 4) screen is shown in the Camera mode, or a STA-  
TUS screen is shown in the VTR mode.  
DV-60I  
DV-50I  
4:3  
Cannot be selected  
DV-24P  
DV-24PA  
DV-25P  
If an alarm is generated while the STATUS 2, 3 screen is  
shown, the STATUS 0 screen returns to display the alarm.  
X See page 106.  
When an abnormality occurs in the VTR, a warning message  
with an error code is displayed.  
16:9  
HDV-HD60P  
HDV-HD50P  
HDV-HD30P  
HDV-HD25P  
HDV-HD24P  
Auto White Balance Indication  
(Camera mode only)  
[16:9]  
X See pages 106-108.  
The AUTO WHITE indication and the result of the operation are dis-  
played during the auto white balance adjustment operation.  
X See “White Balance Adjustment” on page 52.  
Switching between the LCD Screen  
and Viewfinder Display  
When the LCD+VF item in the LCD/VF[4/4] menu is set to  
OFF, the LCD monitor and viewfinder (VF) displays are as  
shown below.  
DISPLAY button  
Alarm display area  
LCD Monitor Status  
LCD Display  
VF Display  
ON  
LCD Closed  
Normal LCD  
Inverted LCD  
Normal LCD  
Inverted LCD  
OFF  
ON  
ON  
ON  
OFF  
LCD Open  
OFF  
Normal LCD  
OFF  
Menu Setting Screen  
MEMO  
Screen used for making various settings.  
The Menu Setting Screen appears when the STATUS button is  
pressed for 1 second or more.  
You can switch between the LCD monitor and the view-  
finder by holding down the DISPLAY button for about 2  
seconds.  
Inverted LCD  
X See “Setting Menu Screens” on page 75.  
After you set up the function that switches the display  
between the LCD monitor and the viewfinder by holding  
down the DISPLAY button, the display mode is cancelled  
by the LCD monitor open/close and normal/inverted  
operations.  
LCD open 40° or  
more  
LCD close less  
than 40°  
If the LCD monitor is closed inside this device with the  
screen in the normal display orientation, holding down  
the DISPLAY button does not work.  
When the LCD+VF item in the LCD/VF[4/4] menu is set to  
ON, the LCD monitor and viewfinder (VF) displays are as  
shown below.  
TOP MENU screen (Camera mode)  
LCD Monitor Status  
LCD Display  
VF Display  
Safety Zone Indication (Camera mode only)  
LCD Closed  
Normal LCD  
Inverted LCD  
Normal LCD  
Inverted LCD  
OFF  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
The indication of the following safety zone and center mark indications can be turned ON/OFF with the SAFETY ZONE item and CEN-  
TER MARK item on the LCD/VF[1/4] menu screen. X See page 89.  
In addition, the safety zone display is on or off depending on the REC item setting and the ASPECT item setting in the VIDEO FORMAT  
menu screen, as shown below.  
LCD Open  
SAFETY ZONE  
CENTER MARK  
OFF  
-
4:3  
14:9  
16:9  
16:9+4:3  
OFF ON  
OFF  
ON  
OFF  
ON  
OFF  
ON  
MEMO  
REC  
ASPECT  
Press the DISPLAY button for 2 seconds to switch the  
LCD screen display ON and OFF.  
The viewfinder screen is always displayed.  
DV-60I  
DV-50I  
DV-24P  
DV-24PA  
DV-25P  
4:3  
Cannot be selected  
16:9  
HDV-HD60P  
HDV-HD50P  
HDV-HD30P  
HDV-HD25P  
HDV-HD24P  
[16:9]  
30  
31  
PREPARATIONS  
1. 3. Knob  
2. Microphone  
Basic System  
Attaching the Zoom Lens  
1.Loosen the mount ring.  
Shoulder Belt  
Microphone  
holder  
HD-SD Cable  
BNC  
2.Attach the lens with its pin aligned with the hole in the  
mount.  
Component Cable  
BNC  
3.Tighten the mount ring.  
4.Connect the cable connector.  
5.Clamp the lens cable.  
Microphone  
XLR 3P  
Monitor  
Composite Cable  
RCA pin  
Earphone  
Audio Cable  
RCA pin  
5. Clamp  
Hole  
Focus Manual Unit  
*1 HZ-FM13 (FUJINON)  
HZ-FM15 (CANON)  
Pin  
Monitor  
HDD Unit  
DR-HD100  
Microphone  
IEEE1394 Cable  
GY-HD250/GY-HD251  
6P-6P  
4. INPUT1, 2 connector  
1/3 Zoom Lens  
Th13 × 3.5BRMU (FUJINON)  
For GY-HD250  
Clamp  
VF BRIGHT  
DV VTR  
How to Attach the View-  
finder  
USER  
1
USER  
2
USER  
3
N
D
F
I
L
T
E
R
2
1
MENU  
Wide Converter  
WCV-82SC  
STATUS  
Anton Bauer  
Battery Charger  
WHT.BAL  
AUTO  
CH-1  
AUTO  
CH-2  
AUDIO  
LEVEL  
Anton Bauer  
Battery  
ON  
OFF  
POWER  
REC  
1/3 Zoom Lens  
CAUTION  
Focus Manual Unit  
*1  
Th16 × 5.5BRMU (FUJINON)  
BR-HD50  
(Excluding the CHU/CHE model)  
Battery mount  
GY-HD250: Gold Mount  
GY-HD251: V Mount  
For GY-HD251  
Be sure to tighten the mount ring completely. Incomplete  
tightening may result in the lens dropping off or disturbed  
back focus.  
Set the GY-HD250/GY-HD251’s power switch to “OFF”  
before the zoom lens is attached or detached.  
1. To attach the viewfinder, slide it in the direction of the  
Non-linear Editing System  
SD Memory Card  
2. aSrerot wth.e viewfinder to a comfortable position and then turn  
Zoom Servo Unit  
HZ-ZS13B  
Tripod Base (U model only)  
IDX  
the slide mounting ring and mount.  
GY-HD250/GY-HD251  
Standard Package  
IDX (Endura)  
Battery  
Battery Charger  
To take off the viewfinder, pull the knob in the direction of  
the arrow as you slide the viewfinder.  
Mount Converter  
(1/2r1/3): ACM-12  
(2/3r1/3): ACM-17  
XLR 4P  
Knob  
Taking off the viewfinder  
Attaching the Microphone  
(Provided)  
AC  
Tripod  
AC Adapter  
1/2 Zoom Lens  
S14 × 7.3B12U (FUJINON)  
S17 × 6.6BRM (FUJINON)  
S20 × 6.4B12U (FUJINON)  
YH16 × 7K12U (CANON)  
YH19 × 6.7K12U (CANON)  
2/3 Zoom Lens  
2. Slide mounting ring  
Remote Control Unit  
RM-LP55/RM-LP57  
Carrying Case  
Connect the provided microphone to the microphone holder.  
Provided microphone is a phantom microphone.  
Dolly  
1.Turn the knob on the microphone holder anticlockwise to  
Headset  
DT109 (Beyerdynamic)  
loosen it and open the microphone holder.  
1.  
REMOTE CONTROL UNIT RM-P210  
MASTER BLACK IRIS  
POWER  
TALLY  
CALL  
FULL AUTO  
F1  
F3  
MENU/SHUTTER  
GAIN  
P
A
I
N
T
W
H
I
T
E
A
U
T
O
2.Place the microphone in the microphone holder.  
Place the microphone toward the front to prevent it from  
interfering with the cassette cover.  
SHUTTER  
STEP  
HIGH  
W.BAL  
B
I
SHUTTER  
PUSH-ON  
VARIABLE  
PUSH-ON  
MID  
A
AUTO  
MANU  
BARS  
F2  
F4  
MENU  
LOW  
R
B
PRESET  
GAIN  
O
INTERCOM  
LEVEL  
DOWN  
UP  
DOWN  
UP  
CLOSE  
OPEN  
View Finder  
VF-P400  
Camera Remote Control Unit  
RM-P210  
3.Turn the knob on the microphone holder clockwise to  
secure the microphone.  
4.Connect the microphone cable to the INPUT1 or INPUT2  
View Finder  
Studio Kit  
KA-HD250  
DM-3106 (Astrodesign)  
input connector on the GY-HD250/GY-HD251.  
V-R70P-HAD (Marshall Electronics)  
Monitor  
5.Attach the microphone cable to the clamp.  
6.Make sure to perform the correct setting for use of a  
*1 An HZ-FM13 cannot be used with a Th16 × 5.5BRMU or S14 × 7.3B12/U zoom lens.  
Use a FUJINON focus manual unit (FMM-8, CFH-3, CFC-12-990).  
For details, please consult your JVC authorized dealer.  
phantom microphone.  
X See page 56.  
32  
33  
PREPARATIONS  
CAUTION  
About the Viewfinder Cable  
Attach the viewfinder cable to the clamp 7 on page 14.  
To reduce the emission of unwanted radio waves, be sure to  
attach the provided core filter as shown in the figure below.  
The front base mount may be locked while the pin of the  
tripod base is not inserted into the hole on the rear base  
mount of this device. Therefore, after mounting, make  
sure that these parts are engaged properly.  
Taking out the SD memory card  
Attaching the Tripod Base  
(Provided only for U model)  
1. Push the SD memory card in the direction of the arrow.  
Attach the core filter (black) as close to this device as pos-  
sible, as shown in the figure.  
The SD memory card comes out slightly.  
When moving this device mounted on  
a
tripod, any  
2. Pull the SD memory card straight out.  
impact or vibration should be avoided as this may cause  
this device to become detached and to drop from the tri-  
pod.  
Use the provided tripod base to place the camera on a tri-  
pod. (U model only)  
Be sure to remove this device from the tripod before  
transporting it.  
1.Attach the tripod base on the tripod by using the hole that  
balances this device most optimally.  
1. Tripod mounting holes  
2.While pushing the safety lever, pull the lock lever toward  
Core filter (black)  
the front until the front mount clip clicks into place.  
3. Pin  
Front mount clip  
About SD Memory Cards  
Inserting an SD Memory  
Card  
When you use an SD memory card that was either just  
purchased or formatted on a device other than GY-HD250/  
GY-HD251, format it on GY-HD250/GY-HD251.  
X See page 102.  
2. Safety lever  
Recommended SD memory cards  
Panasonic: 16 MB to 2 GB  
2.  
By using an SD memory card, you can save and call up menu  
settings and camera settings for GY-HD250/GY-HD251.  
X See “FILE MANAGE Menu Screen” on page 100.  
Check that the POWER switch is OFF.  
Lock lever  
You can write-protect the card so that saved files are not  
mistakenly erased. Set the switch on the side of the SD  
memory card to the “LOCK” position.  
3.Place this device on the tripod base by aligning the rear  
base mount of this device with the pin on the tripod base.  
Inserting an SD Memory Card  
LOCK switch  
1.Open the SD memory card cover.  
2.Face the cutout end of the SD memory card inward and  
insert it in the direction of the arrow.  
CAUTION  
MEMO  
Be sure not to touch the metal connector area of the SD  
memory card.  
4. Front base mount  
SDHC-compliant memory cards cannot be used with this  
device.  
3. Rear base mount  
3.Close the SD memory card cover.  
4.Hold the camera on the top and slide forward so that the  
base mount of the camera is locked by the front mount  
clip of this device as it clicks into place.  
4.  
Cutout  
VF BRIGHT  
USER  
1
USER  
2
USER  
3
ND FILTER  
2
1
MENU  
STATUS  
WHT.BAL  
AUTO  
CH-1  
AUTO  
CH-2  
AUDIO  
LEVEL  
ON  
OFF  
POWER  
REC  
SD memory card cover  
34  
35  
PREPARATIONS  
GY-HD251E  
Charging the Built-in Battery  
Use an IDX (Endura) battery.  
AC Operation  
Battery Operation  
Attaching the Battery  
The built-in, rechargeable backup battery retains the date  
and time and the time code data.  
1. Face the battery terminals down and align the battery V-  
The built-in battery is constantly being charge whenever the  
GY-HD250/GY-HD251 is connected to a power supply, but it  
gradually discharges while the GY-HD250/GY-HD251 is dis-  
connected from a power supply. The battery will be fully dis-  
charged when the GY-HD250/GY-HD251 is not used for  
about three months, in which case the set date and time and  
time code data are reset.  
In this case, recharge the built-in battery and then set the  
date and time and time code data again.  
However, it is possible to use the GY-HD250/GY-HD251  
even if the built-in battery is discharged but the date and time  
and time code data cannot be recorded.  
mount with the battery adapter V-mount attachment.  
The GY-HD250/GY-HD251 is operable with AC power supply  
or battery pack.  
Use the AC adapter as the AC power supply.  
The attachable battery varies depending on location.  
Recommended batteries  
U model: Dionic 90 (Anton Bauer)  
E model: Endura-7 (IDX)  
V-mount  
V-mount  
attachment  
1.After making sure that the power switches of the GY-  
HD250/GY-HD251 and of the AC adapter are set to OFF,  
connect the DC cable to the DC OUTPUT connector of  
the AC adapter and the DC INPUT connector of the GY-  
HD250/GY-HD251 as shown in the illustration.  
CAUTION  
Use only the recommended batteries.  
If a heavy battery is used, the battery may fall out depend-  
ing on the way the HD camera recorder is used.  
To lessen the amount of unnecessary radio waves  
emitted, attach a provided Clamp filter near both ends  
of the DC cable as shown in the diagram.  
GY-HD250U  
Use an Anton Bauer battery.  
How to charge the built-in battery  
1. Connect the AC adapter to the GY-HD250/GY-HD251  
and an AC outlet or mount a charged battery on the GY-  
HD250/GY-HD251.  
Attaching the Battery  
2. Slide the battery down until it clicks and locks.  
2. Set the POWER switch on the GY-HD250/GY-HD251 to  
“ON” or “OFF” (charging takes places with the POWER  
switch set to either of the positions).  
The battery is attached.  
1.Align the battery guide pins (three places) with the bat-  
tery adapter guide holes and insert straight. Battery will  
not be properly attached if guide pins are not straight.  
Removing the Battery  
Clamp filter  
3. Leave the equipment in this condition for about 4 hours.  
Slide the battery up while holding down the lock release but-  
ton to remove the battery.  
The built-in battery will remain charged for about 3  
months after being charged for about 4 hours.  
Guide pins  
Cassette cover  
side panel  
Guide  
holes (×3)  
DC INPUT  
Release button  
Battery  
Release lever  
DC cable  
Battery pack  
(trim pack)  
LCD screen  
side panel  
2.Slide the battery towards the Cassette cover side panel  
DC OUTPUT  
until it clicks.  
The battery is attached.  
Clamp filter  
AC adapter  
Removing the Battery  
Slide the battery towards you (LCD screen side panel) while  
holding down the release lever, and pull away from the  
device to remove the battery.  
2.Press the POWER switch of the GY-HD250/GY-HD251 to  
ON. Power is supplied to the VTR section and the cam-  
era.  
CAUTION  
Do not remove or connect the DC cable while recording  
is being performed.  
Release lever  
Battery  
Do not use any power source with large fluctuations in  
the power source voltage, power sources generating  
noise, such as ripples or power sources with lower volt-  
age.  
36  
37  
PREPARATIONS  
PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION  
When you use an Anton Bauer battery, the remaining  
battery (capacity or time) can be displayed in the STA-  
TUS 1 screen of the LCD screen or viewfinder. Set BAT-  
TERY INFO. on the LCD/VF[3/4] menu screen to  
CAPA% or TIME to display the remaining battery. When  
using the IDX Endura battery, the remaining capacity (%)  
can be displayed. X See page 91.  
Battery Operation  
(Cont’d)  
Turning the Power OFF  
Turning the Power ON  
1. Place the GY-HD250/GY-HD251 in the record-standby or  
STOP mode.  
2. Set the POWER switch to OFF.  
3. Remove the battery pack or the power supply to the DC  
INPUT connector. (When the camera is not going to be  
used for a longer period.)  
Turning the Power ON  
Precautions for the Battery Opera-  
tion  
1.Set the POWER switch to ON.  
Operating Time with Battery Pack  
CAUTION  
This device turns on in Camera mode.  
Do not detach the battery pack while recording is taking  
place.  
Do not connect or disconnect the DC cable while operat-  
ing with a battery pack.  
Do not set the POWER switch to OFF while recording is  
taking place.  
Confirm that the “STBY” or “STOP” indication is shown in  
the VTR operation mode indication area before the  
power is turned off.  
Should the POWER switch accidentally be set to OFF  
during a recording, wait at least 5 seconds before turning  
the power on again.  
Always set the POWER switch to OFF before discon-  
necting the power supply.  
When a fully charged battery pack is attached, the approxi-  
mate continuous operating time is as follows  
The operation differs according to whether this device is in  
the Camera mode or in the VTR mode.  
The mode switches each time you press the CAM/VTR button.  
When the mode is switched, the VTR indicator displays  
the following statuses.  
Battery Pack  
Continuous Operating Time (at 25°C (77°F))  
Approx. 3.2 hours  
The following symptoms may occur if the DC cable is con-  
Dionic 90  
(U model)  
nected or disconnected while operating with  
pack.  
a
battery  
Endura-7  
(E model)  
Approx. 2.5 hours  
While the mode is being switched : Flashing  
The power is cut off for a moment when the DC cable is  
In VTR mode  
: Lit  
disconnected.  
In Camera mode  
: Off  
Battery operating time may differ depending on the age of  
the battery pack, charging conditions and the operating  
environment, etc. Use the values in the table on the above  
for approximate reference times.  
Noise to the video and audio signals occurs. Audio sig-  
nal are muted.  
Do not remove the battery pack or turn AC adapter OFF  
while the POWER switch on the camera is still set to ON.  
When operation is continued with DC input after the bat-  
tery pack capacity has been used up, set the POWER  
switch to OFF after the DC power is applied. Then switch  
ON again.  
If the GY-HD250/GY-HD251 is left with the battery pack  
attached, a small amount of power is consumed even if  
the POWER switch on the GY-HD250/GY-HD251 is set to  
OFF.  
Operating time is reduced in areas with a cold environ-  
ment.  
Operating time is reduced when the power zoom lens and  
LCD are used frequently.  
VTR indicator  
Remove the battery pack when the GY-HD250/GY-HD251  
is not going to be used.  
Precautions for the Battery Pack  
VF BRIGHT  
When the battery pack is not in use, it must be stored in a  
cool, dry place.  
USER  
1
USER  
2
USER  
3
ND FILTER  
LCD BRIGHT  
-
Do not leave the battery pack in a place where it might be  
subject to a high temperature (under direct sunlight in a  
car, etc.), this could cause leakage of the fluid or shorten  
service life.  
CAM/VTR  
+
2
1
Remaining Battery Power Display  
MENU  
AUDIO SELECT  
CH-1  
CH-2  
TC  
DISPLAY  
TC  
GENE.  
FREE  
AUTO  
MANU  
REC  
UB  
STATUS  
REGEN  
WHT.BAL  
AUTO  
CH-1  
AUTO  
CH-2  
AUDIO  
LEVEL  
LCD monitor/Viewfinder  
When the terminal section of the battery pack gets dirty,  
the operating time will be shortened.  
If the operating time becomes greatly reduced even imme-  
diately after recharging, the service life of the battery pack  
is nearly finished.  
ON  
OFF  
POWER  
REC  
CAM/VTR button  
POWER switch  
Camera mode  
Purchase a new battery pack.  
The GY-HD250/GY-HD251 enters the Camera mode. The  
camera image is displayed in the viewfinder or on the LCD  
monitor. When a recordable videocassette is loaded, the  
GY-HD250/GY-HD251 enters the record-standby mode  
automatically. “STBY” is displayed in the VTR operation  
mode indication area of the LCD monitor and/or in the  
viewfinder. In this condition, press the REC/VTR trigger  
button to start recording.  
Recharging  
Recharge the battery pack after completely discharging it.  
Repeated recharging with residual charge remaining could  
result in reduced battery capacity.  
When the remaining battery power is nearly exhausted, the  
following warnings will be generated.  
Viewfinder screen or LCD monitor  
When a Status screen is displayed (excluding the STATUS  
2, 3 screen in the Camera mode)  
*
Playback is also possible in the Camera mode.  
Playback operation becomes possible when the STOP  
button is pressed to set the VTR operation mode indica-  
tor to indicate “STOP”.  
If the battery capacity is reduced by repeating incomplete  
recharging, or recharging without discharging, once dis-  
charge the battery pack completely, then recharge it to  
restore the battery capacity.  
Alarm indication: LOW VOLTAGE displayed.  
FRONT and BACK TALLY lamp on camera: Blinks  
Monitoring loudspeaker and PHONES jack: Alarm sound  
VTR mode  
If the battery pack is recharged with its internal tempera-  
ture raised immediately after use, recharging may not be  
performed completely.  
Perform charging in an environment where the tempera-  
ture is between 10°C (50°F) and 35°C (95°F). 20°C (68°F)  
to 25°C (77°F) is the ideal temperature range for charging.  
If the environment is too cold, charging may not complete.  
The GY-HD250/GY-HD251 enters the VTR mode. The  
camera image will not be displayed in the viewfinder or on  
the LCD monitor. When a videocassette is loaded, the GY-  
HD250/GY-HD251 enters the stop mode.  
“STOP” is displayed in the VTR operation mode indication  
area of the LCD monitor and/or in the viewfinder.  
HDV/DV input is possible through the IEEE1394 connector.  
MEMO  
After the remaining battery power warnings appear, the  
GY-HD250/GY-HD251 automatically stops operation if  
the battery power operation is continued.  
38  
39  
PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION  
TC/UB/CLOCK menu screen  
Unloading the Cassette  
Loading/Unloading the  
Cassette  
Setting and Displaying the  
Date and Time  
1. Turn the POWER switch to ON.  
2. When this device is in shooting standby mode or stop  
mode, slide the EJECT switch to the side and wait until  
the videocassette cover opens completely.  
The date and time of the built-in clock should be set. Pow-  
ered by the built-in backup battery the set date and time data  
continue to count even when the power is switched off.  
The set date and time data are displayed on the LCD mon-  
itor or in the viewfinder and recorded on the tape in accor-  
dance with the settings made on the menu screen.  
Cassette Loading  
The LED next to the EJECT switch flashes.  
A few seconds pass before the videocassette tape is  
ejected.  
Use a videocassette tape marked MiniDV.  
To record, slide the switch on the back for use in prevent-  
ing accidental erasure to the “REC” side.  
3. The LED turns off and the videocassette cover opens.  
Take out the videocassette tape.  
Remove any the tape slack before loading.  
5. Make settings on the TIME/DATE menu screen. (This  
4. Carefully push the center of the videocassette cover in  
includes display style, etc.)  
1.Turn the POWER switch ON.  
the direction of the arrow as far as it will go to close it.  
Setting the Date and Time Style  
2.Slide the EJECT switch on the top panel of this device to  
TIME/DATE menu screen  
CAUTION  
the side.  
The date and time are set on the menu screen.  
When you close the videocassette cover, push it in firmly  
as far as it will go. If the videocassette cover is not closed  
properly, it becomes half-locked and this device cannot  
function.  
The videocassette cover opens automatically and a vid-  
eocassette tape can be inserted.  
When setting while observing on a monitor connected to the  
connector, set the ANALOG OUT CHAR. item or SDI OUT  
CHAR. item on the OTHERS[1/2] menu screen to ON.  
3.Insert a videocassette tape into the videocassette holder.  
With the tape window facing out, move the switch on the  
back of the videocassette up and firmly push the center  
back of the videocassette straight in as far as it will go.  
If this happens, firmly push the videocassette cover in  
again as far as it will go to lock it.  
1.Set the POWER switch to ON.  
2.Press the STATUS button for 1 second or longer to dis-  
The videocassette cover does not open during recording  
even if you slide the EJECT switch.  
Do not leave the videocassette cover open for a long  
time.  
play the TOP MENU screen.  
4.Carefully push the center (“Push here” sticker) of the vid-  
eocassette cover in the direction of the arrow as far as it  
will go to close it.  
After the cover is closed, it takes about 10 seconds  
until recording can begin or this device can enter  
STOP mode.  
Dust or dirt may enter the inside and cause damage.  
Do not touch the videocassette cover or interfere with the  
eject operation while ejecting is in progress. This will  
cause damage.  
When you close the videocassette cover, do not press  
the black area of the inner cover.  
3.  
USER  
1
USER  
2
USER  
3
DATE STYLE : Selects the style for displaying the  
date.  
SHUTTER dial  
ND FILTER  
YY/MM/DD (Year, month, day)  
MM/DD/YY (Month, day, year)  
DD/MM/YY (Day, month, year)  
2
1
REC/SAVE  
Tape window  
switch  
MENU  
2.  
TIME STYLE : The time can be set to display as a 12-  
hour or 24-hour clock system.  
SEC DISPLAY : To select whether or not indication of  
seconds should be displayed on the  
screen.  
STATUS  
EJECT switch  
STATUS button  
Cassette holder  
WHT.BAL  
AUTO  
CH-1  
AUTO  
CH-2  
AUDIO  
LEVEL  
ON  
OFF  
TIME SHIFT  
: Adds time to the built-in clock (time  
compensation) and displays it. The  
adjusted time is also recorded on the  
tape.  
POWER  
REC  
1Rotate the SHUTTER dial to align the cursor (K) with  
the item to be set, and then press the SHUTTER dial.  
1. POWER switch  
The setting area of the selected item starts blinking.  
3.Rotate the SHUTTER dial to align the cursor (K) with the  
TC/UB/CLOCK item, and then press the SHUTTER dial  
in the direction of the camera body.  
Videocassette cover  
Inner cover  
2Rotate the SHUTTER dial to change the setting, and  
then press the SHUTTER dial.  
The setting area stops blinking and the setting is  
entered.  
The TC/UB/CLOCK menu screen appears.  
4.Rotate the SHUTTER dial to align the cursor (K) with the  
If the power is on, the modes are as shown below.  
MEMO  
TIME/DATE item, and then press the SHUTTER dial.  
REC/SAVE switch  
MODE  
The TIME/DATE menu screen appears.  
Set the DISPLAY item on the TIME/DATE menu  
screen to ON.  
The TIME STYLE, SEC DISPLAY, DATE STYLE and TIME  
SHIFT items can also be set and changed after the date  
and time have been set.  
REC  
SAVE  
STOP mode  
Camera  
VTR  
Record-standby mode  
REC INHIBIT is displayed  
on the LCD monitor and in  
the viewfinder.  
STOP mode  
40  
41  
PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION  
Setting and Displaying the Date  
and Time (Cont’d)  
Displaying the Time and Date on the  
Screen  
Displayed Time Code/User’s Bit  
Displaying Time Code  
When TCG SOURCE on the TC/UB/CLOCK menu screen  
is set to INTERNAL, values from the built-in time code  
generator is displayed.  
When TCG SOURCE on the TC/UB/CLOCK menu screen  
is set to EXTERNAL, values from the external time code  
generator connected to the [TC IN] terminal is displayed.  
When TC DUPLI. on the TC/UB/CLOCK menu screen is  
set to ON in IEEE1394 input mode, values input in the  
[IEEE1394] terminal is displayed.  
Whether or not the time and date should be displayed on the  
screen and how to display them are set on the TIME/DATE  
menu screen.  
The GY-HD250/GY-HD251 records SMPTE-standard  
(NTSC) or EBU-standard (PAL) time codes and user’s bits.  
In the play mode or the record mode, the reproduced time  
codes or user’s bits are shown on the LCD monitor or in the  
viewfinder.  
Setting the Date and Time  
1.Display the CLOCK ADJUST menu screen.  
Select the CLOCK ADJUST item on the TIME/DATE  
menu screen.  
Time code generator data is output from the [TC OUT] ter-  
minal or [HD/SD-SDI] terminal.  
Values recorded on the tape are displayed for PLAY  
mode.  
TIME/DATE menu screen  
The time codes or user’s bits can be shown on the LCD mon-  
itor or in the viewfinder during playback and recording as fol-  
lows. (Status screen)  
Time code input entered the  
IEEE1394 connector  
Setting  
Date  
Time  
1.Set the TC/UB item on the LCD/VF[3/4] menu screen to  
1. Display the TIME/DATE menu screen.  
Pressing the STOP button for 1 second in the EJECT or stop  
mode displays the DV input time code data or user’s bit data  
from the IEEE1394 connector on the STATUS screen.  
ON.  
1
Select the TC/UB/CLOCK item on the TOP MENU  
screen.  
Time codes or user’s bit data are displayed on the  
STATUS screen.  
2Select the TIME/DATE item on the TC/UB/CLOCK  
menu screen.  
DTCG : The time code data from the IEEE1394 connector  
DUBG : The user’s bit data from the IEEE1394 connector  
Time code indication  
2. Set the TIME/DATE menu screen.  
(Example)  
Time code indication  
00:00:00:00  
2.Set the date and time.  
To return to display of the original time code or user’s bit,  
press the STOP button. (Display of the normal time code or  
user’s bit is also restored by performing VTR operation.)  
The blinking digit is the one to be set.  
DISPLAY item : Sets whether or not date and time  
should be displayed.  
CLOCK ADJUST menu screen  
Date  
User’s bits indication  
FF EE DD 20  
Set to ON to display the indications.  
DISPLAY MODE : Sets the video output mode in  
MEMO  
item  
which date and time should be dis-  
To use input time code data from the IEEE1394 terminal,  
set TCG SOURCE item on the TC/UB/CLOCK menu  
screen to INTERNAL.  
To record HDV/DV input time code and user’s bit from  
the IEEE1394 connector, set the TC DUPLI. item on the  
TC/UB/CLOCK menu screen to ON.  
played.  
BARS  
CAM  
:
Displayed when outputting the color  
bar.  
: Displayed when outputting the color  
camera image.  
Date and time are always displayed.  
: Sets the style in which the date and  
time are displayed.  
: Date and time are displayed.  
: Date only is displayed.  
: Time only is displayed.  
STATUS 1 screen  
BARS+CAM  
DISPLAY  
STYLE item  
DATE+TIME  
DATE  
:
X See page 93.  
To maintain the continuity of time code data, use with the  
TC GENE. switch set to REGEN mode when recording  
HDV/DV input signal from the IEEE1394 connector.  
There is no time code display for HDV input.  
2.Whether time codes or user’s bit data should be dis-  
played is selected with the TC DISPLAY switch inside the  
LCD door.  
Time (Hour:Min)  
TIME  
TC  
UB  
: Time codes are displayed.  
: User’s bit data is displayed.  
1When the SHUTTER dial is pressed, the blinking digit  
moves to the next digit.  
2When the SHUTTER dial is rotated, the value of the  
blinking digit changes.  
When the SHUTTER dial is rotated upward, the value  
becomes higher. When rotated downward, the value  
becomes smaller.  
Display of date and time in the various operation modes.  
CAUTION  
In Camera mode  
: The date and time of the internal  
clock are displayed.  
In VTR playback mode : The date and time recorded on the  
tape are displayed.  
A time code with a duration of more than 2 hours may not  
be displayed correctly by DV components for general con-  
sumer use, as some of these lack the capability to display  
longer time codes.  
In VTR stop mode  
: The last read date and time values  
are displayed.  
LCD BRIGHT  
CAM/VTR  
-
+
3Repeat the procedure described in 1 and 2 above to  
set the day, month, year, hours, minutes.  
The digits indicating seconds cannot be set.  
4Press the SHUTTER dial in sync with a time signal to  
enter the date and time precisely.  
When an HDV/DV sig- : The date and time of the DV input  
nal is input from the are displayed in DV format. The  
AUDIO SELECT  
CH-2  
TC  
DISPLAY  
TC  
GENE.  
FREE  
CH-1  
AUTO  
MANU  
IEEE1394 connector  
date and time of the internal clock  
are displayed in HDV format.  
REC  
UB  
REGEN  
3.When all the settings are completed, rotate the SHUT-  
TER dial to align the cursor with the PAGE BACK item,  
and then press the SHUTTER dial.  
TC DISPLAY switch TC GENE. switch  
The TIME/DATE menu screen returns.  
4.To return to the normal screen, use either of the following  
methods.  
Press the STATUS button  
or  
Return to the TOP MENU screen and then select the  
EXIT item on the TOP MENU screen before pressing the  
SHUTTER dial.  
42  
43  
PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION  
TC/UB/CLOCK menu screen (FRAME RATE: 60/30)  
Use the DROP FRAME item to select the framing mode  
for the time code generator.  
Presetting time code data  
Presetting user’s bit data  
Presetting and Recording  
of Time Code  
DROP  
: The time code generator’s running method is  
set the drop frame mode.  
The time code and user’s bit data are preset on the TC/UB/  
CLOCK menu screen.  
The user’s bit data are preset with the UB PRESET item on  
the TC/UB/CLOCK menu screen.  
The method for setting is the same as the method for setting  
the time code described on the left.  
Use this setting when placing emphasis on  
the recording time.  
1.Display the TC/UB/CLOCK menu screen.  
Select the TC/UB/CLOCK item on the TOP MENU  
screen.  
The time codes from the internal time code generator can be  
recorded at the time of recording scenes.  
The TC/UB/CLOCK menu screen differs depending on  
whether the FRAME RATE item on the VIDEO FORMAT  
menu screen is “60/30” or “50/25”.  
There are two ways to preset the time code.  
Set from the TC/UB/CLOCK menu screen.  
Set in the LCD screen without opening the menu screen.  
NON  
DROP  
: The time code generator’s running method is  
set to the non drop frame mode.  
Use this setting when placing emphasis on  
the number of frames.  
The user’s bit can be specified using numerals or alpha-  
betic letters from 0 to F for each digit.  
To record user’s bit data, set the UB REC item to ON (Only  
when set to FRAME RATE 50/25).  
TC/UB/CLOCK menu screen  
(FRAME RATE: 60/30)  
CAUTION  
It is not possible to set all the digits of the user’s bit data to  
This section explains how to set from the TC/UB/CLOCK  
menu screen.  
“F”.  
Reading of the data during playback will not be possible for  
an all-F setting.  
*
See page 46 for instructions of setting from the LCD  
screen.  
Framing mode:  
Drop frame/  
Non-drop setting  
Menu and switch settings to set the time code preset are the  
same as the settings below.  
Time code (hour, min, sec, frame)  
Zero-resetting the Time Code or  
User’s Bit Data  
2.Set the time code (hours, minutes, seconds, frames).  
Setting  
1Rotate the SHUTTER dial to align the cursor (K) with  
TC PRESET, and then press the SHUTTER dial.  
This is performed with the TC or UB PRESET item on the  
TC/UB/CLOCK menu screen. (Performed separately for the  
time code and the user’s bit data.)  
The first digit of the time code blinks.  
The blinking digit is the one to be set.  
To preset the Time Code, make the following settings.  
TC GENE. switch  
Set to REC or FREE.  
MEMO  
Drop frame/Non-drop frame mode  
2When the SHUTTER dial is pressed, the blinking digit  
changes.  
In the NTSC system, the actual number of frames per 1  
second is approximately 29.97 frames, but per time code  
30 frames are processed. To compensate for this differ-  
ence, the mode called “drop mode” drops frame 00 and 01  
for every minute not divisible by 10.  
1Rotate the SHUTTER dial to align the cursor (K) with the  
TC or UB PRESET item, and then press the SHUTTER  
dial.  
REC  
: The data preset in the time code generator  
runs only during recording.  
Use this setting if it is necessary to record  
continual time codes across different scenes.  
3When the SHUTTER dial is rotated, the value of the  
blinking digit changes.  
When the SHUTTER dial is rotated upward, the value  
becomes higher. When rotated downward, the value  
becomes smaller.  
2Rotate the SHUTTER dial to select ZERO PRESET as the  
setting value, and then press the SHUTTER dial.  
*
However, approximately ±1-frame varia-  
tions may occur in scene accuracy.  
The “non-drop frame mode” is when no frames are dropped  
and the actual time shift neglected.  
MEMO  
FREE  
: The time code starts to run from the time it is  
preset in the time code generator.  
4Repeat the procedure described in 2 and 3 above to  
set the desired value for all digits.  
When a menu screen is not being displayed, you can zero  
reset the time code data by simultaneously holding down  
the USER2 button and the STOP button for about 1 sec-  
ond.  
TC/UB/CLOCK menu screen (FRAME RATE: 50/25)  
Whether or not user’s bit data should be recorded can be  
selected with the UB REC item on the TC/UB/CLOCK  
menu screen.  
5After setting the frame digit, press the SHUTTER dial to  
make EXECUTE blink. The setting values are con-  
firmed when the SHUTTER dial is pressed again.  
To cancel the setting, select CANCEL and press the  
SHUTTER dial.  
Set the TCG SOURCE item in the TC/UB/CLOCK menu  
screen to INTERNAL.  
TC/UB/CLOCK menu screen  
(FRAME RATE: 50/25)  
3.When all the digits are set  
Press the STATUS button to return to the normal  
screen  
or  
Rotate the SHUTTER dial to align the cursor (K) with  
the PAGE BACK item, and then press the SHUTTER  
dial to return to the TOP MENU screen.  
44  
45  
PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION  
Recording Time Codes in  
Continuation of Time  
Presetting the Time Code  
from the LCD Screen  
Playing Back Time Code  
Codes Recorded on Tape  
The time code can be preset directly from the LCD screen  
without opening the TC/UB/CLOCK menu screen.  
This device features a time code reader. During playback,  
the time code or user’s bit data recorded on the tape is dis-  
played on the LCD screen or viewfinder status screen.  
The GY-HD250/GY-HD251 also incorporates  
a
time code  
CAUTION  
reader. Therefore, when this device enters record mode from  
record-standby mode, it can read the time code data  
recorded on the tape and record time codes in continuation  
of the existing data.  
The recorded user’s bit data are identical to the user’s bit  
date recorded on tape.  
However, approximately ±1-frame variations may occur in  
scene accuracy.  
To enable this function, set the time code related switches as  
follows before starting recording.  
When the [PB/PR/TC] switch is set to TC, the playback  
time code is output from the [PB/TC OUT] terminal (Only in  
VTR mode).  
PRESET mode is not available in the following.  
Blink  
TCG SOURCE item in the TC/UB/CLOCK menu screen  
is set to EXTERNAL.  
When HD/SD-SDI OUT of the VIDEO FORMAT[2/2] menu  
screen is set to ON, the playback time code is output from  
the [HD/SD-SDI] terminal.  
2. Press the USER2 button to reset all data.  
TC GENE. switch is set to REGEN.  
TC DUPLI. item in the TC/UB/CLOCK menu screen is  
set to ON.  
Data becomes “00:00:00:00” and the hour digit starts  
blinking.  
*
MEMO  
3. Set the time code (hour, minute, second and frame).  
Menu screen is displayed.  
RECORDING mode is active.  
Switching to CAM/VTR mode (When VTR indicator is  
blinking).  
The blinking digit can be set.  
During playback, if a portion of tape without recording  
time code runs through, the time code stops running.  
Playback continues.  
1Turn the SHUTTER dial to change the value of the  
blinking digit. Turn the SHUTTER dial up to increase the  
value and down to decrease the value.  
Setting  
When a tape with a time code that is longer than two  
hours is played on home-use DV equipment, time code  
may not be played properly on some models.  
Set TCG SOURCE on the TC/UB/CLOCK menu screen to  
INTERNAL.  
Set the TC GENE. switch inside the LCD door to REGEN.  
Set TC DUPLI. item on the TC/UB/CLOCK menu screen  
to OFF.  
Setting  
TC/UB/CLOCK menu screen  
2Press the SHUTTER dial to change the blinking digit.  
3Repeat steps 1 and 2 and continue setting for each  
Set TCG SOURCE to INTERNAL.  
row.  
Set framing of the time code generator in DROP  
FRAME. (When set to FRAME RATE 60/30)  
Set to enable/disable user’s bit recording in UB REC.  
(When set to FRAME RATE 50/25)  
4. Press the USER3 button to confirm the setting data.  
The LCD screen returns to the original screen.  
MEMO  
Presetting User’s Bit  
You can specify the user’s bit with a number or character  
between 0 - F.  
The time code framing mode automatically becomes the  
mode (drop frame or non drop frame) already recorded on  
the tape.  
Set the TC GENE switch to REC or FREE.  
MEMO  
CAUTION  
See page 44 for details on the above settings.  
All digits of user’s bit cannot be set to F.  
If all digits are set to F and read, user’s bit is deemed as  
undefined during playback.  
About Time Code Mode  
Camera mode  
Set the TC DISPLAY switch.  
Set to TC to preset time code and UB to preset user’s bit.  
TC/UB/CLOCK menu  
TC GENE. switch  
REC REGEN  
TCG SOURCE item  
INTERNAL  
FREE  
Operation  
This section describes presetting of the time code.  
Aborting Preset Operation  
While presetting, press the USER1 button while holding  
TC PRESET mode TC REGENE mode  
EXT TC mode  
EXTERNAL  
down the STATUS button.  
USER 2 button  
Preset operation stops and the LCD screen returns to  
the original screen.  
VTR mode/IEEE1394 input mode  
USER 1 button  
USER 3 button  
TC/UB/CLOCK menu  
TC GENE. switch  
REC  
USER  
1
USER  
2
USER  
3
TCG SOURCE item  
TC DUPLI. item  
FREE  
REGEN  
CAUTION  
SHUTTER  
OFF  
ON  
TC PRESET mode  
TC REGENE mode  
IEEE1394 TC  
SLAVE mode*  
Preset operation is terminated in the following.  
ND FILTER  
INTERNAL  
SHUTTER dial  
IEEE1394 TC DUPLI. mode  
TC DISPLAY switch is changed  
CAM/VTR mode switch is changed  
VTR operations are performed  
2
1
VF BRIGHT  
OFF  
ON  
USER  
1
USER  
2
USER  
3
MENU  
OFF  
EXTERNAL  
EXT TC mode  
ND FILTER  
2
1
MENU  
STATUS button  
STATUS  
WHT.BAL  
AUTO  
CH-1  
AUTO  
CH-2  
USER1, USER2, and USER3 presetting in the SWITCH  
MODE menus screen is not available when the Time Code  
Preset screen is displayed.  
*
AUDIO  
LEVEL  
STATUS  
IEEE1394 TC SLAVE mode is performed with special operations. X See page 48.  
ON  
OFF  
POWER  
REC  
The time code preset screen is displayed on the LCD  
screen or viewfinder. It will not be output from the VIDEO  
OUT terminal.  
1.In Standby or Stop mode, press the USER1 button for  
about 2 seconds while holding down the STATUS button.  
The current time code generator data is displayed in  
enlarged display mode on the LCD screen. The hour  
digit starts blinking.  
46  
47  
PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION  
Operation  
Synchronizing with the  
Time Code of the IEEE1394  
(DV)-Connected Master Unit  
Synchronizing with an Exter-  
nal Time Code Generator  
1. Set the external time code generator and operate it.  
The built-in time code generator synchronizes with the  
input external time code data.  
“L” lights up in the STATUS 1 screen of LCD screen or  
viewfinder. ”L” also lights up when the LCD screen is in  
enlarged character display.  
Synchronize the built-in time code generator with the  
SMPTE/EBU-compliant LTC time code, which is input from  
the [TC IN] terminal. After synchronization (slave lock), the  
built-in time code generator continues to run even if external  
time code are not input.  
You can synchronize the time code when performing multi-camera recording. The internal time code generator will be synchro-  
nized with the time code in the signal input from the IEEE1394 terminal. After synchronization (slave lock), the internal time code  
generator continues to run even if the IEEE1394 cable is disconnected.  
STATUS 1 screen  
Enlarged display screen  
Master unit  
Slave unit  
PBPR/TC switch  
GENLOCK/AUX IN switch  
Synchronization signal  
VF BRIGHT  
VF BRIGHT  
GENLOCK  
IN  
USER  
1
USER  
2
USER  
3
USER  
1
USER  
2
USER  
3
Synchronization signal  
generator  
ND FILTER  
ND FILTER  
2
1
2
1
Lights up  
MENU  
MENU  
TC IN  
Lights up  
STATUS  
STATUS  
WHT.BAL  
WHT.BAL  
AUTO  
CH-1  
AUTO  
CH-2  
AUTO  
CH-1  
AUTO  
CH-2  
AUDIO  
LEVEL  
AUDIO  
LEVEL  
Synchronization signal  
ON  
OFF  
ON  
OFF  
“L” blinks when the time code cannot be synchronized.  
POWER  
REC  
POWER  
REC  
2. The built-in time code generator continues to run even if  
the external time code generator is disconnected after  
synchronization.  
Slide the IEEE1394  
switch to the [DV] side.  
IEEE1394 terminal  
IEEE1394 terminal  
Slide the IEEE1394  
switch to the [DV] side.  
LTC time code  
IEEE1394 cable  
External time code  
generator  
CAUTION  
You can use the GY-HD250U, GY-HD251E, GY-HD110U, or  
GY-HD111E as a slave unit.  
Status display  
DTCG 00 : 00 : 00 : 00  
TC SLAVE LOCK  
Connection  
Input external synchronization signal to the external time  
code generator and the GENLOCK/AUX IN terminal of this  
device.  
Use BB signals or Tri-sync HD signals as the external syn-  
chronization signals.  
If a time code generator is connected or disconnected dur-  
ing recording, servo lock will be disturbed.  
Connections  
Connect the master unit and the slave unit with an IEEE1394  
cable.  
?
When connecting multiple devices and assigning one  
as the master unit and others as slave units  
If there is only one slave unit, connect as shown below.  
If there are multiple slave units, input external synchroniza-  
tion signals to all GENLOCK/AUX IN terminals from the syn-  
chronization signal generator.  
EXECUTE  
CANCEL  
USER1  
USER3  
Settings and Operations  
CAUTION  
Master unit (GY-HD100U/GY-HD100E/GY-HD101E/GY-  
HD110U/GY-HD110E/GY-HD111E/GY-HD250U/GY-  
HD251E)  
When the power switch is turned on while the external syn-  
chronization signal is input, a vertical vibration occurs for a  
few seconds. This is not a malfunction.  
Master unit  
Slave unit  
1.Set the IEEE1394 switch on the left side to [DV].  
2.Set to Camera mode.  
9. Check that the time code that is synchronized with the  
Input SMPTE/EBU-compliant LTC time code signal to the  
PB/TC IN terminal.  
master unit is running.  
3.Set the recording format to DV-60I or DV50I.  
4.Set the TC GENE. switch to [FREE].  
10.Disconnect the IEEE1394 cable.  
Setting  
11.The slave unit finally returns to Camera mode.  
Slave unit (GY-HD250U/GY-HD251E/GY-HD110U/GY-  
HD111E)  
Set the [GENLOCK/AUX IN] switch to GENLOCK.  
Set the [PBPR/TC] switch to TC.  
Set TCG SOURCE in the TC/UB/CLOCK menu screen to  
EXTERNAL.  
Set the LCD screen or viewfinder to STATUS 1 screen dis-  
play.  
MEMO  
1.Set the IEEE1394 switch on the left side to [DV].  
2.Set to VTR mode.  
GENLOCK IN  
VIDEO OUT  
Slave lock cannot be performed in the following  
instances.  
TC IN  
Slave unit is in CAMERA mode  
Slave unit is in VTR mode and there is no DV signal  
The TC GENE. switch on the slave unit is not set to  
FREE  
3.Check that the camera image from the master unit is input.  
TC OUT  
4.Set TCG SOURCE in the TC/UB/CLOCK menu screen to  
Or set the LCD screen to enlarged status display screen.  
X See page 29.  
INTERNAL. (GY-HD250U, GY-HD251E)  
5.Set the TC GENE. switch to [FREE] and the TC DISPLAY  
HDV format  
switch to [TC].  
If slave lock is performed in DV format and is then  
switched to HDV format, frame digit may deviate.  
6.Set to STOP mode or EJECT mode.  
7.Press the STOP button for 1 second.  
If power is turned off, slave lock is disabled. Perform  
slave lock operation again.  
The DV input time code data from the IEEE1394 termi-  
nal is displayed in the status display. (When status is in  
magnified size, characters are displayed.)  
Slave lock cannot be performed for UB (User’s bit).  
If the frame rate for the master unit and slave unit is not  
synchronized, it will not run properly. Synchronize frame  
rate before using.  
8.Press the USER1 button to begin slave lock.  
(To skip slave lock, press the USER3 button and clear  
the status display.)  
If DROP/NON DROP is not synchronized, it will not run  
properly. Synchronize DROP/NON DROP before using.  
48  
49  
PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION  
1. Set the IRIS mode switch to M (Manual).  
2. Set the zoom mode to M (Manual).  
Screen Adjustment  
Viewfinder Adjustment  
Back Focus Adjustment  
3. Open the iris by turning the iris ring.  
If the illumination is too strong, reduce it or move to a  
darker place.  
4. Turn the zoom lever until the lens is at the maximum tele-  
LCD monitor direction, angle, screen brightness, etc. can be  
adjusted.  
It is only necessary to perform this when the lens is attached  
for the first time or when focusing is not correct in both the  
telephoto and wide-angle positions.  
Direction of the Viewfinder  
Adjust the position and angle of the viewfinder.  
photo position.  
5. Bring the subject into focus.  
6. Set the lens to maximum wide-angle.  
7. Loosen the back focus ring retaining knob.  
Diopter Adjustment  
Rotate the eyepiece focusing ring until the viewfinder screen  
image is clearly visible.  
Adjusting the Direction and Angle of the  
LCD monitor  
It is easier to adjust back focus when the subject is more  
than 3 meters from the camera.  
8. View the same subject and adjust the back focus ring for  
The optimal subject for this adjustment is a Siemens star  
chart.  
With the LCD door in the open condition, rotate the LCD  
the best possible focus.  
Adjustment of the Viewfinder Screen  
door.  
9. Repeat steps 4. through 8. about three times for fine  
adjustment until the subject remains in focus in both the  
telephoto position and the wide-angle position.  
PEAKING:  
It can be turned 180° in upward direction and 90° in down-  
ward direction.  
Adjusts the contour of the LCD monitor and the viewfinder  
screen.  
When turned 180° upward direction, the LCD monitor can  
be viewed from the lens side (vertically inverted image).  
3
4, 6  
5
10.Tighten the back focus ring retaining knob to secure the  
VF BRIGHT:  
ring.  
Adjusts the brightness of the viewfinder screen.  
PEAKING volume  
Eyepiece focusing ring  
Eyepiece  
LCDBRIGHT  
button  
VF BRIGHT volume  
PEAKING volume  
Sliding securing ring  
LCD  
-
BR  
IGH  
T
+
CA  
M/V  
TR  
AU  
DIO  
SE  
LEC  
T
CH-1  
TC  
CH-2  
AUTO  
DISPLA  
Y
GENE.  
MAN  
U
TC  
UB  
FREE  
REC  
REG  
EN  
180° up  
90° down  
1
LCD lock release lever  
Adjusting the LCD monitor  
PEAKING:  
Adjusts the contour of the LCD monitor.  
LCD BRIGHT:  
Adjusts the brightness of the LCD monitor.  
2
7, 8, 10  
Viewfinder mount base  
Adjustments are made on the LCD/VF[2/4] menu screen.  
X See page 90.  
Adjustments are made on the LCD/VF[4/4] menu screen.  
X See page 92.  
LCD MIRROR MODE:  
Sets the LCD monitor to display mirrored images when  
shooting facing the subject.  
VF CONTRAST:  
Adjusts the contrast of the viewfinder screen.  
BLACK & WHITE:  
Adjustments are made on the LCD/VF[4/4] menu screen.  
X See page 92.  
Sets the LCD monitor and viewfinder to black and white  
display.  
LCD CONTRAST:  
Adjusts the contrast of the LCD monitor.  
BLACK & WHITE:  
Sets the LCD monitor and viewfinder to black and white  
display.  
MEMO  
The screen size of the viewfinder can be changed by  
selecting the desired size with the ASPECT item on the  
VIDEO FORMAT[1/2] menu screen (4:3 or 16:9).  
Siemens star chart  
50  
51  
PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION  
ERROR: LOW LIGHT (Insufficient illumination)  
Displayed when the illumination is dim. Increase the illumi-  
nation and then re-adjust the white balance.  
ERROR: OVER LIGHT (Excessive illumination)  
Displayed when the light is excessively bright. Decrease  
the illumination and then re-adjust the white balance.  
4. Change the setting values for LEVEL(R), LEVEL(G), and  
LEVEL(B) with the SHUTTER dial while referring to the  
monitor.  
When setting values are increased, colors at the bottom  
of the screen are suppressed and the top is enhanced.  
LEVEL(R): Adjusts reds.  
White Balance Adjustment  
White Shading Adjustment  
LEVEL(G): Adjusts greens.  
LEVEL(B): Adjusts blues.  
<Range: -128 to +127>  
Since the color of light (color temperature) varies depending on  
the light source, it is necessary to re-adjust the white balance  
when the main light source illuminating the subject changes.  
Even if white balance is achieved in the middle of the screen,  
it may not be achieved at the top and bottom of the screen.  
Greens and magentas may be colored. This is due to char-  
acteristics of the lens. Correcting this phenomenon is called  
White Shading Adjustment.  
5. Press the SHUTTER dial after changing the setting val-  
ues to save in the memory.  
Perform this after adjusting white balance.  
White shading adjustment is performed on the WHITE BAL-  
ANCE menu screen.  
6. Press the STATUS button to return to the normal screen.  
White Balance Adjustment  
7. When white shading adjustment is completed, adjust  
Two kinds of white balance adjustment results can be stored  
in memories AUTO A and AUTO B.  
During operation  
Result message  
white balance again.  
X See “White Balance Adjustment” on page 52.  
1.Display the WHITE BALANCE menu screen.  
Follow the steps in “Setting Menu Screens” on page 75  
and proceed as follows.  
Adjustment procedure  
1.Set the following switches.  
MENUrCAMERA PROCESS[1/2]rCAMERA PRO-  
CESS[2/2]rADVANCE PROCESSrWHITE BALANCE  
Set the POWER switch to ON.  
Set the IRIS mode switch of the lens to A (Auto).  
Set the FULL AUTO switch to OFF.  
2.Set the ND filter switch according to the current lighting.  
Improper object  
Insufficient illumination  
3.Set the WHT.BAL switch to A or B.  
4.Place a white object near the center of the screen under  
the same lighting conditions as the target subject and  
zoom in to fill the screen with white.  
5.Press the AWB (Auto White Balance) button.  
“AUTO WHITE A, B OPERATION” is displayed in the view-  
finder while the auto white balance adjustment circuit operates.  
When correct white balance is obtained, the approximate  
color temperature is displayed together with “AUTO  
WHITE A, B OK” for about 5 seconds.  
Excessive illumination  
Setting in the WHITE BALANCE screen is performed as fol-  
lows.  
CAUTION  
Do not adjust using any highly reflective objects, such as  
metal, etc., as this may result in improper white balance  
adjustment.  
The FAW (Full Auto White balance) function cannot pro-  
vide optimum white balance with a subject outside the  
FAW adjustment range, for example when it contains  
only a single color or not enough white color.  
The accuracy of the FAW (Full Auto White balance) is  
inferior to that of the Auto white balance.  
Selecting an item  
Turn the SHUTTER dial to align the cursor (j) with the  
desired item, and press the SHUTTER dial.  
Iris mode switch (7 on page 10)  
The item is selected and the setting value blinks.  
Changing the setting value  
Turn the SHUTTER dial to change the blinking value. When  
the SHUTTER dial is pressed, the value stops blinking and  
the setting is changed.  
ND filter  
2.Perform the above steps to set SHADING to MANUAL.  
When the power is turned on with the FAW mode  
selected, it takes about 10 seconds for the FAW adjust-  
ment to be completed.  
3.Select LEVEL(R), LEVEL(G), LEVEL(B) and press the  
SHUTTER dial.  
Do not shoot within this interval.  
WHT.BAL  
switch  
The setting value for the selected LEVEL blinks and  
becomes available for changing.  
POWER switch  
AWB button  
Full Auto White Balance (FAW)  
MEMO  
Fine-tune red and blue to match the white adjusted in white  
balance in WHITE PAINT<R>/<B> on the WHITE BAL-  
ANCE menu screen. X See page 85.  
The FAW function adjusts the white balance value automati-  
cally as the lighting condition changes.  
This mode is convenient when you have no time to adjust the  
white balance or when the camera is moved frequently in  
and out of places under different lighting conditions.  
Setting procedure  
Error messages  
If the adjustment ends abnormally, an error message, as  
described below, blinks for about 5 seconds.  
The FAW function can be activated with the FAW item on  
the SWITCH MODE menu screen. The FAW function can  
be allocated to one of the white balance switching  
switches A, B, or PRESET.  
NG: OBJECT (Improper object)  
Displayed when there is not enough white color on an  
object or the color temperature is not suitable.  
Replace the color temperature conversion filter or use  
another white object and re-adjust the white balance.  
X See page 86.  
52  
53  
SETTING AND ADJUSTMENTS BEFORE SHOOTING  
4. Turn the SHUTTER dial, change the setting and push the  
SHUTTER dial.  
ASPECT item  
4:3  
4:3 TV  
Setting the Video Format  
Camera Settings  
The setting stops flashing and is temporarily set.  
Move the cursor (K) to the EXECUTE item and EXE-  
CUTE flashes.  
5. Push the SHUTTER dial.  
“REBOOT! SYSTEM CHANGE” is displayed on the  
screen and after a few seconds the system is reboo-  
ted.  
Set the video format using the FRAME RATE item and the  
REC item on the VIDEO FORMAT menu screen.  
1.Set the switch positions.  
A. [GAIN] switch: Set to L ( 0 dB).  
B. [WHT. BAL] (Auto White Balance) switch: Set to A or  
B.  
16:9 TV  
2.Set the lens’ iris mode switch to “A” (Auto iris side).  
Setting the FRAME RATE Item  
3.Select the ND filter.  
1.Press the STATUS button for at least 1 second.  
ND FILTER  
Suitable Location  
16:9  
4:3 TV  
The TOP MENU screen is displayed.  
SHUTTER dial  
OFF OFF  
Indoors, dark outdoors  
1
2
1/4ND  
Outdoors under clear sky  
1/16ND  
Outdoors under extremely clear sky  
4.Set the shutter speed to OFF with the SHUTTER dial.  
[SQUEEZE]  
4:3 TV  
USER  
1
USER  
2
USER  
3
SHUTTER  
ND FILTER  
Setting the REC Item  
2
1
Set the REC item using the same steps as for the FRAME  
RATE item.  
MENU  
[LETTER]  
16:9 TV  
STATUS  
MEMO  
If you change the FRAME RATE item setting, the system  
is rebooted.  
The synchronous video signal is momentarily disturbed  
when the REC item setting is switched.  
We recommend the following settings for REC item (in  
HDV format).  
When recording images with a lot of motion:  
Set to HDV60p or HDV50p  
When recording images with little motion:  
Set to HDV30p or HDV25p  
VTR indicator  
STATUS button  
VF BRIGHT  
2.Turn the SHUTTER dial and bring the cursor (K) to the  
VIDEO FORMAT.. item and press the SHUTTER dial.  
In DV mode, selection of SQUEEZE and LETTER is not  
possible. The screen display mode becomes SQUEEZE.  
USER  
1
USER  
2
USER  
3
4.  
3.  
The VIDEO FORMAT[1/2] menu screen is displayed.  
ND FILTER  
LCD BRIGHT  
-
CAM/VTR  
+
2
1
MENU  
AUDIO SELECT  
CH-1  
CH-2  
TC  
DISPLAY  
TC  
GENE.  
FREE  
MEMO  
AUTO  
MANU  
REC  
UB  
STATUS  
REGEN  
When you set the REC item on the VIDEO FORMAT[1/2]  
menu to HDV format, the ASPECT item is fixed at 16:9  
and “[16:9]” is displayed.  
If the above applies, you can set to display the image in  
the style of 4:3 televisions.  
X See “DOWN CON. [HDV]” on page 78.  
In the SAFETY ZONE item on the LCD/VF[1/4] menu  
screen, you can display the safety zone for a standard  
screen as well as a 16:9 screen in the viewfinder or LCD  
monitor.  
WHT.BAL  
AUTO  
CH-1  
AUTO  
CH-2  
AUDIO  
LEVEL  
A
B
1.  
ON  
OFF  
POWER  
REC  
CAM/VTR button  
Screen Size (4:3/16:9)  
Mode Selection  
X See page 89.  
3.Turn the SHUTTER dial and bring the cursor (K) to the  
When the ASPECT item is set to 4:3, the screen that is  
displayed may differ depending on the 16:9 television  
you are using.  
FRAME RATE item and press the SHUTTER dial.  
The setting for the selected item flashes and can be  
changed.  
“CHANGE THE SYSTEM” is displayed on the screen.  
The screen size of recorded images can be selected with the  
ASPECT item on the VIDEO FORMAT[1/2] menu screen.  
X See page 78.  
To record using the standard screen, set ASPECT to 4:3.  
To record using the 16:9 screen, set ASPECT to 16:9.  
54  
55  
SETTING AND ADJUSTMENTS BEFORE SHOOTING  
MEMO  
MEMO  
MEMO  
You can select the normal input level for MIC and MIC+48V  
in the INPUT1, 2 MIC REF. item on the AUDIO/MIC[1/2]  
menu screen.  
When AUDIO LIMITER in the AUDIO/MIC[1/2] menu  
When connecting a stereotype earphone, make the fol-  
lowing settings to output stereo sound.  
1Set the MONITOR SELECT switch to BOTH.  
Audio Input Signal Selec-  
tion  
screen is set to ON, the AUDIO LIMITER functions in  
manual adjust mode. Recording level is suppressed  
when excessive audio is input.  
2Set the AUDIO MONITOR item on the AUDIO/MIC[2/2]  
X See “AUDIO LIMITER” on page 87.  
menu screen to STEREO.  
The reference level for audio recorded on the tape can  
be set with the AUDIO REF. LEVEL item on the AUDIO/  
MIC menu screen. (–20 dB or –12 dB) The level will  
change for both CH-1 and CH-2.  
When AUDIO MONITOR item on the AUDIO/MIC[2/2]  
menu screen is set to “STEREO”, only the audio of CH-1  
is output from the monitoring speaker.  
The volume of the alarm tone is set with the ALARM VR  
LEVEL item on the OTHERS[1/2] menu screen. (OFF/  
LOW/MIDDLE/HIGH)  
The GY-HD250/GY-HD251 is provided with the INPUT1 con-  
nector and the INPUT2 connector for audio input.  
Select the audio from the INPUT1 connector or the INPUT2  
connector using the CH-2 INPUT switch for the audio to be  
recorded in CH-2.  
Adjusting Audio during Recording  
For each audio channel, use the CH-1/CH-2 AUDIO  
SELECT switch to select whether the audio level adjustment  
should be set to AUTO mode or MANUAL mode.  
CAUTION  
When the AUDIO INPUT switch is set to MIC, be sure to  
check that the microphone is connected to the INPUT1/2  
connector. If the microphone is not connected, increasing the  
audio level could cause noise from the input connector to be  
recorded on the tape. When the microphone is not con-  
nected to the INPUT1/2 connector, set the AUDIO INPUT  
switch to “LINE” or turn down the audio level control.  
In the FULL AUTO mode, the audio level volume cannot  
be adjusted with the audio level controls on the CH-1 and  
CH-2.  
Adjusting the audio input level control  
The audio input level can be adjusted manually when the GY-  
HD250/GY-HD251 is in the record, record-standby or stop mode.  
Selecting the CH-2 channel input  
connector  
1. Set the CH-1/CH-2 AUDIO SELECT switch of the chan-  
nel whose audio level that you want to adjust manually to  
MANU.  
Select using the CH-2 INPUT switch.  
INPUT1  
: Inputs the audio from the INPUT1 connector  
into CH-2.  
INPUT2  
: Inputs the audio from the INPUT2 connector  
into CH-2.  
CH-2 INPUT switch  
Monitor  
speaker  
Monitoring Audio during Recording  
The audio input during recording, in record-pause or stop  
mode can be monitored through the monitoring speaker or  
earphone.  
MONITOR SELECT FULL AUTO switch  
switch  
MONITOR  
volume  
AUDIO INPUT  
VF BRIGHT  
switch  
USER  
1
USER  
2
USER  
3
ND FILTER  
LCD BRIGHT  
-
CAM/VTR  
+
2
1
MENU  
AUDIO SELECT  
CH-1  
CH-2  
TC  
DISPLAY  
TC  
GENE.  
FREE  
AUTO  
MANU  
REC  
UB  
STATUS  
REGEN  
WHT.BAL  
AUTO  
CH-1  
AUTO  
CH-2  
AUDIO  
LEVEL  
ON  
OFF  
POWER  
REC  
CH-1 audio input  
level volume  
CH-1/CH-2  
AUDIO SELECT switch  
MEMO  
CH-2 audio input level  
volume  
The audio from the INPUT1 connector is also input into CH-  
1 regardless of the setting.  
2. Rotate the audio input level control corresponding to the  
audio input level to be adjusted.  
Adjust so that the peak level does not exceed the –3 dB  
point when a loud sound is input.  
Selecting the audio signal input  
STATUS 1 screen  
PHONES jack  
Select the sound to be input to the INPUT1 or INPUT2 con-  
nector using the AUDIO INPUT switch.  
The setting is made for each of INPUT1 or INPUT2 connector.  
Select the audio channel to be monitored using the MONI-  
TOR SELECT switch.  
LINE  
: Set to this position when connected to audio  
equipment, etc.  
The reference input level is +4 dBs.  
CH-1  
: The sound input to the CH-1 channel is output.  
BOTH : The sound input to the CH-1 and CH-2 chan-  
nels is output mixed.  
CH-2  
MIC  
: Set to this position when using  
microphone.  
a
dynamic  
: The sound input to the CH-2 channel is output.  
The MONITOR volume control adjusts the monitoring vol-  
ume.  
The loudspeaker or earphone outputs an alarm tone in the  
case of an abnormal condition occurring in this device.  
An alarm tone is also output when the tape end is reached  
or when the battery is running down.  
MIC+48V : Set to this position when a microphone (phan-  
tom microphone) requiring +48  
V
DC power  
supply is connected.  
Audio level  
CAUTION  
Indicator level (reference)  
When connecting a component that does not require +48 V  
power supply, make sure that the switch is not set to  
MIC+48V before the component is connected.  
*
Do not increase the audio monitoring volume exces-  
sively; otherwise howling with the camera microphone  
may occur.  
56  
57  
SHOOTING OPERATION  
MEMO  
1. In the record-standby mode, press the RET button on the  
camera lens section.  
The way the FRONT TALLY and the BACK TALLY lamps  
flash differ depending on what you set in the FRONT  
TALLY and BACK TALLY items on the OTHERS[1/2] menu  
screen. X See page 96.  
If the Record-Standby Mode Contin-  
ues  
Basic Recording Opera-  
tion  
Setting the time before the tape protection mode is engaged  
The time before the tape protection mode is engaged from  
the record-standby mode can be set to 5 minutes or 3 min-  
utes with the LONG PAUSE TIME item on the OTHERS[1/2]  
screen menu. X See page 96.  
1.Set the POWER switch to ON.  
CAUTION  
This device turns on in camera mode.  
This device enters the stop mode automatically at TAPE  
2.Start recording.  
END. If this mode continues for  
switches to the tape protect mode.  
3
minutes, the mode  
Press the REC/VTR trigger button on the GY-HD250/GY-  
HD251 to start recording.  
X
See “OTHERS[1/2] Menu Screen” on page 96.  
When the record-standby mode has continued for about 5  
minutes or 3 minutes, the GY-HD250/GY-HD251 automati-  
cally stops drum rotation in order to protect the tape. (Tape  
protect mode)  
In the tape protect mode, STOP is shown as the VTR  
mode indication on the LCD monitor and in the viewfinder  
screen. (STATUS 1 screen)  
Once recording has started, the FRONT TALLY lamp and  
BACK TALLY lamp light red.  
(LONG PAUSE TIME item)  
If the REC/VTR trigger button is pressed very quickly  
and repeatedly, or the POWER switch is moved immedi-  
ately after the trigger button is pressed, the GY-HD250/  
GY-HD251 may not enter the record mode.  
1. RET button  
FOCUS ASSIST button  
FRONT TALLY lamp  
To remedy this condition set the POWER switch to OFF  
and wait for 5 seconds or more before turning the power  
on again.  
A neat transition to the next recorded scene cannot be  
guaranteed if  
POWER switch or DC power supply OFF, or by removing  
the battery pack.  
Trial-shooting is always recommended before recording  
important events to confirm the recording is satisfactory.  
The microphone may pick up the sound of the lens’ iris if  
the iris is changed abruptly or the iris is manually moved  
abruptly during recording.  
a
recording is ended by turning the  
The tape rewinds and about 6 seconds of the content  
recorded in DV format is played back, and about 8 sec-  
onds of the content recorded in HDV format is played  
back. After playback, this device returns to standby  
mode at the position on the tape where the RET button  
was pressed.  
If you continue to hold down the RET button, up to about  
18 seconds of content recorded in DV format and up to  
about 20 seconds of content recorded in HDV format can  
be rewound and played back.  
VTR mode indication  
About the QUICK REC START Mode  
Pressing the REC/VTR trigger button during playback  
will put this device in REC standby mode. The camera  
will automatically return to recording mode after play-  
back.  
To start recording from the tape protect mode, press the  
REC/VTR trigger button.  
The drum starts rotating, and recording starts after  
about 3 seconds.  
To return to the record-standby mode from the tape protect  
If the REC/VTR trigger button is pressed immediately after  
the videocassette is inserted, the mode becomes the  
QUICK REC START mode that enables quick start of  
recording.  
However, when shooting starts in the middle of the tape, a  
blank space appears as the new scene will not be linked  
smoothly with the previous image.  
REC trigger button  
POWER switch  
CAUTION  
mode, press the RET button.  
This function does not work when using RET button is  
used as FOCUS ASSIST button.  
This function does not work when the GY-HD250/GY-  
HD251 is in the stop mode.  
During recording check, the following indication will  
appear if the error rate increases due to head clogging,  
etc.  
“HEAD CLEANING REQUIRED!” is shown on the LCD  
monitor or in the viewfinder. (When the STATUS 0, 1, 4  
screen is displayed.)  
FOCUS ASSIST  
button  
REC trigger button  
BACK TALLY lamp  
CAUTION  
Also, the time code does not continue. (Some overlap may  
also occur.)  
This function does not work when using RET button is used  
as FOCUS ASSIST button.  
About the Focus Assist Function  
When you press this button during shooting, the area of  
focus is displayed in blue, red or green, making it easy to  
focus accurately.  
X See “LCD/VF[1/4] Menu Screen” on page 89.  
You can also set this function from the RET button.  
X See “SWITCH MODE Menu Screen” on page 86. (LENS  
RET item)  
When FOCUS ASSIST on the LCD/VF[1/4] menu screen is  
set to ACCU-FOCUS, ACCU FOCUS functions with FOCUS  
ASSIST. This makes focusing with shallower depth of field  
easier. ACCU FOCUS automatically turns OFF after approxi-  
mately 10 seconds. X See page 89  
Checking Recorded Contents in  
Record-Standby Mode (Recording  
Check Function)  
This function is available only when the GY-HD250/GY-  
HD251 is in the standby mode.  
In standby mode, about 5 seconds of the last part of the con-  
tent recorded in DV format can be played back, and about 7  
seconds when the content was recorded in HDV format can  
be played back.  
The recorded contents can be checked on the LCD moni-  
tor, in the viewfinder or on a monitor connected to the  
video signal output connectors.  
RET button  
VTR trigger button  
58  
59  
SHOOTING OPERATION  
specified duration only, the Record-Standby mode is  
engaged automatically.  
During HEADER REC recording, “HEADER REC” is  
shown (blinking) on the LCD monitor and in the view-  
finder.  
How to set the HEADER REC menu screen  
HEADER REC Function  
1.Display the HEADER REC menu screen.  
1Select the TC/UB/CLOCK.. item on the TOP MENU  
screen.  
2Select the HEADER REC item on the TC/UB/CLOCK  
menu screen.  
When the REC/VTR trigger button is pressed while the STOP button is pressed, this function first records the color bar video and  
the test tone (1 kHz sine-wave) of the built-in signal generator at the beginning of the tape. Then it records the black video signal  
and the mute audio signal for the duration specified in advance. When the recording is completed, this device enters the Record-  
Standby mode. The time code value at the Record-Standby position becomes the time code specified in advance. (HEADER  
REC function)  
TC/UB/CLOCK menu screen  
Settings related to the HEADER REC function, such as whether the HEADER REC function should be enabled, the HEADER  
REC execution duration, and the time code value setting when the HEADER REC recording is completed, etc., are made on  
the HEADER REC menu screen.  
The HEADER REC function is enabled when TCG SOURCE on the TC/UB/CLOCK menu screen is set to INTERNAL.  
The HEADER REC function is executed under the following circumstances:  
CAM/VTR button: Set to CAM mode.  
During HEADER REC  
In the Record-Standby or Stop mode  
The menu screen is not displayed during HEADER REC  
recording.  
HEADER REC menu screen  
Record-Standby mode  
Tape beginning  
HEADER REC  
3. After HEADER REC recording is completed and the  
Record-Standby mode is engaged, normal recording  
starts when you press the REC/VTR trigger button.  
Normal recording  
2.Setting the HEADER REC menu screen.  
(Example) 30 sec  
(Example) 30 sec  
1Select the menu item.  
Rotate the SHUTTER dial to align the cursor (K) with  
the item to be set, and then press the SHUTTER dial.  
When the TC GENE. switch is set to either REC or  
REGEN, the time code value at the start of the  
HEADER REC menu screen.  
Color bar video signal  
Test tone (1 kHz)  
(Setting range: 0 to 99 sec)  
Black video signal  
Mute audio (No sound)  
(Setting range: 0 to 99 sec)  
The setting area of the selected item starts blinking.  
2Changing the setting value.  
Rotate the SHUTTER dial to change the setting, and  
then press the SHUTTER dial.  
MEMO  
Time code, user’s bits recording  
Time code, user’s bits recording  
To stop during HEADER REC operation, press the REC/  
VTR trigger button or the STOP button.  
The HEADER REC menu screen cannot be opened dur-  
ing HEADER REC recording.  
HEADER REC operation is accepted even during load-  
ing of the cassette tape.  
The test tone (1 kHz sine-wave) recorded in the color bar  
section will be recorded unrelated to the setting for the  
TEST TONE item on the AUDIO/MIC[1/2] menu screen.  
The time code preset on the TC/UB/CLOCK menu  
screen becomes invalid when HEADER REC recording  
is performed.  
The user’s bits following completion of HEADER REC  
recording will be the user’s bits value set on the TC/UB/  
CLOCK menu screen.  
Time code:  
Time code:  
User’s bits:  
User’s bits:  
The value specified on the HEADER  
REC menu screen.  
The value specified on the HEADER  
REC menu screen- HEADER REC time.  
(Example) 23:59:00:00  
The value specified for the UB  
DATA item on the HEADER REC  
menu screen.  
The value specified for the UB  
PRESET item on the TC/UB/  
CLOCK menu screen.  
(Example) 00:00:00:00  
(only when set to REC RUN or  
FREE RUN mode)  
HEADER REC menu screen contents  
Item  
Function/Initial Setting  
START KEY  
Sets whether the HEADER REC operation should be executed when the REC/VTR trigger button is pressed while the  
STOP button is pressed.  
Cursor  
Item  
Set value  
DISABLE  
STOP+REC  
:
:
HEADER REC operation is not executed.  
HEADER REC operation is executed.  
The running of the time code following completion of  
HEADER REC recording will be in accordance with the  
setting of the TC GENE. switch.  
In the case of the TC DATA item and the UB DATA  
item, the blinking digit position moves when the SHUT-  
TER dial is pressed. When the SHUTTER dial is  
rotated, the value of the blinking digit changes. After all  
the digits have been set and the SHUTTER dial is  
pressed, EXECUTE starts blinking. Press the SHUT-  
TER dial once more to confirm the set value.  
TC DATA  
Sets the time code value for the point when the Record-Standby mode is engaged following completion of HEADER  
REC.  
EXECUTE  
ZERO PRESET: Resets all time codes to zero “0”.  
CANCEL Clears the set time code.  
:
Confirms the set time code.  
FREE RUN  
: Continuous running.  
:
REC RUN or REGEN: Runs only during REC.  
Camera images are not output to the LCD monitor, view-  
finder or video output during REW mode when the  
HEADER REC operation begins.  
The frame mode is set depending on the setting in the DROP FRAME item on the TC/UB/CLOCK menu screen.  
* The time code value at the point when the Record-Standby mode is engaged may differ some frames from the value  
set for this item.  
3.To terminate the setting, press the STATUS button.  
UB DATA  
Sets the user’s bits of the HEADER REC section.  
EXECUTE  
:
Confirms the set user’s bits.  
Executing the HEADER REC Function  
The START KEY item on the HEADER REC menu screen  
should be set to STOP+REC.  
ZERO PRESET: Resets all user’s bits data to zero “0”.  
CANCEL  
:
Clears the set user’s bits.  
MEMO  
The user’s bits for the normal recording section are set on the TC/UB/CLOCK menu screen.  
1.Load the cassette and engage the Record-Standby mode  
2.oWrhthilee Sptroepssminogdeth. e STOP button, press the REC/VTR  
BARS TIME  
Sets the duration (seconds) in which the color bar signal and test tone (1 kHz) is recorded during HEADER REC. (1-sec  
steps)  
[Initial Setting: 0SEC - 30SEC - 99SEC]  
trigger button.  
The tape automatically rewinds to the beginning, and  
HEADER REC operation starts from the beginning of  
the tape.  
BLACK TIME  
PAGE BACK  
Sets the duration (seconds) in which the black signal is recorded during HEADER REC. (1-sec steps)  
[Initial Setting: 0SEC - 30SEC - 99SEC]  
The TC/UB/CLOCK menu screen returns when the SHUTTER dial is pressed.  
After HEADER REC recording is performed for the  
60  
61  
PLAYBACK MODE  
When the automatic tracking function is activated at the  
start of the playback mode, digital noise may appear in  
the playback image.  
This device does not allow manual tracking adjustment.  
When playing back a tape that was recorded on another  
unit, digital noise may appear during playback.  
Following loading of the tape, the built-in head cleaner  
will emit a sound while operating. This does not indicate  
a malfunction.  
1. Display the AUDIO menu screen.  
Select the AUDIO item on the TOP MENU screen.  
Playback Procedure  
Outputting Audio  
2. Set the AUDIO menu screen.  
PB AUDIO CH [DV] Items  
CH1/2  
: To reproduce the sound (CH-1, CH-2)  
recorded during shooting.  
Recorded pictures can be viewed in the viewfinder, or on the  
LCD monitor, or on the monitor connected to the video output  
connector.  
MIX  
: To reproduce the sound recorded during  
shooting (CH-1, CH-2) and the after-  
recorded sound (on CH-3 and CH-4)  
simultaneously.  
Setting  
Confirm that the GY-HD250/GY-HD251 is in the VTR mode.  
(VTR indicator: On)  
The data recorded for the date and time or time code on  
the tape can be shown on the screen. To enable or dis-  
able the display is selected on the menu screen:  
CH3/4  
: To reproduce the sound after-recorded  
on CH-3 and CH-4.  
STOP button  
PLAY/STILL button  
Display of date and time : TIME/DATE menu screen  
Display of time code  
: LCD/VF[1/2] menu screen  
AUDIO OUT connector  
PB AUDIO CH [DV]  
CH-1  
CH1  
CH-2  
CH2  
CH1/2  
MIX  
MONITOR  
SELECT switch  
VTR indicator  
CH1+CH3  
CH3  
CH2+CH4  
CH4  
CH3/4  
REW button  
FF button  
Fast-Forward, Rewind  
For HDV format, audio is output to CH1 and CH2 no matter  
the settings.  
VF BRIGHT  
MEMO  
USER  
1
USER  
2
USER  
3
The GY-HD250/GY-HD251 can play back the following two  
types of videocassettes:  
ND FILTER  
3. Either of the following operations returns you to the nor-  
LCD BRIGHT  
-
CAM/VTR  
SHUTTER  
dial  
+
Press the FF button in the stop mode to fast forward the  
tape. Press the REW button in the stop mode to rewind  
the tape. (VTR mode only)  
2
1
MENU  
mal screen.  
AUDIO SELECT  
CH-1  
CH-2  
TC  
DISPLAY  
TC  
GENE.  
MiniDV videocassette  
DVCAM videocassette  
FREE  
AUTO  
MANU  
REC  
UB  
Press the STATUS button  
STATUS  
REGEN  
or  
WHT.BAL  
AUTO  
CH-1  
AUTO  
CH-2  
AUDIO  
LEVEL  
*
“SWITCH TO VTR MODE” is displayed and the function  
does not work if the “FF” or “REW” buttons are pressed  
when Camera mode is in the stop mode.  
STATUS  
button  
Tapes recorded in the LP mode cannot be played back.  
Return to the TOP MENU screen, select the EXIT item  
and press the SHUTTER dial.  
ON  
OFF  
POWER  
REC  
1.Set the POWER switch to ON.  
Press the STOP button to stop fast forwarding or rewind-  
ing.  
MEMO  
2.Set this device to the VTR mode.  
CAM/VTR button  
AUDIO menu screen  
Press the CAM/VTR button to turn on the VTR indicator.  
The DV format is capable of recording up to 4 channels  
*
Playback is also possible in the Camera mode.  
Playback operation becomes possible when the STOP  
button is pressed to set the VTR operation mode indi-  
cator to indicate STOP.  
when the 12-bit, 32 kHz sampling frequency is  
employed. The GY-HD250/GY-HD251 records audio on  
the two channels CH-1 and CH-2. (4-channel recording  
is possible in the case of DV input.)  
MEMO  
When the tape approaches the end during fast forward-  
ing or rewinding, the tape speed decelerates to protect  
the tape.  
When the GY-HD250/GY-HD251 is used for playback of  
3.Load the recorded videocassette correctly.  
The time required for fast forwarding and rewinding may  
become longer when used in a cold environment. This is  
not a malfunction.  
a
tape that was recorded on another unit with audio  
When the videocassette is loaded, this device enters  
the Stop mode.  
recorded on the CH-3 and CH-4 channels, the PB  
AUDIO CH [DV] item on the AUDIO menu screen must  
be set.  
After-recording on the CH-3 and CH-4 channels is not  
possible.  
4.Open the operation cover on the upper section of this  
device.  
Slide the operation cover to the side to open.  
5.Press the PLAY/STILL button.  
Search  
The PB AUDIO CH [DV] item is also valid for embedded  
audio.  
The sampling frequency for embedded audio is 48 kHz.  
Playback starts.  
Earphone terminal output audio  
6.Press the PLAY/STILL button to stop playback tempo-  
Audio output is as shown in the table below depending on  
the MONITOR SELECT switch and AUDIO MONITOR  
and PB AUDIO CH [DV] settings on the AUDIO menu  
screen.  
rarily.  
This device enters the still mode.  
Press the FF button in the play mode or still mode to  
search the tape in the forward direction. Playback takes  
place while fast forwarding.  
Pressing the REW button executes search of the tape in  
the reverse direction. Playback takes place while rewind-  
ing.  
(Each press on the button switches the speed to ×2, ×5,  
and ×10.)  
Press the PLAY/STILL button to resume normal playback.  
Press the STOP button to stop.  
7.To re-start playback, press the PLAY/STILL button.  
8.To stop playback or the still mode, press the STOP but-  
PB AUDIO CH [DV]  
MONITOR  
ton.  
CH1/2  
MIX  
CH3/4  
SELECT  
AUDIO MONITOR  
MEMO  
CH-1  
-
L/R: CH1  
L/R: CH1+CH3  
L/R: CH3  
In the VTR mode, the camera image is not output on the  
LCD monitor, in the viewfinder or through the video out-  
put connector.  
BOTH  
MIX  
STEREO  
L/R: CH1+CH2  
L: CH1 R:CH2  
L/R: CH1+CH2+CH3+CH4 L/R: CH3+CH4  
L: CH1+CH3 R: CH2+CH4 L: CH3 R: CH4  
CH-2  
-
L/R: CH2  
L/R: CH2+CH4  
L/R: CH4  
When the still picture mode or stop mode has continued  
for a while, this device automatically switches to the tape  
protect mode.  
*
In HDV format, you can only select the settings within the bold frame.  
MEMO  
To output sound during the search, set the SEARCH  
AUDIO [DV] item on the AUDIO menu screen to ON.  
Block noise may appear in the picture or the image may  
freeze during the search.  
Tape protect mode : Drum rotation is stopped in order to  
protect the tape.  
Noise may appear in the picture in the still mode.  
62  
63  
USING EXTERNAL COMPONENTS  
Displaying Alarms  
Operation  
CHANGE 1394 SWITCH  
Start and stop recording with the REC/VTR trigger button.  
Recording Composite  
Video Signals from an  
External Device  
Connecting the Video  
Signal Cables  
Displayed when the setting for the input/output video format  
from the IEEE1394 connector and the setting for the  
IEEE1394 switch are different.  
EE images of input signals are output in DV-60I (U  
model) or DV-50I (E model) formats from the various  
image output terminals.  
Set the IEEE1394 switch so it matches the video format.  
CAUTION  
Recording cannot be checked using the lens RET button  
when recording external image signals.  
Do not touch GENLOCK/AUX IN switch during record-  
ing.  
Connecting the IEEE1394 Cable  
This device features an AUX IN terminal and can record  
composite video signals from external devices.  
To reduce the emission of unwanted radio waves, be sure to  
attach the provided clamp filter as shown in the figure below.  
GENLOCK/AUX IN switch  
GENLOCK/AUX IN terminal  
C H A N G E 1 3 9 4 S W I T C H  
Attach the clamp filter as close to this device as possible,  
as shown in the figure.  
Set the IEEE1394 switch on the left panel of this device.  
Status Screen Display on the LCD Screen  
or Viewfinder  
“AUX” is displayed at the top left with signal format (DV60I  
DV  
: DV format  
or DV50I).  
HDV  
: HDV format  
“AUX” display  
“AUX” display  
IEEE1394 switch  
D V- 6 0 I A U X  
D V- 6 0 I A U X  
Clamp filter  
Connection  
Input analog composite video signals from an external  
device to the GENLOCK/AUX IN terminal.  
Wind once  
1
2
.
0
MEMO  
STATUS 0 screen  
STATUS 1 screen  
Input composite video signals with no jitter.  
Input level: 1.0V ± 0.3V (p-p)  
Setting  
Set this device to camera mode:  
If the VTR indicator is lit, press the [CAM/VTR] button and  
turn off the indicator.  
Set the GENLOCK/AUX IN switch to AUX IN.  
Set REC on the VIDEO FORMAT[1/2] menu screen as fol-  
lows.  
U model: DV-60I  
E model: DV-50I  
Set SET UP item on the VIDEO FORMAT[2/2] menu  
screen as follows. (Only for U model)  
ON : Set to this when input analog signals include the  
setup signal.  
CAUTION  
When connecting the IEEE1394 cable from/to Camcorder,  
VCR and other IEEE1394 device, make sure the following  
instructions, otherwise the IEEE1394 circuit device may be  
destroyed.  
Turn the power of both devices OFF and connect the  
IEEE1394 cable.  
Do not insert incorrectly (in reverse) the IEEE1394 cable  
end to IEEE1394 port of both devices.  
OFF : Set to this when input analog signals do not include  
the setup signal.  
X
Do not connect the IEEE1394 cable under the condition  
of static electricity.  
Turn the power of both devices OFF when changing the  
IEEE1394 switch from/to HDV/DV.  
64  
65  
USING EXTERNAL COMPONENTS  
Synchronized Signals  
VIDEO FORMAT menu screen  
The synchronized signal differs depending on the input sync  
signal.  
Refer the table below.  
Using GENLOCK Func-  
tions  
Dubbing with AV Devices  
Input sync signal  
Terminal  
VIDEO  
Video signal  
Tri-sync  
This device features a GENLOCK IN terminal. Input external  
synchronization signals in the GENLOCK IN terminal to syn-  
chronize camera images or playback images with external  
signals.  
Additionally, the H (horizontal) and SC (subcarrier) phase  
adjustments can be performed on image signals of this  
device for external synchronization signals from the GEN-  
LOCK menu screen.  
By connecting the video signal output terminal and the  
AUDIO OUTPUT terminal on GY-HD250/GY-HD251 to an AV  
device, analog signal dubbing is possible.  
BB  
720p  
1080i  
V,F  
V,F  
V
Composite  
SC,H,V,F  
H,V,F  
V
V
V
SD Component  
1.Connect the cables.  
HD Component 720p  
H,V  
V
To reduce the emission of unwanted radio waves, be  
sure to attach the provided clamp filter as shown in the  
figure below.  
Y/PB/PR HD Component 1080i  
V,F  
H,V,F  
V,F  
V,F  
V,F  
V
HDV PB OUTPUT item:  
SD RGB  
SD Y/C  
SD-SDI  
H,V,F  
SC,H,V,F  
H,V,F  
V
V
Set the video format to be output from the video output  
terminal during tape playback.  
Attach the clamp filter as close to this device as possi-  
ble, as shown in the figure.  
V
GENLOCK functions are only valid in Camera mode. They do not  
work in VTR mode.  
PB TAPE item:  
V
HD/SD-  
HD-SDI 720p  
SDI  
Select whether to automatically detect the playback tape  
video format or play back only a particular format.  
Normally, use the “AUTO” setting.  
H,V  
V
HD-SDI 1080i  
V,F  
H,V,F  
Composite cable  
or  
Component cable  
GENLOCK/AUX IN switch  
GENLOCK/AUX IN terminal  
SC : Subcarrier phase H: Horizontal phase  
: Vertical phase F : Field phase  
OUTPUT TERM. [DV] item:  
V
Set component, RGB or Y/C signals for the output image  
signals of the [Y/PB/PR] terminal. (Only for DV format)  
Adjust SC PHASE and H PHASE in the above table from the  
GENLOCK menu screen.  
5. Set the audio output. X See page 63.  
Set the AUDIO menu screen. X See page 87.  
Adjust SC and H PHASE  
AUDIO menu screen  
Signal flow  
1. Display the GENLOCK menu screen.  
Follow the steps in “Setting Menu Screens” on page 75  
and proceed as follows.  
Recording unit  
Connection  
MENUrOTHERSrGENLOCK  
During Standby or Stop mode, input synchronization sig-  
nals from a Sync signal generator to the GENLOCK/AUX  
IN terminal.  
The following synchronization signals are applicable.  
SD synchronization signal: BB (Black burst) signals  
SMPTE170M (RS-170A)-compliant for NTSC  
ITU-R BT.470-6-compliant for PAL  
HD synchronization signal: HDTV Tri-sync signals  
SMPTE296M-compliant for HD720p  
SMPTE274M-compliant for HD1080i  
2. In the GENLOCK menu screen, select the item to per-  
form phase adjustment for and adjust.  
SD H PHASE : Adjust the H phase in SD analog signals.  
(During BB signal input)  
HD H PHASE : Adjust the H phase in HD analog and SD/  
HD SDI signals. (During Tri-sync signal  
input, PHASE of SD analog signals are  
simultaneously adjusted in HD H PHASE  
item.)  
AUDIO  
OUTPUT  
connector  
Signal flow  
Audio cable  
PB AUDIO CH [DV] item:  
Set the audio channel to be output.  
6. Insert the videocassettes.  
SC PHASE : Adjust the SC phase in composite and  
YC signals.  
For details, refer to “GENLOCK Menu Screen” on  
X See page 99.  
CAUTION  
GY-HD250/GY-HD251 : Insert the recorded videocas-  
sette.  
When the FRAME RATE is set to 60/30 or 24 in the  
VIDEO FORMAT[1/2] menu screen, input a 59.94 Hz  
synchronization signal (vertical synchronization). 50 Hz/  
60 Hz synchronization signals cannot be synchronized.  
If the FRAME RATE is set to 50/25, input a 50 Hz syn-  
chronization signal. 59.94 Hz/60 Hz synchronization sig-  
nals cannot be synchronized.  
Recording unit  
: Insert the videocassette to be  
dubbed to.  
MEMO  
Clamp filter  
7. Press the PLAY/STILL button on the GY-HD250/GY-  
H PHASE cannot be adjusted during playback or record-  
ing.  
HD251 to start playback.  
8. Start recording on the recording unit.  
For details, see the instructions to the unit used for  
recording.  
IEEE1394 output stops while  
adjusted.  
H
PHASE is being  
Do not connect or disconnect the cable during recording  
or playback.  
When the power is turned on while the external synchro-  
nization signal is input, a vertical vibration occurs for a  
few seconds. This is not a malfunction.  
2.Turn both devices on.  
When values for SD  
H
PHASE or HD  
H
PHASE is  
9. When dubbing is completed.  
3.Set this device to VTR mode.  
changed, the images cannot be produced properly  
momentarily. This is not a malfunction.  
Stop recording on the recording unit, and then press the  
STOP button on the GY-HD250/GY-HD251 to stop play-  
back.  
Press the CAM/VTR button. The VTR indicator lights.  
4.Set the video output.  
VTR playback signals with jitter cannot be synchronized  
with this device.  
Set the VIDEO FORMAT menu screen. X See page 77.  
Setting  
Set this device to Camera mode.  
Set the GENLOCK/AUX IN switch to GENLOCK.  
When the camera image is locking to external synchro-  
nization signals, “SYNC LOCKING” is displayed on the  
screen. When locking to external synchronization sig-  
nals is complete, the indication disappears and you can  
enter recording mode.  
66  
67  
USING EXTERNAL COMPONENTS  
5. Set the PB TAPE item on the VIDEO FORMAT menu  
screen. X See page 79.  
Select whether to automatically detect the playback tape  
video format or play back only a particular format.  
Normally, use the “AUTO” setting.  
When Using the GY-HD250/GY-HD251 as  
Recording Unit  
(Dubbing From Another Videocassette)  
HDV/DV Dubbing  
1.Set the IEEE1394 switch on left side of the GY-HD250/  
VIDEO FORMAT menu screen  
GY-HD251.  
Connecting the GY-HD250/GY-HD251 to another video com-  
ponent equipped with HDV/DV connector (IEEE1394 stan-  
dard) using a IEEE1394 cable (optional) enables dubbing of  
digital signals with high picture quality and high-quality  
sound.  
DV : When dubbing in DV format  
HDV : When dubbing in HDV format  
2.Connect the units with the IEEE1394 cable.  
3.Turn ON both units.  
4.Place the GY-HD250/GY-HD251 in the VTR MODE.  
Press the CAM/VTR button to turn on the VTR indicator.  
Using the GY-HD250/GY-HD251 as the  
playback unit  
(Dubbing to another video)  
5.Set the frame rate.  
Set the FRAME RATE item (60/30, 50/25, 24) on the  
VIDEO FORMAT[1/2] menu to match the HDV/DV signal  
frame rate input from the IEEE1394 connector.  
X See page 77.  
TC/UB  
6. Insert a videocassette tape.  
1.Set the IEEE1394 switch on the left panel of this device.  
GY-HD250/GY-HD251 : Recorded videocassette tape  
DV : When dubbing in DV format  
HDV : When dubbing in HDV format  
Recording unit  
: Videocassette you want to dub  
1.  
7. Press the PLAY/STILL button on GY-HD250/GY-HD251  
2.Connect the IEEE1394 cable.  
IEEE1394 switch  
to start playback.  
3.Turn both devices on.  
8. Start recording on the recording device.  
See the recording device user manual for more informa-  
tion.  
4.Set this device to VTR mode.  
Press the CAM/VTR button. The VTR indicator lights.  
9. When dubbing is finished, stop recording on the record-  
ing device, press the STOP button on this device, and  
stop the playback.  
1.  
Date and Time  
IEEE1394 switch  
Recording unit  
7. Insert the videocassettes.  
GY-HD250/GY- : Insert the videocassette to be dubbed  
HD251 to.  
MEMO  
Switch the IEEE1394 switch when this device is OFF.  
When you dub still images, they are low resolution  
images. Noise may also enter the audio.  
Playback unit : Insert the recorded videocassette.  
2.  
8. Start playback on the playback unit.  
For details, see the instructions to the unit used for play-  
back.  
Operations may differ depending on the features and  
specifications of the connected device, and operations or  
data exchange may not be possible even if the devices  
are connected.  
IEEE1394 cable  
Signal flow  
Recording unit  
CAUTION  
The playback picture from the playback unit appears  
on the GY-HD250/GY-HD251’s LCD monitor and view-  
finder screen.  
Set the IEEE1394 switch on both devices to either HDV  
or DV.  
Start recording after making sure that both devices are  
properly connected.  
If noise appears on the screen or the audio cuts out, re-  
connect the IEEE1394 cable or turn the GY-HD250/GY-  
HD251 on again.  
If you turn the power to the device connected to the  
IEEE1394 connector on and off or switch the video input,  
noise may occur in the audio. If you perform this type of  
operation, set the speaker volume as low as possible on  
the audio device connected to this device.  
2.  
9. Press the REC/VTR trigger button on the GY-HD250/GY-  
IEEE1394 cable  
Signal flow  
HD251 to start recording.  
To temporarily pause the recording, press the REC or  
VTR trigger button.  
To restart the recording, press the REC or VTR trigger  
button again.  
6.Set the time code and user bit recording.  
Set the TC DUPLI. item on the TC/UB/CLOCK menu  
screen.  
CAUTION  
Set the IEEE1394 switch on both devices to either HDV  
or DV.  
Recording may not be possible in some cases even if the  
recorder is equipped with a IEEE1394 connector.  
OFF  
: Records the TC/UB set in this  
device.  
: Records the TC/UB for the  
IEEE1394 input.  
Start recording after making sure that both devices are  
properly connected.  
10.When dubbing is completed.  
Press the REC/VTR trigger button or the STOP button on  
the GY-HD250/GY-HD251 to stop recording, and then  
stop playback on the playback unit.  
ON  
Date and time data : Records the data sent from the  
playback device in DV format.  
MEMO  
Records the data of the internal  
clock in HDV format.  
Depending on the player, sound may not be heard momen-  
tarily from this device when switching modes from STILL to  
PLAY.  
MEMO  
In HDV format, the UB set in this device is recorded regard-  
less of the setting.  
68  
69  
USING EXTERNAL COMPONENTS  
Backup unit  
Notes on Using the Remote Control Unit  
Place in HDV/DV signal input mode.  
When the switch function of this device and the remote  
control unit are the same, the remote control switch func-  
tion is prioritized.  
Connect a Remote Con-  
trol Unit (RM-LP55/RM-  
LP57)  
Backup Recording  
*
Depending on the used component, it may be neces-  
sary to set “REMOTE SELECT”.  
When BR-HD50 is used, set the Backup Recording  
function to OFF.  
FOCUS and ZOOM cannot be adjusted with the remote  
control unit.  
Shutter speed slightly differs from the value displayed on  
this device.  
Also, set REM SEL HDV/DV in the REMOTE[1/2] menu  
of the BR-HD50 to ON or LOC+REM.  
Backup Recording of the GY-HD250/GY-  
HD251’s Camera Image and Sound  
Through the IEEE1394 Connector  
The GY-HD250/GY-HD251’s camera image and sound can  
be recorded for backup on another component that is  
equipped with IEEE1394 connector.  
Insert the tape and set to STOP or REC PAUSE status.  
Set camera switch functions with the remote control unit  
(RM-LP55/RM-LP57).  
Shutter Speed in 24p Mode  
When this device is in 24p mode, shutter speed cannot be  
set to 1/60 (U model) or 1/50 (E model) with the remote  
control unit.  
Even if shutter speed is set to 1/60 or 1/50 with the remote  
control unit when in 24p mode, the shutter speed for the  
device is 1/48.  
CAUTION  
Connection  
Connect the remote control unit cable to the REMOTE termi-  
nal.  
Set the IEEE1394 switch on both devices to either HDV  
or DV.  
Start recording after making sure that both devices are  
properly connected.  
If the RET button is pressed during backup recording,  
output from the IEEE1394 terminal is stopped, the image  
is switched to the image recorded on this device, inter-  
rupting the backup recording image.  
Connections  
Use the GY-HD250/GY-HD251 as the master unit.  
When H PHASE adjustment is performed with the remote  
control unit, only H PHASE of SD signal operates.  
When adjusting H PHASE of SD signal with the remote  
control unit, it cannot be set outside the range of SD H  
PHASE in the GENLOCK menu screen. X See page 99.  
AUTO WHITE Function  
Connect the master unit and the backup unit with  
IEEE1394 cable.  
a
1.  
Operation  
IEEE1394 switch  
When the device is in VTR mode or during playback or  
HEADER REC, the AUTO WHITE function does not work  
even if the auto white operation is performed with the RM-  
LP55 and RM-LP57.  
Start and stop of recording on the backup unit takes place in  
accordance with the operation of the REC/VTR trigger button  
on the master unit.  
(Depending on the GY-HD250/GY-HD251 or the backup unit,  
the image, audio, and/or time code may deviate from what  
they should be at the points where the recording is started or  
stopped.)  
In the case of the RM-LP55, “LOW LIGHT ERROR” is dis-  
played on the LCD screen of the RM-LP55.  
REMOTE  
RM-LP55  
Backup unit  
MEMO  
CAUTION  
When the backup recording is started, the “TRIGGER  
TO DV” or “TRIGGER TO HDV” indication is shown on  
the LCD or in the viewfinder for approx. 3 seconds.  
When the Series Recording function of BR-HD50 is  
used, the GY-HD250/GY-HD251’s 1394 REC TRIG. item  
should be set to OFF.  
If the backup device is equipped with a feature to record  
time codes input from the IEEE1394 connector (TC  
DUPLICATE feature), time code data the same as on the  
master side can be recorded.  
Turn the power OFF when connecting.  
Master unit  
GY-HD250/  
Operation  
GY-HD251  
IEEE1394 cable  
Signal flow  
1.Turn the device ON.  
Settings  
Master unit (GY-HD250/GY-HD251)  
2.Turn ON the OPERATE switch on remote control unit to  
activate the remote control unit.  
See page 72 for details on functions that can be operated  
with the remote control unit.  
1.Set the IEEE1394 switch on left side of the GY-HD250/  
GY-HD251.  
If the master unit tape is paused or stopped when the  
master unit time code running mode is in REC RUN  
mode, the time code for the slave unit stops.  
When using BR-HD50 as a backup device and switching  
GY-HD250/GY-HD251 from the playback mode to the  
record mode, noise will be noticed on the monitor output  
screen of BR-HD50 (backup will be correctly recorded).  
DV : When backup in DV format  
HDV : When backup in HDV format  
2.Place in Camera mode.  
3.Set the 1394 REC TRIG. item on the OTHERS[2/2] menu  
screen. X See page 97.  
For HDV mode, set the BACK SPACE [HDV] item.  
X See page 97.  
OTHERS[2/2] menu screen  
70  
71  
USING EXTERNAL COMPONENTS  
MENU SCREENS  
SC FINE  
q
G
X
Connect a Remote Control Unit  
(RM-LP55/RM-LP57) (Cont’d)  
RANDOM SHUTTER  
VARIABLE SHUTTER LEVEL  
SLOW SHUTTER LEVEL  
Menu Screen Configura-  
tion  
X
X
q: Same as RM-LP55  
G: Available  
The Menu Screen consists of multiple layers of menu screens as shown below. The menu screen to be set is selected from the  
TOP MENU in accordance with the function or purpose.  
The items on the menu screens differ with the Camera mode and the VTR mode. The contents of set items are stored in the GY-  
HD250/GY-HD251’s memory and are retained even when the power is turned off.  
The FILE MANAGE menu screen can be used to store the menu setting contents on the GY-HD250/GY-HD251 or SD memory card.  
Camera Mode  
Remote Control Unit Functions List  
: None  
X: Not available  
1
*
*
Only when frame rate is 60p, 60i, 30p, or 24p  
Only when frame rate is 50p, 50i, or 25p  
Function  
Action  
2
RM-LP55  
BARS [OFF/ON]  
RM-LP57  
q
q
q
q
q
G
G
G
G
G
X
CONTOUR [OFF/ON]  
CONTOUR V/H LEVEL  
IRIS [MANU/AUTO]  
IRIS LEVEL  
IRIS DETECT  
WHT.BAL  
AUTO1  
q
q
q
G
G
G
G
G
G
AUTO2  
FAW  
PRESET  
MANU  
AUTO WHITE  
q
MANUAL WHITE BALANCE R/B  
LEVEL  
G
PAINT R/B LEVEL  
q
q
q
q
q
G
G
G
G
G
X
GAIN  
0dB  
6dB  
9dB  
12dB  
LOLUX  
–3dB  
–6dB  
ALC+EEI  
ALC  
TOP MENU screen (CAM)  
X
X
q
q
G
X
NEGA [OFF/ON]  
SHUTTER  
X
NORMAL  
1/100  
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
G
G *1  
G *2  
G
G
G
G
G
G
X
1/120  
1/250  
1/500  
1/1000  
1/2000  
1/4000  
1/10000  
EEI  
q
V.SCAN  
X
ZOOM  
q
q
X
FOCUS  
X
HI-RESO [OFF/ON]  
X
MASTER BLACK LEVEL  
GAMMA [OFF/ON]  
GAMMA MASTER LEVEL  
KNEE MASTER LEVEL  
TITLE [OFF/ON]  
q
G
X
X
X
X
TITLE POSITION  
X
TITLE CLEAR  
X
H PHASE  
q
q
G
G
SC COARSE [0°/90°/180°/270°]  
72  
73  
MENU SCREENS  
4. Select the menu screen to be set.  
Rotate the SHUTTER dial to align the cursor (K) with the  
menu screen to be set, and then press the SHUTTER  
dial.  
Menu Screen Configuration  
(Cont’d)  
Setting Menu Screens  
The selected menu screen appears.  
Item  
Setting  
VTR Mode/IEEE1394 Input Mode  
Make the settings while observing the LCD monitor or the  
viewfinder screen.  
If the ANALOG OUT CHAR. item or SDI OUT CHAR item on  
the OTHERS[1/2] screen is set to ON, the menu screen can  
also be viewed on a monitor connected to the video signal  
output connector.  
1.Set the POWER switch to ON.  
2.Set the mode of the GY-HD250/GY-HD251 with the CAM/  
VTR button. (Camera mode or VTR mode)  
3.Press the STATUS button for 1 second or longer.  
VIDEO FORMAT[1/2] menu screen  
The TOP MENU screen appears.  
5. Select the menu item on the menu screen.  
USER1 USER2 USER3 button  
Rotate the SHUTTER dial to align the cursor (K) with the  
item to be set, and then press the SHUTTER dial.  
The setting area of the selected item starts blinking,  
and the setting can now be made.  
SHUTTER dial  
USER  
1
USER  
2
USER  
3
SHUTTER  
6. Change the setting.  
ND FILTER  
Rotate the SHUTTER dial to change the setting, and then  
press the SHUTTER dial.  
2
1
MENU  
The setting area stops blinking and the setting is  
entered.  
STATUS  
To change multiple items, repeat the procedures in steps  
5. and 6. above.  
TOP MENU screen (VTR)  
7. Return to the TOP MENU screen.  
Rotate the SHUTTER dial to align the cursor (K) with the  
PAGE BACK item, and then press the SHUTTER dial.  
To change settings on other menu screens, repeat the  
procedures in steps 4. to 7. above.  
STATUS button  
Cursor  
Menu screen  
To save the set contents in FILE, select the FILE MAN-  
AGE menu screen and perform the operations for saving  
to file.  
X See “FILE MANAGE Menu Screen” on page 100.  
8. To return to the normal screen after completing the set-  
tings, use either of the following methods.  
Press the STATUS button  
or  
Return to the TOP MENU screen and align the cursor (K)  
with the EXIT item, and then press the SHUTTER dial.  
MEMO  
TOP MENU screen  
While the menu screen is being displayed, the USER1,  
USER2 and USER3 buttons can also perform menu  
operations.  
USER1 button : Raises the cursor (K)/Changes the set-  
ting  
USER2 button : Lowers the cursor (K)/Changes the set-  
ting  
USER3 button : Confirms the menu item/Confirms the  
setting  
The menu screen is not displayed when switching  
between Camera and VTR mode (VTR indicator  
flashes).  
74  
75  
MENU SCREENS  
TOP MENU Screen  
VIDEO FORMAT[1/2] Menu  
Screen  
Different menu screens are displayed depending on whether the GY-HD250/GY-HD251 is in the Camera mode or in the VTR  
mode. In the VTR mode, the CAMERA OPERATION, CAMERA PROCESS and SWITCH MODE menu screens are not dis-  
played.  
The VIDEO FORMAT menu screen consists of two screens (1/2 screen, 2/2 screen).  
In VTR mode, this screen consists of one screen.  
*
This is not displayed in VTR mode.  
Item  
Function  
Item  
Function/Setting (bold characters indicate initial settings)  
Sets the frame rate for shooting.  
VIDEO FORMAT..  
Displays the menu screen for setting the video format for shooting and playing back video.  
Camera mode: It consists of two screens.  
FRAME RATE  
U model  
60/30  
VTR mode  
: It consists of one screen.  
: Shoots at 480/60i, 720/60p, 720/30p.  
• The cursor (K) does not move to this item when this device is recording.  
50/25  
: Shoots at 720/50p, 720/25p.  
24  
E model  
60/30  
50/25  
24  
: Shoots at 480/24p (2:3:2:3 pulldown), 480/24p advance mode (2:3:3:2 pulldown), 720/24p.  
CAMERA OPERATION.. Displays a menu screen for setting the operation mode for camera shooting.  
• This item is only displayed in the Camera mode.  
: Shoots at 720/60p, 720/30p.  
: Shoots at 576/50i, 720/50p, 576/25p, 720/25p.  
: Shoots at 720/24p.  
: Cancels the settings.  
: Executes the settings.  
CAMERA PROCESS..  
Displays a menu screen for adjustments of the picture quality of the camera image.  
It consists of two screens.  
The ADVANCED PROCESS menu screen, WHITE BALANCE menu screen, and SKIN COLOR ADJUST screen can  
be displayed through the CAMERA PROCESS menu screen.  
• This item is only displayed in the Camera mode.  
CANCEL  
EXECUTE  
MEMO  
• The cursor (K) does not move to this item when this device is in VTR mode (PLAY, STL, FWD, REV).  
• If you change the FRAME RATE item setting, the system is rebooted. X See page 54.  
• The cursor (K) does not move to this item when this device is in VTR mode or is ejecting a tape.  
SWITCH MODE..  
AUDIO/MIC..  
Displays the menu screens related to the camera switch functions.  
• This item is only displayed when in camera mode.  
Displays a menu screen related to audio.  
Camera mode: It consists of two screens.  
1080I CAMERA*  
Selects whether or not to output camera images in HDV1080i signals. HDV1080i signals are output from component  
output of the Y/PB/PR terminal or HD/SD-SDI output terminal. However, they are not recorded on this device.  
VTR mode  
: It consists of one screen.  
OFF  
ON  
: No HDV1080i signal is output. Output setting of camera images is based on the REC settings below.  
: HDV1080i signal is output. (60/30 Frame rate: 1080/60i, 50/25 Frame rate: 1080/50i)  
480/60i or 576/50i signals are output from the VIDEO OUT terminal.  
• In VTR mode, the screen changes to the AUDIO menu screen.  
• The cursor (K) does not move to this item when this device is recording.  
LCD/VF..  
Displays a menu screen for selecting whether to display characters on the LCD monitor or in the viewfinder, and for  
adjustments of the picture quality of LCD monitor.  
Camera mode: It consists of four screens.  
• ON/OFF is set when the SHUTTER dial is pressed.  
MEMO  
Tape recording and IEEE1394 output are not available when this is ON.  
• REC item cannot be set when this is ON.  
• The cursor is positioned on 1080I CAMERA in the VIDEO FORMAT[1/2] menu screen when this is ON.  
• When the FRAME RATE is set to 24, this is fixed to OFF.  
VTR mode  
: It consists of two screens.  
TU/UB/CLOCK..  
Displays a menu screen for setting the time code, user’s bit data, date and time.  
The ways that the date and time are recorded together with the display style are set here.  
The TIME/DATE menu screen and CLOCK ADJUST screen can be displayed through the TC/UB/CLOCK menu  
screen.  
REC*  
Sets the video format for shooting. (Can only be displayed and set in camera mode)  
You can set the following according to the FRAME RATE.  
• The cursor (K) does not move to this item when this device is recording.  
OTHERS..  
Displays a menu screen for setting other functions and to display the hour meter.  
It consists of two screens.  
Setting  
DV-60I  
Description  
FRAME RATE  
FILE MANAGE..  
Displays the FILE MANAGE menu screen.  
DV format Shoots using a 480/60i signal.  
(U model Only)  
Saves the menu screen settings as a file on this device or an SD memory card, or reads the menu screen settings  
saved in the file. It is also possible to reset the menu settings to default settings or initialize (format) an SD memory  
card.  
X See “FILE MANAGE Menu Screen” on page 100.  
• The cursor (K) does not move to this item when VTR is activated.  
HDV-HD60P HDV format Shoots using a 720/60p signal.  
HDV-HD30P HDV format Shoots using a 720/30p signal.  
HDV-HD50P HDV format Shoots using a 720/50p signal.  
HDV-HD25P HDV format Shoots using a 720/25p signal.  
60/30  
50/25  
EXIT  
The normal screen returns when the SHUTTER dial is pressed while the cursor is aligned with this item.  
DV-50I  
DV format Shoots using a 576/50i signal.  
DV format Shoots using a 576/25p signal.  
DV format Shoots at 480/24p (2:3:2:3 pulldown).  
DV format Shoots at 480/24p (2:3:3:2 pulldown).  
(E model Only)  
(E model Only)  
(U model Only)  
DV-25P  
DV-24P  
DV-24PA  
(U model Only) 24  
HDV-HD24P HDV format Shoots using a 720/24p signal.  
CANCEL  
EXECUTE  
: Cancels the settings.  
: Executes the settings.  
MEMO  
• The synchronous video signal is momentarily disturbed when the REC item setting is switched.  
• On the E model, the video format is fixed at HDV-HD24P when the FRAME RATE item is set to “24”. “[HDV-  
HD24P]” is displayed.  
76  
77  
MENU SCREENS  
VIDEO FORMAT[1/2] Menu Screen  
(Cont’d)  
VIDEO FORMAT[2/2] Menu  
Screen  
*
This is not displayed in VTR mode.  
*
This is not displayed in VTR mode.  
Item  
Function/Setting (bold characters indicate initial settings)  
Item  
Function/Setting (bold characters indicate initial settings)  
ASPECT*  
Sets the screen size for the recording video signal. (Can only be displayed and set in camera mode)  
PB TAPE  
Selects whether to automatically detect the playback tape video format or play back only a particular format.  
Normally, use the “AUTO” setting.  
4:3  
: Outputs the video with an aspect ratio of 4:3.  
16:9  
: Outputs the video with an aspect ratio of 16:9.  
The resolution in the vertical direction drops compared to 4:3 video.  
AUTO  
DV  
HDV  
: During tape playback, the format signal is switched automatically and played back.  
: During tape playback, only the part of the tape recorded in DV format is played back.  
: During tape playback, only the part of the tape recorded in HDV format is played back.  
: During tape playback, only the part of the tape recorded in DVCAM format is played back.  
MEMO  
DVCAM  
• When the format setting is HDV, the ASPECT item is fixed at 16:9. (“[16:9]” is displayed.)  
• The synchronous video signal is momentarily disturbed when the ASPECT item setting is switched.  
MEMO  
If you play back a tape containing both DV and HDV formats, the video signal is disturbed when the signal is  
switched.  
HDV PB OUTPUT  
When playing back an HDV recorded tape, set video format for component output from the Y/PB/PR terminal or SDI  
output from the HD/SD-SDI output terminal.  
You can set the following depending on the FRAME RATE of the HDV recorded tape.  
HD/SD-SDI OUT  
Sets whether or not to output SDI (Serial Digital Interface) signals from the HD/SD SDI OUT terminal.  
OFF  
ON  
: No output.  
Setting  
NATIVE  
Description  
FRAME RATE  
: Output on. Embedded audio and time code are also output.  
Outputs the signal being recorded on the tape.  
60/30  
50/25  
24  
OUTPUT TERM. [DV]  
Sets the output image format for the Y/PB/PR terminal in DV format.  
Y/PB/PR  
RGB  
720P  
1080I  
NTSC  
Converts the signal being recorded on tape to 720p and outputs it.  
Converts the signal being recorded on tape to 1080i and outputs it.  
Converts the signal being recorded on tape to 480i and outputs it.  
: Outputs analog component signals.  
: Outputs analog RGB signals.  
: Outputs YC separate signals.  
Y/C  
60/30  
24  
Signals are output from terminals as shown in the table below depending on the settings.  
Setting  
PAL  
Converts the signal being recorded on tape to 576i and outputs it.  
50/25  
Terminal  
Y/PB/PR  
RGB  
Y/C  
Y
MEMO  
Y
Component Y  
Component PB  
Component PR  
G
B
R
• If you convert video recorded in HDV format to DV format and output it, the colors may change.  
• This item is also applied to EE images when HDV signals are input to the IEEE1394 terminal.  
• Fixed at NATIVE during DV recorded tape playback or DV signal input.  
C
PB  
PR  
(When the [PBPR/TC] switch is set to PBPR)  
MEMO  
DOWN CON. [HDV]  
Set the style to display down-converted images in aspect ratio 4:3.  
SQUEEZE  
: Image that is squeezed horizontally is displayed.  
LETTER  
: Wide image with the top and bottom blackened is displayed.  
• SYNC signals are added to all channels for RGB signals.  
• In HDV format, signals are output in analog component format regardless of these settings.  
MEMO  
This setting is only valid in HDV mode.  
In DV mode, the style becomes SQUEEZE regardless of the setting of this item.  
SET UP  
Selects whether to add a setup signal to the video signal output from the video signal output connector.  
In DV format, a setup signal can be added to COMPONENT output and Y/C output.  
(When Y/PB/PR or Y/C is set for OUTPUT TERM [DV])  
NEXT PAGE  
PAGE BACK  
To display the VIDEO FORMAT[2/2] menu screen, move the cursor to this position and press the SHUTTER dial.  
The TOP MENU returns when the SHUTTER dial is pressed with the cursor at this position.  
* You can also select a setup signal in the IEEE1394 signal input mode.  
0.0%  
7.5%  
: No setup signal is added.  
: A setup signal is added.  
Initial settings: U model: 7.5% E model: 0.0%  
MEMO  
• When recording composite video signals from an external device, set this item according to whether the input  
signals include a setup signal.  
X See “Recording Composite Video Signals from an External Device” on page 65.  
• When the FRAME RATE item is set to 50/25, this item is not displayed.  
PAGE BACK  
When the cursor is in this position, press the SHUTTER dial to the VIDEO FORMAT[1/2] menu screen.  
78  
79  
MENU SCREENS  
CAMERA OPERATION  
Menu Screen  
CAMERA PROCESS[1/2]  
Menu Screen  
The CAMERA OPERATION menu screen is only displayed in the Camera mode.  
The CAMERA PROCESS menu screen consists of two screens. (1/2 screen, 2/2 screen)  
The CAMERA PROCESS menu screen is only displayed in camera mode.  
Item  
AE LEVEL*1  
Function/Setting (bold characters indicate initial settings)  
Item  
Function/Setting (bold characters indicate initial settings)  
For adjusting the image level when using auto iris, “ALC” or “EEI”.  
Increase value : Increases level.  
MASTER BLACK*2  
Adjusts the pedestal level (master black) that serves as the reference black.  
Increase the number : Raises the pedestal level.  
Decrease value : Decreases level.  
[Settings: –3, –2 - NORMAL (0) - 2, 3]  
Decrease the number : Lowers the pedestal level.  
[Settings: MIN (–10), –9 - NORMAL (0) - 9, MAX (10)]  
ALC MAX  
Sets the maximum “ALC” value to automatically change the signal intensity level depending on the brightness.  
DETAIL*2  
Adjusts the contour (detail) sharpness level.  
Increase the number : Sharpens the contour.  
Decrease the number : Softens the contour.  
[Setting: 6 dB, 12 dB, 18 dB]  
PRESET TEMP.  
Sets the basic color temperature when the [WHT.BAL] white balance selector switch c on page 15 is in the PRST  
(PRESET) position.  
OFF  
: Does not function.  
3200K  
: Sets the basic color temperature to 3200K. (Use for light sources with a low color temperature,  
such as halogen lamps.)  
[Settings: OFF, MIN (–10), –9 - NORMAL (0) - 9, MAX (10)]  
When this item is set to “OFF”, “-----” is displayed for the following menu items and they cannot be selected.  
5600K  
: Sets the basic color temperature to 5600K. (Use for light sources with a high color temperature,  
such as sunlight.)  
V/H BALANCE*2  
H FREQUENCY*2  
Sets which contours (details) to sharpen, those in the horizontal (H) direction or those in the vertical (V) direction.  
Increase the number : Sharpens H direction.  
Decrease the number : Sharpens V direction.  
MEMO  
This item does not function when the FAW item on the SWITCH MODE menu screen is set to “PRESET”.  
[Settings: H-MIN (–5), –4 - NORMAL (0) - 4, H-MAX (5)]  
SMOOTH TRANS*1  
Changes the horizontal contour compensation frequency for the contours (details). Set this as appropriate for the  
subject.  
Smoothens the transition when the [GAIN] switch b on page 15, or [WHT.BAL] switch c on page 15 is switched  
over and achieves gradual change in place of sudden change.  
However, the smooth transition function does not function when switching the [GAIN] switch set in ALC, FULL AUTO  
ON.  
OFF  
ON  
LOW  
: Enhances low frequency bands.  
Use this when shooting subjects with large patterns.  
: Enhances middle frequency bands.  
MIDDLE  
: Deactivates the smooth transition function.  
: Activates the smooth transition function.  
HIGH  
: Enhances high frequency bands.  
Use this when shooting subjects with small patterns.  
BARS*1  
Sets whether or not color bars are output. (This is fixed at “OFF” when in FULL AUTO mode)  
OFF  
ON  
V FREQUENCY*1  
Use this when shooting subjects with finely detailed patterns.  
Changes the vertical contour compensation frequency for the contours (details). Compensates for distortion when  
outputting progressive video to an interlaced monitor.  
: Color bars are not output.  
: Color bars are output.  
PAGE BACK  
The TOP MENU returns when the SHUTTER dial is pressed with the cursor at this position.  
HIGH  
LOW  
: Enhances high frequency bands.  
: Enhances low frequency bands.  
*1  
REMOTE appears as the setting value of this item when the remote control unit is connected.  
SKIN DETECT*2  
LEVEL  
Sets ON/OFF for the skin detail function.  
OFF  
ON  
: Turns off the skin detail function.  
: Turns on the skin detail function. (Softens detected skin color area details.)  
X See “Using the Skin Detail Function” on page 104.  
Sets the contour compensation level (amount of softening) for the skin detail function.  
This can only be selected when the SKIN DETECT item is set to ON.  
–1  
–2  
–3  
: Low contour compensation level (amount of softening)  
: Medium contour compensation level (amount of softening)  
: High contour compensation level (amount of softening)  
NEXT PAGE  
PAGE BACK  
To display the CAMERA PROCESS[2/2] menu screen, move the cursor to this position and press the SHUTTER dial.  
The TOP MENU returns when the SHUTTER dial is pressed while the cursor is at this position.  
*1  
When the REC item on the VIDEO FORMAT[1/2] menu is set to “DV-60I” or “DV-50I”, “-----” is displayed and this cannot be  
selected.  
REMOTE appears as the setting value of this item when the remote control unit is connected.  
*2  
80  
81  
MENU SCREENS  
CAMERA PROCESS[2/2]  
Menu Screen  
ADVANCED PROCESS  
Menu Screen  
Item  
Function/Setting (bold characters indicate initial settings)  
Item  
Function/Setting (bold characters indicate initial settings)  
Changes the gain in dark areas. Change this depending on the video signal being shot.  
BLACK*1  
CINEMA  
OFF  
: Turns the function OFF.  
ON  
: Sets the gamma characteristics and color matrix close to the characteristics of a movie  
screen. (The monitor image is movie-quality. This setting is not intended for film output.)  
NORMAL  
STRETCH  
: Normal status  
: Enhances the dark areas of the video so the contrast between light and dark is more visible by  
stretching the signal only in the dark areas.  
Set elongation level with STRETCH LEVEL below.  
MEMO  
When this item is set to “ON”, “[CINE]” is displayed for COLOR MATRIX and GAMMA items and cannot be  
selected.  
COMPRESS : If the video that was shot is bright overall and lacking in contrast, the gain in the dark areas is com-  
pressed, which adds contrast.  
Set compression level with COMPRESS LEVEL below.  
COLOR MATRIX  
Sets the color matrix.  
OFF  
STANDARD  
CINEMA  
: Turns the function OFF.  
: Sets a normal color matrix.  
: Sets a color matrix close to the characteristics of a movie screen.  
STRETCH LEVEL  
COMPRESS LEVEL  
WHITE CLIP  
The amount of stretching increases from LEVEL1oLEVEL2oLEVEL3oLEVEL4oLEVEL5.  
[Settings: LEVEL1, LEVEL2, LEVEL3, LEVEL4, LEVEL5]  
The amount of compression increases from LEVEL1oLEVEL2oLEVEL3oLEVEL4oLEVEL5.  
[Settings: LEVEL1, LEVEL2, LEVEL3, LEVEL4, LEVEL5]  
ADJUST..  
GAMMA  
When “STANDARD” or “CINEMA” is set for the COLOR MATRIX item, a color matrix can be set individually.  
Press the SHUTTER dial to call up the COLOR MATRIX ADJUST menu screen.  
X See “COLOR MATRIX ADJUST Menu Screen” on page 84.  
Sets the white clipping point on input video signals with a high luminance level.  
108%  
100%  
: The white clipping point is set at a luminance level of 108%.  
: The white clipping point is set at a luminance level of 100%. If the screen is too white at  
108%, set it to 100%.  
Adjusts the gamma curve to determine how black is rendered.  
OFF  
: No gamma curve correction.  
STANDARD  
CINEMA  
FILM OUT  
: Sets a normal gamma curve.  
: Sets to appear movie-like when viewing on a TV screen.  
: Sets to a setting for recording onto film.  
KNEE*1  
Sets whether to run the “knee” function, which compresses video signals over a certain level to render the tonality  
in the highlight areas, automatically or manually. Set “MANUAL” when you want to check the bright areas, and adjust  
the knee point manually.  
MEMO  
AUTO  
MANUAL  
: Adjusts the knee point automatically, according to the luminance level.  
: You can change the luminance level in the “LEVEL” item.  
When this item is set to “OFF”, “-----” is displayed for the LEVEL item and it cannot be selected.  
LEVEL*1  
Sets the start point for knee compression (knee point).  
Increase the number : Raises the knee point level.  
Decrease the number : Lowers the knee point level.  
[Settings: 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, 100%]  
LEVEL  
When “STANDARD”, “CINEMA”, or “FILM OUT” is set for the GAMMA item, a gamma curve can be set individually.  
Increase the number : Enhances the tonality of the black. However, the tonality in the bright areas deteriorates.  
Decrease the number : Enhances the tonality in the bright areas. However, the tonality in the black areas deterio-  
rates.  
MEMO  
[Settings: MIN (–5), –4 - NORMAL (0) - 4, MAX (5)]  
When the “KNEE” item is set to “AUTO”, “-----” is displayed and this cannot be selected.  
COLOR GAIN  
Adjusts the video signal color level.  
OFF  
: Sets the video to black and white.  
REVERSE PICTURE  
When the lens image is inverted and flipped, set “ROTATE” to record properly.  
Increase the number : Makes the colors more dense.  
Decrease the number : Makes the colors less dense.  
[Settings: OFF, MIN (–10), –9 - NORMAL (0) - 9, MAX (10)]  
OFF  
: No inversion.  
ROTATE  
: Invert lens image.  
MEMO  
WHITE BALANCE..  
SKIN COLOR ADJUST..  
PAGE BACK  
When the cursor is in this position and you press the SHUTTER dial once, the screen switches to the WHITE BAL-  
ANCE menu screen.  
When the REVERSE PICTURE item is set to ROTATE, skin detail function is available but the detection area is  
not displayed in the viewfinder or LCD screen.  
When the cursor is in this position and you press the SHUTTER dial once, the screen switches to the SKIN COLOR  
ADJUST screen.  
DNR  
Selects whether or not to set the noise reduction.  
The DNR (Digital Noise Reduction) function is applied to the tape recording signal, HD component output signal, and  
When the cursor is in this position, press the SHUTTER dial to return to the CAMERA PROCESS[2/2] menu screen.  
the IEEE1394 output signal in CAMERA mode.  
When camcorder’s picture is noisy, because of low light conditions, you can improve picture’s S/N by turning DNR  
on.  
OFF  
ON  
: Noise reduction is not performed.  
: Sets noise reduction.  
MEMO  
• DNR is not applied in VTR mode, AUX IN mode or during playback.  
• DNR is not applied to composite output signals in CAMERA mode.  
• When the DNR is set to ON, the camcorder’s S/N ratio becomes better but the “blurring of moving objects” will  
increase.  
ADVANCED PROCESS.. Calls up the ADVANCED PROCESS menu screen.  
X See “ADVANCED PROCESS Menu Screen” on page 83.  
PAGE BACK  
When the cursor is in this position, press the SHUTTER dial to return to the CAMERA PROCESS[1/2] menu screen.  
*1  
REMOTE appears as the setting value of this item when the remote control unit is connected.  
82  
83  
MENU SCREENS  
COLOR MATRIX ADJUST  
Menu Screen  
WHITE BALANCE Menu  
Screen  
Item  
Function/Setting (bold characters indicate initial settings)  
Item  
Function/Setting (bold characters indicate initial settings)  
WHITE PAINT<R>*1  
R GAIN  
For manually adjusting the shading of the R axis of the color matrix (red and cyan).  
Increase the number : Enhances red and cyan.  
Adjusts the R (red) component when in AWB (Auto White Balance) mode.  
Increase the number : Strengthens the red.  
Decrease the number : Reduces red and cyan.  
Decrease the number : Weakens the red.  
[Settings: MIN (–5), –4 - NORMAL (0) - 4, MAX (5)]  
[Settings: MIN (–32), –31 - NORMAL (0) - 30, MAX (31)]  
R ROTATION  
G GAIN  
For manually adjusting the color phase of the R axis of the color matrix (red and cyan).  
Increase the number : Increases yellowishness of red color and bluishness of cyan color.  
Decrease the number : Increases bluishness of red color and greenishness of cyan color.  
[Settings: MIN (–5), –4 - NORMAL (0) - 4, MAX (5)]  
MEMO  
• You can select this when  
X See page 15.  
Settings can be made for A and B individually. (When “PRESET” is set, “-----” is displayed and this cannot be  
selected.)  
• When you press the AWB (Auto White Balance) button and readjust the white balance, WHITE PAINT  
becomes “NORMAL”.  
A
or  
B
is set for the [WHT.BAL] switch  
c
on the right panel of this device.  
For manually adjusting the shading of the G axis of the color matrix (green and magenta).  
Increase the number : Enhances green and magenta.  
Decrease the number : Reduces green and magenta.  
R
[Settings: MIN (–5), –4 - NORMAL (0) - 4, MAX (5)]  
WHITE PAINT<B>*1  
Adjusts the B (blue) component when in AWB (Auto White Balance) mode.  
Increase the number : Strengthens the blue.  
Decrease the number : Weakens the blue.  
G ROTATION  
B GAIN  
For manually adjusting the color phase of the G axis of the color matrix (green and magenta).  
Increase the number : Increases bluishness of green color and reddishness of magenta color.  
Decrease the number : Increases yellowishness of green color and bluishness of magenta color.  
[Settings: MIN (–5), –4 - NORMAL (0) - 4, MAX (5)]  
[Settings: MIN (–32), –31 - NORMAL (0) - 30, MAX (31)]  
MEMO  
For manually adjusting the shading of the B axis of the color matrix (blue and yellow).  
Increase the number : Enhances blue and yellow.  
Decrease the number : Reduces blue and yellow.  
• You can select this when  
X See page 15.  
Settings can be made for A and B individually. (When “PRESET” is set, “-----” is displayed and this cannot be  
A
or  
B
is set for the [WHT.BAL] switch  
c
on the right panel of this device.  
[Settings: MIN (–5), –4 - NORMAL (0) - 4, MAX (5)]  
selected.)  
B ROTATION  
PAGE BACK  
For manually adjusting the color phase of the B axis of the color matrix (blue and yellow).  
Increase the number : Increases reddishness of blue color and greenishness of yellow color.  
Decrease the number : Increases greenishness of blue color and reddishness of yellow color.  
[Settings: MIN (–5), –4 - NORMAL (0) - 4, MAX (5)]  
• When you press the AWB (Auto White Balance) button and readjust the white balance, WHITE PAINT <B>  
becomes “NORMAL”.  
SHADING  
Adjusts white shading.  
PRESET  
Press the SHUTTER dial to return to the ADVANCED PROCESS screen when cursor is at this position.  
: No white shading adjustment.  
MANUAL  
: Enables white shading adjustment.  
X See “White Shading Adjustment” on page 53.  
MEMO  
SKIN COLOR ADJUST  
Menu Screen  
When the SHADING item is set to PRESET, the LEVEL R, LEVEL G, and LEVEL B items cannot be selected.  
LEVEL R  
LEVEL G  
When the SHADING item is set to MANUAL, adjusts the reds of white shading.  
Increase the number : Red at the bottom of the screen is suppressed and the top is enhanced.  
Decrease the number : Red at the top of the screen is suppressed and the bottom is enhanced.  
[Settings: MIN, –127 to –1, NORMAL, 1 to 126, MAX]  
When you enter the SKIN COLOR ADJUST screen, the areas where the skin detail function is applied are displayed in color, and  
other areas are displayed in black and white.  
When the SHADING item is set to MANUAL, adjusts the greens of white shading.  
Increase the number : Green at the bottom of the screen is suppressed and the top is enhanced.  
Decrease the number : Green at the top of the screen is suppressed and the bottom is enhanced.  
[Settings: MIN, –127 to –1, NORMAL, 1 to 126, MAX]  
Item  
Function/Setting (bold characters indicate initial settings)  
Sets the color used by the skin detail function.  
SKIN COLOR DET.  
STOP  
EXECUTE  
: Stops loading the color used by the skin detail function.  
: Loads the color used by the skin detail function.  
LEVEL B  
When the SHADING item is set to MANUAL, adjusts the blues of white shading.  
Increase the number : Blue at the bottom of the screen is suppressed and the top is enhanced.  
Decrease the number : Blue at the top of the screen is suppressed and the bottom is enhanced.  
[Settings: MIN, –127 to –1, NORMAL, 1 to 126, MAX]  
X See “Using the Skin Detail Function” on page 104.  
SKIN COLOR RANGE  
Adjusts the range of skin colors to which the skin detail function is applied.  
Adjust as you check the color range.  
Increase the number : Widens the range.  
PAGE BACK  
When the cursor is in this position, press the SHUTTER dial to return to ADVANCED PROCESS menu screen.  
Decrease the number : Narrows the range.  
[Settings: NARROW (–10), –9 - NORMAL (0) - 9, WIDE (10)]  
*1  
REMOTE appears as the setting value of this item when the remote control unit is connected.  
MEMO  
When the COLOR GAIN item is “OFF” on the ADVANCED PROCESS menu screen, only the areas where the  
skin detail function is running are displayed using skin colors.  
PAGE BACK  
When the cursor is in this position, press the SHUTTER dial to return to the ADVANCED PROCESS menu screen.  
84  
85  
MENU SCREENS  
SWITCH MODE Menu  
Screen  
AUDIO/MIC[1/2] Menu  
Screen  
The SWITCH MODE menu screen is only displayed in camera mode.  
The AUDIO/MIC menu screen consists of two screens (1/2 screen, 2/2 screen).  
In VTR mode, the screen changes to the AUDIO menu screen.  
Item  
SHUTTER  
Function/Setting (bold characters indicate initial settings)  
Sets the fixed value (STEP) for values that can change using the SHUTTER dial on the right panel or the VARIABLE  
used when shooting computer monitors.  
*
This is not displayed in VTR mode.  
STEP  
VARIABLE  
: Switches the shutter speed using fixed values.  
: Set when shooting a computer monitor, etc.  
Item  
Function/Setting (bold characters indicate initial settings)  
TEST TONE  
Sets whether to output a test audio signal (1 kHz, –20dBFS or –12dBFS) during color bar output.  
You can set the following using the REC item on the VIDEO FORMAT menu screen. (This is fixed at EEI when in  
FULL AUTO mode.)  
OFF  
ON  
: A test audio signal is not output.  
: A test audio signal is output.  
MIC WIND CUT*  
Selects whether to cut the lows (low frequency bands) from the audio input signal.  
Use this when you want to reduce wind sounds from the microphone.  
REC Item  
Setting for STEP  
Setting for VARIABLE  
DV-60I  
HDV-HD60P 1/10000  
HDV-HD30P  
1/7.5, 1/15, 1/30, 1/60, 1/100, 1/250, 1/500, 1/1000, 1/2000, 1/4000, 1/30.03 - 1/10489.5  
OFF  
: Low frequencies are not cut.  
INPUT1  
INPUT2  
BOTH  
: Only cuts the low frequencies in the audio from the INPUT1 connector.  
: Only cuts the low frequencies in the audio from the INPUT2 connector.  
: Cuts the low frequencies in the audio from both the INPUT1 and INPUT2 terminals.  
DV-50I  
1/6.25, 1/12.5, 1/25, 1/50, 1/120, 1/250, 1/500, 1/1000, 1/2000,  
1/25.04 - 1/10489.5  
1/24.01 - 1/10489.5  
HDV-HD50P 1/4000, 1/10000  
HDV-HD25P  
DV-25P  
AUDIO REF.LEVEL  
Sets the reference audio level on the tape. (Both CH-1 and CH-2)  
–20dB  
: Records with –20 dB as the reference audio level.  
Initial value: 1/25  
–12dB  
: Records with –12 dB as the reference audio level.  
DV-24P  
DV-24PA  
1/6, 1/12, 1/24, 1/48, 1/60, 1/100, 1/250, 1/500, 1/1000, 1/2000,  
Set this if you are playing back the recorded tape on an ordinary DV device.  
* Set this for both playback and recording.  
1/4000, 1/10000  
HDV-HD24P Initial value: 1/48  
* This is unrelated to the audio level via the IEEE1394 signal.  
INPUT1 MIC REF.*  
INPUT2 MIC REF.*  
AUDIO MODE*  
Sets the reference audio input level for the INPUT1 connector. (When the [AUDIO INPUT] switch 3 on page 16 is  
set to MIC or MIC+48)  
FAW  
Sets the positions to assign the FAW (Full Auto White Balance) function to the [WHT.BAL] white balance selector  
switch c on page 15. (Fixed at FAW when in FULL AUTO mode)  
–50dB  
–60dB  
: Sets the reference audio input level at –50 dB.  
: Sets the reference audio input level at –60 dB.  
NONE  
A
B
: The FAW function is not assigned.  
: Assigns FAW to the A position.  
: Assigns FAW to the B position.  
: Assigns FAW to the PRESET position.  
Sets the reference audio input level for the INPUT2 connector. (When the [AUDIO INPUT] switch 3 on page 16 is  
set to MIC or MIC+48)  
PRESET  
–50dB  
–60dB  
: Sets the reference audio input level at –50 dB.  
: Sets the reference audio input level at –60 dB.  
GAIN L  
GAIN M  
GAIN H  
USER1  
USER2  
USER3  
Sets the gain value for each position on the [GAIN] sensitivity selector switch b on page 15.  
[Setting: 0dB, 3dB, 6dB, 9dB, 12dB, 15dB, 18dB, ALC] (Fixed at ALC in FULL AUTO mode)  
Initial values: L: 0dB, M: 9dB, H: 18dB  
Selects the audio sampling frequency for recording. (Both CH-1 and CH-2)  
(When HDV format is set, this is fixed at 48K and “[48K]” is displayed.)  
You can assign one of the following menu functions to the [USER1/2/3] buttons  
8
on page 14 to each button.  
32K  
48K  
: Digitally records with a 12-bit, 32 kHz sampling frequency.  
: Digitally records with a 16-bit, 48 kHz sampling frequency.  
Set according to the shooting conditions. This is only valid in CAMERA mode.This does not function in VTR mode.  
Setting  
Description  
* If the DV format is 12-bit, 32 kHz, up to 4 recording track channels are available.  
Of those, GY-HD250/GY-HD251 records on the CH-1 and CH-2 channels. GY-HD250/GY-HD251 is not capable of  
dubbing.  
NONE  
Does not function.  
BARS  
PRESET TEMP.  
Assigns “BARS” item functions in the CAMERA OPERATION menu screen.  
Assigns “PRESET TEMP.” item functions in the CAMERA OPERATION menu screen.  
X See “CAMERA OPERATION Menu Screen” on page 80.  
AUDIO LIMITER  
Sets whether or not AUDIO LIMITER functions when the [CH-1/CH-2 AUDIO SELECT] switch 2 on page 13 is set  
to MANU.  
OFF  
: AUDIO LIMITER is turned off.  
B.STRETCH1  
B.STRETCH2  
B.STRETCH3  
B.STRETCH4  
B.STRETCH5  
B.COMPRESS1  
B.COMPRESS2  
B.COMPRESS3  
B.COMPRESS4  
B.COMPRESS5  
Assigns “BLACK” item functions in the CAMERA PROCESS[1/2] menu screen.  
X See “CAMERA PROCESS[1/2] Menu Screen” on page 81.  
ON  
: AUDIO LIMITER is turned on. Recording level is suppressed when excessive audio is input.  
NEXT PAGE  
PAGE BACK  
To display the AUDIO/MIC[2/2] menu screen, move the cursor to this position and press the SHUTTER dial.  
When the cursor is in this position, press the SHUTTER dial to return to the TOP MENU screen.  
AE LEVEL+  
AE LEVEL–  
Assigns “AE LEVEL” item functions in the CAMERA OPERATION menu screen.  
MEMO  
Cannot assign to the USER3 button. If you assign these menu functions, assign AE  
LEVEL+ to the USER1 button, AE LEVEL– to the USER2 button.  
RET  
Assigns the normal RET button function.  
LOAD FILE  
Assigns the function to jump to in the LOAD FILE menu.  
X See “FILE MANAGE Menu Screen” on page 100.  
LENS RET  
Sets the lens RET button functions. (This does not function if there is not RET button on the lens you are using.)  
RET  
: Functions as a normal RET button.  
FOCUS ASSIST  
: Functions as the FOCUS ASSIST button.  
PAGE BACK  
When the cursor is in this position, press the SHUTTER dial to return to the TOP MENU screen.  
86  
87  
MENU SCREENS  
AUDIO/MIC[2/2] Menu  
Screen  
LCD/VF[1/4] Menu Screen  
In VTR mode, the screen changes to the AUDIO menu screen.  
The LCD/VF menu screen consists of four screens. (1/4 screen, 2/4 screen, 3/4 screen, 4/4 screen)  
The LCD/VF[1/4] menu screen can only be set in camera mode.  
In VTR mode, this screen consists of two screens. (1/2 screen, 2/2 screen)  
Item  
Function/Setting (bold characters indicate initial settings)  
AUDIO MONITOR  
Selects whether stereo or mixed audio is output from the PHONES jack when the MONITOR SELECT switch is set  
to BOTH.  
Item  
Function/Setting (bold characters indicate initial settings)  
STEREO  
: Stereo audio (CH-1 audio is output to L and CH-2 audio is output to R)  
ZEBRA  
Switches the luminance level of the subject sections where the zebra pattern is displayed.  
* Outputs only the CH-1 audio from the monitor speaker.  
MIX  
60-70%  
70-80%  
85-95%  
OVER95%  
OVER100%  
: Zebra pattern is displayed in sections with luminance levels between 60% and 70%.  
: Zebra pattern is displayed in sections with luminance levels between 70% and 80%.  
: Zebra pattern is displayed in sections with luminance levels between 85% and 95%.  
: Zebra pattern is displayed in sections with luminance levels over 95%.  
: Mixed audio (CH-1 and CH-2 mixed audio is output to L and R)  
FAS AUDIO  
Selects the recording level adjusting method for FAS (Full Auto Shooting). (CH-1, CH-2)  
AUTO  
SW SET  
: Sets to AUTO.  
: Follows settings for the AUDIO SELECT switch.  
: Zebra pattern is displayed in sections with luminance levels over 100%.  
X See “2 [CH-1/CH-2 AUDIO SELECT] switch” on page 13.  
X See “g [FULL AUTO] switch” on page 19.  
F. NO/IRIS IND.  
Selects whether or not the F-number of the lens iris/iris level mark is displayed in the status display on the LCD mon-  
itor or in the viewfinder. (STATUS 1 screen)  
OFF  
F.NO  
F.NO+IND.  
: F-number and iris level mark is not displayed.  
: F-number is displayed.  
: F-number and iris level mark is displayed.  
SEARCH AUDIO [DV]  
PB AUDIO CH [DV]  
Selects whether to output audio when searching a tape recorded in DV format. (This also includes slow playback.)  
ON  
: Audio is output.  
OFF  
: Audio is not output.  
FILTER  
Selects whether or not the FILTER position of this device is displayed in the status display on the LCD monitor or in  
the viewfinder. (STATUS 1 screen)  
Selects which channel audio to output when playing back a DV tape with the audio signal recorded in 4 channels.  
(Can only be set in VTR mode)  
OFF  
ON  
: FILTER position is not displayed.  
: FILTER position is displayed.  
CH1/2  
: Outputs the CH-1 and CH-2 channel audio.  
GY-HD250/GY-HD251 records the audio in CH-1 and CH-2 while shooting.  
: Outputs all 4 channels of audio at the same time.  
: Outputs the CH-3 and CH-4 channel audio.  
MIX  
CH3/4  
SAFETY ZONE*1  
Selects whether or not the safety zone is shown on the LCD monitor or in the viewfinder together with the form of  
the safety zone indication.  
OFF  
4:3  
14:9  
: Not displayed.  
: 4:3 zone is displayed.  
: 14:9 zone is displayed.  
MEMO  
GY-HD250/GY-HD251 does not have a function for dubbing to the CH-3 and CH-4 channels.  
16:9  
16:9+4:3  
2.35:1 CE  
: 16:9 zone is displayed.  
PAGE BACK  
When the cursor is in this position, press the SHUTTER dial to the AUDIO/MIC[1/2] menu screen.  
: 16:9 zone and 4:3 zone are display mixed. (This cannot be selected when DV format is set.)  
: Displays 2.35:1 zone in the middle of the screen.  
(Only in HDV format or 24P or 25P mode)  
: Displays 2.35:1 zone at the top of the screen.  
(Only in HDV format or 24P or 25P mode)  
2.35:1 CH  
CENTER MARK*1  
FOCUS ASSIST  
Sets whether or not a center mark is displayed when the safety zone is displayed.  
ON  
: Center mark is displayed.  
OFF  
: Center mark is not displayed.  
MEMO  
When the SAFETY ZONE item is set to OFF, - - -” is indicated and this item cannot be selected.  
Sets the FOCUS ASSIST function. Press the [FOCUS ASSIST] button on page 14 (6) or page 18 (7) to operate  
the FOCUS ASSIST function.  
NORMAL  
: Only the [FOCUS ASSIST] function operates.  
(The focus area becomes blue, red or green, making it easier to focus.)  
ACCU-FOCUS : The FOCUS ASSIST function and ACCU-FOCUS (forced focus) function operates.  
This makes the depth of field shallower, making it easier to focus. ACCU FOCUS automatically  
turns OFF after approximately 10 seconds.  
COLOR  
LEVEL  
Sets the display color for focusing when running the FOCUS ASSIST function.  
BLUE  
RED  
GREEN  
: Displays the area of focus in blue.  
: Displays the area of focus in red.  
: Displays the area of focus in green.  
Sets the display range of the focal area when the FOCUS ASSIST function is in use.  
LOW  
MIDDLE  
HIGH  
: Displays the focal area narrower than MIDDLE.  
: Displays the focal area in normal setting.  
: Displays the focal area wider than MIDDLE.  
NEXT PAGE  
PAGE BACK  
When you display the LCD/VF[2/4] menu screen, move the cursor to this position and press the SHUTTER dial.  
When the cursor is in this position, press the SHUTTER dial to return to the TOP MENU screen.  
*1  
SAFETY ZONE and CENTER MARK will not be displayed when this device is in VTR mode (PLAY, STL, FWD, REV).  
88  
89  
MENU SCREENS  
LCD/VF[2/4] Menu Screen  
LCD/VF[3/4] Menu Screen  
The LCD/VF[2/4] menu screen can only be set in camera mode.  
[1/2] screen is displayed in the VTR mode.  
Item  
Function/Setting (bold characters indicate initial settings)  
Item  
Function/Setting (bold characters indicate initial settings)  
Sets the image display method when the LCD monitor is in counterview position.  
VIDEO FORMAT  
Selects whether to display the video format in the status display on the LCD monitor or the viewfinder.  
(Camera mode: STATUS 1 screen, VTR mode: STATUS screen)  
LCD MIRROR MODE  
NORMAL  
: Image is displayed without inverting.  
: Inverted image is displayed.  
ON  
: Displays the video format.  
MIRROR  
OFF  
: Does not display the video format.  
• NORMAL/MIRROR is set when the SHUTTER dial is pressed.  
In camera mode : Displays the video format set in the REC item on the VIDEO FORMAT menu screen.  
MEMO  
In VTR mode  
: Displays the video format recorded on the playback tape or the video format input from the  
IEEE1394 connector.  
MIRROR setting is disabled when color bar is displayed or status is in magnified size.  
X See “Outputting Color Bars” on page 105.  
X See “Magnified Status Indications on the LCD Monitor” on page 29.  
TAPE REMAIN  
TC/UB  
Selects whether or not the remaining tape time (minutes) is shown in the status display on the LCD monitor or in the  
viewfinder.  
(Camera mode: STATUS 1 screen, VTR mode: STATUS screen)  
NEXT PAGE  
PAGE BACK  
When you display the LCD/VF[3/4] menu screen, move the cursor to this position and press the SHUTTER dial.  
When the cursor is in this position, press the SHUTTER dial to return to the LCD/VF[1/4] menu screen.  
ON  
: Displayed.  
OFF  
: Not displayed.  
Selects whether or not the time code or user’s bits data should be shown in the status display on the LCD monitor  
or in the viewfinder.  
(Camera mode: STATUS 1 screen, VTR mode: STATUS screen)  
OFF  
ON  
: Not displayed.  
: Displayed.  
* Whether the time code or user’s bits data is shown is selected with the TC DISPLAY switch.  
AUDIO  
Selects whether the audio level meters should be shown in the status display on the LCD monitor and the viewfinder  
screen.  
(Camera mode: STATUS 1 screen, VTR mode: STATUS screen)  
OFF  
ON  
: Not displayed.  
: Displayed.  
BATTERY INFO.  
For setting the status display method when loading the Anton-Bauer Battery.  
The status will be displayed on the LCD screen and the viewfinder screen.  
(In camera mode, only displayed when in STATUS 1 screen.)  
VOLTAGE  
CAPA%  
TIME  
: Indicates battery voltage in 0.1 V steps [V]  
: Remaining battery is shown in percentage [%]  
: Remaining battery is shown in minutes [min]  
• VOLTAGE and CAPA% can be selected when using an IDX Endura battery. When TIME is set, VOLTAGE is dis-  
played.  
MEMO  
• When TIME or CAPA% is selected, the battery indicator displayed before the value changes depending on the  
remaining battery level.  
}: 12% or less |: 12% to less than 50% {: 50% or more  
• When remaining battery level becomes less than 12%, the display changes to “} RES”.  
• When CALIBRATION is required from the battery, the display switches between TIME (CAPA%) display (30 sec-  
onds) and “} CAL” display (2 seconds) repeatedly.  
• For CALIBRATION, refer to the instruction manual of Anton-Bauer Battery.  
• Please use the remaining battery level and remaining time as a reference for shooting duration.  
SHUTTER DISP.  
Sets the shutter display method to seconds or angle.  
SEC  
DEG  
: Seconds  
: Degrees  
MEMO  
This item is available when REC on the VIDEO FORMAT[1/2] menu screen is set to HDV-HD24P, DV-24P, DV-  
24PA, HDV-HD25P, or DV-25P.  
Shutter display method is fixed to SEC for other settings.  
NEXT PAGE  
PAGE BACK  
Camera mode:  
To display the LCD/VF[4/4] menu screen, move the cursor to this position and press the SHUTTER dial.  
VTR mode:  
To display the LCD/VF[2/2] menu screen, move the cursor to this position and press the SHUTTER dial.  
Camera mode:  
When the cursor is in this position, press the SHUTTER dial to return to the LCD/VF[2/4] menu screen.  
VTR mode:  
When the cursor is in this position, press the SHUTTER dial to return to the TOP MENU screen.  
90  
91  
MENU SCREENS  
LCD/VF[4/4] Menu Screen  
TC/UB/CLOCK Menu  
Screen  
[2/2] screen is displayed in the VTR mode.  
Time codes (TC) and user’s bits (UB) can be set on this screen. Date and time is set on the TIME/DATE screen that can be  
reached from this screen.  
*
This is not displayed in VTR mode.  
Item  
Function/Setting (bold characters indicate initial settings)  
Selects the source of the time code generator.  
Item  
Function/Setting (bold characters indicate initial settings)  
Selects the LCD monitor and viewfinder display switching method.  
TCG SOURCE  
INTERNAL  
: Uses the built-in time code generator  
LCD+VF  
EXTERNAL  
: Uses the time code generator connected to the [TC IN] terminal  
OFF  
ON  
: Turns off the viewfinder display when the LCD monitor is opened.  
: Viewfinder always displayed the image.  
MEMO  
MEMO  
• TC PRESET and UB PRESET are not available when set to EXTERNAL.  
• HEADER REC is disabled when set to EXTERNAL.  
When this item is set to ON, the contents displayed on the LCD monitor can be changed with the DISPLAY button.  
• When this is set to EXTERNAL, the setting for TC DUPLI. is invalidated.  
X See page 29.  
TC PRESET  
UB PRESET  
To preset the time code, align the cursor with this position and then press the SHUTTER dial.  
LCD CONTRAST  
VF CONTRAST  
BLACK & WHITE*  
Adjusts the contrast of the LCD.  
[Settings: MIN (–5), –4 - NORMAL (0) - 4, MAX (5)]  
EXECUTE  
CANCEL  
: The set time code is confirmed.  
: The set time code is cancelled.  
Adjusts the contrast of the viewfinder.  
[Settings: MIN (–5), –4 - NORMAL (0) - 4, MAX (5)]  
ZERO PRESET : Resets all time codes to “0”.  
To preset the user’s bit data, align the cursor with this position and then press the SHUTTER dial.  
Selects the LCD monitor and viewfinder display style.  
EXECUTE  
CANCEL  
: The set user’s bit data are confirmed.  
: The set user’s bit data are cancelled.  
COLOR  
: Displays the image in color.  
B&W  
: Displays the image in black and white.  
ZERO PRESET : Resets all user’s bits data to “0”.  
MEMO  
MEMO  
Characters are always displayed in color.  
When the “UB REC” item is set to “OFF”, “--------” is displayed and this cannot be selected.  
VF SIGNAL  
Sets the image format output from the Viewfinder connector 1 on page 16.  
DROP FRAME *1  
Selects whether the time code generator framing mode is drop-frame or non-drop-frame.  
RGB  
: RGB signals  
DROP  
: Internal time code generator works in drop-frame mode. Set this when the recorded time is im-  
Y
: Y signals (Brilliance signals)  
: Component signals  
: Composite signals  
portant.  
COMPONENT  
COMPOSITE  
NON DROP  
: Internal time code generator works in non-drop-frame mode. Set this when the number of frames  
is important.  
MEMO  
UB REC *2  
To select whether or not user’s bit data should be recorded.  
To select whether the user’s bits should be displayed during playback of a tape with recorded user’s bits data.  
• Set this to RGB when using the supplied viewfinder. The supplied viewfinder will not function properly when set  
to another setting.  
• When this is set to Y or COMPOSITE in the HDV mode, images are not output from the [Y/PB/PR] terminal.  
• When the VF-P400 viewfinder (sold separately) is connected to the Viewfinder connector, set this to Y to view  
HDV format images with the VF-P400.  
ON  
: User’s bits are recorded during recording.  
User’s bits are displayed during playback.  
: User’s bits are not recorded during recording.  
User’s bits are not displayed during playback.  
OFF  
When this is set to COMPONENT or COMPOSITE, the following occurs.  
• FOCUS ASSIST and SKIN AREA are not displayed.  
TC DUPLI.  
Sets how to record the time code (TC) and user’s bits (UB) during IEEE1394 input of HDV/DV format.  
OFF  
: Records the TC/UB set in this device.  
When this is set to COMPONENT, the following restrictions are applied in HDV mode.  
• Set output of characters from the viewfinder terminal with ON/OFF in ANALOG OUT CHAR. item on the OTH-  
ERS[1/2] menu screen.  
• Also set ZEBRA output from the viewfinder terminal with ON/OFF in ANALOG OUT CHAR. Item (When the  
ZEBRA switch is ON).  
ON  
: Records the TC/UB of the IEEE1394 input.  
MEMO  
• This is validated when TCG SOURCE is set to INTERNAL.  
• In HDV format, the UB set in this device is recorded regardless of the setting.  
When ZEBRA is set to ON, ZEBRA is also displayed for COMPONENT output from the [Y/PB/PR] terminal.  
HEADER REC..  
To make settings related to the HEADER REC function, align the cursor with this position, and then press the SHUT-  
TER dial.  
PAGE BACK  
Camera mode:  
X See “HEADER REC Menu Screen” on page 94.  
When the cursor is in this position, press the SHUTTER dial to return to the LCD/VF[3/4] menu screen.  
VTR mode:  
When the cursor is in this position, press the SHUTTER dial to return to the LCD/VF[1/2] menu screen.  
TIME/DATE..  
PAGE BACK  
To make settings related to the date and time, align the cursor with this position and then press the SHUTTER dial.  
X See “TIME/DATE Menu Screen” on page 95.  
When the cursor is in this position, press the SHUTTER dial to return to the TOP MENU screen.  
*1  
This can be displayed and selected when 60/30 is set for the FRAME RATE item on the VIDEO FORMAT menu screen.  
(When 24 is set, this is fixed at “NON DROP” and “[NON DROP]” is displayed.)  
This can be displayed and selected when 50/25 is set for the FRAME RATE item on the VIDEO FORMAT menu screen.  
*2  
92  
93  
MENU SCREENS  
HEADER REC Menu  
Screen  
TIME/DATE Menu Screen  
The HEADER REC menu screen is used for settings related to the HEADER REC function. X See page 60.  
Item  
Function/Setting (bold characters indicate initial settings)  
Sets whether the date and time are shown in the status display on the LCD monitor or in the viewfinder.  
Item  
START KEY  
Function/Setting (bold characters indicate initial settings)  
DISPLAY  
OFF  
: Not displayed.  
: Displayed.  
Sets whether the HEADER REC operation should be executed when the REC/VTR trigger button is pressed while  
the STOP button is pressed.  
ON  
When a tape with time and date not recorded is played back, there will be no display of time and date even when  
this item is set to ON.  
DISABLE  
STOP+REC  
: HEADER REC operation is not executed.  
: HEADER REC operation is executed.  
DISPLAY MODE  
In the Camera mode, the date and time are displayed in accordance with the following settings.  
The date and time recorded on a tape are displayed in accordance with the following settings.  
TC DATA  
Sets the time code value for the point when the Record-Standby mode is engaged following completion of HEADER  
REC.  
BARS+CAM  
BARS  
CAM  
: Date and time are always displayed.  
: Date and time are displayed when the color bars are output.  
: Date and time are displayed when the camera images are output.  
EXECUTE  
ZERO PRESET : Resets all time codes to “0”.  
CANCEL : Clears the set time code.  
: Confirms the set time code.  
When the DISPLAY item is set to OFF, “- - -” is indicated and this item cannot be selected.  
The frame mode is set depending on the setting in the DROP FRAME item on the TC/UB/CLOCK menu screen.  
* The time code value at the point when the Record-Standby mode is engaged may differ some frames from the val-  
ue set for this item.  
DISPLAY STYLE  
DATE STYLE  
Selects the style for the date and time display.  
DATE+TIME  
DATE  
TIME  
: Date and time are displayed.  
: Date only is displayed.  
: Time only is displayed.  
UB DATA  
Sets the user’s bits of the HEADER REC section.  
EXECUTE  
: Confirms the set user’s bits.  
When the DISPLAY item is set to OFF, “- - -” is indicated and this item cannot be selected.  
ZERO PRESET : Resets all user’s bits data to “0”.  
CANCEL  
: Clears the set user’s bits.  
Selects the style for the date display.  
YY/MM/DD  
MM/DD/YY  
DD/MM/YY  
: Displayed in the format of year/month/date.  
: Displayed in the format of month/date/year.  
: Displayed in the format of date/month/year.  
MEMO  
• The user’s bits for the normal recording section are set on the TC/UB/CLOCK menu screen.  
• When the “UB REC” item is set to “OFF”, “--------” is displayed and this cannot be selected.  
Variation Range: U model: MM/DD/YY E model: DD/MM/YY  
When the DISPLAY item is set to OFF, “- - -” is indicated and this item cannot be selected.  
BARS TIME  
Sets the duration (seconds) in which the color bar signal and test tone (1 kHz) is recorded during HEADER REC. (1-  
TIME STYLE  
Selects the style for the time display.  
sec steps)  
24 HOUR  
12 HOUR  
: Displays the time using the 24-hour system.  
: Displays the time using the 12-hour system.  
[Settings: 0SEC - 30SEC - 99SEC]  
BLACK TIME  
PAGE BACK  
Sets the duration (seconds) in which the black signal is recorded during HEADER REC. (1-sec steps)  
[Settings: 0SEC - 30SEC - 99SEC]  
When the DISPLAY item is set to OFF, “- - -” is indicated and this item cannot be selected.  
SEC DISPLAY  
Selects whether to display the seconds in the time display.  
The TC/UB/CLOCK menu screen returns when the SHUTTER dial is pressed.  
ON  
: Seconds are displayed.  
OFF  
: Seconds are not displayed.  
When the DISPLAY item is set to OFF, “- - -” is indicated and this item cannot be selected.  
TIME SHIFT  
Sets the clock OFFSET time. (1H steps)  
Adds time to the built-in clock (time compensation) and displays it. The adjusted time is also recorded on the tape.  
[Settings: –23H - –1H, OFF, +1H - +23H]  
CLOCK ADJUST  
PAGE BACK  
To adjust the date and time, align the cursor with this position and then press the SHUTTER dial.  
The date and time are set on the CLOCK ADJUST screen.  
X See “Setting the Date and Time” on page 42.  
The TC/UB/CLOCK menu returns when the SHUTTER dial is pressed while the cursor is at this position.  
94  
95  
MENU SCREENS  
OTHERS[1/2] Menu Screen  
OTHERS[2/2] Menu Screen  
The OTHERS menu screen consists of two screens (1/2 screen, 2/2 screen)  
*
This is not displayed in VTR mode.  
Item  
Function/Setting (bold characters indicate initial settings)  
Item  
1394 REC TRIGGER*  
Function/Setting (bold characters indicate initial settings)  
ANALOG OUT CHAR.  
Sets whether or not to display characters such as status and menus on the screen for the [Y/PB/PR] and [VIDEO  
OUT] terminals.  
Sets how to control the REC trigger command output from the IEEE1394 connector. (Can be displayed and set in  
camera mode)  
ON  
: On-screen display.  
Set this when recording a backup of the HDV/DV signal from GY-HD250/GY-HD251 onto another device.  
OFF  
: No on-screen display.  
OFF  
: Does not control the backup device.  
SYNCRO : Controls the backup device in conjunction with the recording start/stop mode status on this device, and  
if there is no videocassette or if no tape remains for recording, controls the backup device in conjunction  
with the REC trigger button and the lens VTR button on this device.  
MEMO  
When ANALOG OUT CHAR. item is set to ON, the content displayed on the viewfinder is also displayed in the  
video from the video output terminal. During VTR recording, the mode is displayed in red on the viewfinder. How-  
ever, color is not applied for the following video outputs.  
• Component output of recording or playback in DV format  
• Composite output  
SPLIT  
: The REC trigger button on the right panel of this device controls the backup device recording start/stop.  
Set this when you want to control the timing of the recording on this device and the backup device sep-  
arately.  
SERIES : Automatically starts recording on a backup device that is on Pause when the tape on this device has less  
than 3 minutes remaining during shooting.  
SDI OUT CHAR.  
Sets whether or not to display characters such as status and menus on the screen for the [HD/SD SDI] terminal.  
ON  
MEMO  
: On-screen display.  
OFF  
: No on-screen display.  
• If you use the backup recording function on the BR-HD50, set this item to OFF.  
• The cursor (K) does not move to this item when this device is recording.  
LONG PAUSE TIME  
Selects the time (minutes) before the tape protect mode (drum head rotation stopped) is engaged when the record-  
standby condition continues.  
BACK SPACE [HDV]*  
This function controls the camera tape transport, back space and pre-roll time when the camera is connected to an  
external HDD or external back up Recorder via IEEE1394 in HDV mode.  
P-1394 : Priority for IEEE1394 recording (Auto setting)  
3MIN  
5MIN  
: 3 minutes  
: 5 minutes  
* When used in a cold environment or when the stopped or STILL status continues, the setting will be 3 minutes or  
less regardless of the setting on the menu.  
P-TAPE : Priority for camera VCR recording  
* Normally, set “3MIN” and use this to prevent head clogging and tape damage.  
1394 REC  
TRIGGER  
(X See page 97)  
Internal  
VCR  
start delay  
IEEE1394  
connection  
External Recorder or HDD  
vie IEEE1394 terminal  
ALARM VR LEVEL  
Selects whether or not alarm sound is emitted and the volume of the alarm sound.  
The alarm sound is output through the monitoring loudspeaker and the PHONES jack.  
BACK SPACE [HDV]  
OFF  
LOW  
: Sound is not output.  
: Alarm sound is soft.  
OFF  
SYNCRO  
SPLIT  
N/A  
See Note 1  
See Note 2  
N/A  
Connected and  
Power ON  
MIDDLE : Alarm sound is normal.  
HIGH : Alarm sound is loud.  
Selects the lighting method of the FRONT TALLY lamp during recording.  
approx. 3 seconds  
approx. 1 second  
approx. 1 second  
approx. 1 second  
SERIES  
OFF  
FRONT TALLY  
BACK TALLY  
P-1394  
BLINK  
: The lamp blinks from when the REC/VTR trigger is pressed and until recording starts. The lamp lights  
steadily during recording.  
No connection or  
Power OFF  
See Note 4  
SYNCRO  
SPLIT  
ON  
OFF  
: The lamp lights only during recording.  
: The lamp is always off.  
N/A  
SERIES  
OFF  
Selects the lighting method of the BACK TALLY lamp during recording.  
BLINK  
: The lamp blinks from when the REC/VTR trigger is pressed and until recording starts. The lamp lights  
steadily during recording.  
SYNCRO  
SPLIT  
See Note 3  
N/A  
Connected and  
Power ON  
ON  
OFF  
: The lamp lights only during recording.  
: The lamp is always off.  
SERIES  
OFF  
FORMAT LED  
GENLOCK..  
Sets whether or not the [HDV/DV LED] g on page 15 lights for HDV format or DV format.  
P-TAPE  
ON  
: Lights.  
SYNCRO  
SPLIT  
OFF  
: Does not light.  
No connection or  
Power OFF  
N/A  
Calls up the GENLOCK menu screen.  
Adjusts the H PHASE or SC PHASE of image signals of this device according to the external synchronization signal  
input to the [GENLOCK IN] terminal.  
SERIES  
X See page 99.  
Note 1:  
REC start signal will be sent 3 seconds after pressing REC trigger button.  
* Actual recording start time is depending on recorder performance.  
Note 2:  
NEXT PAGE  
PAGE BACK  
To display the OTHERS[2/2] menu screen, move the cursor to this position and press the SHUTTER dial.  
The TOP MENU screen returns when the SHUTTER dial is pressed while the cursor is at this position.  
REC start signal will be sent just after pressing REC trigger button.  
* Actual recording start time is depending on recorder performance.  
Note 3:  
In this mode, the IEEE1394 stream is discontinuous during internal VCR back space editing (when the REC trigger  
is operated). This may result in breaks in the recording on tape on an external recorder. In the case of HDD recording  
this may result in this device staying in REC PAUSE or divided files.  
Note 4:  
If HD/SD SDI OUT on the VIDEO FORMAT[2/2] menu screen is set to ON, the internal VCR start delay becomes  
approximately 3 seconds.  
96  
97  
MENU SCREENS  
OTHERS[2/2] Menu Screen  
(Cont’d)  
GENLOCK Menu Screen  
*
This is not displayed in VTR mode.  
Item  
Function/Setting (bold characters indicate initial settings)  
SD H PHASE*1  
Adjusts the horizontal (H) phase of the SD signal of this device according to the BB (Black Burst) signal input to the  
[GENLOCK IN] terminal.  
Increase the number : Proceed horizontal phase.  
Decrease the number : Delay horizontal phase.  
Item  
Function/Setting (bold characters indicate initial settings)  
DR-HD100 A.OFF*  
Selects whether or not to turn OFF the DR-HD100 (HDD unit by FOCUS enhancements) when this device is turned  
OFF.  
OFF  
: Power does not turn OFF.  
ON  
: Power turns OFF with this device.  
[Settings: MIN, 31 to 1, 0, 1 to 86, MAX]  
MEMO  
HD H PHASE  
Adjusts the horizontal (H) phase of the HD signal and HD/SD SDI signal of this device according to the HD Tri-sync  
signal input to the [GENLOCK IN] terminal. In addition, during Tri-sync signal input, H PHASE of SD analog signals  
are simultaneously adjusted in HD H PHASE item.  
Increase the number : Proceed horizontal phase.  
Decrease the number : Delay horizontal phase.  
• The [ mark is displayed at the upper right of the LCD monitor and viewfinder when the DR-HD100 is con-  
nected. If this device is turned OFF before the mark is displayed, power does not turn OFF even if this setting is  
ON.  
• This setting is canceled and the DR-HD100 does not turn OFF in the following instances.  
- 1394 REC TRIGGER item is set to OFF  
[Settings: MIN, 1023 to 1, 0, 1 to 1022, MAX]  
MEMO  
- VTR mode is set  
• When the DR-HD100 power turns off and this device is turned ON again, after 12 seconds, “DR-HD100 power?”  
appears on the LCD monitor for 7 seconds.  
When adjusting the HD H PHASE, the setting value quickly changes while the USER1 or USER2 button is held  
down for approximately two seconds.  
SC COARSE*1  
Adjusts the phase of the subcarrier (SC) of the composite or YC separate signal of this device according to the BB  
(Black Burst) signal input to the [GENLOCK IN] terminal.  
Increase the number : Proceed phase.  
Decrease the number : Delay phase.  
[Settings: , 90°, 180°, 270°]  
MENU ALL RESET  
Selects whether to reset the menu screen settings to initial settings.  
The camera mode and VTR mode menu settings are reset. (The TC PRESET, UB PRESET, and CLOCK ADJUST  
settings are not reset.)  
CANCEL  
: The settings are not reset.  
EXECUTE : The settings are reset.  
SC FINE*1  
Fine-tunes the phase of the subcarrier (SC) of the composite or YC separate signal of this device according to the  
BB (Black Burst) signal input to the [GENLOCK IN] terminal.  
Increase the number : Proceed phase.  
MEMO  
• The cursor (K) does not move to this item when the VTR is activated.  
• If the current menu settings and the factory settings have different FRAME RATE settings, “REBOOT!” is dis-  
played for 3 seconds, this device automatically turns off and then turns on.  
Decrease the number : Delay phase.  
[Settings: MIN, 127 to 1, 0, 1 to 126, MAX]  
PAGE BACK  
DRUM HOUR  
When the cursor is in this position, press the SHUTTER dial once to return to the OTHERS[1/2] menu screen.  
PAGE BACK  
When the cursor is in this position, press the SHUTTER dial once to return to the OTHERS[1/2] menu screen.  
Displays the drum usage time.  
Use as an estimate for regular maintenance.  
The cursor (K) does not move to this item.  
*1  
REMOTE appears as the setting value of this item when the remote control unit is connected.  
FAN HOUR  
Displays the fan motor usage time.  
Use as an estimate for regular maintenance.  
The cursor (K) does not move to this item.  
98  
99  
MENU SCREENS  
5. Turn the SHUTTER dial, bring the cursor (K) to the  
STORE item and press the SHUTTER dial.  
Displaying the FILE MANAGE menu  
screen  
Saving settings  
FILE MANAGE Menu  
Screen  
EXECUTE (if the file already exists, “OVERWRITE”)  
flashes.  
Select the STORE FILE.. item on the FILE MANAGE menu  
screen.  
Select the FILE MANAGE.. item on the TOP MENU screen.  
1.Turn the SHUTTER dial, bring the cursor (K) to SELECT  
You can perform the following operations in the FILE MAN-  
AGE menu screen.  
and press the SHUTTER dial.  
The file name setting area flashes.  
Settings corresponding to shooting conditions can be read  
immediately with the following read-only files.  
Loading a menu settings file  
2.Turn the SHUTTER dial, select the file to save to, and  
press the SHUTTER dial.  
LIVE HD60P  
LIVE HD50P  
: Ideal setting for HD60P format  
: Ideal setting for HD50P format  
Select the LOAD FILE.. item on the FILE MANAGE menu  
screen.  
CINEMA HD24P : Ideal setting for movie-quality shoot-  
ing  
*
The read-only files listed above cannot be saved or  
reset.  
6. With EXECUTE selected, turn the SHUTTER dial to save  
the menu settings to the selected file.  
Save menu settings (Camcorder: CAM1, 2, 3, 4; SD mem-  
ory card: EXT1, 2, 3, 4) to files.  
Load saved files.  
You can set a SUB NAME for the file to be saved.  
Reset the menu settings to the factory settings.  
Initialize (format) an SD memory card.  
When you set CANCEL for the LOAD, STORE, RESET  
and FORMAT SD CARD items, these operations are not  
executed.  
Setting a SUB NAME  
If you do not want to set a SUB NAME, go to Step 5..  
Execute  
Complete  
FILE MANAGE menu screen  
3.Turn the SHUTTER dial, bring the cursor (K) to SUB  
Error displays  
NAME and press the SHUTTER dial.  
A message is displayed in the LCD monitor or the view-  
finder.  
The first character in the file name flashes.  
NO CARD:  
No SD memory card is inserted.  
Insert an SD memory card.  
EXECUTE : Displayed for 3 seconds  
COMPLETE : Displayed for 3 seconds  
NO FORMAT:  
ERROR  
: Flashes (Error displays X See page 101.)  
The SD memory card is not initialized (formatted).  
Initialize (format) the SD memory card.  
NO ACCESS:  
There is a problem with the SD memory card.  
Replace the SD memory card.  
WRITE PROTECT:  
The SD memory card may be write-protected.  
Check that write-protection is disabled.  
1. Turn the SHUTTER dial, bring the cursor (K) to SELECT  
Execute  
Complete  
and press the SHUTTER dial.  
DISK FULL:  
The file name setting area flashes.  
The SD memory card does not have enough free space.  
Delete unwanted data or initialize (format) the card.  
Settable Characters  
2. Turn the SHUTTER dial, select the file to load and press  
the SHUTTER dial.  
INVALID VIDEO FORMAT:  
Flashing  
A settings file for a video format that is not supported was  
called up.  
3. Turn the SHUTTER dial, bring the cursor (K) to the  
Error display  
Space  
LOAD item and press the SHUTTER dial.  
Settings files for video formats that are not supported can-  
not be called up.  
EXECUTE flashes.  
4.Turn the SHUTTER dial, select the character, and press  
4. With EXECUTE selected, press the SHUTTER dial to  
Error  
the SHUTTER dial.  
READ ONLY FILE:  
read the menu settings in the selected file.  
The second character in the file name flashes.  
Indicates a read-only file.  
Read-only files cannot be saved.  
If the current menu settings and the menu settings to be  
loaded have different video format settings, “REBOOT!”  
is displayed for 3 seconds, this device turns off automati-  
cally and then turns on.  
Repeat Step 4. up through the eighth character.  
If there is an error:  
Press the STATUS button  
screen.  
Press the SHUTTER dial o Return to the FILE MAN-  
AGE menu screen.  
To exit the FILE MANAGE screen:  
o
Return to the normal  
Flashing  
Error display  
Move the cursor (K) to PAGE BACK and press the SHUT-  
TER dial or press the STATUS button.  
Error  
Reboot display  
CAUTION  
This device cannot load scene files from GY-HD100/GY-  
HD110-series devices.  
100  
101  
MENU SCREENS  
FEATURES OF THE CAMERA SECTION  
MEMO  
3. Move the cursor (K) to the SKIN COLOR DET. item,  
press the SHUTTER dial and select EXECUTE to switch  
to skin color detection mode.  
FILE MANAGE Menu Screen  
(Cont’d)  
Even if CAM1, CAM2, CAM3, or CAM4 are reset, the cur-  
rent settings are not reset.  
To reset the currently set values, select “CURRENT”.  
How to Use Skin Detail  
4. Shoot so that the color area you want to detect within the  
detection area frame is input.  
To confirm the detection area, press the SHUTTER dial  
and set SKIN COLOR DET. to STOP.  
This function suppresses edge sharpening in the skin color  
areas of the video signal, enabling velvety, smooth skin tones.  
The frame on the screen is the detection area for the  
skin detail function.  
Initializing (formatting) an SD mem-  
ory card  
Resetting the menu settings to the  
factory settings  
The color within the detection area is recognized as  
the color that the skin detail function will use.  
If the color within the detection area is not recognized  
as the color that the skin detail function will use,  
“ERROR” is displayed on the screen.  
Setting the skin detail function color and range  
Before initializing (formatting) a card:  
SHUTTER dial  
Select the RESET FILE.. item on the FILE MANAGE menu  
screen.  
1Insert and remove the SD memory card with the power  
to this device OFF.  
2Disable write-protection on the SD memory card.  
USER  
1
USER  
2
USER  
3
SHUTTER  
3Check that an SD memory card has been inserted into  
ND FILTER  
this device.  
2
1
1. Turn the SHUTTER dial, bring the cursor (K) to the FOR-  
MENU  
Detection  
area  
MAT SD CARD item and press the SHUTTER dial.  
CANCEL flashes.  
STATUS  
2. Turn the SHUTTER dial, and when EXECUTE flashes,  
press the SHUTTER dial to initialize (format) the card.  
SKIN COLOR ADJUST menu screen  
STATUS button  
1.Turn the SHUTTER dial, bring the cursor (K) to SELECT  
and press the SHUTTER dial.  
The file name setting area for the file to be reset  
flashes.  
1.Display the ADVANCED PROCESS menu screen.  
Black and  
white  
presenta-  
tion  
In menu setting procedure  
2.Turn the SHUTTER dial, select the name of the file to  
TOP MENU screen  
o
CAMERA PROCESS[1/2]  
o
Execute  
Complete  
reset, and press the SHUTTER dial.  
CAMERA PROCESS[2/2] o Select ADVANCED PRO-  
CESS item.  
Color  
presenta-  
tion  
CAM1, CAM2, CAM3, CAM4, CURRENT (current set-  
tings)  
3.Turn the SHUTTER dial, bring the cursor (K) to the  
Flashing  
RESET item and press the SHUTTER dial.  
Error display  
EXECUTE flashes.  
SKIN COLOR ADJUST screen  
4.With EXECUTE selected, press the SHUTTER dial to  
reset the settings.  
Error  
5. If you want to change the range of colors recognized with  
Cursor  
the skin color detection function, follow the steps below.  
1Turn the SHUTTER dial, bring the cursor (K) to the  
SKIN COLOR RANGE item and press the SHUTTER  
dial.  
If there is an error:  
Check items 2 and 3 in “Before initializing (formatting) a  
card”.  
CAMERA PROCESS[2/2] menu screen  
o The setting area flashes and can be changed.  
2Turn the SHUTTER dial up or down to widen or narrow  
the color range.  
Execute  
Complete  
2.Turn the SHUTTER dial, bring the cursor (K) to the SKIN  
COLOR ADJUST item and press the SHUTTER dial.  
Set the range as you check the color display.  
3To confirm the color range, press the SHUTTER dial.  
The setting returns to its lit state.  
The SKIN COLOR ADJUST screen is displayed.  
The entire screen becomes black and white, and only  
the areas recognized by the skin detail function are  
displayed in color.  
If the current menu settings and the factory settings have  
different video format settings, “REBOOT!” is displayed  
for 3 seconds, this device turns off automatically and then  
turns on.  
6. To stop the SKIN COLOR ADJUST function, turn the  
SHUTTER dial, bring the cursor (K) to the PAGE BACK  
item and press the SHUTTER dial.  
Reboot display  
When this happens, the SUB NAME initial value,  
“[SCENE]” is displayed.  
ADVANCED PROCESS menu screen  
102  
103  
FEATURES OF THE CAMERA SECTION  
How to Use Skin Detail  
(Cont’d)  
Outputting Color Bars  
GY-HD250/GY-HD251 can output three types of color bars,  
depending on the camera settings.  
Using the Skin Detail Function  
To use the skin detail function set on the SKIN COLOR  
ADJUST screen, select “ON” for the SKIN DETECT item on  
the CAMERA PROCESS[1/2] menu screen.  
In addition, you can use the LEVEL item to set three levels of  
suppression of skin color area detail enhancement in the  
video signal. X See page 81.  
NTSC standard : Outputs color bars compliant with the  
SMPTE standard.  
PAL standard  
: Outputs color bars compliant with the  
EBU standard.  
16:9 screen  
: Outputs multi-format color bars.  
While the skin detail function operates, the “SD” indicator is  
displayed on the STATUS 0 and STATUS 1 screen in the  
viewfinder or LCD monitor.  
To output color bars, make the following settings.  
1.Turn the FULL AUTO switch to “OFF”.  
2.Set the BARS item on the CAMERA OPERATION menu  
screen to “ON”. X See page 80.  
Color bars are output.  
FULL AUTO switch  
“SD” display  
STATUS 0  
Confirming the color tone area adjusted  
with the Skin Detail function  
When you push the ZEBRA switch on the front panel to  
“SKIN AREA”, the skin detail function turns ON, and the color  
area adjusted with the skin detail function is displayed in  
color in the LCD monitor or viewfinder.  
USER button  
Outputting color bars using the USER buttons  
1.Turn the FULL AUTO switch to “OFF”.  
2.Assign “BARS” to one of the USER1, 2 or 3 buttons.  
X See “SWITCH MODE Menu Screen” on page 86.  
3.Press the USER button to which “BARS” was assigned.  
Color bars are output.  
MEMO  
You can select whether to output an audio test signal  
during color bar output using the TEST TONE item on  
the AUDIO/MIC[1/2] menu screen. X See page 87.  
Color bars are not output when FULL AUTO mode is ON  
or in VTR mode.  
ZEBRA switch  
MEMO  
When the REVERSE PICTURE item in the CAMERA  
PROCESS[2/2] menu screen is set to ROTATE, skin  
detail function is available but the detection area is not  
displayed in the viewfinder or LCD screen.  
When COLOR GAIN item on the ADVANCED PRO-  
CESS menu screen is set to “OFF”, only the portion the  
skin detail function is working is displayed in skin color.  
X See page 83.  
104  
105  
OTHERS  
Display  
Status  
Action  
Warnings and Responses  
CHANGE PB TAPE  
FORMAT*  
Image format which is different from the one set in the PB Check the setting for the PB TAPE item.  
TAPE item on the VIDEO FORMAT[2/2] menu screen is be- X See page 79.  
ing played back.  
LOW VOLTAGE*  
Battery is low.  
Charge the battery pack or replace it.  
TAPE NEAR END*  
There are less than 3 minutes remaining on the tape (flash- To continue shooting, find a new tape or replace the tape.  
es only when recording).  
Warnings are displayed on the LCD monitor or the viewfinder if there was a mistaken operation, if the battery or tape is low, or if  
there is a problem on the VTR.  
In addition, if the tape or battery is low or the VTR has a problem, the tally lamp flashes (or lights) and an alarm is output from the  
monitor speaker or PHONES jack.  
TAPE END*  
Displayed when the tape ends.  
Replace the tape.  
CHANGE 1394  
SWITCH*  
Recording or playback video format and the IEEE1394 set- Set the IEEE1394 switch correctly, turn the power off and  
ting is different when connected to the IEEE1394 port.  
Tried to use the FF or REW button in camera mode.  
then on again.  
SWITCH TO VTR  
MODE*  
Press the CAM/VTR button to set VTR mode.  
MEMO  
GY-HD250/GY-HD251 uses microcomputers. It may not operate properly if there is external static or interference. If this hap-  
pens, turn the power off and then on again.  
HEAD CLEANING  
REQUIRED  
Displayed when the video head is dirty. (Head clogging was Clean with a special head cleaning tape.  
detected during an edit search in shooting mode as well as X See page 7.  
during playback and displayed.)  
CLEANING TAPE!  
Displayed when a head cleaning tape is inserted.  
The display disappears when the head cleaning tape is re-  
Display  
Status  
Action  
moved.  
60/30 INHIBIT  
CHANGE FRAME  
RATE MENU  
The FRAME RATE item is set to 50/25 or 24, and a tape re- Sets the FRAME RATE item on the VIDEO FORMAT menu  
corded in 60/30 frame is played back or it is input into the screen to match the frames.  
COPY GUARD!*  
Tried to play back a copyguarded tape.  
Cannot play back a copyguarded tape.  
Please contact your local dealer or JVC.  
Lightly push the top center of the videocassette cover.  
IEEE1394 port in VTR mode.  
X See page 77.  
FAN MOTOR HOUR Over the prescribed fan motor usage time.  
50/25 INHIBIT  
CHANGE FRAME  
RATE MENU  
The FRAME RATE item is set to 60/30 or 24, and a tape re-  
corded in 50/25 frame or it is input into the IEEE1394 port  
in VTR mode.  
PUSH CASSETTE  
COVER*  
The videocassette cover is not firmly shut.  
CHANGE THE SYS- Displayed when you attempt to change FRAME RATE item When the FRAME RATE item setting is changed, the frame  
24 INHIBIT CHANGE The FRAME RATE item is set to 50/25 or 60/30, and a tape  
FRAME RATE MENU recorded in 24 frame is played back or it is input into the  
IEEE1394 port in VTR mode.  
TEM*  
in the VIDEO FORMAT menu screen.  
rate system for this device is changed. Check the frame  
rate to use before changing the setting.  
X See pages 54 and 77.  
AUX IN INHIBIT  
CHANGE  
FRAME RATE MENU  
• U model  
Set the FRAME RATE item as shown below to input exter-  
*
When status indications are magnified, warnings are not displayed on the LCD monitor.  
X See “Magnified Status Indications on the LCD Monitor” on page 29.  
Displays when the FRAME RATE item is set to 50/25 or nal images.  
24 and the GENLOCK/AUX IN switch is set to AUX IN.  
• E model  
U model : 60/30  
E model : 50/25  
Displays when the FRAME RATE item is set to 60/30 or  
24 and the GENLOCK/AUX IN switch is set to AUX IN.  
SYNC LOCKING  
INVALID SYNC  
• Camera image is locking to external synchronization sig- It is not possible to enter recording mode while “SYNC  
nals.  
LOCKING” is displayed. Wait until the indication disap-  
pears.  
• Displays when the FRAME RATE item is set to 60/30 or Input supported external synchronization signals.  
24 and signals not supported by GENLOCK are input.  
• Displays when the FRAME RATE item is set to 50/25 and  
signals not supported by GENLOCK are input.  
X See page 66.  
DV-60I INVALID!  
DV-24P INVALID!  
DV-24PA INVALID!  
A tape recorded in DV-60I, DV-24P, or DV-24PA format The E model cannot play back tapes recorded in DV-60I,  
was played back or input into the IEEE1394 connector in DV-24P or DV-24PA format or input into the IEEE1394 con-  
VTR mode on the E model.  
nector in VTR mode.  
DV-50I INVALID!  
DV-25P INVALID!  
A tape recorded in DV-50I or DV-25P format was played The U model cannot play back tapes recorded in DV-50I or  
back or input into the IEEE1394 connector in VTR mode on DV-25P format or input into the IEEE1394 connector in  
the U model.  
VTR mode.  
HDV-SD60P  
INVALID!  
A tape recorded in HDV-SD60P format was played back or GY-HD250/GY-HD251 cannot play back or input an HDV-  
input into IEEE1394 connector in VTR mode.  
SD60P/HDV-SD50P signal.  
HDV-SD50P  
INVALID!  
A tape recorded in HDV-SD50P format was played back or  
input into IEEE1394 connector in VTR mode.  
INVALID TAPE!  
A computer data tape or a DVC PRO cassette was used. Use a MiniDV videocassette.  
LP TAPE INVALID!*  
Tried to play back a tape recorded in LP mode.  
GY-HD250/GY-HD251 cannot record or play back in LP  
mode.  
NO DV SIGNAL*  
NO HDV SIGNAL*  
COPY INHIBIT*  
REC INHIBIT*  
DV signal was not input.  
Set the IEEE1394 switch to DV and input a DV signal.  
Set the IEEE1394 switch to HDV and input an HDV signal.  
Cannot record a copyguarded signal.  
HDV signal was not input.  
Tried to record a copyguarded signal.  
A tape that cannot be recorded (back switch is set to SAVE) Set the switch on the back of the cassette tape to REC.  
was inserted.  
NO TAPE*  
No videocassette tape is inserted.  
Insert a cassette tape.  
106  
107  
OTHERS  
TALLY lamp  
Warnings and Responses (Cont’d)  
Blinks when remaining battery power or tape is low. (Only  
in Camera mode)  
Blinking Pattern  
Remaining Battery/Tape  
Slow blinking  
(once per sec.)  
• Remaining battery power is low.  
• Remaining tape time is equivalent to less  
than 3 minutes.  
Error code  
Fast blinking  
• Tape has run out.  
(four times per sec.)  
• Irregularity has occurred in the VTR.  
Alarm Sound  
When remaining battery power becomes low, a warning  
sound is output from the monitoring loudspeaker and the  
PHONES jack.  
Warning  
(In Camera mode only)  
When an irregularity occurs in the VTR, a warning sound  
is also output.  
Whether or not alarm sound should be output and the vol-  
ume level are selected with the ALARM VR LEVEL item  
on the OTHERS[1/2] menu screen.  
Warning Indications for VTR Abnormalities  
Should malfunctions occur during VTR operation, this  
device self-diagnoses the cause and shows the diagnose  
together with an error code on the LCD monitor or in the  
viewfinder.  
Depending on the alarm conditions, the warning indicators  
on the LCD monitor/viewfinder screen, the TALLY lamp,  
and alarm sounds appear as shown in the following table.  
GY-HD250/GY-HD251  
Operation  
Error Code  
Error Details  
Remedy  
0201  
Indicates dew formation (condensa- Operation stops. All opera- Leave this device with the power ON,  
CONDENSATION ON DRUM tion).  
tions are rejected.  
until the indication disappears.  
3200  
Tape cannot be loaded.  
Switch the power OFF and then switch  
it back ON. However, the tape may be  
damaged depending on the circum-  
stances. Please consult the person in  
charge of professional video equip-  
ment at your nearest JVC-authorized  
service agent.  
LOADING FAILURE  
3300  
Tape cannot be unloaded.  
UNLOADING FAILURE  
4100  
Irregularity with eject operation.  
CASSETTE EJECT FAILURE  
5605 - 5609  
DEFECTIVE TAPE  
Tape is cut.  
Operation stops.  
Press the EJECT button to take out the  
cassette.  
Alarm Indications on LCD Monitor/  
TALLY lamp  
If the tape runs out during recording,  
switch the power OFF and then switch  
it back ON, press the EJECT button,  
and then take out the cassette.  
Alarm Sound  
Condition  
Viewfinder Screen  
VTR alarm indication  
(Example)  
Dew formation (condensation) or error has oc-  
curred in the VTR.  
5702  
Tape end sensor error.  
Tape beginning sensor error.  
Drum rotation error.  
Operation stops. All opera- Switch the power OFF and then switch  
I
TAPE END DET. ERROR  
tions are rejected.  
it back ON. However, the tape may be  
damaged depending on the circum-  
stances. Please consult the person in  
charge of professional video equip-  
ment at your nearest JVC-authorized  
service agent.  
5802  
About 3 min. before tape end  
(displayed during recording).  
TAPE BEGIN DET. ERROR  
J
I
J
7001  
Tape end  
(displayed during recording).  
DRUM MOTOR FAILURE  
7101  
Capstan rotation error.  
Supply reel rotation error.  
Take up reel rotation error.  
Remaining battery power is low.  
CAP MOTOR FAILURE  
7202 - 7203  
SUPPLY REEL FAILURE  
Display symbols  
J
: Blinking once per second.  
: Sound interrupted once per second.  
I
: Blinking four times per second.  
: Continuous sound.  
7302 - 7303  
TAKE UP REEL FAILURE  
7305  
Take up reel rotation error when un-  
loading.  
TAKE UP REEL FAILURE  
8000  
Tape problem detected.  
EMERGENCY TAPE!  
TURN POWER OFF.  
System error when power is turned on. HDV/DV LED, VTR indicator Turn off the power and let this device  
TURN BACK ON LATER.  
and TALLY lamp flash. Only sit for sometime before turning it back  
POWER switch operation is on.  
accepted.  
108  
109  
OTHERS  
Troubleshooting  
How to Display the Hour  
Meter  
The drum and fan motor usage times are displayed in the  
DRUM HOUR item and the FAN HOUR items on the OTH-  
ERS[2/2] menu screen as the hour meters on GY-HD250/  
GY-HD251.  
Symptoms  
Remedy  
• Is power supply connected correctly?  
Power cannot be switched ON.  
• Is battery pack recharged?  
• Was the power turned ON immediately after being turned OFF?  
Wait at least 5 seconds before turning the power ON again once it has been  
turned OFF.  
Use as an estimate for regular maintenance. X See page 7.  
1.Turn the POWER switch ON.  
2.Press the STATUS button for at least 1 second to display  
Recording is not possible.  
• Is the REC LOCK switch on the handle set to ON?  
• Is the switch on cassette set to “REC”? If it is set to “SAVE”, set it to “REC”.  
• The Camera mode has not been selected. (The VTR indicator does not light.)  
While the VTR indicator lights, press the MODE switch upward to turn on the  
CAM indicator.  
the TOP MENU screen.  
3.Turn the SHUTTER dial, select the OTHERS.. item, and  
press the SHUTTER dial.  
The OTHERS[1/2] menu screen is displayed.  
Camera image does not appear on LCD monitor or in viewfind- • The Camera mode has not been selected. (The VTR indicator does not light.)  
4.Select the NEXT PAGE item on the OTHERS[1/2] menu  
er.  
While the VTR indicator lights, camera image will not be output.  
Press the CAM/VTR switch upward to turn on the VTR indicator.  
screen and press the SHUTTER dial.  
The OTHERS[2/2] menu screen is displayed.  
Image shown on LCD monitor or in viewfinder is dark or blurred. • Adjust the brightness of the LCD monitor or viewfinder screen.  
• Is the ND filter knob set to 2?  
• Is the iris closed?  
OTHERS[2/2] menu screen  
• Is the shutter speed too fast?  
• Is the viewfinder cable correctly connected?  
Playback does not start when the play button is pressed.  
Cannot play back.  
• In the Camera mode, is “STOP” indicated as the VTR operation mode indica-  
tor?  
When “STBY” is indicated, press the STOP button to display “STOP”.  
• Is the PB TAPE item on the VIDEO FORMAT menu screen set to a setting oth-  
er than AUTO?  
Drum usage  
hours (h)  
If this menu item and the tape format do not match, the tape cannot be played  
back.  
Cannot input an HDV/DV signal.  
Noise interferes with playback video.  
Sound is not output during playback.  
• Is this device in VTR mode? (Is the VTR indicator lit?)  
• Is the IEEE1394 switch set correctly?  
Fan motor usage hours (h)  
• Video head may be clogged with dirt. Clean head with the special head clean-  
ing tape. X See “Precautions for Use of Head Cleaning Tape” on page 7.  
OTHERS[2/2] Menu Screen  
• Is the AUDIO SELECT item on the AUDIO menu screen set to CH3/4?  
To output the sound of the recording, set to CH1/2.  
DRUM HOUR item : Displays the drum usage hours.  
FAN HOUR item  
: Displays the fan motor usage  
hours.  
Noise appears when playing back a tape recorded on another • When a tape recorded on another unit is played back or used for recording,  
unit.  
this phenomenon may occur due to tracking errors.  
The transient section between scenes recorded on other units  
and those recorded on the GY-HD250/GY-HD251 may appear  
disturbed.  
5.To return to the normal screen display, do one of the fol-  
lowing:  
Press the STATUS button.  
The front section’s audio level control doesn’t work.  
• Is the CH-1/CH-2 AUDIO SELECT switch set to “AUTO”?  
• Is the FULL AUTO switch set to “ON”?  
or  
Return to the TOP MENU screen, select the EXIT item  
on the TOP MENU screen and press the SHUTTER  
dial.  
Cannot initialize (format) the SD memory card.  
• Is the SD memory card write-protected? X See page 34.  
Battery alarm is displayed even if a fully charged battery pack • Is the battery pack old?  
is put in.  
Cassette cannot be ejected after the power is turned ON.  
• The capacity of the power supply may be insufficient. Check the power volt-  
age.  
Time code or user’s bits data not displayed.  
• Is the TC/UB item on the LCD/VF[3/4] menu screen set to OFF?  
If so, set to ON.  
The date and time are not displayed or recorded.  
• Is the DISPLAY item on the TIME/DATE menu screen set to OFF?  
Set to ON when the data should be displayed and recorded.  
• Is the date and time setting made? X See “Setting and Displaying the Date  
and Time” on pages 41, 42.  
Video is not output from the [Y/PB/PR] terminal.  
Viewfinder is not displayed properly.  
• Is VF SIGNAL on the LCD/VF[4/4] menu screen set to Y or COMPOSITE?  
• Is VF SIGNAL on the LCD/VF[4/4] menu screen set to a setting other than  
RGB?  
110  
111  
OTHERS  
[DV]  
Video signal record- : DV format, 8-bit, 25 Mbps  
ing format  
[ACCESSORIES]  
Specifications  
Lens  
: 1 (Excluding the CHU/CHE model)  
Compression  
: DV compression, 4:1:1 (NTSC)/  
4:2:0 (PAL)  
Microphone  
: 1  
Core Filter  
: 1  
Audio:  
[HDV]  
Clamp Filter  
: 4  
SD memory card  
Tripod base  
: 1  
[General]  
Power requirements : DC 12 V, W 2 A  
Power consumption : Approx. 24 W (in the Record mode)  
Audio signal record- : MPEG1 Audio Layer II  
ing format  
[DV]  
: 1 (U model only)  
Instruction Manual  
Warranty Card  
: 1  
: 1  
Dimensions  
: 224(W) × 242.3(H) × 401(D) mm  
(U model)  
Audio signal record- : 16-bit (locked audio), 48 kHz PCM  
(USA and Canada only)  
ing format  
for  
2
channels or 12-bit, 32 kHz  
224(W) × 242.3(H) × 414(D) mm  
(E model)  
PCM for 4 channels  
: MiniDV tape  
For details, consult your JVC dealer.  
Usable tape  
Mass  
: 3.6 d(8.0 lbs.) (U model)  
3.8 d(8.4 lbs.) (E model)  
(including lens (Th16 × 5.5BRMU),  
viewfinder, microphone and tape)  
Tape speed  
: 18.8 mm/sec.  
Record/play time  
: 63 minutes (with an M-  
DV63PROHD tape)  
Temperature  
Operating  
Storage  
Humidity  
Operating  
Storage  
[Time Code]  
: 0°C to 40°C (32°F to 104°F)  
: –20°C to 60°C (–4F° to 140°F)  
Time code signal  
: Compliance with SMPTE/EBU stan-  
dard  
EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS (unit: mm)  
: 30% to 80% RH  
: 85% RH or less  
LTC input  
:
0 dBs±6 dBs, high impedance, unbal-  
anced  
LTC output  
: 0 dBs±6 dBs, low impedance, unbal-  
anced  
[Camera section]  
Image pickup device : 1/3" interline-transfer CCDs  
[Connectors]  
AUX input  
Color separation  
optical system  
: F1.4, 3-color separation prism  
Number of total pixels : Approx. 1,110,000 pixels  
: Composite video signals 1V (p-p)  
±0.3V (p-p). 75 :ꢀunbalanced (BNC)  
Color bars  
: SMPTE/EBU type Sync system:  
Internal sync (built-in SSG)  
: 1/3" bayonet system  
: 1/4ND, 1/16ND  
: 0, 3, 6, 9, 12, 15, 18 dB, ALC  
Genlock input  
Lens mount  
ND filter  
Gain  
: BB signals  
SMPTE 170M (RS-170A) compliant  
NTSC  
Electronic shutter  
Standard value  
Fixed values  
/ITU-R BT. 470-6 compliant PAL  
HDTV Tri-sync signals  
[SMPTE 296M/SMPTE 274M com-  
pliant] (BNC)  
: 59.94 Hz (U model)/50 Hz (E model)  
: 7.5  
-
10,000 Hz, 11 steps (HDV  
HD30p/HDV HD60p/DV 60i), 6.25 -  
10,000 Hz, 11 steps (HDV HD25p/  
HDV HD50p/DV 50i), 6 - 10,000 Hz,  
12 steps (HDV HD24p/DV 24p),  
6.25 - 10,000 Hz, 11 steps (DV 25p)  
: 30.03 - 10,489.5 Hz (HDV HD60p/  
HDV HD30p/DV 60i)  
Analog composite output  
: 1.0 V (p-p), 75 :, unbalanced (RCA)  
Analog component output  
Y
PB/PR  
HD/SD SDI output  
: 1.0 V (p-p), 75 :, unbalanced (BNC)  
: 0.7 V (p-p), 75 :, unbalanced (BNC)  
Variable scan  
25.04 - 10,489.5 Hz (HDV HD50p/  
HDV HD25p/DV 50i/DV 25p)  
24.01 - 10,489.5 Hz (HDV HD24p/  
DV 24p)  
: SMPTE 292M compliant HD serial  
digital signals  
/SMPTE 259M compliant SD serial  
digital signals (BNC)  
Dynamic range  
: 300% or more  
Audio inputs  
Mic  
: –60 dBs, 3 k:, balanced (XLR), +48  
V output for phantom power supply  
: +4 dBs, 10 k:, balanced (XLR)  
: –8 dBs, low impedance, unbalanced  
(RCA ×2)  
[VTR section]  
Video  
Line  
Audio outputs  
Recording format  
: 720/24p, 720/25p, 720/30p, 720/  
50p, 720/60p (U/E model), 480/24p,  
480/60i (U model), 576/25p, 576/50i  
(E model)  
Earphone jack  
: –17 dBs to –60 dBs, 8-: impedance  
(stereo mini-jack ×2)  
Video Format:  
[HDV]  
IEEE1394 connector : 6-pin  
*
Design and specifications are subject to change without notice.  
Video signal record- : HDV720p format, 8-bit, 19.7 Mbps  
ing format  
Compression  
: MPEG-2 video (profile  
MP@H-14)  
&
level:  
112  
113  
Correction  
About provided clamp filter  
Wrong  
Correct  
Page 2  
Clamp Filters x 4  
For DC (x2)/Audio/  
IEEE1394 Cable  
Clamp Filters x 4  
For DC (x2)/ Earphone/  
IEEE1394 Cable  
See pages 36,64 and 67  
See pages 36,64 and 67  
Conncting the Earphone Cable  
To reduce the emission of unwanted radio waves, be sure to attach the provided  
clamp filter as shown in the figure below.  
Attach the clamp filter as close to this device as possible, as shown in the  
figure.  
Earphone cable  
Clamp filter  
LST0523-001A  
© 2006 Victor Company of Japan, Limited  

Polk Audio GNX104 4 User Manual
PB Heat MIH User Manual
Paradyne HOTWIRE 8310 MVL User Manual
Panasonic WV NP244 User Manual
Panasonic HDC TM300 User Manual
Newcon Optik LRB 20000 User Manual
McIntosh Radio MR85 User Manual
KitchenAid KUWS246EBT01 User Manual
JVC Marine WR DV75U User Manual
JVC LYT0060 001B User Manual